BEING | LE SOE WiOy | ! <9 AMo 4% rn oe ee “7 ANNUAL REPORT OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Showing the Operations, Expenditures and Condition of the Institution FOR THE YEAR N DENG tN 30 1904 WASHINGTON GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE ESOS) a ae FROM THE SECRETARY OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION The Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Institution for the year ending June 30, 1904. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, Washington, D. C., February 27, 1905. To the Congress of the United States: In accordance with section 5593 of the Revised Statutes of the United States, I have the honor, in behalf of the Board of Regents, to submit to Congress the Annual Report of the operations, expendi- tures, and condition of the Smithsonian Institution for the year end- ing June 30, 1904. I have the honor to be, very respectfully, your obedient servant, S. P. LANG ey, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Hon. Witu1aM P. Frye, President pro tempore of the Senate. Til ANNUAL REPORT OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION FOR THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1904. SUBJECTS. 1. Proceedings of the Board of Regents for the sessions of Decem- ber 8, 1903, and January 27 and March 7, 1904. 2. Report of the executive committee, exhibiting the financial affairs of the Institution, including a statement of the Smithson fund, and receipts and expenditures for the year ending June 30, 1904. 3. Annual report of the Secretary, giving an account of the opera- tions and condition of the Institution for the year ending June 30, 1904, with statistics of exchanges, ete. 4. General appendix, comprising a selection of miscellaneous mem- oirs of interest to collaborators and correspondents of the Institu- tion, teachers, and others engaged in the promotion of knowledge. These memoirs relate chiefly to the calendar year 1904. 1" ~ CONTENTS. Page. Letter from the Secretary, submitting the Annual Report of the Regents CORE ONOTESS peeeiee errr in eres Se deh scree eee eerie, Meet ar Cp ee renal te ee E III Generalasdby ectsiotaihevAnnualeReporte sass ees see ee eee IV Contents omihepReponte sw ye wie owe. Saas py Sree re ee ge 2 WLS eS be 2 Vv I SEIO tale ALES em mee yearly Mapas rs, a Onl aye eaten oe PMO (8, Aichi es NUN Uy pe OX Memibersie1o7icconOLat hey Hstablishmrent sass a2 ae eee eee ey eee ee XIII Reventsiot the smithsonian: in Stub ub rome a. ee eye eee XIV PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. Meetings of December 8, 1903, January 27, and March 7, 1904 ________ XV REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE for the year ending June 30, 1904. Condition of the fund July 1, 1904 ____.___.__. a eta! sali y ee Wier ew LE, 1) PR EKERENAY Receipts andiexpenditures forthe year -— =e 22-2 XXXVI Appropmation fon International: ixchanges)=5 52-906.) 2-2 eo) SX VIL Detailsiotexpendituresiol Samess=- se eee e sees eee see eee XXXVII Appropriation for American Mthnology 2-54 -=2 2-2 228-222 s2 022-2 ee. XXXVIII Detail stotexpenditmresyot Sam eo ee eee ae ee eu eke ea XXXIX Appropriations morneaNatlonalaVitseum ss 22s) ee eee nee eee >a bil Detaillsyohexpenditures| Of Sane) sss ee ee XLI Appropriation for Astrophysical Observatory ____.___.--..---------.-- LVIUI Detailsiofiexpenditures\of same /_2 92 5-2-2-=2-------- == phe tee LVIII Appropriation for observation of solar eclipse_-_.:-.-.-----.--------- LX Balance of same _____-___- Ae se sale EAN es PAs Gd OLS IS BOS Cs De eee ce 19:4 Appropriation for the National Zoological Park -_-___._-_---.---------- LX Detail sroirexpen chifimrestOty Sam Cy ae ee pee eee ILD Recapitulla tony Seas Sse. Se silo eS Seep ala Aa Se ee esate od ees LXV Generallsumimiar yen oe 1s ph ches Dee tees Lol epee. Fee de epee ee ee LXVI AcTs AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS relative to Smithsonian Institution, (QUO SE 3 Ee Ne el ees ee ie ee eee ee SNS fey eR oe eee eee eee aS LXIX REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. ARETE OMUTELS ONIGANMIUN SLD U/ ELON Spaces ae eee es NS Be ee ee ee 1 Mheyhstablishmen thea. vale asta eens ens 2. Sere ee eee 1 Organization of the Board of Regents ________- Bee a Aa aN ee Boe eer Se 2 Mectinesiotshessoardlor Regents\se 22 see oat eee ee eee as 2 Generaliconsiderations= 2222-2 22) 22 =e SPTAEL 4 sesee ss Mae whe EA 6S aah 5 The removal of the remains of James Smithson_________-___-._-__---- if IFS CT GAT G5 eee cre ee ne ee Se ee ae Ce A mn era AS lek ce eh 11 ISEIIROGS) os cse6 gered eed bae see adigeiueare ae seo ae Sep aaa ae saa erases 11 EVES ATC perenne oes p eee sete eres ene ee hy iy) Pee eS ele SR yan 13 Od ekin shun deems Ma hh await ae Ne aM PEE ULM cee ten de Ie 13 Na Dlesatallo lee iat se or es ee ae oe eee cole Re ae ee Shree ee ey! 15 Bb a) CCvaTy nONeTS\S Fac ees Mak ae ee eee ae ae eee eee aie eet eee 16 RUD catlonseennec see aces See eee ee ers oe ee LeU ee 16 VI CONTENTS. THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION—Continued. Page. TD VAT yi e eee St 2 pare ae etl Sd 20 Correspondence teats 5 nee eee eee Bee oe oe 21 International American Archeological Commission____--_-_-___-_---- 22 International Congresses and Expositions. ____...-_.-.-_..-_-_-:------ 24 MEISCETAN COU Ss ae cers an a0 aire RN tee ere iar! Gann ws oy 27 National Musecumy=s took soe sete oe pet eee pee Sot ee et ae oe 27 BureaivoteAm emcanrb thn ol omg ee ee ee 30 Interna tional ebixcham ces eee are easy ees ee eee ree epee la eee 31 INationalt Zoological dear kya) = 2s ne 8 eye ee eee are ate 8 ee ne eo ee 32 AS Trophysical ODServatOliyy ee eee es ape ane ae ee 34 ING CROLO Ry Siar ee ce ae eas at rs nea aS hat 35 Appendixes: I. Report on the United States National Museum ~-._________-- _--- 37 II. Report on the Bureau of American Ethnology ___.__.-_--__--_-- 46 III. Report on the International Exchange Service _-_-__-----------.-- 55 IV. Report on the National Zoological Park _---_.----_--.--_.-_--2. 69 V. Report on the Astrophysical Observatory --...-------.---------- 78 VE Report ofthe Mlibraniane so =e - ease eee ne eee eee 87 Vie Report.ot thes Eaitore <2 oboe sos 2s ee ee eee 91 VIII. Report of the Representative of the Smithsonian Institution and National Museum, Louisiana Purchase Exposition, St. Louis, Mor 1904. ek eo. coh an See ae ee ere eee ree 100 GENERAL APPENDIX. Page. Experiments with the Langley Aerodrome, by 8S. P. Langley____.__---.-.. 118 The Relation of Wing Surface to Weight, by R. Von Lendenfeld _-______- 127 The Rumford Spectroheliograph of the Yerkes Observatory, by George E. IEE YS ehaxvel MNerAohhay hare MileraMeWN oe oe soot ce et eeee cee sece 131 The Construction of large Telescope Lenses, by Dr. C. Faulhaber - : sea 63 Some Reflections Suggested by the Application of Photography to AP Te TKO VAMUERWL Ieee Holo, lOnig IEROE, Jal, Jal “WihwMAe — sone cones eeceseses: 171 Radiationintthe Solarisystem= by, Js co Foy nti = =sss=ee= ase e= === 185 CondensationyNiucleil: biyaleno ten © ee ens VV Alls © ieee 193 The Present Problems of Inorganic Chemistry, by Sir William Ramsay -.. 207 The Evolution of the Scientific Investigator, by Simon Newcomb-.--. ---.-- 221 Metalstintthe Atmospheres byarorecAlireds ithe === =e 235 Observations on Vision in Brightness and in Obscurity, with a Hypothesis on the Causelof Color Blindness iby © hum Cree eee a 249 A Lightning Spiral observed near Basel, by Fr. Klingelfuss-_-.--.--------- 259 Variations of Specific Gravity, by Georg W. A. Kahlbaum -...------.----- 261 Some New Methods of Lighting, by A. Berthier _...------_------.-----.-- 267 The Progress in Wireless Telegraphy, by William Maver, jr -------------- 275 Electric Welding Development, by Elihu Thomson -.-----.---------------- 281 The History of Some Discoveries in Photography, by Robert Hunt _-_-_-_--- 287 Theories of Ore Deposition Historically Considered, by S. F. Emmons----- 309 On Mountains and Mankind, by Douglas W. Freshfield -...-.---..-------- 337 Morocco} by. Theobald Hisch ery ese eee eee een er 359 The Work of the Reclamation Service, by F. H. Newell---.-----------.--- 373 The Yuma Reclamation Project. bys by uippincovbseas= as s== 554 --5----- 383 The Hyidence of Evolution, by. Eco De Varleseea-se so seee eens === 2-2 -- 388 CONTENTS. The Evolutionary Significance of Species, by O. F. Cook _.________________ Nome bird Litean British Papnavby R. A. Vivian 2264 2.95227. .220 1... Bind: Sanctuariosun New Zealand)... 98 2220.5 22s ee he House Sparrow bya Dire ge Os ekImner =. 5228 2 ete Some Tibetan Animals, by R. Lydekker ......2......._--__-- The Multiple Origin of Horses and Ponies, by Dr. J. Cossar Ew art _ Egyptian and Arabian Horses, by E. Prisse d’Avennes _______________- ; iBeestands lowers sD yeeLoOb Eras SOlviOlL = sam rans ae as See een eee The Pearl Fisheries of Ceylon, by Prof. W. A. Herdman___________._____- Flying Fish and their Habits, by Dr. Theodore Gill ___________2__._______- The Stature of Man at Different Epochs, by A. Dastre _____...__....___.-- OldeAcesbysuilieMetchnikofi 22. s-- ee- ee esos eee SS The Contributions of American Archeology to History, by W. H. Holmes - Gournias by jlarret ABO Gt. te eo ne eee oo nso oe ee eee Archeological Researches on the Frontiers of Argentina and Bolivia, by TEESE CVO DI EVOSC Ty sm Ree ee aE yes Oty EY Me a t=, Nt is ae eye The Painting of Human Bones among the American Aborigines, by Dr. PAC Sabir di Gaetan ses SOU Let ele o 2 zu WE er Le scan SE a a 2 Sling Contrivances for Projectile Weapons, by F. Krause ____.__________-- Materials Used to Write upon before the Invention of Printing, by Prof. PANS OTE eID 2a 10 97 Bree 8 ee meray 05 Se REO ey Bre rete ct Lee NMR eet eee perk An Inquiry into the Population of China, by W. W. Rockhill. -__________- ChimneserArchitectures bya ss Wires USiie) lie ete epee eee eee Pewter and the Revival of its Use, by Arthur Lasenby Liberty _.________- Cameossby Cynil Davienporteses ss. eee ee =- ee ees The Beane Conquest of trie a by the Railnoads. DA mock. Se cee ey The Present Aspects of the Panama Canal, by William Hl Burra ss) oe The Sanitation of the Isthmian Canal Zone, by W. C. Gorgas__..._.-___-- The Projected New Barge Canal, by Col. Thomas W. Symons ._____.. ---- Rapid Transit Subways in Metropolitan Cities, by Milo R. Maltbie_______- Sir George Gabriel Stokes, by Ernest W. Brown_.-------_...-_.-.-_____-- Karl Alfred von Zittel, by Charles Schuchert_........-..._.-_--- oe Seen eee KarliGerenbauer,, by Oscars Hergwit mac as. 2esse 555 se beeen oo ee nee ee re —= » < a2 oe a / ws ee ~ LIST OF PLATES. SECRETARY'S REPORT: Plate I. Tis 1D.& XE eXaIs XII. XIIt. XIV. . Ground plan of the observatory inclosure . New form of bolometric apparatus .._._.1._.---.2.-22.2-_.-- . Terrestrial temperature and solar radiation, 1908______._____. . Intensity of radiation along diameter of solar disk, September, Location of animal quarters in the National Zoological Park -__ Plan of main floor of new house for animals, National Zoo- Mayeaker ld Stra time at aie ai ke rae a oe GR Ce ee eee : . Bird cage at Louisiana Purchase Exposition _._____..__-___-- . Great brown bear from Alaska. Leopard in National Zoo- OPICARR AT Kee sees etna see yas a2 Sey CMW Sms er Sey a ee LOO SS ee ee ee errs SO ere aa ed aes 2. pg St: Louis'exhibit of National Museum. .-2.-.5.2. 2... 2... 2-_- Central court, Smithsonian pavilion at St. Louis _____._____. Entrance to St. Louis exhibit of the Astrophysical Observatory - St. Louis exhibit of the National Zoological Park__.__._____- St. Louis exhibit of the Bureau of Exchanges --_----_-__- eas EXPERIMENTS WITH THE AERODROME (LANGLEY): Plate I. Instantaneous photograph of the launch of October 7, 1903 __- THE RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH (HALE AND ELLERMAN): Plate I. TE: Ill. The Rumford spectroheliograph attached to the 40-inch Yerkes refractor The curvature of lines in the spectroheliograph, fig. 2, H and elines onthe disks etcetera ee ee ee Fig. 1, K line on the disk and at the limb; fig. 2, H and K lines in electric arc; fig. 3, minute calcium flocculi (H,)-_-.____- TeLhe suns showine.calcmmfocculime ss: == asses ese ee . Fig. 1, low level (H,) section of calciuni flocculi; fig. 2, high lévelk(E) i SsectionloL same focculim=s seas sees == aaa oe . General appearance of sun’s disk at H, level___...__.._._----- . Fig. 1, Facule; fig. 2, calcium flocculi, low K, level .__.____-- . Calcium flocculi, higher K, level; fig. 2, calcium flocculi, K, Te Viele erry Scan y AIA I Ei a aed ies Midi Se amr al NASER ATi oe aha FELVOTOSEMIMOCCUL + Yaa mer amet e resale Stars us Peis A Tle . Fig. 1, hydrogen floceuli; fig. 2, calcium flocculi_......__---- ~Calcium-elocculislow i levelasse asses In whee de ed . Calcium flocculi, middle H, level > (Ceikeiuorn saloyecuubl, Jalen el oon ee hee pee Sean easecesnee mLiyarorentlocculii j25 eee ee Spee Se ee a ede Bake eee MOBLIN HOCCULM OWE eVelecesseaen nase ee ac Se scee seek . Calcium flocculi, middle H, level Calcium flocculivhioh ty levele..2 sos ioe Se PeCalcium Hocculi, Ha loveless. .22 2285552555 eeeee ae: Ix Page. 70 70 72 x LIST OF PLATES. CONDENSATION NUCLEI (WILSON. PLATES BY BARUS): Plate I. Charts showing nucleation from Oct. 2 to 28, 1902___..____--_- II. Charts showing nucleation from Oct. 27 to Nov. 24____-_----- IiI. Charts showing nucleation from Noy. 24 to Dec. 8 _________-- IV. Charts showing nucleation from Dec. 6 to Dec. 20 _-__________- V. Charts showing nucleation from Dec. 21, 1902, to Jan. 4, 1903 VI. Charts showing nucleation from Jan. 4 to 18,1903 ___________ VII. Charts showing average number of nuclei per cubic centi- meter on successive days of the years 1902-3 and 1903—4____- VIII. Curves showing the average number of nuclei per cubic centi- meter in successive months of the years 1902-3 and 1903-4 __ A LIGHTNING SPIRAL (KLINGELFUSS): Plate I. Fig. 1, photograph of lightning flash; fig. 2, photograph of Induction: Cols parle Ae: ee eer eee eee eer UT, abhayevelbeotssiis) Jesh wes my Ibaohiveioyatonm, — 2-3 ses New MetuHops oF LIGHTING (BERTHIER): Plate I. A drawing-room wall and ceiling effect obtained with Moore TU DOSAS 2 serch aes Dee severe s yan aerate hay) Oe eee ae ine ee ELECTRIC WELDING (THOMSON): Plate I. Fig. 1, an electric tire-welding machine; fig. 2, an electric welding machine for iron and steel pipe_________-.__-_____- II. Another form of hoop or tire welding machine ____-_________- Ill. Fig. 1, rolls of electrically welded wire fences of varying width and mesh; fig. 2, an electric chain-welding machine__ IV. Electric rail welding on street railways ___...-----_----___--- V. A welding machine for large tubes or shells___._-___________- DISCOVERIES IN PHOTOGRAPHY (HUNT): Plate I. Joseph Nicephore Niepce VI. Fig. I, Niepce’s apparatus; fig. 2, Thomas Wedgewood VIL. Fig. 1, Talbot’s studio; fig. 2, Calotype printing apparatus - WORK OF THE RECLAMATION SERVICE (NEWELL): Plate I. Canal line crossing on Dunlap Creek, Montana______.______-- Il. Typical scene in North Platte Canyon, Wyoming ___- JOU, TSiaverstavorays (Op wahyayal, \WWyayopeawhaye? 2 IV. Looking up North Platte River, Wyoming. V. Detailed view of Shoshone dam site, Wyoming VI. Malheur dam site, Malheur River, Oregon VII. Looking up Cottonwood Creek, Oregon ........-...__------.-- VIII. Pear orchard on Rockefeller ranch, Oregon THE YUMA PROJECT (LIPPINCOTT): Plated? Relicimapiot the wana projech sea ee MULTIPLE ORIGIN OF HORSES AND PONIES (EWART): Plate I. Fig. 1, Professor Ewart’s yearling wild horse in summer coat; fig. 2, Celtic pony, showing tail lock in midwinter- : II. Fig. 1, a typical Celtic pony in winter coat; fig. 2, a richly striped dark yellow-dun horse of the Norse type EGYPTIAN AND ARABIAN Horsrs (D’AVENNES): Plate I. Egyptian horses; bas-relief at Thebes_......_-__- Il. Egyptian horses; bas-relief at Karnak _-___- Ill. Zedan, a pure-blooded Arabian colt__......_......____._____- IV. Obeyran, an imported Arabian stallion__---_---____- LIST OF PLATES. XI FLYING FIsH (GILL): Page. iaibomiem@ yy Se lui ts eer eee se gee ee ne eee ek eyes a e008 II. Air bladders _-_---_=.- Wht See eles le en Bead See 508 Ill. Dactylopter us-volitans. aaa : : : 510 IV. Dactylopterus volitans’ 2 aesiaent stages: OF peoaih f 510 GOURNIA (BOYD): ; Plate I. Sketch plan of the central acropolis._ ._....--..-------------- 564 ii Objects'excavated(atrGournia,_2- 22255800 he a _.. 564 Mike Clay, bulls head! 2-2. - eS aes se ee 570 ARCH ZOLOGICAL RESEARCHES ON THE FRONTIER OF "ARGENTINA AND Bo- LIVIA (VON ROSEN): 4 Plate I. Fig. 1, grave grotto; fig. 2, unearthed skeleton _____---------- 574 tv ~ on tS tg II. Fig. 1, cacti; fig. 2, door of SAC HU SiuwvOO Clee tae ay ee ena lieehigod doom of cactus wood, fis, 2 yetone hut. 2-222. 5---- IV. Fig. 1, ancient irrigation terraces; fig. 2, walled-up ¢ EaOrton ae V. Fig. 1, barrow in mountain pass; fig. 2, small stone altarseae VI. Loess formations in the Tarija Valley------ ---- BMPR cpa VII. Fig 1, Loess formation, showing fossil bones of Mastodon; al (Sia De CO inks, De saovareleraay Ibavéhe yoy lowohy ae BT eee sees ee VIII. Vessels and implements from Casabindo and Tarija --.._--_-. 582 EX Oodensimploments=) se - = ah ee oan ee ees ee 582 X. Objects found at the ancient dwelling place near Tolomosa, in Ghevbarijaev alley ses et ee ae eee ee ey Soe ee 582 THE ARCHAOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION (HEWRTT): Plate I. Fig. 2, ruins of Puye Pueblo, New Mexico; fig. 2, restoration of cliff dwellings in Sandia Canyon, New Mexico___...-_-_- 586 II. Restoration of pueblo of Tchirege. New Mexico__-.-_-_._----- 586 Ill. Ruins of pueblo of Giusewa and mission of San Diego, New Wi Reba oY yee cattle tees re gems A ana a heap sR UR =. _ aystt) IV. Fig. 2, pueblo ruins, Montezuma Mesa, New Mexico; ie, 2 25 cliff acaba Montezuma Mesa, New Mexico_-_--_-_. 590 V. Fig. 1, ruins of Hungopavi, New Mexico; fig. 2, ruins of rene lizinineeNewin Vex CO eas nea as eee Sle Hire ert ee wha 594 VI. Fig. 1, ruins of Kinkletsoi, New Mexico; fig. 9, cliff dwelling, Colorado sae ee es eee aN eee gare ee a en ee Ss oy 594 Will, Chish, milenaes, Aaaey 32 oo eset ee sano a4ense ae 598 VIII. Cliff dwelling and mummy cave, Canyon del Muerto, Rei onat 598 IX. Cliff palace. Mesa Weems end Colkontyelo). ee 602 X. Fig. 2, Montezuma Castle, Beaver Creek, Arizona; fig. 2, Casa GrandtaGalamvallleyapAmI Zon dt as ses ees aa ee ae 602 XI. Cliff dwellings, Gila Hot Springs, New Mexico- -----.-------- 602 PAINTING OF HuMAN Bones AMONG AMERICAN ABORIGINES (HRDLICKA): Plate I. Fig. 1, modern female skull with painted inscription and de- coration; fig. 2, male skull, with black designs on face (colored@ plate)! 2 -e.se se ee RRS et oe Shah 607 Il. Fig. 1, Wasco skull, with a discoloration by copper ceili fe. 2. Wasco skull, with colored cross over frontal bone (col- OLEdaplatel Pee ee eee eee eA ree rey ere 2 eee Ollie III. Male skull painted red, from Lower C Alifor nia (colored mlatene 616 SLING CONTRIVANCES FOR PROJECTILE WEAPONS (KRAUSE): Plate I. Slings for hurling weapons ---.-. .----------- ise sia 3 oe ee 624 II. Slings for hurling weapons -.---------- Pepe sfeitis Jee cee eat GOA IIL. Slings for hurling weapons , Rees sa ean ee Saan (OBE iVerslinestomhuriimoweapons = 2522. vioe ew. £2 ue 632 XII LIST OF PLATES. MATERIALS USED TO WRITE UPON (MAIRE): Plate I. Clay tablet, with linear prehistoric script If. Lachish cuneiform clay tablet IV. Moro school exercise inscribed on board V. Hebrew scroll of unbleached leather VI. Fragment of Hebrew manuscript on parchment —_____- VIL. Hebrew manuscript of Pentatauch on velluam___--- VIII. Ethiopic manuscript of gospel of John on parchment_._- CHINESE ARCHITECTURE (BUSHELL): Plate I. Sacrificial hall of Yung Lo. Peking II. Imperial hall of the classics. Pi Yung Kung Ill. Memorial arch of marble and glazed terra cotta. Paieou IV. The great altar of heaven. T’ien T’an VI. Shrine and altar of Confucius, Peking IX. Hunchback bridge. Lo-Ko Ch’iao XI. ‘‘ Porcelain’’ pagoda at Yuan-Ming Yuan XII. Pagoda. Ling Kuang Ssu XIII. Buddhist triad. Interior of Lama temple XV. Incarnation of a Bodhisattva. Pai T’a Ssu TOW lbehineg wemmlereindiglgl. . -k 2252-32 ea ee et tle ese XVII. Five-towered temple, near Peking XIX. Ruined gateway of a mosque, Peking____-._____--.-_-___-- PEWTER AND THE REVIVAL OF Its USE (LIBERTY): Plate I. Fig. 1, candlestick; fig. 2, card tray --_-- Ill. Babylanian alabastar votive tablet___-______- a : = : : Wey INSTI a EPC en VII. Garden pavilion at Wan Shou Shan -----._---------- we ay. WANS IDEN Venn WWnMSVVON SVaeWN 2 28 oe See ee Sano cesses ease X. Bronze Buddhist shrine at Wan Show Shan eae one XIV. Stupa of sculptured marble___________._- DEL ae ye ree SWATOTS IBRevawas) Thaversiarets) |OUOVETR = a eB eee II. Fig. 1, biscuit box; photograph frame; fig. 3, fruit basket; fig. 4, frame for glass flower bowl; fig. 5, tray and lid for glass butter bowl. ____—_- Be ee Le eee ee s,s: : Ill. Fig. 1, liqueur set and tray; fe 2 hee handled vase; fig. 3, hot=wateryUere eae a eee ee Stn, soe ree As eee IV. Fig. 1, coffee pot; fig. 2, glass claret jug; Siete 3, ‘peer tankar d, gy st pe okey 06 Ue pie ae ee eet apes Fe LA 2s Ol a ee ee ene V. Fig. 1, tripod bowl; fig. 2, tr ay, -, with Cripihandse ese = VI. Fig. 1, entrée dish and cover; fig. 2, cigar box; fig. 3, biscuit ro SAE eae IG STS eel as © CAMEOS (DAVENPORT): Plate I. Camee Dee oe Sua Sue Et a one Re is ae IIL. Gr eC me a gems - ae I Sis EN eater ee ee IV. Greek and Roman portraits_-__-_- -- E ae THE PrRoJECTED New BAarGE CANAL (SYMONS): Plate I. Map showing proposed route of new Erie Canal - GEORGE GABRIEL STOKES (BROWN): Plate I. Sir George Gabriel Stokes - wae tear as ee KARL ALBERT VON ZITTEL (SCHUCHERT): Plate I. Karl Alfred von Zittel-_------. . Hesetne CARL GEGENBAUER (HERTWIG): Plate I. Carl Gegenbauer : Ae ee Senha ee rs Se APC THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. MEMBERS EX OFFICIO OF THE “ ESTABLISHMENT.” THEODORE ROOSEVELT, President of the United States. (Vacancy), Vice-President of the United States. MELVILLE W. FuLLer, Chief Justice of the United States. JOHN Hay, Secretary of State. Lesiige M. SHAw, Secretary of the Treasury. WiiiamM H. Tarr, Secretary of War. PHILANDER C. KNox, Attorney-General. Henry C. PAYNE, Postmaster-General. WILLIAM H. Moopy, Secretary of the Nayy. ETHAN ALLEN Hircucocrk, Secretary of the Interior. JAMES WILSON, Secretary of Agriculture. GeEOoRGE B. CorreLyou, Secretary of Commerce and Labor. REGENTS OF THE INSTITUTION. (List given on following page. ) OFFICERS OF THE INSTITUTION. SAMUEL P. LANGLEY, Secretary. Director of the Institution and Keeper of the U. S. National Museum. RICHARD RATHBUN, Assistant Secretary. XIII REGENTS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTEVUDION. By the organizing act approved August 10, 1846 (Revised Stat- utes, Title LX-XITI, section 5580), “The business of the Institution shall be conducted at the city of Washington by a Board of Regents, named the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, to be composed of the Vice-President, the Chief Justice of the United States, three members of the Senate, and three members of the House of Repre- sentatives, together with six other persons, other than members of Congress, two of whom shall be resident in the city of Washington and the other four shall be inhabitants of some State, but no two of the same State.” REGENTS FOR THH YHAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1904. The Chief Justice of the United States: MELVILLE W. FULLER, elected Chancellor and President of the Board, January 9, 1889. The Vice-President of the United States (vacancy) : WILLIAM P. FRYE, President pro tempore of the Senate, acting as Regent. United States Senators: Term expires. SHELBY M. CULLOM (appointed Mar. 24, 1885. Mar. 28, SSO Dee lSya'S95 andeManr a O01) Seas =e eee Mar. 3, 1907 ORVILLE H. PLATT (appointed Jan. 18, 1899, Feb. 23. 1903)_ Mar. 3, 1909 ERANCIS M. COCKRELL (appointed Mar. 7, 1901))_~_----—— Mar. 3, 1905 Members of the Ilouse of Representatives : ROBERT R. HITT (appointed Aug. 11, 1893, Jan. 4, 1894, Dec 20; 1895, Dee. 22, 189t, Jan. 4, 1900, Dee 13, 1901, anal Debi, 5 I Oe ye eee ee poe el 28 eh Se SD CCHS ROBERT ADAMS. Jr. (appointed Dee. 20, 1895, Dee. 22 1897, Jan. 4, 1900, Dee. 13. 1901, and Jan. 12, 1904) _____ 22] Deer 271905 HUGH A. DINSMORE (appointed Jan. 4, 1900, Dee. 138, 1901, F201 0X0 tear’ Fz) 6 Pam) lee Petial eo) OY? 5) ee ee US Te ae ee Dee. 27, 1905 Citizens of a State: JAMES B. ANGELL, of Michigan (appointed Jan. 19, 1887, debit ito hy have leebalpeese, sll) oe Em, AHR AN 0 S) ANDREW D. WHITH, of New York (appointed Feb. 15, 1888, Mar, 19; 1894and) June-2491900) eee 2 June 2, 1906 RICHARD OLNEY, of Massachusetts (appointed Jan. 24, L900). = a eo eae Lo Sok a Jan. 24, 1906 GHORGE GRAY, of Delaware (appointed Jan. 14, 1901)---. Jan. 14, 1907 Citizens of Washington City : JOHN B. HENDERSON (appointed Jan. 26, 1892, Jan. 24, 1898. and Jan: 27%: 1904) 22 ae eee Jan. 27, 1910 ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL (appointed Jan. 24, 1898, and: Jan:.27;, 1904) 22.2 eee eee subbed Sak Jan. 27, 1910 Hrecutive Committee of the Board of Regents. JoHN B. Henperson, Chairman. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL. Ropert R. Hirv. XIV PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS FOR THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1904. At a meeting held March 12, 1903, the Board of Regents adopted the following resolution : Resolved, That, in addition to the prescribed meeting held on the.fourth Wed- nesday in January, regular meetings of the Board shall be held on the Tuesday after the first Monday in December and on the 6th day of March, unless that date falls on Sunday, when the following Monday shall be substituted. In accordance with the above resolution, the Board met at 10 o'clock a. m. on December 8, 1903, and on January 27 and March 7, 1904. ‘ REGULAR MEETING OF DECEMBER 8, 1903. Present: Mr. Chief Justice Fuller (Chancellor) in the chair; Senator S. M. Cullom; Senator O. H. Platt; Senator F. M. Cock- rell; Senator W. P. Frye, President pro tempore of the Senate; Representative Robert Adams, jr.; Representative Hugh A. Dins- more; the Hon. Richard Olney; the Hon. John B. Henderson; the Hon. George Gray; Dr. A. Graham Bell, and the Secretary, S. P. Langley. EXCUSES FOR NONATTENDANCE. The Secretary read letters from Dr. J. B. Angell and the Hon. R. R. Hitt, explaining that important engagements prevented their attendance. He stated also that Dr. Andrew D. White was at present in Europe. MINUTES OF PREVIOUS MEETINGS. The Secretary read in abstract the minutes of the meetings of Jan- uary 28 and March 12, and, there being no objection, they were approved. NEW BUILDING FOR NATIONAL MUSEUM. The Secretary read a report which showed that with the advice and consent of the Chancellor and the chairman of the executive com- mittee, as required by the resolution of the Board of Regents adopted March 12, a contract had been made, under date of May 18, 1903, with Messrs. Hornblower & Marshall, architects, of Washington, D. C., for the necessary architectural services. ov xV . XVI PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. SPECIAI REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. In the absence of the chairman of the executive committee Doctor Bell made a verbal report of the action of the committee, in which he included certain resolutions on which he asked the approval of the Board. REPORT OF SPECIAL COMMITTEE. The Chancellor then read at length the report of the special com- mittee appointed for the purpose of considering the question of defining the powers of the executive committee, and after a discussion, participated in by Senator Platt, Doctor Bell, Senator Henderson, and Judge Gray, Senator Henderson asked that the report might le over until the January meeting. The Chancellor suggested that it would be well to have the report and the exhibit of the past acts of the executive committee printed and communicated to the members of the Board. The following resolutions were then adopted: Resolved, That the report of the special committee, together with its exhibit, be printed and distributed to the members of the Board of Regents, and called up at the January meeting for action. Resolved, That the executive committee’s report, as presented by Doctor Bell, be printed and distributed to the members of the Board of Regents, and called up at the January meeting for action. COMPILATION OF LAWS AFFECTING SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. The Secretary presented the compilation of laws which had been prepared in accordance with a resolution offered by Senator Cockrell at the meeting of March 12, and adopted by the Board. On motion, the manuscript was referred to Senator Cockrell for examination and decision as to printing. REMOVAL OF SMITHSON’S REMAINS. The Secretary read a letter from the Hon. Wiliam Henry Bishop, United States consul at Genoa, showing the need of action in the removal of James Smithson’s remains, owing to the imminence of the proposed demolition of the cemetery in which they reposed. Doctor Bell renewed the proposition which he made at the last meeting that the remains of Smithson be brought to this country at his expense. After further remarks Judge Gray offered the following resolu- tions, which were adopted : Resolved, That Dr. A. Graham Bell be appointed as a committee to take charge of the matter of the removal of the remains of James Smithson from Genoa to Washington, with the request that the negotiations and remoyal be conducted quietly and privately, PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. XVII Resolved, That upon the conclusion of this duty, all expenses involved by it be reimbursed to Doctor Bell from the funds of the Institution, ~ The Board then adjotirned. ANNUAL MEETING OF JANUARY 27, 1904. Present: Mr. Chief Justice Fuller (Chancellor), in the chair: the Hon. S. M. Cullom; the Hon. O. H. Platt; the Hon. F. M. Cockrell; the Hon. R. R. Hitt; the Hon. Robert Adams, jr.; the Hon. Hugh A. Dinsmore; Dr. J. B. Angell; the Hon. John B. Henderson: Dr. A. Graham Bell; the Hon. Richard Olney, and the Secretary, Mr. S. P. Langley. EXCUSES FOR NONATTENDANCE. Excuses for nonattendance were received from Senator Frye and Judge Gray, on account of iiportant engagements, and from Dr. Andrew D, White, who was unable to attend owing to absence abroac. MINUTES OF PREVIOUS MEETING. The Secretary read in abstract the minutes of the previous meeting, and there being no objection they were declared approved. REAPPOINTMENT OF REGENTS. The Secretary announced that on January 12 the Speaker of the House had reappointed Representatives Hitt, Adams, and Dinsmore as Regents for two years; and also that Senator Henderson and Dr. A. Graham Bell had been reappointed for a term of six years by joint resolution approved by the President January 27, 1904. RESOLUTION RELATIVE TO INCOME AND EXPENDITURE. Mr. Hitt, on behalf of the executive committee, presented the fol- lowing resolution, which was adopted : Resolved, That the income of the Institution for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1905, be appropriated for the service of the Institution, to be expended by the Secretary, with the advice of the executive committee, with full discretion on the part of the Secretary as to items. ANNUAL REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. The Secretary presented his report of the operations of the Institu- tion for the year ending June 30, 19038, which was accepted. ANNUAL REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Senator Henderson, chairman, presented the report of the com- mittee for the year ending June 30, 1903, which was adopted, SM 01k XVIII PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. ANNUAL REPORT OF THE PERMANENT COMMITTEE. Senator Henderson, chairman, reported upon the present status of the proposed bequests of Addison T. Reid and Joseph White Sprague ; also concerning the will of Wallace C. Andrews and the condition of the Hodgkins and Avery funds. He further stated that the Secre- tary had expended, under the authority of the Board, the sum of $14,225.02 on his experiments in mechanical flight, from January 1 to December 31, 1903. The Secretary then submitted a statement on the work of the Insti- tution, conducted since the date of his annual report (June 30, 1903), together with his plans for future operations. REPORT OF THE SPECIAL COMMITTEE. The Chancellor stated that the next matter to be disposed of was the report of the special committee to consider the question of defin- ing the duties of the executive committee, and in this connection also the special report of the executive committee, but suggested that owing to lack of time it might be well to defer this until the meeting of March 7 next, which the Board approved. REMOVAL OF SMITHSON’S REMAINS. Doctor Bell’s report upon the matter of the removal of Smithson’s remains from Genoa to Washington, and their delivery to the charge of the Board, was next in order, but the hour having arrived at which it was necessary for a majority of the Regents to leave for their duties at the Capitol, the Board took a recess until 8 o’clock this evening, when the report would be received and considered. 8 O'CLOCK P. M. The Board resumed its meeting at the Institution. Present: The Elon. S. M: Cullom, the Hon, ©: H. Platt, the Hon. IF. M. Cockrell, the Hon. R. R. Hitt, the Hon. Robert Adams, jr., the Hon. Hugh A. Dinsmore, the Hon. John B. Henderson, the Hon. Richard Olney, Dr. A. Graham Bell, and the Secretary, Mr. S. P. Langley. Senator Cullom was invited to preside. Doctor Bell then read his report in full, and after discussion in which certain changes were suggested, it was accepted. (The report will be found appended hereto p. xx.) Mr. Adams then offered tne following resolution, which was adopted : Resolved, That the Board of Regents desire to record in the minutes of the Institution their profound appreciation of the voluntary service of Dr. Alexan- der Grabam Bell in personally going to Genoa and returning with the remains PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. XIX of James Smithson, that they might find a resting place in the grounds of the Institution he so nobly founded “for the increase and diffusion of knowledge cunong men.” hs Some further discussion took place with regard to the final disposi- tion of the remains, and Senator Platt offered the following resolu- tion, which was adopted : Resolved, That the Chancellor and the Secretary, with the members of the executive committee, be appointed a committee upon the question of the final disposition of the remains of James Smithson, and of the monument to be erected to him, with power to act in the entire matter. The Board then adjourned. REGULAR MEETING OF MARCH 7, 1904. Present: Mr. Chief Justice Fuller (Chancellor), in the chair; the Hon. William P. Frye, the Hon. 8. M. Cullom, the Hon. O. H. Platt, the Hon. F. M. Cockrell, the Hon. R. R. Hitt, the Hon. Robert Adams, jr., the Hon. John B. Henderson, Dr. A. Graham Bell, and the Secretary, Mr. S. P. Langley. EXCUSES FOR NONATTENDANCE. The Secretary presented excuses in writing for nonattendance from Judge Gray, Doctor Angell, and Mr. Olney, on account of engage- ments, and added that Mr. Dinsmore had sent a message that he was compelled to leave the city and would not be present. Doctor White was still absent in Europe. . MINUTES OF PREVIOUS MEETING. The minutes of the previous meeting were read in abstract, and there being no objection, were declared approved. REPORT OF SPECIAL COMMITTEE. * The Chancellor, as chairman, read the report of the special com- mittee appointed to consider the question of defining the powers of the executive committee. The report was very fully discussed, and, on motion, was adopted. SPECIAL REPORT OF EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Mr. Bell read the report of the executive committee as presented by him at the meeting of December 8, 1903. After discussion it was moved and carried that the consideration of the resolutions recommended by Doctor Bell be indefinitely postponed, xx PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. REPORT OF SPECIAL COMMITTEE ON THE DISPOSITION OF THE REMAINS OF JAMES SMITHSON. The Chancellor stated that at the meeting of the Board of Regents held January 27, 1904, the following resolution was adopted: Resolved, That the Chancellor and the Secretary, with the members of the executive committee, be appointed a committee upon the question of the final disposition of the remains of James Sinithson and of the monument to be erected to him, with power to act in the entire matter. The committee provided by the above resolution met on March 4, 1904, and after discussion adopted the following resolution : Resolved, That a fitting tomb should be erected on the grounds of the Smith- sonian Institution as a final resting place for the body of James Smithson, and that after consideration of the character and cost of such tomb Congress be requested to make an adequate appropriation for it. NATIONAL GALLERY OF ART. The Secretary then brought before the Board the matter of the will of the late Mrs. Harriet Lane Johnston, who left a number of paint- ings to the Corcoran Gallery of Art until a national gallery of ari had been established by the Government. The Corcoran gallery had declined the pictures under these conditions, and Mr. Corcoran Thom had communicated with the Secretary with regard to the probability of the Government establishing such a national gallery of art under the Institution. After discussion, on motion of Senator Cullom, the matter was referred to the executive committee. The Board then adjourned. APPENDIX TO PROCEEDINGS OF REGENTS. REPORT OF COMMITTEE ON THE TRANSFER OF THE REMAINS OF JAMES SMITHSON TO THE UNITED STATES. To the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution. GENTLEMEN: As the committee charged with the duty of bringing to the United States the mortal remains of James Smithson, the founder of the Smithsonian Institution, I beg to report the successful accomplishment of my mission; and the remains were handed over to the Smithsonian Institution last Monday, the 25th of January, 1904. I reached Genoa, Italy, on the 25th of December, 1903, and next day presented my credentials to the American consul, Mr. William Henry Bishop, and to Mr. Noel Lees, for the committee of the British Burial Ground Fund Association. On the 29th of December I made formal application for the remains of James Smithson, and on the 31st of December they were delivered into my custody. In accordance with the expressed wish PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. X XI of the Regents, the exhumation was effected quietly and privately, only the American Consul and six other witnesses being present in addition to the workmen employed. I have the honor of submitting the following certificate from the American consul describing the exhumation : THE CONSULATE OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, Genoa, Italy. To whom it may concern : I, William Henry Bishop, consul of the United States of America, do hereby certify that on Thursday, December 31, 1905, at about 11 o’clock in the morn- ing, Iwas present at the opening of the grave known without doubt or question to be that of James Smithson, in the old Hnglish cemetery of San Benigno at Genoa, said James Smithson having died at Genoa in the year 1829, and having been buried till now in the said cemetery. That on the opening of the grave the remains, consisting of little more than the skeleton, were seen clearly exposed. to view, since no earth had been thrown upon the body, and the wooden coffin that contained it had entirely fallen to decay; that said remains were reverently removed from the grave and pliced in a metal casket prepared to receive them; that the said metal casket was thereupon sealed up securely and put in the mortuary chapel of the cemetery, as in the custody of Dr. Alex- ander Graham Bell, to await his convenience in conveying it to America. I further certify that there were present with me, and witnesses of all the circumstances of the above-described exhumation, the following persons: Dr. Alexander Graham Bell, Washington, ID. C., especially commissioned by the Smithsonian Institution to convey the remains of James Smithson to the United States; Mrs. Alexander Graham Bell, his wife, Washington, D. C.; Noel Lees, esq., Genoa, Italy, official representative of the British Burial Ground Fund Association, in which the proprietorship of the said cemetery of San Benigno is vested; Gino Coppede, Genoa, architect and engineer, charged with the work of opening the tomb and grave of the said James Smithson, and of removing all the belongings of the said cemetery to the new site to which it is to be transferred; Giovanni Battista Firpo, Genoa, gardener by profession and paid custodian for many years past of the said cemetery and of the grave of James Smithson, having succeeded his father in the same office; Federico Guarini, the municipal guard deputed by the bureau of hygiene to be present on the occa- sion; Paolo Parodi, metal worker and chief undertaker, in transferring the remains to the casket and soldering up the same. That the above-mentioned persons are all personally known, to me, and known to fill the various functions respectively assigned to them above. That they have consented to be sworn as to the matters herein alleged, and that each has appended his signature hereurito as making oath to the truth of the statements, so far as each one individually is concerned, above set forth. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL. MABEL G. BELL. NorEL LEEs. ARCHO GINO COPPEDE. G. B. Frrpo. FEDERICO GUARINI. PaoLto PAROpDI. In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my seal of office this 81st day of December, 1903. [ SEAL. ] WILLIAM Henry BISHOP, Consul of the United States of America at Genoa, Italy. XxXii PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. The above certificate of the American consul was signed by the witnesses named in the mortuary chapel of the cemetery after the ‘asket had been soldered up in their presence. The witnesses named and the workmen employed then stood around with uncovered heads while the consul of the United States placed over the remains of James Smithson the American flag. The casket was left in the mortuary chapel to await my convenience in transporting it to America; and Giovanni Battista Firpo, the gardener employed by the Smithsonian Institution as the custodian of the grave of James Smithson, was left in charge—he agreeing to remain in the mortuary chapel night and day until the removal of the remains. On Saturday, the 2d of January, 1904, the foregoing witnesses again assembled in the mortuary chapel of the cemetery, and in their presence the metallic casket was placed within a coffin of strong wood. Before the lid of the coffin was screwed down our consul, Mr. Bishop, placed upon the casket the seal of the consulate of the United States and covered the casket with an American flag. Mrs. Bell then placed within the coffin a wreath of leaves from the grave of Smith- son, and all the witnesses contributed flowers. Immediately before the removal of the remains from the mortuary chapel the following addresses were made: REMARKS OF WILLIAM HENRY BISHOP, UNITED STATES CONSUL. {On the oceasion of the removal of the remains of James Smithson from the mortuary chapel of the cemetery of San Benigno, January 2, 1904.] Dr. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL: You arrived here, my dear Dr. Graham Bell, charged by the Smithsonian Institution with the mission of removing to Wash- ington the remains of the founder of that Institution, James Smithson, who has been buried till new in the cemetery where we stand, since his death at Genoa in the year 1829. Having been invited by you and by the Smithsonian Insti- tution to aid you to what extent I might be able in this object, it has been a matter of great pride and pleasure to me that I have been allowed to do so. All the steps necessary to such removal have now been taken. We have received the authorization of the governmental heads of the province, the city, and the British Burial Ground Fund, in which latter the title to the cemetery and the custody of the grave of James Smithson is vested, and all of these have kindly cooperated with us in the work. The body of James Smithson has now been reverently raised from the earth; it has been placed in A case securely sealed, and this case stands ready to pass into the charge of the steamship company which will convey it to New York. T assure you that it is with a feeling of real emotion that I have just now east the American flag over the body of this illustrious man, this noble but as yet little known benefactor, as it is on the verge of beginning its journey to the United States. The flag adopts him already, as it were, in the substance, for our country, to which he has so long belonged in the spirit. Tle is now about to receive there a portion of the outward yeneration and homage he so supremely merits. and which, owing to the modest circumstances of his life, and his inter- ment here in some sense almost forgotten, he has never had. PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. XXIII Shal! I admit that on taking possession of my post as consul at Genoa, I did not even know who,James Smithson was? I may say that I was surprised to learn that he was buried* at Genoa; more surprised still that he was an Englishman, whe had never even set foot in America. He left his great bequest to the United States, then ‘in its infancy, through admiring confidence in our future. It is likely that many, or even most, Americans are in the same condi- tion as was I myself; for occasion has rarely arisen for taking thought as to the personality of the man. Happily this unenlightened condition of mind is about to cease. Dr. Graham Bell, I wish you a hearty godspeed across the ocean with your precious freight. The American people will receive it with general gratification, and, through the Smithsonian Institution, will soon delight to pay it great honor. REMARKS OF ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL IN RESPONSE TO THE ABOVE. Mr. ConsuL: It is with feelings of deep emotion that I undertake the trans- portation of the remains of James Smithson from the cemetery where they have so long reposed to their last resting place in the United States. On behalf of the Smithsonian Institution allow me to thank you, Mr. Consul, for the unwearied zeal and care with which, you have given me your assistance. Without your active cooperation and without your personal sympathy it would have been difficult indeed for me to have accomplished the object of my mission here. On behalf of the Smithsonian Institution, I beg to thank you, too, Mr. Noel Lees, for your courtesy and attention; and trust that you will convey to His British Majesty’s consul-general and to the committee of the British Church Burial Ground Fund my thanks and the thanks of the Institution I represent for their ready assistance in furthering my mission. The United States of America will provide in Washington, D. C., a suitable and permanent resting place for the remains of her great benefactor, James Smithson, through tle instrumentality of the Smithsonian Institution—the establishment created by the Government to perpetuate his name. REMARKS OF NOEL LEES, ESQ. [On behalf of the British Burial Ground Fund Committee. ] Dr. GRAHAM BeLL: I beg to thank you heartily for the words you have said with regard to the aid you have received from the burial board and myself. Although we regret to lose the remains of James Smithson, we at the same time feel that in the country to which he left his money, with such charitable intent, his remains will receive the honor and glory which have so long been due to them, and we must understand that our loss is America’s gain. To us it will always remain a pleasant memory that, from the date of his burial to the present day, we have had in our custody in this picturesque little churchyard the remains of a man whose foresight and kindness have enabled so many in the New World to benefit. Upon the conclusion of these remarks the remains of James Smith- son were transported to the North German Lloyd steamship Princess Trene, accompanied by the American consul and myself. ‘The steamer left Genoa for New York on the 7th of January, 1904, touching at Naples and Gibraltar on the way. The American consul at Naples, General Byington, contributed an American flag to cover the wooden coffin containing the remains. + XXIV PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. Not knowing the nature of the reception arrangements that were being made in the United States, I telegraphed from Gibraltar to my son-in-law, Mr. Gilbert H. Grosvenor, expressing the hope that the remains of James Smithson would be received with as much honor as those of John Howard Payne. After conferring with the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institu- tion, Mr. Grosvenor laid the substance of my telegram before the President of the United States, who immediately responded by requesting the Secretary of the Navy to detail the U. S. dispateh- boat Dolphin to meet the Princess Irene on her arrival at quarantine, escort her to the pier at Hoboken, N. J., and then bring the remains to Washington. At the request of Mr. Grosvenor a squadron of United States cay- alry was also detailed to escort the remains from the navy-yard to their resting place here. Mr. Grosvenor has made a report to me of the correspondence which resulted in this cooperation of the United States Government, which will be found in the appendix. As your committee charged with the duty of bringing the remains to the Smithsonian Institution, I have expressed to the President and to the Secretary of the Navy and to the Secretary of War my sincere appreciation of these acts of courtesy, which have given a national character to the reception accorded to the remains of James Smithson on their arrival in the United States. On Monday, the 25th of January, 1904, I handed over, at the Smithsonian Institution, to Senator Frye, as the representative of the Board of Regents, the remains of this great benefactor of the United States. I have the honor to present as an appendix to this report the fol- lowing documents : A. Copy of the application of your committee to the committee of the British 2urial Ground Fund Association for the custody of the remains of James Smith- son, with the reply. B. Copy of the application of your committee to the prefect of the province of Genoa for permission to remove the remains of James Smithson to the United States, with a copy of the decree permitting such removal. C. Copy of a certificate made by the British consul-general at Genoa, at the request of the municipal bureau of hygiene, stating that no objection existed on the part of the British consulate-general to the removal of the remains of James Smithson. D. Certificate of the acting mayor of Genoa that all the requirements of the existing regulations on mortuary matters had been complied with. E. Copy of the final certificate of the American consul, given to your conunit- tee on board the steamer Princess Irene as she was about to leave Genoa: for New York. I. Copy of letter from Lieut. Commander J. H. Gibbons, U. S. Navy, deliy- ered on board the stenmer Princess Trene upon her arrival at quanantine, notifying your committee of the action of the Navy Department in detailing the PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. XXV U. S. S. Dolphin to convey the remains of James Smithson from New York to Washington. ' G. Copy of the remarks of your committee at the Smithsonian Institution January 25, 1904, in handing over’ the remains of James Smithson to Senator Frye as the representative of the Board of Regents, together with the reply of Senator Frye. H. Copy of report of Mr. Gilbert H. Grosvenor, M. A., concerning the corre- spondence which resulted in the cooperation of the United States Government in transporting the remains of James Smithson from New York to the Smith- sonian Institution in Washington, D. C. I. Copy of telegrams and letters sent by your committee to the President of the United States, and to the Secretary of the Navy, and to the Secretary of War, in acknowledgment of Government courtesies. J. Statement of expenses incurred in the removal of the remains of James Smithson to the United States. I may say that it is entirely due to the ability and energy of our consul at Genoa that the transfer of tlfe remains to the United States was effected at all. Without his earnest and intelligent assistance it would have been difficult indeed, if not impossible, for me to have accomplished the object of my mission abroad. No less than five dis- tinct permits had to be obtained from different government officials in Italy, besides a certificate from the British consul-general and per- mission from the British Burial Ground Fund Association. In addi- tion to the official permits required special difficulties were encoun- tered which at first sight seemed insurmountable, but which were successfully overcome by the tact and ability of our consul at Genoa. Respectfully submitted. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, Committee on the Transfer of the Remains of James Smithson to the United States. Wasuincton, D. C., January 27, 1904. APPENDIX A.—Application to the committee of the British Burial Ground Fund Association for the custody of the remains of James Smithson, with the reply. EDEN PALACE HOTEL, Genoa, December 29, 1908. DEAR Sir: IT have the honor to request that the remains of James Smithson, now resting in the old cemetery on the heights of San Benigno, be delivered to me for transportation to the United States. : By the will of James Smithson the United States of America became his heir. The Government of the United States accepted the bequest; and, in conformity with the terms of the will created in Washington, D. C., an establishment for the increase and diffusion of knowledge among men under the title of “ The Smith- sonian Institution.” It appears that an immediate necessity exists for the removal of the remains of this great benefactor of the United States from the cemetery where they have so long reposed; and it seems peculiarly appropriate that the body of Smithson XXVI PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. should now be taken to America and cared for permanently by the institution which bears his name. As the authorized representative of the Smithsonian Institution for this purpose, I respectfully make application for the custody of the remains. I am, sir, yours, respectfully, ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, Regent of the Smithsonian Institution. NoEL LEES, Esq., ‘Care of His Britannic Majesty's Consul-General, for the Committee, British Burial Ground Fund, Genoa, Italy. REPLY TO THE ABOVE. CARE OF His BrITANNIC MAJESTY’s CONSUL-GENERAL, Genoa, January 2, 1904. DEAR Sir: Your favor of December 29, 1903, to hand. On the 31st of the same month the remains of James Smithson, buried in the British cemetery at San Benigno in this city, were exhumed in the presence of the United States consul, yourself (representing the Smithsonian Institute), myself, and other witnesses. The remains were then formally handed over to you, and I now confirm the same in this letter, understanding that the remains will be trans- ported to the United States. I remain, dear sir, yours, faithfully, NoeEL LEEs, Assistant Secretary British Burial Ground Fund, Genoa. Dr. A. GRAHAM BELL, Eden Palace Hotel, Genoa. APPENDIX B.-—Application to the prefect of the province of Genoa for perniis- sion to remove the remains of James Smithson to the United States, with a copy of the decree permitting such removal. [ Translation. ] GENOA, December 29, 19038. The undersigned has the honor to request your excellency to grant him per- mission to remove from Genoa to Washington, United States of America, the remains of James Smithson, buried in the English Protestant Cemetery of San Benigno, at Genoa. With great respect and esteem, the commissioner charged with the same, ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL. UNITED STATES CONSULATE AT GENOA, ITALY, Genoa, December 29, 1908. I, the undersigned, consul of the United States of America at Genoa, hereby certify that Dr. Alexander Graham Bell is the person duly authorized by the Smithsonian Institution, ef Washingten, to take charge of the remains of James Smithson for the purpose of transporting the same to America. [ SEAL. | WitrtAmM HeNrRy BrsnHopr, Consul of the United States of America, REPLY TO THE ABOVE. [Form for authentication of signature. | CONSULAR SERVICE, UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, December 29, 1903. I, William TWenry Bishop, consul of the United States at Genoa, Italy, do hereby certify that the signature of the Marchese Garroni, prefect of the proy- ince of Genoa, at the foot of the paper hereto annexed, is his true and genuine sigiature, made and acknowledged in my presence, and that the said Marchese Garroni is personally known to me. In witness whereuf I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seal of the PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. XeXGValil consulate at Genoa, Italy. the day and year next above written, and of the Independence of the United States the one hundred and twenty-eighth. [ SEAL. ] \ WILLIAM HENRY BISHOP, a Consul of the United States. {Translation of the prefect’s decree. | RoyYAL PREFECTURE OF GENOA. The prefect of the province, upon the demand of Mr. Alexander Graham Bell, bearing in mind the certificate of illness and the extract from the certificate of death relevant, as also the receipt No. 786/10641 delivered by the fiscal register of Genoa, on this date, for the required payment of the tax for a governmental permit to the amount of 560 lire. Bearing in mind the law concerning the care of hygiene and the public health of December 22, 1888, No. 5849, series 3, and the regulation of mortuary affairs of July 25, 1892; Decrees that there is authorized, subject to the observance of the existing sanitary requirements, the transportation of the remains of James Smithson, deceased of a malady not contagious, from Genoa to Washington (United States of America). Genoa, December 29, 1903. ; The prefect, N. GARRONIT. APPENDIX C.—Copy of u certificate made by the British consul-general at Genoa, at the request of the municipal bureau of hygiene, stating that no objection existed on the part of the British consulate-general to the removal of the remains of James Smithson. [ Translation. | CONSULATE-GENERAL OF GREAT BRITAIN, Genoa, December 30, 1908. There is not known on the part of this royal consulate-general any reason why the representatives of the late Mr. Smithson, deceased in the year 1829, should not remove his body from the cemetery of San Benigno, which has been expropriated, [ SEAL. ] ; WILLIAM KEENE, Consul-General. APPENDIX I).—Certificate of the acting mayor of Genoa that all the requirements of the existing regulations on mortuary matters had been complied with. [Form for authentication of signature. ] CONSULAR SERVICE, UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, Genod, Italy, January 5, 1904. I, William Henry Bishop, consul of the United States at Genoa, Italy, do hereby certify that the signature of Bernabo Brea, acting mayor at Genoa, Italy, at the foot of the paper hereto annexed, is his true and genuine signature, made and acknowledge in my presence, and that the said Bernabo Brea is personally known to me. In witness whereof I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seal of the consulate at Genoa, Italy, the day and year next above written, and of the Independence of the United States the one hundred and twenty-eighth. [ SEAL. | WitttAamM Hrnry BIsHop, Consul of the United States. [Translation of the mayor's certificate. ] City HALL oF GENOA, OFFICE OF HYGIENE. The mayor certifies that the body of James Smithson has been inclosed in two coffins, the one of zine and the other of strong wood, and that there have been observed throughout all the requirements of the existing regulations on mor- tuary matters, articles 31, 32, 33. Genoa, January 4, 1904. For the mayor: BERNABO Brea, The Assistant. XXVIII PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. APPENDIX EH. Final certificate of the American consul given on board the steamer Princess Trene as she was about to sail for New York. CONSULAR SERVICE, UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, Genoa, Italy. I, William Henry Bishop, United States consul at Genoa, Italy, hereby certify that on December 31, 1905, in my presence and in that of Dr. Alexander Graham Bell and six other credible witnesses whose names are of record, the mortal remains of James Smithson were exhumed from the English cemetery on the heights of San Benigno, at Genoa, where they had reposed since his burial in the year 1829, and that they were placed, securely sealed, and under guard in the mortuary chapel of the said cemetery; and that, on January 2, 1904, they were delivered, accompanied by Dr. Graham Bell and myself, on board the steamer Princess Irene, of the North German Lloyd Steamship Company, to be conveyed to Washington, D. C., United States of America, by Dr. Alexander Graham Bell, who had been especially commissioned by the Smithsonian Institution, of Wash- ington, to come to Genoa for that purpose. Given on board the steamer Princess Jrene, about to sail for New York, this 7th day of January, 1904. [ SEAL. | WiLturamM Henry BrIsHop, United States Consul at Genoa, Italy. APPENDIX F'.—Letter from Lieut. Commander J. H. Gibbons, U. S. Navy, in command of the U. S. S. Dolphin, delivered on board the steamer Princess Irene, notifying your conmittee of the action of the Navy Department in detailing the U. S. S. Dolphin to convey the remains of James Smithson from New York to Washington. U. S. S. DorrHin, New York, N. Y.. January 20, 1904. Sir: 1. I have the honor to inform you that the Navy Department has ordered the Dolphin to escort the Princess Irene to her pier at Hoboken, after which she is to receive the remains of the late James Smithson. 2. The commandant of the navy-yard, New York, will send a tug alongside the Princess Irene after she arrives at her pier, and has made the necessary arrangements with the health and custom authorities so that there will be no delay in-transferring the remains to the Dolphin. 3. The Dolphin will anchor off the Battery and remain there until early day- light of the next day after the remains have been received on board when she will sail for Washington, D. C. In case you wish to accompany the remains to Washington I am authorized to offer vou a passage on the Dolphin. It was the intention of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, Professor Langley, to write to you in regard to this matter, so that you would receive the letter off quarantine. 4. In case there are to be any passengers for the trip to Washington it is requested that they be on board by midnight of the day on which the steamer arrives. This ship can be communicated with by telegraph or telephone by addressing the dock department office, pier 1, North River, at the Battery, where there is a comfortable boat landing. A steam Jauneh will be at this landing at intervals during the day and night, the last trip leaving the ship at 11.80 p. m. Very respectfully, J. H. Grrnons, Lieutenant-Commander, U. S. Navy, Commanding. Prof. A. GRAHAM BELL, Steamship Princess Trene, APPENDIX G.—Remarks of Alerander Graham Bell at the Smithsonian Insti- tution January 25, 1904, in handing over the remains of James Smithsov to Senator Prye as the representative of the Board of Regents, together with the reply of Senator I’rye. REMARKS OF A. G. BELL. Mr. SENATOR: I have the honor of handing over to the Smithsonian Insti- tution the mortal remains of its founder, James Smithson, fellow of the Royal Society of London, England, who died in Genoa, Italy, on the 26th of June, 1829. PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. XXIX For nearly seventy-five years the body of Smithson has lain in an almost forgotten grave in the picturesque little British cemetery on the heights of San Benigno, in Genoa. City imprévements have now rendered necessary the expro- priation of the cemetery and ‘the removal of the remains; and at the last meet- ing of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution I was appointed a committee to arrange for the transfer of the body of Smithson to the United States. Upon my arrival in Genoa - was afforded every possible facility for the accomplishment of my mission by the provincial and municipal authorities, by His British Majesty’s consul-general (Mr. Keene), and by the committee of the British Burial Ground Fund Association, in which is vested the ownership of the cemetery, as well as by our own consul, Mr. William Henry Bishop, to whom I am indebted for invaluable assistance. On the 31st of December, 1903, the tomb of Smithson was opened in my presence as the representative of the Smitbsonian Institution, and in the presence of the American consul, Mr. Bishop, and six other witnesses. The remains of James Smithson were reverently raised from the grave and placed in a metallic casket, over which the consul of the United States cast the Ameri- ean flag, while the witnesses stood around with uncovered heads. The casket was left in the mortuary chapel of the cemetery—securely sealed and under guard—until the 2d day of January, 1904, when it was placed in a coffin of strong wood, as required by Italian law, and was then removed to the North German Lloyd steamship Princess Irene, accompanied by the American consul and myself. The steamer Jeft Genoa on the 7th of January; and upon arrival in the United States the remains of James Smithson were received with national honors by direction of the President and of the Secretary of the Navy and the Secretary of War. The remains were transported to Washington on the U. S. dispatch boat Dolphin, and have been escorted to the Smithsonian Institution by United States cavalry. And now, Mr. Senator, my mission is ended, and I deliver into your hands, as the representative of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Tnstitution, the remains of this great benefactor of the United States. REMARKS OF SENATOR FRYE. Sir: The Smithsonian Institution receives with profound gratitude the remains of its distinguished founder. Providence, every now and then, seems to place in the world a man and inspires him with a purpose to elevate his fellow-men. Such a man was Mr. Smithson, the founder of this Institution. The spirit, sir, which prompted you to such earnest endeayor, resulting as it did in taking these remains from their resting place in a country foreign to him and foreign to us, and bringing them here, where for so many years we have enjoyed the rich fruits of his splendid benefaction, your countrymen will appreciate. His grave here will be an incentive to earnest, faithful, wise, and discreet endeavor to carry out his lofty purposes, and, sir, it will be to our people a sacred spot while the Republic endures. APPENDIX H.—WReport of Mr. Gilbert H. Grosvenor, M. A., concerning the cor- respondence which resulted in the cooperation of the United States Govern- ment in transporting the remains of James Smithson from New York to the Smithsonian Institution in Washington, D.C. Hursarp MrMortIaAL HALL, Washington, D. C., January 23, 1904. Dear Mr. BELL: I beg to submit the following report on arrangements for the reception of James Smithson. On January 7 I received the following cable- gram from you: * GENOA, January 7, 1904. ** GILBERT GROSVENOR, “Memorial Building, Sirteenth and M, Washington, D. C. “We bring Smithson’s remains steamship Princess Irene, touching Naples and Gibraltar. See Henderson, Hitt, Langley about formalities of landing and transfer to Washington. “GRAHAM BELL.” ‘ XXX PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. I thereupon consulted with Mr. Langley who assured me that all formalities were being arranged so that the remains might be admitted into this country without delay. On Sunday, January 10, I cabled to you at Gibraltar as tollows: “ BELL, Princess Irene, Gibraltar. * Congratulations. Formalities arranged. “ GILBERT GROSVENOR.” On Monday, January 11, I received the following cablegram from you: * GIBRALTAR, January 11, 1904. “ GILBERT GROSVENOR, Washington, D. C. “ Hope Smithson’s remains will be received with as much honor as those of John Howard Payne. Notify me at quarantine what to expect. “GRAHAM BELL.” Upon receipt of this message I called upon Dr. S. P. Langley and expressed your desire that suitable honors be rendered James Smithson upon the arrival of the remains in this country. I then addressed the following letter to the President of the United States, Hon. Theodore Roosevelt : “ HueBparp MEMORIAL HALL, “Washington, D. C., January 11, 1904. “Sir: The remains of James Smithson, the founder of. the Smithsonian Insti- tution, are now being brought to the United States by Dr. Alexander Graham Bell, one of the Regents of the Institution. The remains left Gibraltar this morning on the steamer Princess Jrene, and are due in New York about the 20th instant. Dr. Graham Bell has cabled me urging that. the remains be received with as much honor as those of John Howard Payne. It would seem most appropriate that a Government vessel, a ship of war, a revenue cutter, or even a tug, be detailed to meet the Princess Irene when she enters the harbor of New York and receive Smithson’s remains. This official tribute from the American nation seems due a man who bequeathed his entire fortune to a people whom he had never seen. As the time is urgent I take the liberty of addressing you directly, rather than through official channels. I would respectfully beg, in case your honor does not deem it fitting to order detailed a vessel to welcome Smithson in the harbor of New York, that I be so informed at once, in order that private plans for paying honor to this illustrious benefactor may then be carried out. “T beg to remain, most respectfully, “ GILBERT TH. GROSVENOR. * Hon. THEODORE ROOSEVELT, * President of the United States.” On Tuesday, January 12, I received word from the Secretary of the Navy that my request for a war ship had been approved by the President, and I was asked to send a formal application for the detail of the Dolphin. I thereupon for- warded the following application : “ JANUARY 12, 1904. “Sir: Pursuant to the request from the Secretary of the Navy, I beg herewith formally and respectfully to petition that the Dolphin be detailed to receive the remains of James Smithson, the founder of the Smithsonian Institution, in New York Harbor and convey them to Washington. I beg to remain, “Most respectfully, * GILBERT H. GROSVENOR. “Tion. THEODORE ROOSEVELT, “President of the United States, Washington.” The Dolphin was thereupon detailed and ordered to New York. On January 18 I called upon the Chief of Staff, Lieut. Gen. Adna R. Chaffee, and requested a military escort to receive the remains of James Smithson when they reached this city, and on January 19 forwarded the following formal application : “ JANUARY 18, 1904. “Sir: The remains of James Smithson, the founder of the Smithsonian Institu- tion, will reach Washington on Friday or Saturday of this week, The remains PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. XX XI are to be brought from New York on the Dolphin, which was especially detailed by the Secretary of the Navy _to proceed to New York. receive them from the Princess Irene, when the latter ship arrived from Genoa, and bring them to Washington. When the Dolphin reaches this city the remains will be conveyed without ceremony to Oak Hill Cemetery, where they will be deposited until action is taken as to their final disposition. It would seem most appropriate that an escort of 50 or 100 cavalrymen be detailed to accompany the remains from the dock to the cemetery. I have the honor to respectfully request, therefore, that an escort be detailed for this purpose. For your information I heg to inclose a copy of the letter addressed to the President, which was approved by him and led to the detail of the Dolphin. “Very respectfully, “ GILBERT TH. GROSVENOR. “Lieut. Gen. ADNA R. CHAFFEE, U. S. Army. “War Department, Washington, D.C.” On January 20 the following letter was received from General Chaffee, stat- ing that the military escort had been detailed : “ JANUARY 19, 1904. “Sir: I have just received your note of January 19, requesting an escort of cavalry for the remains of Mr. James Smithson, the founder of the Smith- sonian Institution, which are to arrive, as you say, on Friday or Saturday of this week on the Dolphin. JI lave instructed the commanding officer of Fort Myer to hold in readiness an escort of 50 men, properly officered, and an artillery caisson to convey the remains. In order to give further direction in this matter to avoid delay and to insure promptness, it will be necessary for you to advise me of the time and place the escort should be directed to report to receive the remains. Will you please make certain that I am informed of this matter at least twelve hours in advance? “Very respectfully, ADNA R. CHAFFEE, “ Lieutenant-General, Chief of Staff. “Mr. Ginpert H. GROSVENOR, “Editor National Geographic Magazine, “Hubbard Memorial Hall, Sixteenth and MW streets, 7 “Washington, D. C2? For your information, I sent you January 19, care of the quarantine officer, the following telegram : “Dr. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, “Passenger on Board Steamship Princess Irene, “Arriving New York January 20: Dolphin will meet [rene, fire salutes, and accompany to dock. The Dolphin will receive Smithson and carry to Washington. You can come by Dolphin or not. You are reelected Regent. Langley and Daisy meet you at dock. Elsie and I sorry we can not. * GILBERT H. GROSVENOR.” And on January 20 a second message, as follows: “Dr. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, “Passenger on Board Steamship Princess Trene, “Arriving Neav York January 20: “ave arranged military escort and caisson meet Smithson on arrival here. ** GILBERT H. GROSVENOR.” Letters to General Chaffee and Admiral Taylor follow : ~*~ JANUARY 22, 1904. “Sir: I beg to acknowledge with thanks your courteous favor of the 19th instant. Admiral Taylor, Chief of the Bureau of Navigation, informs me that he has already sent you word that James Smithson will leave the navy-yard Monday morning, January 25, at 10 o’clock. With much appreciation of your courtesy in this matter, I beg to remain, “Very respectfully, * GILBERT H. GROSVENOR, “Lieut. Gen. ADNA R. CHAFFEE, U. S. Army, “War Department, Washington, D.C.” XXXII PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. ** JANUARY 22, 1904. “Sir: L wish to thank you most cordially for your courtesy in the matter of the marine guard for James Smithson, the founder of the Smithsonian Institution. “ Yours, very respectfully, “GILBERT H. GROSVENOR. “ Rear-Admiral H. C. Taytor, U. S. Navy, “Chief of Bureau of Navigation, Navy Department, Washington, D.C.” The following letters from Admiral Taylor give the details of the arrange- ments at the navy-yard : * JANUARY 22, 1904. “Sir: I have the honor to inform you that instructions have been sent to the commandant of the navy-yard, Washington, to arrange for the debarkation of the remains of the late James Smithson, esq., from the U. S. S. Dolphin, about 9.30 o’clock, Monday morning, the 25th instant, and for their escort, with ceremony, from alongside the ship to the navy-yard gate, where they will be transferred to the custody of an escort of army troops. A copy of the said instructions is inclosed. “Very respectfully, JEG (One db aor “Aeting Secretary. “The PRESIDENT, NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY, “ Wushington, D. C.” “Navy DEPARTMENT, “Washington, D. C., January 22, 1904. “Sir: You will please give the necessary instructions for the remains of the late James Smithson, esq., to be landed from the U. 8. 8S. Dolphin, about 9.30 o'clock, Monday morning, the 25th instant, and escorted with ceremony to the navy-yard gate, where, punctually at 10 o’clock, the remains will be delivered to the escort of army troops which will be in waiting outside the gate. “As large a force of marines as may be available will be paraded as an escort, the Commandant of the Marine Corps having been directed to send a detach- ment and the Marine Band to report to you for this purpose. The customary detail of naval enlisted men as body bearers will be made, these to accompany the remains until the transfer to the army escert has been effected. “The Department desires as many officers of the station as may be spared from their duties to attend the ceremony. Uniform for officers of the Navy will be ‘ Dress,’ with or without overcoats, at your discretion. The Smithsonian Institution and the National Geographical Society have been notified of these instructions, and you may expect their representatives to be in attendance from the beginning of the ceremony. “When the army escort moves off with the remains, the part taken by the Navy in the ceremony will terminate. : “Very respectfully, EC RAY GOR: “Acting Secretary, “The COMMANDANT OF THE NAvy-YARD, “ Washington, D. C.” Very truly, yours, GILBERT TH. GROSVENOR. Dr. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, Board of Regents, Smithsonian Jnstitution, Committee on the transfer of the remains of James Smithson to the United States. APPENDIX I.—Acknowledgment of Government courtesies made by your com- mittee to the President of the United States and to the Secretary of the Navy and Secretary of War. New York, January 21, 1904. Mr. Presmipent: I have the honor to announce the safe arrival in the United States of the remains of James Smithson, founder of the Smithsonian Institu- tion, by steamer Princess Irene, and to thank you for detailing the Dolphin to convey the remains to Washington. GRAHAM BELL, Regent in Charge of Remains. The PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES, White House, Washington, D.C. aS PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. XX XIIT 13381 CONNECTICUT AVENUE, ; Washington, D. C., January 25, 1904. My Dear Sir: At the last meeting of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution I was appointed.a committee charged with the duty of bringing to the Institution the body of its-distinguished founder, James Smithson. As such committee allow me to express my deep indebtedness to you for the assistance rendered by the Navy of the United States in transporting the remains from New York to Washington and for the assistance rendered by the Army in completing the transportation to the Smithsonian Institution. Yours, respectfully, ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, Regent of the Smithsonian Institution. The PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES, White House. 1331 CONNECTICUT AVENUE, Washington, D. C., January 25, 1904. My Dear Sir: I beg to inclose for your information a copy of a note I have addressed to the President of the United States expressing my sincere appre- ciation of the assistance rendered by the Navy in transporting the remains of the founder of the Smithsonian Institution from New York to the nayvy-yard in Washington, D. C. Yours, respectfully, ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, Regent of the Smithsonian Institution. The SECRETARY OF THE NAVY, Navy Department. 1331 CONNECTICUT AVENUE, Washington, D. C., January 25, 1904. My Dear Sir: I beg to inclose for your information a copy of a note I have addressed to the President of the United States expressing my sincere appre- ciation of the assistance rendered by the Army in transporting to the Smith- sonian Institution the body of its founder, James Smithson. Yours, respectfully, ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, Regent of the Sinithsonian Institution. The SECRETARY OF WAR, War Department. APPENDIX J.—Statement of expenses incurred in the removal of the remains of James Smithson to the United States (supported by vouchers, which have been handed to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution). Lire. ORCA CIOMRUAN \ os Bi oe Ce ee By eles laspah 9, by a pped y EE 360. 00 (OMCLeTRa Gnesi Oy ene eal ie eS ee Leg. CICENI en ren) eae ee sr esl laite ta) MaAsonessoulll ==) ses = ee WANE Ne ee ee te Sr oy ee ee <= ALTE (00) Gardener’s bill, with his assistants____---____ eee ee ee ae ee FG Ou) Freight to New York from cemetery—_--—- Bee 2s eae, SN ee NS es _ 430. 00 Ota Se eee a a a a See UIST 6 tet) sm 1904——1i1 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION For rHe YEAR Enpine JUNE 30, 1904. To the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution: Your executive committee respectfully submits the following report in relation to the funds of the Institution, the appropriations by Con- gress, and the receipts and expenditures for the Smithsonian Institu- tion, the U. S. National Museum, the International Exchanges, the Bureau of Ethnology, the National Zoological Park, and the Astro- physical Observatory for the year ending June 30, 1904, and balances of former years: SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. Condition of the fund July 1, 1904. The amount of the bequest of James Smithson deposited in the Treasury of the United States, according to act of Congress of Au- gust 16, 1846, was $515,169. To this was added, by authority of Con- gress, February 8, 1867, the residuary legacy of Smithson, savings from income and other sources, to the amount of $134.83 To this also have been added a bequest from James Hamilton, of Pennsylvania, of $1,000; a bequest of Dr. Simeon Habel, of New York, of $500; the proceeds of the sale of Virginia bonds, $51,500; a gift from Thomas G. Hodgkins, of New York, of $200,000 and $8,000, being a portion of the residuary legacy of Thomas G. Hodgkins, and $1,000, the accumulated interest on the Hamilton bequest, savings from income, $25,000, making in all, as the permanent fund, $937,000. The Institution also holds the additional sum of $42,000, received upon the death of Thomas G. Hodgkins, in registered West Shore Railroad 4 per cent bonds, which were, by order of this committee, under date of May 18, 1894, placed in the hands of the Secretary of the Institution, to be held by him subject to the conditions of said order. . XXXV XXXVI REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Statement of receipts and expenditures from July 1, 1903, to June 30, 1904. RECEIPTS. Gashvnonvhandsduly a. 19032222252 eee $55, 507. 67 Gauss Coyon sHphael AhvUhyeal, Ih OR ye Ss 827, 964. 17 Interest on fund January 1, 1904__________ 28, 110. 00 —- 56, O74. 17 Interest to January 1, 1904, on West Shore bonds______ 1, 680. 00 $1138, 261. 84 ae fLOMASAleSVOLSPUpLICALIONS Ss = eee eee eee Sin}, aif USO Tea Voal Isa aaaKSINUNS, eeNelMT, Cie ee 10, 328. 02 10, 681. 39 Total: PECCU ES Ss ae we Se ee eee ee eee 123, 943, 23 EXPENDITURES. Buildings: Repairs, care, and improvements_______ $4, 128. 78 IM ONEMIYRUNREY Bal iis a — 467. 78 —- $4, 596. 51 General expenses : Postagerandsteleoran en Et 230. 7 Stationery eee 42e== Soe ee eee 584. 97 IncidentalsmGhuel sas Sete.) en 3, (27. 45 Library (books, sere tC) ees 4, 250. 84 SOC Sei se volte ae eee ee 2S oe Ash Slow to) Gallery 30h ante ee eee gh ies are Apeu eet 84. 40 Mectings2 = 2822s =e 2 = ee ee ee 569. 75 —— 35, 832. 00 Publications and researches : Snnithsoniamescontribuons=a==——— =e 2, 102. 85 Miscellaneous collections ___________-- , 4, 940. 74: IRGDOLtS. -22 S= 22 ees eee 1, 433. 13 Speciale nublicatiOn sm = = ee 201. 70 Explorations 22226 see eee 2, 176. 00 Researches. st ee eae 5, 486. 71 AD PALAIS! 2.22 ee ee 182. 95 HSloyekolkiocy: sinbngle. 2 ee ee 12, 625. 89 Teall a TEC Koer er ebbaWOl — e 1, 925. 50 ——___——— 29 075. 47 literary and: scientific exchanses= === === sa === 7, 790. 92 17, 294. 90 Balance nexpended) Inner sO. 190522 ee 46, 648. 3a aJTn addition-to the above $26,883.85, paid for salaries under general expenses, $10,790.18 were paid for services, viz: $3,928.94 charged to building account, 8179.2 50 to furniture and fixtures account, $2,804.21 to researches account, $2,713.44 to library account, $164.18 to reports account, and $999.96 to Hodgkins fund account. REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. XXXVII The cash received from the sale of publications, from repayments, Oo e ’ . . . . freights, and other sources is to be credited to the items of expendi- ture as follows: t 4 SIMTEHSONTATMMCOMUCIDUtIONS) seep een ee $44. 77 Miscellaneous= collections === 2 a ee 129456 VERS) OKO ELS Seg es Je tn Pen een 14S O04 ee SS ay BEC IAM POS) eee een ee a a a Te Mor ee Ol Sure MIN GI GC miei See nee ee a ee ee Peitele tere fee arenes 409. 69 TB. OM CON EST ICG) ANSI Ea ee ee eee Cae ee Se 200. 00 ee SORES SS The net expenditures of the Institution for the year ending June 30, 1904, were therefore $66,613.51, or $10,681.39 less than the gross expenditures, $77,294.90, as above stated. All moneys received by the Smithsonian Institution from interest, sales, refunding of moneys temporarily advanced, or otherwise, are deposited with the Treasurer of the United States to the credit of the Secretary of the Institution, and all payments are made by his checks on the Treasurer of the United States. Your committee also presents the following statements in regard to appropriations and expenditures for objects intrusted by Congress to the care of the Smithsonian Institution : Detailed statement of disbursements from appropriations committed by Congress to the care of the Smithsonian Institution for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1904, and from balances of former years. INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, 1904. RECEIPTS, Appropriated by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1904, “for expenses of the system of international exchanges between the United States and foreign countries under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employees and the purchase of necessary books and pe- TOKOKGNKERUIS) ? (Sb toveh ay ial ele, AVEO oy algl0R3)) 2 $26, 000. 00 DISBURSEMENTS. [From July 1, 1903, to June 30, 1904.] Salaries or compensation : HeACtINSP EM ACOE wl yom ONUMS, a tysbs2 es te eee £2, 700. 00 iL Goviae Cheeks AZ, mond Mey, Ble bliss she 2, 199. 96 IL Cleinlcs 12) Toavouota Sere halla) ee ee 1, SOO. 00 Relenkwel emo neh St raltar sill me eae oe LS OOHOO i lik, sh evermore fae HGH Se 1, 283. 26 ielerle 2 months at p02 sss ay ee amare 960. 00 NG ele kel SMONENS lt, Gp ee eee 660. 00 1 stenographer, 12 months, at $100______ eo eh OOOO , XXXVIII REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Salaries or compensation—Continued. ies opne eres ial aavoyMO INS, Guy Stay Se $605. CO Votan, {lal vervovmucleys, Aug ARO 660. 00 It isaac, SO) icaomuast, Gue S640) 360. OO MP TTTESSE mee yal am O arte eli tec (ee ee 360. 00 HP NESSEME SI al Zy ran ONT Sey reas ey 300. 00 DS eey ae Gy VOU) OVE AYS}4 SIE, ayy ee eT Se a = 450. 00 IL Xa o (oy OKOVONHU, lin Nya ee ee SS ee 90. 00 i acting agent. 2 months, at $91-663 225 183. 33 Totalesalaries OR COMMEeNS Ait Onsen ae 15, 311. 55 General expenses : BOOKS) Ae See ee ee ee a ee $81. 11 2OX CSV eee a me Rae Paes Bar se 1, P2Y (CO) Mreicht) 226 = ee Se Set Oe ere 5, GAS. 97 Postage: 224.4 2 2S 2 eee eee 404, 00 Supplies.) =22225 6 ee eee 108. 91 Stationery s ===] 3225s eee ee 548. 51 8, 013. 50 INopmale Chis oyun S52 eae eee ee ee A By OS BalancessuilyedeWO041es222 > = ee 2 674. 95 INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, 1903. Balanceviillyadle L903 asi pers G1) Or eee ee $i, 822. 14 Salaries or compensation : vareene @ inom, eye Wilsjc 2 ee $90. 00 Motale Salaries Or COMpensaltl OMe a= == $90. OO General expenses : SORES ae eee eS SR se EE ee Aree eae 335. 44 INGE Loh See oe ee ee ee 1, 294. 22 Stationery. 2. 220s 25 5) 2 he a ae eee ~~ T2528 Supplies 25222 ts eee ae eee ee 76 1, 702. 70 MO CAL GSD UES OT CTS ee ee a a ee ee 1, 792: 70 salance July; 190425222 ee eo eee ee ee ees 29, 44 INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, 1902. Balance Iulive 1 LOS ase Wer sas er Cy Ole ese eee $0. 88 Balance carried, under provisions of Revised Statutes, section 8090, by the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 50, 1904. AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, 1904. RECEIPTS. Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 50, 1904, “for continuing ethnological researches among the American In- dians, under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, includ- ing salaries or compensation of all necessary employees, and the REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. XX XIX purchase of necessary books and periodicals, $40,000, of which sum not exceeding $1,500 may be used for rent of building” (sundry Civallmalcta, Mireles lO Ooi i= sere ee ee ee $40, 000. 00 DISBURSEMENTS. Salaries or compensation : 1 chief of bureau, 4 months, at $375; S months, at ESBS ae en pe aM a ae ee aig A acne Ar ee er $4, 166. 64 methnolosist ini charce:, 1 month, at S3ae.c0-— = SoonoO IFethmolosist Oo mmonths: ates200 222 = = 1, SOO. 00 1 ethnologist, 3 months, rat $166.67; S months, at $200_ 2, 100. 01 1 ethnologist, 4 months. at $166.67; 8 months, at $125_ 1, 666. 68 IFethnNOlOsist i months alte pilsossoeee eee ee 1, 599: 96 imechnolocist SomMonths: ait pila ee ee ee ee 1, 000. 00 imethNoOlOoISt a Months ait plone ee ee eee 1, 500. 00 1 assistant ethnologist, 4 months, at $75; 4 months, TUL sll OA) Bee eae Br wh Sie etn reefer. eat renee Os od TOO. 00 1 ethnologic¢ assistant, 8 months, at $100_~--__ ines 300. 00 TL ASSN. eimvoratcive. Ae Sle 750. OO il SHUR WEA aot lie SOW ee 2, 000. O4 IL Cxobiioy2, 12> mMVoMONEG wy SHON 2 1, 200. 00 irassistant editor, Guinonths 2 days; at sl002-=-2 === GOG. 45 IL ASSStouOLE ebiiok, sy alas, Besse — 2 ee 195. 00 il kek, & maven, Bye Ase oe a 375. 00 i Clea 2 amyO NOS, Ale SSalO ee SS ee 1, 200. 00 1 clerk, 3 months 9 days, at $100; 8 months, at $90___ 1, 049.35 Il. levelkes TI) MONON BUSS ee SIO Oe a ee 1, 200. 00 1 @l@ak, TIP imo mniney ane Sia ee ee ee 900. OO 1 stenographer and typewriter, 84 days, at G60_____ ~~ 67. 44 1 stenographer and typewriter, 25 months 14 days, at SG (() i ereereeee steeper) ape 3 yd ee ce ae se hE eer 147. 96 1 stenographer, 14 months 14 days, at $50__________ re 98. 33 1 typewriter, 53 months 16 days, at $50__—__--__-= 301. 14 iL SiEvikexal eWoyoyeere, 1 souvovonl hse Ge XO O)E = ee 720. 00 1 messenger, 7 months 3 days, at $50___________ Na Soo salht METMNESSEMS Tes yy NO Taal NS Seeley) ) ees ea were 250. 0O ieimessencer, 4 inonths 11 days! an spo = == 240. 86 1 laborer. 4 months, at $60; 2 months 8 days, at $50__ 352. 90 1 Jevoyonkeres, 112} soavoyarlos, Bub ay D540. OO MoOtUsecAlaAries Ol) COMPeNSAlONe == === == == ss ones 27, 716. 26 General expenses : BOOkCe== ae SEA AY fe SS, mee erry Ee $197. 93 Drinwines and wllwiStraiilOns=s= === == ss a 59. 20 Sei Cite ee eee ee ee ee 155. 04 Irene ie AIGR Invenio = 1SG6. G4 GING. see eee sae See eee 134. $3 PUENTE UES CTI epee ee ee ee 1, S886. 36 NuScellAaneCOUS! 22 2-) 22-22 b= ae Pee Bee We) Postage, telegraph, and telephone__-___-___ A318 Pipa cries Cunyel Yoptiaye inv Se SS aye ay: Rent pee ae. ae ee Se eee > 1, 375. 00 XL REPORT General expenses—Continued. Special" services. =.=) 22 eee Specimens Stationery Supplies Travel and field expenses_ -_-. OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Dix =) $719. QOeaalal 226. 73 45. 43 > 9D » oe DOO. at} —-——— $10, 376. 80 Total) ‘disbursemyentise SS oe Pes ee aa eee ees ee $38, 093. 06 Bal ar Ce Url sys UG A a a ee eee eee ae 1, 906. 94 AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, 1903 lex naversy dhelbyeals 1UGIORy, cals) josie even Wey MONe Se $3, 489. 99 DISBURSEMENTS. General expenses : Books-and-binding==24 22-2225 eS ee ee $501. 56 OVE aunyeeeeMaVSl NWR NOKOMIS 65. 00 Breighteandshawlines te = eee eee 239. OT UPI: Se ee ee ee ee ee 21. 50 iG hti e S ea ee ee ee ene ee ee ae 93. 18 Miscellaneoust== 83s oe eee 39) 13 Postage, telegraph, and telephone____________--=-___ Death Publica tlons t= see ee ee ee ee eee 270. OF Rent ies ee 2 el pees eee ee 125. 00 SpeciallsenyiGes=ee es aan ee eee a a ad ep 52. 50 Stationery se = See oe ee ee ee pe 493. 98 Supplies! 2284. == eet ee ee ee eee 88. 11 Abiehia lb eharslineyol esq nonses_ 2 Be 975. 65 Totals disbursements: =22 2 Bee Se ee ae ee ee eee 2, 800. 12 Balance July 1, 1904 LOU ST. AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, 1902. Balance. July 1;°1903, as per last report —__---—- S2205 07 DISBURSEMENTS. General expenses : Books —__ Freight Miscellaneous) 2 =a eee Supplies Stationery ______ Travel —___ Total: disbursements—_ Balance 213. 93 6. S4 Balance carried, under provisions of Revised Statutes, section 5090, by the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 30, 1904. REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. KT NATIONAL MUSEUM—PRESERVATION OF COLLECTIONS, 1904. i a RECEIPTS. = 2? Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1904, “for continuing the preservation, exhibition, and increase of the collections from surveying and exploring expeditions of the Goy- ernment, and from other sources, including salaries or compensa- tion of all necessary employees, $180,000, of which sum $5,500 may be used for necessary drawings and illustrations for publications of the National Museuin and all other necessary incidental ex- DSRS (Qutarelee Chall Sees WIR RO 335 Il} ee $180, 000. 00 EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1903, to June 30, 1904.] Salaries! or compensation ——--__=---_- = = $160, 730. 36 Speci aliesenvices==s0 5 sas ee eee 1 6085-25 Motalesalariessand: SOEViGeSe eee ee $162, 338. 61 Miscellaneous : SUD DIGS 2 ss wa aie ee ee eee 5, 660. 11 GA OLE IE; wee ee ee es ae 1, 440. 31 Mrershtrand) Cartages == 2 sss See 1, 626. 39 AURA CNG Tee ee 1, 740. 62 Drawings and illustrations_____-___ __ 1, 053.97 Motalesmiscellane ous ea es ee eee 11, 521. 40 Motaleexpenditune tO; MuUMNen Os OO4e ee ee ee 173, 860. O1 Balance July 1, 1904, to meet outstanding liabilities _____-__ 6, 189. 99 Analysis of expenditures for salaries or compensation. [July 1,-1903, to June 20, 1904.] Scientific staff : IFASSIStamMG Secretary. La MNonthS) esos oes a = $3, 099. 96 il Thyenvalcuneen roves I) innvanraneutsy cao seAg MLA = ee 3, 499. 92 HEA CUAL OA Le AI OMNES sayy p= Ol Oe ee ee ee 3, 499. 92 ,i head curator, 11 months 26 days, at $291.66________ 3, 452. 88 Ls GubeRtone AZ H aA SL ele oO ey a a 1, 200. 00 TL omy RaONES ZA Tahvo vO HE DSH ee RIN Sex O Oa eS Cl ee ee A OOFOO SC CunALOl el, mMOMtnNS ip OO Les = eee = eee 200800 IMGURALO ee IMOMmNS omc aye tas 0 Olam ee eee 2, 320. 00 1 curator, acting, 2 months 15 days, at $200_____- es 00, OO iL Chie Oe RIM uNE, TA Moraes wu Gyo 0 1, SOO. BO 1 curator, assistant 12 months, at Sib02- 222-222 1 800.00 , IRCUrATOM ASSIStanmt Ll) IMOnthsS ato s = =o 1, 800. 00 IL Quiros ASSialiNE, Ts TonVorhINS: BRE aN Se 1, S60. 00 INCHEATOLM ASSIStANE. 12 mMoOnehS, sat pl oOL = = eee se 1, SOO. 0O IMCUE MLO ASSISC Al om ON GIS; mel teenie) ee yee ee 1, 800. 00 CUP ALOLN AUSSISUAMt. U2 mMONGlIS mais pili2ey eee = = eee 1, 500. 00 1 curator, assistant, 12 months, at $133.53______ Sess, US SLES imeuraAtor assistant. 12 months, at SllloGG 2222 =. | 1, 399. 92 IRGUCATOMwASSiStant,, 12 months ab SlilG:66 _2 = = | 1, 399; 92 1 curator, second assistant, 12 months, at $100______ 1, 200. 00 XLII Scientific staff—Continued. REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. 1 curator, assistant, 9 months 15 days, at $133.383____ $1, 266. 63 1 curator, assistant, 3 months, at: $1666 5222222 =es= 1 curator, assistant, 2 months 15 days, at $133.33, CaS Oe LOL MONthSM Sra ays. altro OON Go) === iearded22months.vhe lOO {22— = =e eee IP EOL Tbovovaid okey Hou) eS ee Se Saas Heid wl QsmnonbiSsaitth So aoe Ces INOMENSateh ie ee 2 ead D2cmMOnNGhS SG OOS ee {Vaid 6G months, at-$452—. 222.0 eee Til! ID tino, An Ae Bi ee ee ea I RMGL WH TOWNE, Ain ciswiew = a ee ee Tk aUGl, 2 mao wings Ws Claas, Aw NW 22. Sani de sale2 anv ounGlyS raniterst OO eee ee ee ee ee aid; 12smon chs yang 0 =e Jb Binal ey ranvonannnsy HE Clanysh Ge Mepieeia = ae 1 aid, 9 months 15 days, at $100 dead Tem ont sates) ee ere oe ee eee aL anil, Dinero; tay Gays, ae Sl) ce Ieassistanity lemony 2m alaivisaect tay) ee ee ee IPAS SSE Tl sraONANEIN, GE SAAN = IARI, BF moO, Mie OO. = = =s = Tl GuiStiovabiabay, 1 spavovayelay 110) Glas ue spills Preparators : Tl joynvanrayacayaac, IZ) inoOmWis, Ale Gulyes—— === = ik mnodelkee, I imornmlnes. pur OL. a 2 i COONS, TH imopoudals, Ble AAON0) = jolene souKoNUMKere, BE wAKONMN OL Bln Gysk0 [OMA OVEAIKONE, 3) LUNOMDOSE EG Oe preparator, 10 months 9 days, at $60_--_--_--__-__- preparator, 2 months 27 days, at $402="= == === === DLEPALALOL Oo CLeUy Sey elites ps) 0 eee eee eee PLEPALATOTy Sou Cevsy clive) yess ee HeeORUECONR, GS} WwoKOMNAMS, Ble so jonecyorueainone, U2 maxowmdawsy, aie Sts jOURej oo MON, I) imUKoM MISS, Ele Spal OKO ee joaejopvemtcone, 2 sooo Oe, Ate os Se jarRejonuemone, IL jruvoyayslny (6) Glahys, Bur s2g10) —-- =.= JOUR SVAL EOE, 2A IKONS, Glo Aas ee preparator, 12 months; at $6022==2===" ies ae Ez preparator, 3 months, at $85, $255; 1,048 hours, at at 50 cents, $524 pa a a a i pp i joven, WZ vO, Ble aie = ee l preparator, 12 months; 1b 5502s U7 aye) peo, CS shoaymns) PA Glenys, ale SG) . = - = === 1 preparator, 9 months Wo days) ue ssoee == 1 preparator, 9 months 12 days, ats40)======s= === == : iL jayeyornaahwoye, IP) sonvopaybis, Ais SASO2 ee 1 assistant preparator, 3 months, at $40 _-_-__-_______ aba scoonksim, ia) woKopandoey eye KAO) I TAKIGeEMuSt. 12) mMOnthS, Ato) O0S2 =a 1 taxidermist (chief), 12 months, at $125----_—--____ B49. 98 983. 32 1, 200. 00 300. 00 2, 100. 00 1, 200. 00 1, O80. 00 40. OO 165. 00 617. 42 116. 00 90. 22 38. 33 270. 00 960. 00 1, 200. 00 840. 00 60. 00 100. 00 720. 00 779. 00 540. 00 600. OO 365. 32 S807. 50 376. 00 1, OSO. OO 120. 00 300. 00 1, 200. 00 1, 500. 00 $54, 250. 81 17, 264. 79 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. XLIII Clerical staff : 1 administrative assistant, 12 months, at $291.66_____ $3, 499. 92 1 editor, 12 months, at $167 Sees 3 ey ees ee ee 2, 004. 00 1 editorial assistant, 10 months’7 days, at $133.88... 1, 364. 41 1 chief of division, 12 months, at $200 pee ee ees 2, 400. 00 Pressman mMmonthss atipllGi ss =. ee 2, 004. 00 i disbursing clerks, 12 months, at $116.67 2___ -_ = _- 1, 400. 04 IPASSIStAMtelibranian 2 Monts: ati plo some seen a oe 1, 599. 96 ik sohmeaversiel aveltes IPA aKey oe) BUF be) ee Be 1, 500. 00 1epropertye clerks. sl2hmonths vat $90 S2 == =s = SS OSOsO0 IFStTEROSEADDErA MOM tS artes OO see ee ees eed 1, OSO. OO 1 stenographer, 8 months 27 days, at $175 -_--_--_____ 1,556) 56 1 stenographer and typewriter, G months 18 days, at (5 (0 Se aR ici IS mee Ww, RN Tate peand ea ee 394. 84 1 stenographer and typewriter, 1 month 7 days, Cilaheh GS eee nee ee See ee ee, a eb ee (1335 toot 1 stenographer and typewriter, 9 months 3 days, ELI pares © 0) ae ee EL et ee 546. 00 1 stenographer and typewriter, 12 months, at $83.383_ 999. 96 1 stenographer and typewriter, 4 months 15 days, Eat) (5 () Sit ele A Oat eee eae a oie Pe 270. 00 1 stenographer and typewriter, 5 months S days, DEMS) Seen eR ee ee aye eS ae wa we Syne 262. 90 1 stenographer and typewriter, 1 month 26 days, ete (0) te arene recy ae a A Des ee ae OMe, 1 stenographer and typewriter, 1 month 42 days, itech) ey ee se a ea ee eee eae ee ee eee SIG 119: 09 1 stenographer and typewriter, 1 month 18 days, EUG) () Sa tee a = Se ee ee ee eee 79. O35 1 stenographer and typewriter, 6 months 14 days, eACeites O ee eenate Fal e e ee 387. 10 1 stenographer and typewriter, 20 days, at $50______ SOMO 1 stenographer and typewriter. 31 days, at S$60_______ GOL. 42 1 stenographer and typewriter, 1 month, at $60______ 60. OO 1 stenographer and typewriter, 4 days, at $60_______ &. 00 1 stenographer and typewriter, 5 months 21 days, zee 5) See til, Es SE rN oc Pew St a er en oe he 239. 03 1 stenographer and typewriter, 4 months 15 days, Git Sa (yet oc) cae Bah ceed A Oe oe 2 a Og 225. 86 1 stenographer and typewriter, 7 months, at $75, SSO-45) 5, Hy ADNKOMANE OTS, CHE GeLOS aye eee ee Oe 975. 00 itypewriter, 2 months 28 days, at $4525----- == 132. 00 I typewriter, 11 months 26 days, at $65--—-__ === = 769. 52 TOS ABieT, IEE) TWVOVENOME,, Ale bio ee 1, 020. 00 1 typewriter; 12 months, at $7O0L-_-__- = == Spots oe S40. 00 IMClERK 2 INOMLAS) aie plOOR 2 se eee eee =e 1200200 i @lkerakes ale pannopenngs Ayr hie ee a ee ee 4?0. OO Ul eTeeml S a CllyiSy cll Naat = ee ee 54. OO i) @lemk. IA avons, Bhe Ato 0)e 28 oe ee x 720. 00 NmelerkAs amo melisaaite nite a ee eee ee 900. 00 i Glerdks aI sinyog is, Aue sna = = eee ee ee ee 900. 00 AM CLETs opel ONNOMENS abe ee a ee ee = 900. 00 1 Clank, Ghanrovnhe wes) oe ee 450. 00 ICLeT wet MONT NS! ab, olla a = ee 1, 500. 00 XLIV REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTER. Clerical staff-—Continued. aUeCe Kevidtes, N27 saavopaumacperne ool Vee se ee $1, 200. 00 tC] ere 2 SM OTS Sv eis tiv gs GO eee 720. 00 TH Co Keyes) igs 14 sauoyMplotse tee Oka 720. 00 AS Clerk e MNO MW DNS! 2B uC ayia elite sp) eee 470. 67 Ibo Wevdt, IAA saan asp BUR AI ieee Ee 900. OO IR ClerieomMNON TCHS 5 ORG aly Socal ss) 0) seen ee eee 298. 81 I Okada 74 ranroayd isp alias Ohba Gime Oe Se 125. 00 AP clerke U2 MOE Seat RNs (ee sae Lc 600. 00 I olkevlee AA inavounPlaNsh Gyo HO ee 600. 00 ILO Ken ate Mil) AngVoyayelalsty Pur oT Oi, Megas oun eee nh Se Ea) lf 600. 00 Ieelkeveltes, TIA} oavopal palsy ANG Maia te a A 900. BO IL Geral, GB) avons) ols} 742) CbayASe le, SOO) a 222.58 i elkevelice 124 soovovond ae, Che fallsbs ce Se ee 1, 380. 00 dL Ke)Keyeden, 02) saaXovon nas, OUR os (piete we ee Ee ee 900. OO i Clerks GAMMOMtMNS pala pili a Seek es re ee ee 750. 00 I @keyake, 30) monies! BIL CI SE Bie SS oe 605, 71 1 clerk, 10 months 15 days, at $40, $420; 1 month 16 Gays wat Gs SGio Swe. ee ee ee 487. 58 1 clerk, 7 months, at $50, $350; 5 months, at $75, S375_ 725. 00 1 cataloguer, 11 months 7 Gan Sancta 6) Eee ee oe es 673. 55 ik cof mzuloyenn(ere, oil GSS. elie SAMO) ee 40. 27 It Cayevloeqivse, 2 satoniinel Cay, Bie He 108. 33 ——_—_—— $47, 167. 60 Buildings and labor: 1 superintendent, 1 month 11 days, at $2502______=__ aster (A! 1 general foreman, 12 months, at $122.50____________ 1, 470. 00 I calptainirof watcha a2 sm OMG Sse ss OO meee eee 1, OSO. GO i hentenant or watch, 12) months) ab SOQ = ee S840. 00 I lieutenant of watch) 12 months, at S70m=2222 2s. =ss 840. 00 1 watchman, 10 months 60 days, at $55_-_-___________ 656. 46 1 watchman, 10 months 52 days, at $60___-_________ COZ BY al Wye wn., aI) iaexonlas, Che SKN a 720. GO IU \iehwolibavehay, 3) vedas) Ils) Cea air SRN) 330. 00 I \yyennClaviak wad, (Svinnvayonlays) Bry (laws, Ale Say 3874. 35 IL \yveheoluloatsh al, “7/7 soavoraynars; ws} Clos, Bue AY) 419. 14 i \yelKelaiinna, 12) soovoyMOns, Bue Seo ee 660. 00 iL \yveleelovonemn, 1 smyXovnudal tO) Channel Aue SSat0) 98. 39 I \yelecelnoneval, Sr inavopayclalsy tla) GkeigS, ait, SAO) 570. 00 ME \velwelovankaval, 12) vaayovayclbey, Aalie SAR 720. 00 I \igehelivgehiay, WF sonore Nsl, ane ROS = set : 720. 00 1 watehman, 3 months 18 days, at $55 _--- = = Fes. ore 196. 94 1 watchman, 1 month 25 days, at $55-___ == = = 100. 83 1 watchman, 2 months 3 days, at $55-_____ S aes 115. 50 1 watchman, 5 months 15 days, at $55, $302.50; 6 months 16 days, at $60; $3890:082_—2=_— == eet: 692. 58 1 watchman, + months 17 days, at $55____- EP. PAIS BUTE 1 watchman, 11 months 21 days, at $55_- E 642. 26 1 ywratchman,, 12) AMONG S yale ee eae be 660. 00 1 watchman, 3 months 29 days, at $5 -__-_--—- = 218: 17 1 watchman, 1 month 16 days, at $60_____ Rinne 90. 97 1 watchman, 7 months 15 days) at $o02s2 == L 413. 45 A DYCUTO Maven, I ronKormsdsy Gy AsekOe ee 480. OO REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Buildings and labor—Continued. 1 Ee fee jsy joy jes A pay pS ee je watchman, 4 months, at $55, $220; 8S months, at SO OSA S () tees oy emu Shee ete Neh ME OES te eee tS watchman, 4 months, ht $557 $220; 8 months, at Santee eo si eS ale eee watchman, 4 months 4 days; at $55=2-. 222-2. Eu VCCI NMS ala TenKOVONH NSS Bun ae a ee WER NONE V4 ONG Cleese ee WHET, 14 sae PSone WVaGlavaN Ni UPA Goo, Bue Wee Vie Nobel Ae SooKONTUEbIS, NE OW ee watchman, 5 months 303 days, at $60___________. ie skilledwlaborer) Samonths at $4022 22 ee SiNeol Uelloyopery, Wes aavonmelas, Bie SV skilled laborer, 4 months 29 days, at $60___________ skilled laborer, 6 months 16 days, at $55__________- Skalledslaborersdl 2 smomiliss. ate hom meee yee eee eee Skalledmlawonerc.eil mr Omibla Sa eats capes) eee Siaiikeral eiexotes SulilGehys ane Gul oS ee skilled laborer, 1 month 26 days, at $50___________ Cia bkeyel Vestoyortere, 123 conoakaney, Ale Misi) Ooo, BAe ENS Che Gulia Mee 8 ee eee nixon, GS Genus, pie Silene laborers le dansarats hil Om = eee aa eae Heoroy Rare, TUS). eS RUB ASI Oe ee ee ee Ie oKopReTE, IY TONS) Bp oe ee ate Il oeere, BUS Gly Blnio ga (ks ae ee [ADOPT eid AyiSe aici Ons an oe 2 a ieee eavaveeye,, 1 raaKonoylncy ype ee NSU OTE Tea is CL EUV Sea on yl Fees (Op ene ae enlovor ese. GE Ghent seein oll 55 0) es eS ees laborerwlOsndayss cuunpile as a ae ee ee Lalbone ra Sues Vlaiy Salty epillcey ee aes oe [ADORE AMS AAS, alta ile OL as Se eee laborer, 72 days, at $1-50____- tet Set SLE ee ele LN LHOneE OORT AVS aa pa seats em ee eee Ne as IN oyoReIPS BS (ole nyepeelie Anlgo 0 oe ee ee LAD OReTenlulerc ely Sere ta hime Seine: So ev er ee te eae laborer, 6 days, at $40, $7.74; 13 days, at $1.50 LOE preseason Pe LN SL el ahs eae See lelloxovivere, ales GR aSh Cho hel laa Oe es Se Se i LADORer A ee Mays at Sle Oe ses ae Se ee lA DOLCE Gays rat pil OL a le ees ee ee eee PATO TE Tooele CLARY Sane ete co lees (teen pages oe pa rep Ro Nea ox oy ewes va BEA aos tyrdshe Callen kG (ees ee ee ee Seat 165 days, at $1.75, $288.76; 116 days, at BUS 0 = yl (et eee Re eee ga ee PET eve Area ae IZ MONO BNE ose = ew Ietloxeneeies (Bae y Glenish welip eal aie oe a ee laborers Oudays: at pla. 2 222 tos BE ie laborer, 35 days, at ee 5) (ec ee ee Ie SE Sa laborer, 5 days, at $1.50____ Et ete Ce i ea a laborer, 9 months 15 AVS se aah 2 ee ees eg eS Seas “ $700. TOO. 9DO7 a 605. 660. 720. TSO. 660. 359. 360. 480. 298. aint 660. 600. 468 1) fod ts 471. 180. 471. OO O00 99 (. oo OO OO OO OO 00 05 00 00 OO 42 00 00 . OO 93. 600. 468. (os 7 471. O06 00 75 rita OO 28. 50 540. 470. 108. 480. 00 Or =v 00 OO DO 00 26 116. 25 108. € 45, 124. 5 Hale XLV XLVI REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Buildings and labor—Continned. I TAD ORER BSS: CLAVISS Fly piles) Eee ee eee ene $499. 50 hdlaborerwola days. ate ale 0 eee 471. 00 i laborers s08s days atenlt 0 R=. See eee 462. 75 Telomere, Bis Ole ywsh ene Guleno) 514. 50 APTA borers Alb2 7m O MGS ats pa eee eee ea ee 480. OO 1 laborer, 11 months 16 days, at $45, $517.58; 15 days, in SaOe S20 Me os: Ses 2 a a Ae gneve 537. 58 i laborer: 12 imonths fap Os ee ee 480. 00 TL AE avo pence eS EAS CoN etal let5\ 0 ee ee 471. 00 1 lAborers3 day strat piled Ol a See eee a0) i laborer Olmonths!20 Nd anys sate 0 ere 426. 20 alia oxoneres. oleh Olesya oO 2, a Be 471. OO al exo eres eA S Osh, Bley hale O 471. 00 ft Taborer-s203 days at s4 02222 See eee 26) 45 1laborer; 45d ays; atiGi2bs-22 ss ee eee eee 5. 00 1 messenger, 4 months 15 days, at $20, $90; 7 months iby Gkbywsh Ble Mins GOP a= ee 352. 50 IL Aoneeieere, 7 TOMAS, Bie see - a . 210. 00 TL AMESSEM SEES MOMENI ed CleayiS sets) ee 61. 94 1 messenger, 2 months 20 days, at $20_______________ 5a. 33 1 messenger, 2 months 19) days, at $20-__-- 52. 67 i MeSsensery 2amMO MENS TAM GaySsy alts yee 88. 00 amnesoneere, Il non 20 Glens, Bie S202 32. 90 i messenger 9 months 28 days; at $2052 222 ees 198. 67 (Messen cere cay Gye alias eee een ern 138 JL WOIASSOESIE, fo) UNCONMUIONS, GUE GA 8 100. 00 ISOMERS, PB Ge nysh min we = 15. 23 1 messenger, 1 month 33 days, at $20_______________ 41.35 1 messenger, 2 months 30 days, at $25____-_________ 75. 03 1 messenger, 1 month 29 days, at $25_-________-=____ 49. 66 1 messenger, 6 months 3 days, at $20, $121.94; 5) TaKovaueursh, Ae Heo SSO a 271. 94: il MMS eakese, I24 weovonmUElOK, Gye SH 420. OO 1 messenger, 1 nee Or Clans, ght eee a ath Sy i messenger, 37% days) at $1222 "=-= 2 i a Seen LE 37. 50 1 messenger, 9 a Si eu Sill See ee ee eee 9. 00 Th imager, IU innvovonelny 7 Ch, air SAN 24, 52 1 mail carriers 12smonths ait say ee ee ea 540. OO 1 cleaners Zain OI Semaltn ssc 0 ee a RET Pats 360. 00 1 cleaner, 2 months 183 days, at aa ae 78. 50 1 cleaner, 9 months 85 days, at $35______ oF = 413. 14 cleaner 12am Oni hsseeltee he ) ee 360. 00 i eyehaveyen, abeaieavopnycltysy, fie Syst — se 360. 00 1 cleaner, 2 months 49 days, at $80__________- ae 108. 10 eleaners 12 MoOnGhsSsr alin ho a ee 420. 00 L cleaner, da) months! 2Sid ays) aie ee ee BoT. LO 1 attendant, 12 months, at $40_-_=—_——— aes EES eB hS s A480. OO 1 attendant, 157 days, at $1____ LAPEER TSE ed 157. 00 I Eharcosbholw mien leads Pl ool {0)e Sener ae eh nt 502. 50 ———— $42, 047.16 TRO TALI SCT Vl COS ease en pid SA oe ee le ee 160, 730. 36 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. XLVIL NATIONAL MUSEUM—PRESERVATION OF COLLECTIONS, 1903. i é . * RECEIPTS. [RENAMED MS posse wea oe Iiedhye al aOR ee ee ee $9, 597. 20 EXPENDITURES. Salaries or compensation —____ ee ae ees $8. 00 SDECIallWeSerVviGeS= 2a =e ee 1, 182. 81 No LalgSeiyiCOsee Awe) ool Sur Eee ee ice ee de SEALS Miscellaneous : SUP DCS ae ee ee ee 5, 167. 98 SaiLlOnehy == see a awe os ee eee 1, 216. 16 eve nite ang a Canes eae ee eer es ee 582. 40 TMraviehinierexpenses os eee eee eee 182. 90 Drawaneseang wllwustratlonse.. = sees es Motalymuiscellancous expenditiness.= =.= ne 8, 006. 16 MotalvexpenditiiTres tos uneroOh OO. es eee 9, 196. 97 Balam Ceri geile O Ate eee eS Sees ee 400. 23 PRESERVATION OF COLLECTIONS, 1908. Total statement of receipts and expenditures. [July 1, 1901, to June 30, 1904.] RECEIPTS. Appropriation: by Congress; Mareh 3, 190i] -2=2) 282222 5 ee ape $180, 000. OO EXPENDITURES. Salaries or compensaciomia =) = 2 2s = $162, 216. O4 SPECI SCLWCCSm = a ess ae ee 2, 283. 26 ARO GAISCEVICES = =ess sas fe ee ae eS eee $164, 499. 3 Miscellaneous : Drawings and illustrations _____-___ 2, 629. 71 Sup PlWeswean ssa ns Ja ea ee ee 8, 139. 07 Sitaitlom Given eet a ee oe S80552.35 ye TR) LN ge ee a 529. 79 DEY: ra Gs ase a eR 1, 746. 55 Total miscellaneous expenditure _______ ________ 1 OOEAT, NotaleexpendiuLe wo) ouness0. O04 ss ee 179, 599. 77 TSU) EU reed fb eg a USO Boe pn us Se en 400. 23 SEV REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. NATIONAL MUSEUM—PRESERVATION OF COLLECTIONS, 1902. Balance as per report July 1, 1903 EXPENDITURES. Supplies 222-2 Js. ae Freight and cartage Total expenditure to June 380, 1904 26. O4 Balance carried, under provisions of Revised Statutes, section 8090, by the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 30, 1904. PRESERVATION OF COLLECTIONS, 1902. Total statement of receipts and expenditures. [July 1, 1901, to June 30, 1904.] RECEIPTS. Appropriation by Congress, March 3, 1901_________ = EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1991, to June 30, 1904.] Salaries or compensation ———__ oe S| SOIR SOG SY) Special services == ee eee ee ee 2, 255. 36 Total sernvices! 22... ale Miscellaneous : Drawines and ilustrations=—— 207 == $2, (87%. 83 SU OMe See ee eae Leu caee 6, 608. 47 StATIONERY: aoa sae ee eee oe eR 2, 663. 02 MT AN Clipe tes ee ee ee eee 2, O2de 21 SMEG & lah ey ee eee 2 Tee 1, TO7. 48 Total miscellaneous expenditures__——___ pee eee ae eso $164, 153. 35 Total expenditure to June 30, 1904 Balance NATIONAL MUSEUM—FURNITURE AND FIXTURES, 1904. RECEIPTS. Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1904, for ‘‘cases, furniture, fixtures, and appliances required for the exhibition and szafe-keeping of the collections of the National Museum, including salaries or compensation of all necessary em- or) ployees’” (sundry civil act, March 3, 1903) EXPENDITURES. Salaries or compensation __—— Special services __--- pet ee ee ROR a ee ee ee eee eee 53. 25 Total salaries and services__ Miscellaneous : STORASTE CASES Ses See Se eee ONO. 1Dhe ay abakersh = pie oa SEN is eee 50. 88 ID TAWCLS4 CULV S DOCS = = ee ee ee (DG reyes Frames, stands, miscellaneous woodwork. _ 100. 40 $9, 969. 06 $ 1 $180, 000. 00 9, 941. 36 58. 64 22, 500. 00 mids & REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTER. XLIX Miscellanecus—Continued. (CUES S 5a ea ae oe eee eS eee 2 SASS 26 Elana Cesena ae eet So ees be S07. 48 MOO ls esew ees Lee ee pile Mele ies ees 54. 73 Cloth cotton. (cic@eaa ss ee ee 167. 60 LGPL C Tee scene ee ee A Sey et ee 1, 870. 44 Paints, oils, glue, brushes________________ 181. 96 Office and hall furniture and furnishings _ 939. 65 eather enubberpeie: == == = ene ae 227. 95 SHWE Ce ei ee ee Seen ee oe 20. 42 JEN KGB Oba 2 1 ee eg Ree er, 2. 40 MNO tallies rnd S CONTETAE O Use a eee Retess £9, O98. 96 Aol: xg preroohhmouer roy Duane ctOy WHE a ee $19, O68. 02 Balance July 1, 190+, to meet outstanding liabilities... 3, 431. 98 Analysis of expenditures for salaries or compensation. {July 1, 19038, to June 30, 1904.] 1 superintendent, 2 months 12 days, at $166.66_____________ Breet oy $397. 82 1 supervisor of construction, 3 months 19 days, at $140_____________ 505. 81 igclenkelOsmonthss6rdayswat ol 002222 se eee eee ySee al, Tayi ls fou il Slavoya) ionemakenal, WP} waaay, Bib Meee 1, 020. 00 CAT PENLCH ONG ayiSabipoe = =e oe Sees eee See ee Ewes 276. 00 I CAnVeMtet yaa ManiSwidtvho 22. eee ae 2 a Se ee Ce ee fhe sonst 12. 00 NE CALDEMULCE: won lyS cc peeesee a = a eee ene Pa Be Ee Lene ee ep lat 219. 00 il Gaugoyerywere, ISO) Cle nysy fue type ee Eee ie ee oe eee 390. 00 HCA pCULCEAy OAV Smale noo= ae == le see eee ee eee ee 2 Soe 12. 00 NR CAnpeMlel ml GudayS nal poe = = ee es ee 554. 00 HecaArpenvery lo days, abigoss-2— = ee ee Ee. Ne ee 2 eee ee 39. 00 MCA TESTS T eA eC ANS elite ey ee aes eee I ype ee 72. 00 HMCAEPeHLERS dD enCaVvSs aivtiaas ana a Be ee ee ee 46. 50 MBCA HENCE OS OONG AY Seay epee ele are a ee ee eee te 900. 00 RCA CICE peat Ay Ss Doig oe en ie eee ee ee ee eS 72. 00 HeSilledalaporerdlsmombhns 2ONcaySeu a tics Os ae ee ee Rie em 1 skilled laborer, 7 months, at $90_._-_______ Mise Ne Rate Sh ol Re bac s aee 630. 00 ft skilled laborer; 18) days; at) $3.22 2-22 - pa Spee SU a err ns ee 54. 00 iesklled laborers WSndaysarady poe. a ee ae ee 54. 00 iL SUN! eayerere, NAP ioarepayearsy, Guy GSPN) So ae 750. 00 Hesoiledmiaborers: daly daiy.si ats jo ee ee ae ee ee 334. 50 Me Slaillecdel borer a is: dayiSeca tested ee eee Reo) See 286. 88 lepaimbters diemMonths 28s Gays. dt Sips. =a eee ey 893. 95 1 workman, 314 days, at $2_____- Se ee See a a eee 328. 00 il aborerucG: days; at ol b0e 2. ena ee eee ae oe ee ee 39. 00 PTR tei! agen mene eee ene ag R Sia ee ry eee ao BOSS Se SO SS 9, 915. 81 NATIONAL MUSEUM—FURNITURE AND FIXTURES, 1903. RECEIPTS. BalancemasmpeEnreporind ULy dal G0Ss= === = eee ae ee ee ee ee $1, 696. 24 sm 1904——IVv Miscellaneous: Cases, Cases, Glass Tools Cloth Leather, rubber, cork Drawings Slate Travel storage exhibition Drawers, trays, etc Frames and woodwork (ve) wu) On ° CNS OU CF —_— Aa ~ 689. 274. 4. 00 100. 72 114. L REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. EXPENDITURES. Miscellaneous : Drawers; trays, DOCS! -e ee e e eeenee $288. 98 Frames, stands, miscellaneous woodwork__---_______- Bul 7) GIASS ja Bess 2 BE Se ea ee ee See Beis Tard ware® sa. 23a eS Se ee eee 231. 49 GlOthe COLON, 1OCC ees esse See 2S EMD ei 225 = a5 a cay Ee ere ee 316. 95 > AIDES 5 2 OS 5g OU Cree ae ate ae a nee ae 0 net te 187. 79 (Opi HuaYol MORN sqnh av Ube, COs eee ey 210. 65 Rubbers Teather see ce ee ae Oa SR a afalt Jed buactayhakesunaatshnel gah lyse Sena ORC Nee ile er aid) No) Wes ranean sap ON ONC A Ul RICH aha tain rae ‘wee SUSPENSE sc) 41. 92 AKOueul Cogaeovebynbors io) Afi ek, Wee ee Balance. Filly: Ds M9 Ae ea Eee a eres fees sz an eg ne a Total statement of receipts and expenditures. [July 1, 1902, to July 1, 1904.] RECEIPTS. AN DATO HKG Joni, (Clovakeareasis, Aiea Vey wey EXPENDITURES. SALAS sy yes a ee ee $12, 342. 35 Special SCLviCes essai iene wen eee eres Sale 14. 6O Total, "SCEVICES |e Le EN oe en ee $12, 356. 95 $ 29 -—=—) 500. 00 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. NATIONAL MUSEUM i a RECEIPTS. sf Balancerasspersreponur oul vad OQsetee ee ue se Dae eee Balance carried, under provisions of Revised Statutes, section NATIONAL MUSEUM—-HBATING, LIGHTING, EYFC., 1904. RECEIPTS. Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1904, ioe expense of heating, lighting, electrical, telegraphic, and telephonic service for the National Museum’ , (sundry civil act, NAAT Tapas spel: 9) eee ee casa ee A Na en Soe a apie Se ee Rees een EXPENDITURES. Salanieszorcompensation=s== = sa= == mn oe $7, 681. 19 Specialy servicese 29 ae = ae ee ee ee 118. 75 Motalesalanvestran Oars 6lvil Cesar ee ee eee $7, 799. 94 Miscellaneous : CoaleandewOoda as 2a eee 4, 984. 00 CE i eR eA cy 790. 60 CCI Chb ye ee ee Eas ee ee 1, 428. 36 Ree phones) eee eee ee Bee ee ee 503. 91 MVE CiICaAkeSUp DIGS ee ee eee 627. 43 Rentalsotacallshoxes === eee: 110. 00 JB ISRAOONES “Sab yOy OMNES ee 921. 3: MRE] CEPA S sees eae ead Da Te ees ey 18. SO Total miscellaneous expenditure _________________ 9, 384. 48 NORE MPenadiGUEeetonruner sO; 0 O0te see eee Balance July 1, 1904, to meet outstanding liabilities_________ Analysis of expenditures for salaries or compensation. [July 1, 1903, to June 80, 1904.) RCN SINS Se MOM Sat Silos) ees a eee ee ee ea eS telephoneroperator, d2.months: at po0e= ees eee LelephoOnenopenraLol:, o2) Gays. abel oO2 == eens ee eee telephone operator, 6 days, at $1.50_______ Ea asian ay RPE EES LE HIKE DI SVONAVED Coy OVER, o) Clays Re jilsa0)s ee Se ee ee telephone operator assistant, 2 months 51 days, at $45___- _______ GlECERICIOMNMGGrGAVS alee d ee ee oe wee ee ee ee SME ei onsets). tanKONOR BUR SAO) oo ee Skailledalaporerwel 2am OMS sratyinie = = ea ee Sees ee Sklledmaponerigo Mr aay Seats oo ee eaten Be ee DIUMbeVsrassistantwolGs Gaysy ati p2 2505 wes ee see ee mina, UZ snore wie Moles es eee Pas avis eh Te eens hee i 1 1 1 il 1 i Jollee ksienrla, 2) soavoynidus) a3 Ces Bless a ee 1 1 1 1 1 1 HETIL Sea alti OO mmeces rave stig Htc me pine a ee ee ‘ FURNITURE AND FIXTURES, 1902. U7, LI $5. OT 3090, the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 30, 1904. 184. 815. 470. 600. 48. 9: fod is 135. 264. 126. 450. 900. 953. (ful 720. 101. by $18, 000. 00 58 00 00 00 00 DO 19 00 00 00 00 25 69 00 98 LIL REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. il Tangenena, Zh waNVoMIOTS) HO) CHYS,, Clie INO Aa he Th ee LN ADORET S203 UO AySS salt Repl eh) ee ee ee seta eat vee I daboret, 23% days; atsgiko0 222922 ee ee NATIONAL MUSEUM—HEATING AND LIGHTING, 1903. $338. 32 89. 76 3D. DO 681. 19 RECEIPTS. EY MEHIES AS) over Key crore ou Ay ak TIO ee $1, 962. 63 EXPENDITURES. Specialtsenvicess 22222 eee $194. 75 NotalesalarilesMors Selva! COs eee a aeceel ee eee $194. 75 Miscellaneous : Coaland wo0d22 sa Sena Sar eee 621. 36 Gas! 22 See A ee ee ee 63. 70 Blectricity 22222 22 ea ee eee een ALO, 33 Telephones: == 2 Sa 2 ee eee 171. 65 DU Xenetceuh Gujey nies} = 2 296. 97 Rentalto® call \noxes= 2 30. 00 Heating supplies. 22 22s see 448. 61 elegrains! = 2-2 = Meee es = eee ee 9. 40 Total miscellaneous expenditure__________________ 1, 756. 02 ANG HA rq orsvaco liens 1) A ebove) GX0), TI se 1, 950. 77 Balancessuly ai 104s ae ee ee ee eee eee 11. 86 Total statement of receipts and expenditures. [July 1, 1902, to June 30, 1904.] RECEIPTS. Appropriation Dy, COnSTeSS re) UMC nz. lO 02 eee $18, 000. 00 EXPENDITURES. SRUlTEKSS Ce Ganamyoeraseniveyn $8, 224. 02 Special “Sservices2-. 2 25 ee eee 228. 91 Mo tail SOrViGeS! as 2) eee ee ee $8, 452. 938 Miscellaneous : CoalVand wo0d 323222222 ee 4, 529. 47 Gas* 2! Ce i 996. 40 Rental ote Calls Oe See 120. 00 HeCtrical Supplies eae eee ee 487. 18 leCuniclivae == Seren eel Sehr SS 1, 374. 388 Heatine isupplicss =e eee 1, 308. 35 'Telesrams), 2222 Se eel aie eee 47. 83 Telephones) 2434 5 ew ee ee : 671. 6O Motale MU SCe]UAMWEC OWS ee eee oda Total expenditures... =. -< 7-2. es ee ee 17, 988. 14 Balance; July; dl W904 =" 22) ee ee ee 11. 86 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. NATIONAL MUSEUM—HBATING AND LIGHTING, 1902. i alam cemasmperenewolnteiU liye ak) pee eeenn ps ee ee LIL $1. 60 Balance carried, under provisions’ of Revised Statutes, section 3090, by the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 30, 1904. NATIONAL MUSEUM—POSTAGE, 1904. RECEIPTS. Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 50, 1904. “Por postage stamps and foreign postal cards for the National NMMSeUIMin (SUNGry Ccivilvack March) ose1 O03) ee ee ee EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1903, to June 30, 1904.] Hor postagels=— === a TS eS ag ys a a ep Ret ae NATIONAL MUSEUM-—-PRINTING AND BINDING, 1904. RECEIPTS. Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 80, 1904, “for the Smithsonian Institution, for printing labels and blanks, and for the ‘ Bulletins’ and ‘ Proceedings’ of the National Mu- seum, the editions of which shall not be less than 8,000 copies, and binding, in half turkey, or material not more expensive, scientific books and pamphlets presented to and acquired by. the National Museum library’ (sundry civil act, March 3, 1903) _--._-_--____- EXPENDITURES. Bulletinsrotmther Muses] 2 ee eee D2, MOK OU Broceedine sor ehe visemes == as ay eee ee 13, 561. 44 1B 21) ls erent ae eB ct ey Lo See ee ee OE 153. 96 ISAAK uaYel Leo EWES es ee eee 268. TA ConeressionalmReCordas === = es ee ae eee 38. 00 ES 02 Gin Stee ete ae Bae a ee ee ee eee 177. 50 qbroyeall xq oreravobyronss roy diipbovey aiOy ae 8 ee ee BAAN cerulivarl sO Aces eee ee ee ee See ee NATIONAL MUSEUM—RENT OF WORKSHOPS, 1904. RECEIPTS. Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1904, “for rent of workshops and temporary storage quarters for the National Museum” (sundry civil act, Mareh 3, 1903) —---------__- $500. 00 500. OO $17, 000. OO 16, 997. $4, 400. 5 (he) 00 LIV REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE, EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1903, to June 50; 1904.] Rent of workshops: SL ONAN SE SER OSTA S Woes ae eee ee $1, 999. 92 PALME SOVIETS CEC TSS WV eee a 1. OSO. 00 a0 uren ave | asi ley: INET SB RES RNY S60. 00 Ciba Watieibavkey Givens (Teepe) a 360. 00 AMON eH Wied q oxerora lq byes ikon dhbeorss axX0) Webs $4, 399. 92 Balam@e: Suiliy sel GOA es a a a el ee RE IONE . 08 NATIONAL MUSEUM—RENT OF WORKSHOP, 1903. Jaxauluinkexe Gish jovesriamsyooumg Alle al aOR ee a $0. OS LaxeW EE woVere yA fill hail legen 6S, 0 ener eles cacti Se eh oe en ee ee . 08 NATIONAL MUSEUM—RENT OF WORKSHOP, 1902. La EVOVERY GIS} joyerermNsyoyeyany dfmlhy dl: OR soe $0. OS Balance carried, under provisions of Revised Statutes, section 3090, by the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 30, 1904. NATIONAL MUSEUM—BUILDING REPAIRS, 1904. RECEIPTS. Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1904, “for repairs to buildings, shops, and sheds, National Museum, including all necessary labor and material” (sundry civil act, NA eB ekki are) |) es ar scene ee a ee ihe $15, 000. 00 EXPENDITURES. S2laniesmorcomipen Sait! oma =e $9, 960. 86 Special. tServilCesioeys-8 a he a 50. 00 Total salaries and services__=________ 2 eee $10, 010. 86 Miscellaneous : Repairs to roofs (by contract) ___---__- 1, 038. 26 Galvanized-iron ceiling cornice ________ 486. 78 enim ber 2 oe as es Se eee ea oe 93532 Cement, plaster, mortar, brick, sand, ete_ 86. 45 latenohieb ee, WOON (eOn = 298. 38 Paimtsiollss) SlWehs bis es mee eee 210. 97 Sk yi ot Sees Soe BC ae oe 63. 60 GLASS eae eae eas 2 41. 25 Drawings Se ee a ee 46. OO @loth: ete. 28252" Oa eee 270. 00 MevraZZOv pp Ave e Wty eee 66. 00 Lehobenoynakes none e ee aa a | Rubber: sete 23 = sae ee eee 15. 90 Total miscellaneous expenditure________________- 2, 520. 82 ALO EWE Cev-q oyeraYounbues qmoy Dhivarey SiO), aletowe 2,581. 68 Balance July 1, 1904, to meet outstanding liabilities-________ 2, 468. 32 te es sd es REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Analysis of expenditures for salaries or compensation. [July 4, 1903, to June 380, 1904, } isuperintendent, G months; ate Si6GG66) 50 92222 ee ee iL ek, DH rnsvorayelarsy BOGE RS, ENERO Le SEs fate Sen ye ea I ikontammamn, @) Mnxoowasteby Oknc bin Melis =o 22 5 MCAT) MLCT asl Aan Cl DVS Teel pepe eee et ea ee Ie ee RMCUEPeMteIna- 4a CaySer ate poe = eee oe ee aN ry ks oe GCA SMEG ORGAN Semel apes ue nee nk eee ree ee eke ae SPETMMSealt NEU ovov eer IGS ORs AS TCATEA Gee ere eke ee eee Stele len ovorreree BG: CES. ihe ese ae Su = a eee Skilled saboreryal Gadays,ateho oe ae = = ee ee ee Sai leel Meare Hees Ge Che oye aes ee ee es Sklledslaborerge(Gecl ays its pepe eee ee eee eee eee eee Skailledmlaborerpo+sedaysn dit Soe eee Ree ee ee | skilled laborer, 31 days, at $1.75, $54.25; 13 days, at $1.50, $19.50_ SLAM eae ab Oneal OnGl ays scab eke ees ere ee ee ee eee renee len Voy casa Ma aS AG ea tay eee Shall Cgal ADORE MOSACAV Se wall tyra en epee eae eer slledalabonrers slulemonmtise2Sid anys lity per eo ee Skilledmaborers leimomntthy 45 aiy.shr ata) eee ee Se Olknsmibieyel Ikiovareere, SEAGER YS: Gl h ye oh Ue ee ee ee (HiaWNeIe, Al amMYoyaE oY Al AOE Sheen e oN (kO ee ee Ee ee UMMA rsa TN OMNI Sell SetGl iyi Sewell tarsi) eee eee ee GUMTN OTA Oe CLE, Sauter ieee Su re ee Os eee Ee ok ate AIMS S SSE Sie! Chis. ane sls = ee ee DIASTEKEISeASS 1S Cena teeta Ss AIS: elite) 2 ee ee ee eee ee messenger, T months, at $20, $140; 5 ontne: tie EO ae spili sy () eae PAD ORES Cl Ay Sorel Ge shies) () cease Als a Oe jane Ree enn e Bee em ER ADORE MOS SAC UY Seale pillee) isa eee os eee ee ee ee ee TEA OT? 13 Pa el ae CLAY Sow elope il sey) Sates ee ee ee ee PAD OLE S ONC V Stevie pilen (Oy es tes ee a re eee y ee EE: Ile ovowexeres Buel bara bases tact ty chee LEC ieee ee ee Ae a DS ag es ae laborer, 221 days, at ce ee SIA IES eae gl tur oY ate we RR Raeefeas, Siee Ew ADORE wel Se Cl Ay Saw ite pile) eres 9 ee ey ey ee ae Pea als Be PMO CT eel i CLA Sea eN tine oil 6 (0) es et cee er ee es PO pee ed LY OYL i es Ee ach a Pe a oe Nee eR eee NATIONAL MUSH UM—BUILDING REPAIRS, 1903. RECEIPTS. JEU GMKES SIG (oa Oy diye Ie AN OBS es eee EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1908, to June 30, 1904.] STALIeS Ol -COMpPenSavlONe as. =o ee $7. 00 Specialtservyi Cese ae = ae eo eee 10. 00 hoa SRI We SOAs = ee eee See $17. 00 Miscellaneous : ] ABT OY YES ho eRe Tope ME 6a ees Oy eet a 104. 41 Cement, plaster, mortar, gravel, sand. CEO ap a eg a rape a I 1138. 25 $999. 160. € 861. 6 942. © 942. 90. 48. 98. 48. 136.5 ie) 8 LV aw, & 168.5 73. 75 30. alalite 204. 83352 194. 653. O 105. 250. 105. 549. 5 82. 290. C 61.5 95. 479. THORS 549. 5 386. 75 19.5 LVI REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Miscellaneous—Continued. InleaiGlhwyaiRe, (Wools, wea pape fe $455. 19 Paints, oils, glue, chemicals____________ 36. 17 \Wiorovolnyarelle ee of pe ee, It, PS SkyliehtSs 2222. ee eee ee ee 251. 30 Glassy = 2222 ee Se eee 81. 31 : G@lothietes 2: £52 Sie See ee ee eee ees il. a) Noval omiseellaneows Me xq eS Ce UN Ce $1, 453. 93 Total expenditure to June 380, 1904_.________ Sate eee ee Pn Hl De? WC OYSKO SS avelllahaxers’ djiplyy, Di, ISIE se re jot ben 2 ee eee ee DS. O04 Total statement of receipts and expenditures. a [July 1, 1902, to June 30, 1904.] RECEIPTS. ANP PLOP LIA ONS Dye COMSESS yc Uli eel (2 eee ee $15, 000. OO EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1902, to June 30, 1904.] Salaries OM COmpPensei 10 oee eee $10, 174. 89 Special SErvillCeSu ses ene eee ee ee ee 309. SO Total” Services: se ses oe es ee a $10, 484. 69 Miscellaneous : LMM ei as-is ee eee Lee Doze oil Cement, plaster, gravel, lime, sand, YOUNG) G21 pie oe a, SO Ge emer pe arly ae Ie S195 26 Hardware, tools, ete_ 2 _- gies irae Ns TAGS 32 Paints sons cliey bushes sss ae 941. ST IWViOO ChiwiO Te kee es eee SS ae ee is 97. 23 Skylights and ventilators=—22 == 22" == 679. 30 GYASS ye a Bak SE he oe Pe ee 166, 16 (HOO, C@ornwom, Qne 2 Pr, IS IPA Cres Bi ea ie ear eee ee re 40. 50 FOP AW NG Ss 5 teen PS eee le ee ee Oe 355. OO Slatine: Took. 222s. ee eee 750. OO Steel beams). 2.222222 35 eee 47. 77 STUCK WOT ee oS ee ees en ge ee 106. 00 Totalimiseellaneouls 2s 22s = sss see ee eee 4,457. 27 MNotal’ ExpPena EUS Oy MINE ws Oe (4 we ee eS ell LOAN Ct Balance. July a NOOR ee ee ee ee oa en ee og ee 5S. O4 NATIONAL MUSEUM—BUILDING REPAIRS, 1902. Balance as per report July 1, 19038__________- = a ee $27. 25 Balance carried, under provisions of Reyised Statutes, section 8090, by the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 30, 1904. REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. LVIif NATIONAL MUSEUM—-GALLERIES, 1902. 1 Balan Cepasnpetere DOLtr Ul eel lOO eee ee ee Se a ee Sly Balance carried, under proyisions’ df Revised Statutes, section 8080, by the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 80, 1904. NATIONAL MUSEUM—BOOKS, 1904. RECEIPTS. Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 80, 1904, “for purchase of books, pamphlets, and periodicals for reference in the National Museum ” (sundry civil act of Congress, March 3, FO ()3)) eee ane eee ee eee fe a be yh ae VEE Se ee $2, GOO. 00 EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1903, to June 80, 1904.] A) lEGQYORE,, jopuooolMlksuce RyaXel jorenaKovohe iy 2 Se ee M20) Balance July 1, 1904, to meet outstanding liabilities___-_____ 772. 40 NATIONAL MUSEUM—BOOKS, 1903. RECEIPTS, Balance as per report July 1, 1903_____ ee er ae i or oe perpen oo AP $606. 62 EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1908, to June 380, 1904.] Hor bookss pamphlets; "etes= =.=) == es SUI A ein De ERS Pld ED 2 556. 86 FAT AM COV My erles| O QA es see Seer pee ae 49. 76 NATIONAL MUSEUM—-BOOKS, 1902. RECEIPTS, BrilenaGa AS joe weloyorn dk als wR ee eS ee eee ee $198. 27 EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1908, to June 380, 1904.] JBYOONIS|, oR NoNjo Mies, Ghavall porevavorelh(euiss— 165. 89 Balancegs 22s s ssa Se BN BR ae oe 32. 388 Balance carried, under provisions of Revised Statutes, section 3090, by the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 80, 1904. NATIONAL MUSEUM—PURCHASE OF SPECIMENS, 1904. RECEIPTS, Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1904, “for purchase of specimens to supply deficiencies in the collec- tions of the National Museum” (sundry civil act, March 8, 1908) — $10, 000. 00 , LVIIi REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTER. EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1903, to June 30, 1904.] OL |PULCHASCHO TNS TCC LIT GTS ease meee ee ee ce Balance July 1, 1904, to meet outstanding liabilities NATIONAL MUSEUM—PURCHASE OF SPECIMENS, 1903. RECEIPTS, Balance ‘asiper report galiy.as WOO Ses oe oe eee ee ae ee ee EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1993, to June 30, For purchase of specimens Balance July 1, 1904 NATIONAL MUSEUM—PURCHASE OF SPECIMENS, 1902. RECEIPTS. Balance as per report July 1, 1903 EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 1903, to June 30, HOT: SPC ris wees Sears a re ir en Balance -l wt) 1, 482. 27 $4, O00. € 3, 650. . 00 . 26 Balance carried, under provisions of Revised Statutes, section 3090, by the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 30, 1904. NATIONAL MUSEUM—PUBLICATION CONTRIBUTIONS TO NATIONAL HERBARIUM, 1903. RECEIPTS. Jags EVES FASS foyer! REVO LONME Ub Th, WOR $3, 972. 51 EXPENDITURES. [July 1, 19038, to June 30, 1904.] ETAL Ss {CO TNE AD UIE OT Se ee 5, 969. 80 BSBA TN C!d Siu ty A eS OR eee a ee ee eS etal NATIONAL MUSHUM—PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL BUILDING, NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1908. DALANCE AS! PELE COI ill ye ile SS eee ee $43. 20 Salem @e iam ye Ws, Da a ee ea a aE 3. 20 ASTROPHYSICAL OBSERVATORY, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, RECEIPTS. Appropriation by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1904, “for maintenance of Astrophysical Observatory, under the diree- tion of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries of assist- ants, the purchase of necessary books and periodicals, apparatus, making observations in high altitudes, printing and publishing results of researches, not exceeding 1,500 copies, repairs and alterations of buildings, and miscellaneous expenses, $15,000 ” {sundry civil act, March 3, 1903) necessary 1904. $15, 000. 00 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. LIX DISBURSEMENTS. i Salaries or compensation : - 1 aid, 12 months, at $200.42 22-3

COD GO Oo REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Wages of mechanics and ae ete.—Cont’d. 1 laborer, 46 days, at HES 0; 321 days, EH Bab ey] eat oe re ie eye 1 laborer, 3443 days, at $1. Ep muene Pee Seat eS pore pe for ye ery a ey fn psy fay pe ra a a ee 1 laborer, 205 days, at $2; 42 days, at HAboOnrers luis dialysate. niles () eae ee laborers 2962 days> at ji p0be ese laborer, LO9kdays; at Sih 5O=2 2s 2S" sae ee laborer, 3463 GEA Bie Sila) ee laborer, 328 days, at $1.50_________ eos laborer, nea Gaiysaratipile 5 0ae ee ee Bene ln NORE, BAYS, GENYS, Ble bola) laborer, 294 days, at ol j0h2 2 oes laborer, 195? days, at $1.50--__-______ —_ laborer, coe CWE Bip IRR see Bee oe laborer, 62% days, at $1.50; 308? days, at eo = SSE IS Ji, ee eRe ees nee laboreryoOs Gays mak olen la es ae ADOC OSNCayiSyecibepilccy Osa ae ee laborer, 733 days, at $1.50; 164% days, GBB tis 3) Wa De ees esl RN SRR ise ne ge an aes LAWOTET SDs ays alts oils ee ee ee laborer, 194 days, at $1.50; 1544 days, Elita op lejos pean eee et MeL hs SRE eae, Relea laborer, 45 dayssiat $ie5022- = == FADORE TA Man Clety; Ses cilia cpil ent towel ee nel IEMoyoreerRy Glove GRINS fle Gl le tele Se LAbOLerioGOsnOay.Sy alte ple ae ee es lAbOKLerw a2 says cab ep lee ole eee laborer, 54 days, at $1; 2833 days, at SSE Gy pees ee re a me ath Ae ele Mea te laborer, 127 days, at $1; 209% days, at SZ ee ee aie Sat es ee ee attendant, 289 days, at 75 centsl___-_- attendant, 69 days, at 75 cents_________ helper, 38 days, at 75 cents; 384 days, water boy, 40 days, at 50 cents_________ stonebreaker, 44 cubie yards, at 60 COIS ren. - hae eal oes Pa oe eh aa BE stonebreaker, 14 cubic yards, at 60 COMICS eee eer ce EU pe re Ae Re ee wagon and team, 92 days, at $3.50_____- wagon and team, 367% days, at $3.50___ wagon and team, 55 days, at $3.50_____ horse and cart, 1 day, at $1.75_____ Sails HOrserandscarie i Gays, ac piletoes =e horse and cart, 97 days, at $1.75___.—-_ horse and cart; 23 days, at $1.75_______ horse and cart, 1202 days, at $1.75___=_ horse and cart, Gays; aie spilevoe $6306. 516. EB we (eo lod ( 999 OO, 365. 441. 293 548. ie 445, 163. 519.3 A492. LAIIL XIV REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Wages of mechanics and laborers, ete.—Cont’d. 1! horse and cart, 322 days, at $ijb222 223 SANio Bill 1 horse and cart, 734 days, at $1.75______ 128, 63 1 horse and eart, 15$ days, at $1.75______ PA (es 33.6) i horse; 337 days, at 50 cents=2-2 == 168. 50 Rotaliwacesror mechanics wet Cae $30, 042. 52 abo ie sghis oynbneKespaverncs) — ee a US Balance: duly de 19042 e028 ae ee 14, 484. 97 NATIONAL ZOOLOGICAL PARK, 1908. 1s¥nilenaves dfmmilhy il, TSYOR}. ay pysre JASE TREVOR ee $4, 755. 04 DISBURSEMENTS. General expenses : Billings, Sls fea eS eee eee $104. TO Men cin es CAS ew Nate Teall ey CC ee ee eee 829. 89 RO0d:, = 5s2: 222 sie Boe be aes ee ee eee 1, 246. 29 Hreight and transportation of animals==— 92922 = = 370. 50 ATUL ee, 2 2a eee re a ae 2 Ee a 546. SO urn GUnel, So SS es ee a en i ee ee ee 3. 50 ILM bei See es Se ee Oe ee 301. 52 Machinery cools met@s== === 22 = eine Peo eee 170. 31 MMR Cee hae ONS! SinyooihiGts ee ee 252. 42 PATTIES MOUS eu ESS Ce G eee rs a ene ee Goyal Postage, telegraph, and telephone______________ EteRe~ 87. 67 Purchaserofcanimalss se: = Se 2 ae Sa ee eee 160. 13 JeoRGl auaueerael Phavol Caceiehhaye oe 179. 46 Stalon ery books eC aeaseeee es a ee 60. 65 oan Gs, Se ER ee a Ee ee ee 53. 30 ‘TBreess plants. Cle. s24 2 Shes Sk 22 SE eee ee (6 335) Wiaiter Supply ands Se wie ia ge anes es ee eee 109. 42 Speciali@servicest= = 2)" = ee ee eee 2. 00 MNotalyGdisbursenie risen et eS eee 4, 551. 42 Balance July-4l, 1904-222 eee eee eae ee ee ee 208. 62 NATIONAL ZOOLOGICAL PARK, 1902. eM ehaeer a hphyells TIGRE fs) joer Iie me oop. 8 $7. 26 Balance carried, under provisions of Revised Statutes, section 3090, by the Treasury Department to the credit of the surplus fund June 30, 1904. ELEPHANT HOUSE, NATIONAL ZOOLOGICAL PARK, 1903. Balance July, LO0S aspen laStane po tte ee ees $64. 40 DISBURSEMENTS. General expenses : Building materiales 2 eee ee eee ae eee 927. 09 Weneim ois eta Le i ee ee ee Ee ere ee ee hae 36. 77 Total disbunSemvenvts ss 2 oo See eee ey ae ee uo ee 63. 86 Balance Julyeds T90tse 228 os 28k ac a ee ee a eee . 4 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. LXV RECAPITULATION. i The total amount of funds administered by the Institution during the year ending June 30, 1904, appears frony the foregoing statements and account books to have been as follows: SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. Hrom balance of last year, July 1, 19032__--_________- $55, 507. 67 From interest on Smithsonian fund for the year_______ 56, OTA. 17 From interest on West Shore bonds_-________________ 1, G80. 00 Bromysalessob.publicahlonsee 22 = 2s See Sy Dl rom repayments. tre1ehty ets. == = ee ea 10, 328. 02 $1238, 943. 23 APPROPRIATIONS COMMITTED BY CONGRESS TO THE CARE OF THE INSTITUTION. International Hxchanges—Smithsonian Institution : Hrom’ balance of 1901—2-—_--__ __= a ie a, A ae $0. 88 [Brtovaol: Joy evayeey Cin. SIR ae ee eee 1, 822. 14 Hron appropriauon for (90340 ses ee ee 26, 000. 00 27, 823. 02 American Ethnology—Smithsonian Institution : ]reoan joven akerey Crean Soe PPADS FET Home balanceroty, d902=342) 55 2a NS ee Pea 3, 489. 99 Hrom: dppropLiavionr ton 903 =e see ee 40, 000. 00 ———_———_ 48, 710. 76 Preservation of collections—National Museum : ROME Dal ance: ose OO l= 2a ee ee ee eee 159. 16 ]Mitonany “| oyslleuaversy Cope! ale\) PA aio a eee 9, 597. 20 Hrom appropriations tor LQ03=— ees Se eee et 180, 000. 00 ———_—— 189, 756. 36 Furniture and fixtures—National Museum : Bromabalancer of O01 =—2e- ee ee ee ee 5. OT From balance of 1902-—3_—~_____ Ie pens Sah ee 1, 696. 24. HrOMPeappropriation for 190342222 eae eee ee 22, 500. 00 24, 201. 31 Heating and lighting—National Museum : Hromebalance of elOQl= 2 Ss ee 1. 60 From balance of 1902-3____- Ree Mba ADE Ca ee eet aes 1, 962. 638 Kromvappropriavion® for V903—4 ess 18, 000. 00 2 19, 964. 23 Postage—National Museum : MrOMeapPLOpLIaAvion fon 1 O03—-= sae a es ee ee ee ee 500. 00 Printing and binding—National Museum: From appropriation for 1903—4____._________ REE Ra MOR el at 17, 000. 00 Rent of workshops—National Museum : jieogaay Joyey bau overesroe 1 tS\0 Ly re ee ee ee O08 HrommbalamcesotnlOO2= 3 seme ce ee eee ee a 08 Hromeappropriawon for lO03—2 a= ses eee 4, 400. 00 ————— 4, 400. 16 Building repairs—National Musewn : From balance of 1901—2_____ secede PS RIE ee CRE ae 2.23 HroOmenalance. Of 1902-32" 2. == == Sees eee Ze 1, 528. 97 From appropriation for 1903—4___-____--_-____- — 15, 000. 00 —————— 16, 556. 20 sm 1904——v LXVI REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. Galleries—National Museum: lias apvenaveer dou tl, wR Books—National Museum: Jadoo LOREM Cpe I Oni — es $198. 27 Hromebalaneceioi 902-32 = a eee 606. 62 Prom appropriation for 1903—-42_ === 2, 000. 00 Purchase of specimens—National Museum : rom balancevotelOOl— 2a a eee 55. 26 Brom balan Cegeitiesl QOD — ener ee ee 4, 000. 69 HromTappropriavlon store G05 — Aes ee eee 10, 000. 00 Contributions to National Herbarium—National Museum : Krone balancer July elke OS sass ee eee ee ee eee Plans for additional building—National Museum: Brom: balancer aly. sl: ssl OOS eee ee eee ee Astrophysical Observatory—Smithsonian Institution : rom Dalancexot e190 i 2 ees ee ee ee 1, 3238: 22 Eom) palancerof, 90 2— 3s eee eee ee i, chiles, 7Al Mrom! Appropriations Ors lOO 5 — 4 eee ae 15, 000. 00 Observation of eclipse of May 28, 1900: Krom balancer july 9032 5== == S22 Se ee ee ee eee National Zoological Park: rom balanceyotl 90-22 esas sss eee i. 26 Doren lokAeS Ort WOR s 4, 755. 04 Hromeappropriation fon 903 422. == 95, 000. 00 Elephant house—National Zoological Park: Davao oven eh avereved ful hyatals aS Oe ee SUMMARY. Simiuingrornighay 1OnSiipalOya 2 ee a ee See $128, 943. 23 Inxchanges_____ De ESE ace Se ee ee Alin tetas Hthnology --22-224. 222252 2 SS 5 ee eee 2, (10. 76 [MASE Eee Cur (COLUlecnKoOS 189, 756. 36 MUrniture ane ACIS = 2.2 aac ee a ee ee 24, 201. 31 Heating and lighting: =2- =< =e ee 19, 964. 23 Bostages.- Sneha s 2h Se ee ee ee eee 500. OO LeyemTu aes fIMvG jovMONH Nae oe ee » 17, 000. 00 Rent of -workshops2=+=.-222522 22253252.) 4, 400. 16 Building repairssss = = 242 eee 16, 556. 20 Galleries____ Bu Ses es oe eee ie ley BOOKS: -. 2S 2 teeta eek Se ee 2, 804. 89 Furchase-of speciens2—=-25-——]) ee 14, 055. 95 Contributions to National Herbariume——=-—==2 === === 3. Of2. 01 BE HNS Kope BxqKsitKoyorsll Voybuakohovee 98 ee 43. 20 Astrophysical Observatory——-~ ~~ ee ee ere ead ip lose Oo Observationvol eclipse! 222. = = 755. T4 NatlonaleZOOLOTIGH earn === a ee ei 99, 762. 30 National Zoological Park—Elephant house__—-_~ ee 64. 40 $1.17 2, 804. 89 17, 738. 93 99, 762. 30 64. 40 $607, 054. 36 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. LXVII The committee has examined the vouchers for payment from the Smithsonian income during the year ending June 30, 1904, each of which bears the approval of the Secretary or, in his absence, of the Acting Secretary, and a certificate that the materials and services charged were applied to the purposes of the Institution. The quarterly accounts current, the vouchers, and journals have been examined and found correct. Statement of regular income from the Smithsonian fund available for use in the year ending June 30, 1905. FS Ce wa Ulyg ele OO Aes se es Se ete see Se eee See re Sn $46, 648. 338 Interest due and receivable July 1, 1904___-___________ $28, 110. 00 Interest due and receivable January 1, 1905___________ 28, 110. 00 Interest, West Shore Railroad bonds, due July 1, 1904__ 840. 00 Interest, West Shore Railroad bonds, due January 1, 1 UD, See ee ee seen Ee Se a RE ee OS 840. 00 ————— 57,900. 00 Total available for year ending June 30, 1905_______________ 104, 548. 33 Respectfully submitted. J. B. Henperson, ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, Rosert R. Hrrv, Executive Committee. WasuineTon, D. C., January 21, 1905. ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS RELATIVE TO THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION ETC, {Continued from previous Reports.] [Fifty-eighth Congress, second session.] SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, Vhat the vacancies in the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, of the class other than Members of Congress, shall be filled by the reappointment of John B. Henderson and Alexander Graham Bell, residents of the city of Washington, whose terms of office expire on January twenty- fourth, nineteen hundred and four. (Approved January 27, 1904; Statutes, XX XITI, 582.) SMITHSONIAN Deposir [Lisrary or Coneress|.—For custodian, one thousand five hundred dollars; assistant, one thousand two hun- dred dollars; messenger, seven hundred and twenty dollars; mes- senger boy, three hundred and sixty dollars; in all, three thousand seven hundred and eighty dollars. (Approved March 18, 1904; Statutes, XX XITT, 95.) Excuance or Pusiic Documents | Liprary or Coneress |.—For expenses of exchanging public documents for the publications of foreign governments, one thousand eight hundred dollars. (Ap- proved March 18, 1904; Statutes, XX XIIT, 96.) INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES. For expenses of the system of international exchanges between the United States and foreign countries, under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employees, and the purchase of necessary books and _peri- odicals, twenty-seven thousand dollars, and for the fiscal year nine- LXIx LXxX ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. teen hundred and six estimates shall be submitted hereunder em- bracing all sums expended for this service out of other appropria- tions made by Congress. (Approved April 28, 1904; Statutes, XXXITI, 461.) Navan Opservarory.—For repairs to buildings, fixtures, and fences, furniture, gas, chemicals, and stationery, freight (including transmission of public documents through the Smithsonian ex- change), foreign postage, and expressage, plants, fertilizers, and all contingent expenses, two thousand five hundred dollars. (Approved March 18, 1904; Statutes, XX XIII, 120.) BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. For continuing ethnological researches among the American In- dians under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employees and the purchase of necessary books and periodicals, forty thousand dollars, of which sum not exceeding one thousand five hundred dollars may be used for rent of building. (Approved April 28, 1904; Statutes, XX XITT, 461.) That the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution is hereby author- ized to apply any unexpended balance of the appropriation “Ameri- can Ethnology, Smithsonian Institution,” for the fiscal year ending June thirtieth, nineteen hundred and three, to the payment of labil- ties existing against the appropriations “American Ethnology, Smith- sonian Institution,” for the fiscal years ending June thirtieth, nine- teen hundred and one and nineteen hundred and two, respectively, and the same is hereby reappropriated and made available for ex- penditure for the purpose herein mentioned. (Approved April 27, 1904; Statutes X XXIII, 397.) Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That hereafter the bulletins issued by the Bureau of American Ethnology shall be in octavo size instead of royal octavo. (Approved March 29, 1904; Statutes, XXXIIT, 585.) ASTROPHYSICAL OBSERVATORY. For maintenance of Astrophysical Observatory, under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries of assistants, the purchase of necessary books and periodicals, apparatus, making nec- essary observations in high altitudes, printing and publishing results of researches, not exceeding one thousand five hundred copies, repairs ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. LXXI and alterations of buildings and miscellaneous expenses, fifteen thou- sand dollars. (Approved April 28, 1904; Statutes, X XXIII, 461.) NATIONAL MUSEUM. For cases, furniture, fixtures, and applhances required for the exhi- bition and safe-keeping of the collections of the National Museum, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employees, twenty- two thousand five hundred dollars. For expense of heating, lighting, electrical, telegraphic, and _tele- phonic service for the National Museum, eighteen thousand dollars. For continuing the preservation, exhibition, and increase of the col- lections from the surveying and exploring expeditions of the Govern- ment, and from other sources, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employees, one hundred and eighty thousand dollars, of which sum five thousand five hundred dollars may be used for necessary drawings and illustrations for publications of the National Museum, and all other necessary incidental expenses. For purchase of books, pamphlets, and periodicals for reference in the National Museum, two thousand dollars. For repairs to buildings, shops, and sheds, National Museum, in- cluding all necessary labor and material, fifteen thousand dollars. For rent of workshops and temporary storage quarters for the Na- tional Museum, four thousand five hundred and eighty dollars. For postage stamps and foreign postal cards for the National Mu- seum, five hundred dollars. (Approved April 28, 1904; Statutes XX XIII, 461, 462.) For the Smithsonian Institution, for printing labels and blanks, and for the “ Bulletins” and “ Proceedings” of the National Mu- seum, the editions of which shall not be less than three thousand copies, and binding, in half turkey or material not more expensive, scientific books and pamphlets presented to and acquired by the National Museum library, twenty-five thousand dollars. (Approved April 28, 1904; Statutes X X XITT, 512.) NATIONAL ZOOLOGICAL PARK. For continuing the construction of roads, walks, bridges, water sup- ply, sewerage, and drainage; and for grading, planting, and other- wise improving the grounds; erecting and repairing buildings and inclosures and providing seats in the park; care, subsistence, pur- chase, and transportation of animals; including salaries or compensa- tion of all necessary employees, the purchase of necessary books and periodicals, the printing and publishing of operations, not exceeding LX XII ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. one thousand five hundred copies, and general incidental expenses not otherwise provided for, ninety-five thousand dollars, one-half of which sum shall be paid from the revenues of the District of Columbia and the other half from the Treasury of the United States. (Ap- proved April 28, 1904; Statutes, XX XITT, 462. POWER HOUSE FOR PUBLIC BUILDINGS. For the preparation, by the superintendent of the library building and grounds, of preliminary plans and estimates of cost for the loca- tion, construction, and equipment of a power house with distributing mains for heat, steam, and electric power to the existing and projected Government buildings on the Mall and in the vicinity of the White House, said superintendent to report thereon in full to Congress at its next session, five thousand dollars. (Approved April 28, 1904; Statutes, X X XIII, 511.) LETTERING OF OFFICIAL VEHICLES. No part of any money appropriated by this or any other act shall be available for paying expenses of horses and carriages, or drivers therefor, for the personal use of any officer provided for by this or any other act other than the President of the United States, the heads of Executive Departments, and the Secretary to the President: Pvo- vided, That this provision shall not apply to officials outside of the District of Columbia in the performance of their public duties. This paragraph shall not take effect until July first (nineteen hundred and four. (Approved March 18, 1904; Statutes, XX XIII, 142.) No part of any money appropriated by this act shall be used for purchase, maintaining, driving, or operating any carriage or other vehicle, other than those authorized for personal purposes in section two of the legislative, executive, and judicial approprtation act for the fiscal year nineteen hundred and five, unless the same shall have conspicuously painted thereon at all times the full name of the Execu- tive Department or other branch of the public service to which the same belong and in the service of which the same are used. (Ap- proved April 28, 1904; Statutes, XX XITI, 518.) SALARY PAY TABLE. That the annual compensation of officers, agents, and employees of the United States for services rendered subsequent to June thirtieth, nineteen hundred and four, shall be divided into twelve equal install- ments, one of which shall be the pay for each calendar month; and in making payments for a fractional part of a month, one-thirtieth of ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. LXXIIl one of such installments, or of a monthly compensation, shall be the rate to be paid for each day. For the purpose of computing such compensation each and.every month shall be held to consist of thirty days, without regard to the acttial number of days in any month, thus excluding the thirty-first day of any month from the computation, and treating February as if it actually had thirty days. (Approved April 28, 1904; Statutes, XX XIII, 513.) RENT OF WORKSHOPS, LOUISIANA PURCHASE EXPOSITION. GOVERNMENT Boarp, Lourstana PurcHAse Exposrrion: The act of Congress approved June twenty-eighth, nineteen hundred and two, entitled “An act making appropriations for sundry civil expenses of the Government for the fiscal year ending June thirtieth, nineteen hundred and three, and for other purposes,” is hereby amended by inserting at the end and asa part of the paragraph making an appro- priation of eight hundred thousand dollars for a Government exhibit at the Lowisiana Purchase Exposition to be held in the city of Saint Louis, in the State of Missouri, the following words: “Provided fur- ther, That the said United States Government Board is authorized to rent such workshops and storage and office rooms in the District of Columbia as may be required for temporary use in connection with the preparation and safe-keeping of the said Government exhibit.” And the accounting officers of the Treasury Department are hereby authorized to allow any reasonable expense heretofore incurred by said Government Board im the rental of workshops and storage and office rooms in the District of Columbia for the purpose named. (Approved February 18, 1904; Statutes, XX XITI, 19.) LEWIS AND- CLARK CENTENNIAL EXPOSITION. AN ACT to authorize the Government of the United States to participate in celebrating the one hundredth anniversary of the exploration of the Oregon country by Captains Meriwether Lewis and William Clark in the years eight- een hundred and four, eighteen hundred and five, and eighteen hundred and six, and for other purposes. Whereas by an act duly passed by the legislature of the State of Oregon, approved January thirtieth, nineteen hundred and three, said State authorized the holding at the city of Portland, Oregon, commencing May first, nineteen hundred and five, and ending November first, nineteen hundred and five, an industrial exposition to appropriately celebrate the one hundredth anniversary of the exploration of the Oregon country by Captains Meriwether Lewis and William Clark, and “ by means of said exhibition to benefit the people of the State of Oregon by way of the advertisement and development of its agricultural, horticultural, mineral, lumber, manu- . LXXIV ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. facturing, shipping, educational, and other resources ” of said State; and Whereas under and by virtue of said act of the legislature of the State of Oregon a commission consisting of eleven members, residents and inhabitants of said State, was authorized and appointed, known and designated as the Lewis and Clark Centennial Exposition Com- mission, and the Lewis and Clark Centennial and American Pacific Exposition and Oriental Fair, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of said State, have jointly undertaken the inaugura- tion of the Lewis and Clark Centennial Exposition at said city of Portland, to be held under the joint supervision, control, and man- agement of said commission and corporation, as provided by said act; and Whereas a number of States have enacted laws for and appropri- ated money to enable them to participate in said exposition, and other States have signified their intention of so doing, and satisfactory assurances have been given by representatives of foreign governments that their governments will make interesting and instructive exhibits at said exposition illustrative of their material progress during the past century, and it 1s believed that the commerce of the United States in oriental and oceanic countries will be materially aided and devel- oped by such exposition: Now, therefore, for the purpose of contrib- uting to the success of said exposition and enabling our insular posses- sions and also oriental and oceanic countries to exhibit of their prod- ucts and resources at said exposition, Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That all articles that shall be imported from foreign countries for the sole purpose of exhi- bition at said exposition upon which there shall be a tariff or customs duty shall be admitted free of the payment of duty, customs fees, or charges, under such regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe; but it shall be lawful at any time during the exposition to sell for delivery at the close thereof any goods or property imported for and actually on exhibition in the exposition buildings or on the grounds, subject to such regulations for the security of the revenue and for the collection of import duties as the Secretary of the Treas- ury may prescribe: Provided, That all such articles when sold or withdrawn for consumption in the United States shall be subject to the duty, 1f any, imposed upon such articles by the revenue laws in force at the date of withdrawal, and on articles which shall have suf- fered diminution or deterioration from incidental handling and neces- sary exposure the duty, if paid, shall be assessed according to the appraised value at the time of withdrawal for consumption, and the penalties prescribed by law shall be enforced against any person guilty of any illegal sale or withdrawal. ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. LXXV Sec. 2. That there shall be exhibited at said exposition by the Government of the United States from its Executive Departments, the Smithsonian Institution, the National Museum, and the Library of Congress such articles and material as illustrate the function and administrative faculty of the Government in time of peace and its resources as a war power, tending to demonstrate the nature of our institutions and their adaptation to the wants of the people; and the Bureau of American Republics is hereby invited to make an exhibit illustrative of the resources and international relations of the Amert- ean Repubhes, and space in the United States Government building shall be provided for that purpose, and to secure a complete and har- monious arrangement of such Government exhibit a United States Government board shall be created, whose duty it shall be to select from the Government exhibit to be made by such Executive Depart- ments at the city of Saint Louis, at the Louisiana Purchase Exposi- tion, in the year nineteen hundred and four, such articles and things as they may deem advisable, and transport the same to the city of Port- land, Oregon, to be there exhibited as a part of the Government exhibit at said exposition; and said United States Government board shall also be charged with the selection, purchase, preparation, trans- portation, arrangement, safe-keeping, exhibition, and return of such additional articles and materials as the heads of the several depart- ments, the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, the Director of the National Museum, the Librarian of Congress, and the Director of the Bureau of American Republics may respectively decide shall be embraced in said Government exhibit. And said Government board is hereby authorized to rent and use such building or buildings in the District of Columbia as may be necessary in the preparation of said exhibit. The President of the United States may also desig- nate additional articles for exhibition. Such Government board shal! be composed of one person to be named by the head of each of the Executive Departments, one by the head of the Smithsonian Institu- tion and National Museum, one by the Librarian of Congress, and one by the Director of the Bureau of American Republics. The Presi- dent shall name one of said persons so detailed as chairman, and the board itself shall appoint its secretary, disbursing officer, and such other officers as it may deem necessary. The members of said Gov- ernment board, with other officers and employees of the Government who may be detailed to assist them, including officers of the Army and Navy, shall receive no compensation in addition to their regular salaries, but they shall be allowed their actual and necessary trav- eling expenses, together with a per diem in lieu of subsistence, to be fixed by the Secretary of the Treasury, while necessarily absent from their homes engaged upon the business of the board. Officers of the Army and Navy shall receive said allowance in lieu of the subsistence . LXXVI ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. and mileage now allowed by law; and the Secretary of War and the Secretary of the Navy may, in their discretion, detail retired army or navy officers for such duty. Any provision of law which may prohibit the detail of persons in the employ of the United States to other service than that which they customarily perform shall not apply to persons detailed for duty in connection with said Lewis and Clark Centen- nial Exposition. Employees of the board not otherwise employed by the Government shall be entitled to such compensation as the board may determine, and such employees may be selected and appointed by said board. The disbursing officer shall give bond in such sum as the Secretary of the Treasury may determine for the faithful performance of his duties, said bond to be approved by ‘said Sec- retary. The Secretary of the Treasury shall advance to said ofh- cer from time to time, under such regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe, a sum of money from the appro- priation for the Government exhibit herein authorized, not exceed- ing at any one time three-fourths of the penalty of his bond, to enable him to pay the expenses of said exhibit as authorized by the United States Government board herein created: Provided, That so much of the Government exhibit herein authorized as relates to forestry and irrigation shall be made in a separate building. to be erected as hereinafter provided for that purpose, and said buuild- ing shall be known as the forestry and irrigation building, and shall be of sufficient size to accommodate forestry exhibits other than the United States forestry exhibits: And provided further, That the cost of said exhibit herein authorized, including the selection, purchase, preparation, transportation, arrangement, safe-keeping, exhibition, and return of the articles and materials so exhibited, including the forestry and irrigation exhibit, and for rent of building or buildings in the District of Columbia, shall not exceed the sum of two hundred thousand dollars, which amount is hereby appropri- ated out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated. Src. 3. That the Secretary of the Interior is hereby authorized to aid the inhabitants of the district of Alaska in providing and main- taining an appropriate and creditable exhibit of the products and resources of said district at the said Lewis and Clark Centennial Exposition, and for that purpose he is authorized to appoint one or more persons to supervise the selection, purchase, preparation, trans portation, arrangement, installation, safe-keeping, exhibition, and return of such articles as may be exhibited from said district at said exposition; and he is hereby authorized to select so much of the exhibit of the district of Alaska at the Louisiana Purchase Exposi- tion at the city of Saint Louis, in the year nineteen hundred and four, as he may deem necessary for the purpose of making said exhibit at ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. LXXVII the Lewis and Clark Centennial Exposition, and that the cost of said exhibit of said district of Alaska, including such selection, purchase, preparation, transportation, arrangement, installation, safe-keeping, exhibition, and return of the articles so exhibited shall not exceed the sum of twenty-five thousand dollars, which sum is hereby appro- priated out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appro- priated. Sec. 4. That the Secretary of the Treasury shall cause a suitable building or buildings to be erected on the site selected for the Lewis and Clark Centennial Exposition for the said Government exhibit, including a suitable building for’an exhibit of the United States Life- Saving Service, the forestry and irrigation building herein referred to, and also cause to be erected a suitable building or buildings on said site for the use of the district of Alaska, the Territory of Hawai, the Philippine Islands, and also oriental and oceanic countries that may desire an exhibit of their products and resources at said expo- sition. Said buildings shall be erected from plans prepared by the Supervising Architect of the Treasury, to be approved by said United States Government board; and the Secretary of the Treasury is hereby authorized and directed to contract for said buildings in the same manner and under the same regulations as for other public buildings of the United States, but the contract for said buildings and the preparation of grounds therefor and the lighting thereof, inclusive, shall not exceed the sum of two hundred and fifty thousand dollars, which sum is hereby appropriated out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated. The Secretary of the Treasury is authorized and required to dispose of said buildings, or the mate- rials composing the same, at the close of the exposition, giving prefer- ence to the city of Portland, or to the said Lewis and Clark Centen- mal and American and Pacific Exposition and Oriental Fair cor- poration, to purchase the same at an appraised value to be ascertained in such manner as the Secretary of the Treasury may determine. Sec. 5. That the allotment of space for exhibitors in the building or buildings erected under authority of this act for the use of the dis- trict of Alaska, the Territory of Hawan, the Philippine Islands, and also for the use of oriental and oceanic countries, including the space not occupied by the Government board in the forestry and irrigation building, shall be done and performed without charge to exhibitors by the Government board authorized by section two of this act. Sec. 6. That upon the approval of this act the Secretary of the Treasury shall, upon the request of the Lewis and Clark Centennial and American Pacific Exposition and Oriental Fair Company, cause to be coined at the mints of the United States not to exceed two hun- dred and fifty thousand gold dollars, of legal weight and fineness, to LXXVIII ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. be known as the Lewis and Clark Exposition gold dollar, struck in commemoration of said exposition. The words, devices, and designs upon said gold dollars shall be determined and prescribed by the See- retary of the Treasury, and all provisions of law relative to the coin- age and legal-tender quality of all other gold coin shall be applicable to the coin issued under and in accordance with the provisions of this act. That the said coins shall be disposed of by the Secretary of the Treasury to the said Lewis and Clark Centennial and American Pa- cific Exposition and Oriental Fair Company at par, under rules and regulations and in amounts to be prescribed by him. That medals with appropriate devices, emblems, and inscriptions commemorative of said Lewis and Clark Centennial Exposition and of the awards to be made to the exhibitors thereat shall be prepared by the Secretary of the Treasury at some mint of the United States for the board of directors of said exposition company, subject to the provisions of the fifty-second section of the coinage act of eighteen hundred and ninety- three, and upon the payment of a sum not less than the cost thereof; and all provisions, whether penal or otherwise, of said coinage act against the counterfeiting or imitating of coins of the United States shall apply to the medals issued under this act. Src. 7. That the United States shall not be Hable on account of said exposition for any expense incident to or growing out of the same except for the construction of the building or buildings hereinbefore authorized and for the purpose of paying the expense incident to the selection, preparation, purchase, installation, transportation, care, custody, and safe return of the exhibits made by the Government, and for the employment of proper persons as officers and assistants by the Government board created by this act and for other expenses, and for the maintenance of said building or buildings and other con- tingent expenses, to be approved by the chairman of the Government board, or, in the event of his absence or disability, by such officer as the board may designate, and the Secretary of the Treasury, upon itemized accounts and vouchers: Provided, That no lability against the Government shall be incurred and no expenditure of money ap- propriated by this act shall be made until the officers of said exposi- tion shall have furnished to the satisfaction of the Secretary of the Treasury proof that there has been obtained for the purpose of com- pleting and opening said exposition bona fide subscriptions to the stock of said exposition company by responsible parties, contributions, donations, or appropriations, from all sources, a sum aggregating not less than six hundred thousand dollars. Src. 8. That the United States shall not in any manner or under any circumstances be liable for any of the acts, doings, or repre- sentations of said Lewis and Clark Centennial and American Pacific ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. LXXIX Exposition and Oriental Fair, or the commission created by the act of the legislature of the State of Oregon, herein referred to, their officers, agents, servants, or eniployees, or any of them, or for service, salaries, labor, or wages of said officers, agents, servants, or employees, or any of them, or for any subscriptions to the capital stock, or for any stock certificates, bonds, mortgages, or obligations of any kind issued by said corporation or said commission, or for any debts, Ha- bilities, or expenses of any kind or nature whatever attending such exposition corporation or commission, or accruing by reason of the same, Sec. 9. That nothing in this act shall be construed so as to create any lability upon the part of the United States, direct or indirect, for any debt or obhgation incurred, or for any claim for aid or pecuniary assistance from Congress or the Treasury of the United States in support or liquidation of any debts or obligations created by said United States Government board in excess of appropriations hereafter made by Congress therefor. (Approved, April 13, 1904; Statutes, XX XIII, 175. Roe O Ree OF Se Ps EANGEEY, SECRETARY OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, FOR THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1904. To the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution. GENTLEMEN: I have the honor to present herewith my report, show- ing the operations of the Institution during the year ending June 30, 1904, including the work placed under its direction by Congress in the United States National Museum, the Bureau of American Ethnology, the International Exchanges, the National Zoological Park, and the Astrophysical Observatory. Following the precedent of several years, there is given, in the body of this report, a general account of the affairs of the Institution and its bureaus, while the Appendix presents more detailed statements by the persons in direct charge of the different branches of the work. Independently of this, the operations of the National Museum are fully treated in a separate volume of the Smithsonian Report, and the Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology constitutes a volume prepared under the supervision of the Chief of that Bureau. The scientific work of the Astrophysical Observatory is recorded in occa- sional publications. THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. THE ESTABLISHMENT. By act of Congress approved August LO, 1846, the Smithsonian Institution was created an Establishment. Its statutory members are the President, the Vice-President, the Chief Justice of the United States, and the heads of the Executive Departments. The preroga- tive of the Establishment is ‘‘the supervision of the affairs of the Institution and the advice and the instruction of the Board of Regents.” sm 1904——1 1 bo REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. A vacancy continues to exist in the Establishment caused by the succession to the Presidency of Vice-President Roosevelt. As organized on June 30, 1904, the Establishment consisted of the following ex officio members: THEopoRE RooskEvELt, President of the United States. (Vacancy), Vice-President of the United States. Mecvitte W. Futier, Chief Justice of the United States. JoHN Hay, Secretary of Siate. Leste M. Suaw, Secretary of the Treasury. Witiram H. Tart, Secretary of War. PuHILANDER C. Knox, Attorney-General. Henry C. Payne, Postmaster- General. Wituram H. Moopy, Secretary of the Navy. Ernan AtLen Hircncock, Secretary of the Interior. JAMES Witson, Secretary of Agriculture. GrorGE B. Cortetyou, Secretory of Commerce and Labor. ORGANIZATION OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. The Board of Regents consists of the Vice-President and the Chief Justice of the United States as ex officio members, three members of the Senate, three members of the House of Representatives, and six citizens, ‘‘two of whom shall be residents of the city of Washington and the other four shall be inhabitants of some State, but no two of them of the same State.’ As organized at the end of the fiscal year, the Board consisted of the following members: The Hon. M. W. Fuller, Chief Justice of the United States, Chan- cellor; the Hon. W. P. Frye, President pro tempore of the United States Senate, acting as Regent; Senator S. M. Cullom; Senator O. H. Platt; Senator Francis M. Cockrell; Representative R. R. Hitt; Rep- resentative Robert Adams, jr.; Representative Hugh A. Dinsmore; Dr. James B. Angell, of Michigan; Dr. Andrew D. White, of New York; the Hon. J. B. Henderson, of Washington City; Prof. A. Gra- ham Bell, of Washington City; the Hon. Richard Olney, of Massachu- setts, and the Hon. George Gray, of Delaware. MEETINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. At a meeting of the Board of Regents held March 12, 1903, the fol- lowing resolution was adopted: ** Resolved, That in addition to the prescribed meeting held on the fourth Wednesday in January, regular meetings of the Board shall be held on the Tuesday after the frat Monday in December and on the 6th day of March, unless that date falls on Sunday, when the follow- ing Monday shall be substituted.” REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 3 In accordance with, the above resolution the Board met on Decem- ber 8, 1903, January 27, 1904, and March 7, 1904. The following is an abstract: 6f its proceedings, which latter will be found in the annual report of the Board to Congress: Regular meeting of December 8, 1903. Senator Platt and the Chancellor made statements with regard to the new building for the National Museum, and the Secretary read a report which showed that with the advice and consent of the Chancellor and the chairman of the executive committee, as required by the resolution of the Board adopted March 12, 1903, a contract had been made, under date of May 18, 1903, with Messrs. Hornblower & Marshall, architects, of Washington, D. C., for the necessary architectural services. With regard to the special report of the executive committee as sub- mitted by Doctor Bell, and the report of the special committee which was read at length by the Chancellor, the Board, after discussion, adopted resolutions providing for the printing of these reports and their dis- tribution to the members of the Board. The Secretary presented the compilation of laws which had heen prepared in accordance with a resolution offered by Senator Cockrell at the meeting of March 12, 1903, and the manuscript was referred to Senator Cockrell for his examination and decision as to printing. The Secretary read letters from the Hon. William Henry Bishop, United States consul at Genoa, Italy, and from the committee of the British burial ground fund, explaining the urgency of action with regard to the removal of the remains of James Smithson. Doctor Bell renewed the proposition which he made at the last meeting that the remains of Smithson be brought to this country at his expense, and after discussion the Board adopted the following resolutions: ** Resolved, That Dr. A. Graham Bell be appointed as a committee to take charge of the matter of the removal of the remains of -lames Smithson from Genoa to Washington, with the request that the nego- tiations and removal be conducted quietly and privately. ** Resolved, That upon the conclusion of this duty all expenses in- volved by it be reimbursed to Doctor Bell from the funds of the Institution.” OT ANNUAL MEETING OF JANUARY 27, 1904. The Secretary announced that on January 12 the Speaker of the House had reappointed Representatives Hitt, Adams, and Dinsmore as Regents for two years; and also that Senator Henderson and Dr. A. Graham Bell had been reappointed’ for a term of six years by joint resolution approved by the President January 27, 1904. The usual resolution relative to income and expenditure was adopted, and the Secretary presented his annual report of the operations of the 4 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Institution and its several dependencies for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1903. The Board adopted the annual report of the executive committee to the same date, showing in detail the financial condition of the Institu- tion. Senator Henderson, chairman of the permanent committee, made statements in regard to the proposed bequests of Addison T. Reid and Joseph White Sprague; also concerning the will of Wallace C. Andrews, and the present status of the Hodgkins and Avery funds. He further reported upon the expenditures incurred by the Secretary since the last annual meeting, in continuing his experiments in mechanical flight under the authority of the Board. The Secretary made a statement concerning the publications in preparation by the Institution and also with regard to aerodromic experiments carried on by him. He reported that Congress, under a clause of the sundry civil act, approved March 3, 1903, had authorized the erection of a new build- ing for the National Museum at a cost not to exceed $3,500,000. He spoke of the work of the Bureau of American Ethnology and of his efforts to place the Bureau upon a sound administrative footing. He recalled previous efforts to secure a law for the protection of antiquities on the public domain, and urged present action. The Board thereupon adopted a resolution to that effect. The Secretary reported upon the work of the International Exchanges, the National Zoological Park, and the Astrophysical Observatory. ‘The report of the special committee to consider the question of defining the duties of the executive committee was submitted by the Chancellor, but action thereupon was deferred until the meeting of March 7. At the evening session of this meeting Dr. A. Graham Bell sub- mitted in full his report upon the removal of James Smithson’s remains from Genoa to Washington, which is on file with the records of the Board and a lengthy abstract of which will be found on page 7. After remarks, the Board adopted the following resolutions: ‘© Resolved, That the Board of Regents desire to record in the min- utes of the Institution their profound appreciation of the voluntary service of Dr. Alexander Graham Bell in personally going to Genoa and returning with the remains of James Smithson that they might find a resting place in the grounds of the Institution he so nobly founded ‘for the increase and diffusion of knowledge among men.’ © Resolved, That the Chanceilor and the Secretary, with the members of the executive committee, be appointed a committee upon the ques- tion of the final disposition of the remains of James Smithson and of the monument to be erected to him, with power to act in the entire matter,” Or REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. REGULAR MEETING OF MARCH 7, 1904. The Chancellor read .in “full the report of the special committee appointed to consider the question of defining the powers of the executive committee, which was very fully discussed and adopted. Doctor Bell then read the special report of the executive committee as presented by him at the meeting of December 8, 1903. After dis- cussion the Board adopted Senator Cullom’s motion that action on the report be indefinitely postponed. The report of the special committee on the disposition of the remains of James Smithson, in which it was recommended that a fitting tomb should be erected in the grounds of the Institution and that Congress be requested to make an adequate appropriation for it, was submitted. After remarks the report was adopted with the understanding that the committee was to pursue the subject still further. The Secretary brought before the Board the matter of the will of the late Harriet Lane Johnston, who left a number of paintings to the Corcoran Gallery of Art until a national gallery of art should be estab- lished by the Government. The Corcoran Gallery had declined the pictures under these conditions, and the Secretary had been addressed with regard to the probability of the Government establishing such a gallery of art under the Smithsonian Institution. The matter was referred to the executive committee. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. The Institution has been for more than half a century one of the most important agencies in the intellectual life of the American people. It has furnished a center for workers in every department of scientific and educational activity, and it has been the chief agency for the free exchange of books, apparatus of research, and of scientific intelligence between this and other countries. Its publications, which include more than 250 volumes, are to be found in all of the important libraries of the world, and some of them on the work table of every scientific investigator. Its library constitutes an important part of the Library of Congress, and its museum is the rarest in existence in many branches of the natural history and ethnology of the New World. For nearly sixty years it has been in constant cooperation with the Government, with public institutions, and with individuals in every enterprise, scientific or educational, which needed its advice, support, oraid. ‘The appreciation of the work of the Institution by the Ameri- can people is best testified by their representatives in Congress. This has been clearly demonstrated through many successive terms regard- less of political change; by the judgement with which their representa- tives upon the Board of Regents are selected; by the care by which they protect the Institution in its freedom from political entangle- 6 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. ments; by the discrimination with which the reports are distributed, and by numerous evidences of interest and liberality. The objects of the Institution were defined by the founder in the broadest possible terms, and interpreted by its first Secretary, Joseph Henry, in the words ‘‘to assist men of science in making original researches, to publish them in a series of volumes, and to give a copy of them to every first-class library on the face of the earth.” While the field has been of necessity narrowed from time to time, or diverted in first one direction and then another, the breadth of scope has never been narrowed. ‘That many of the efforts have grown so large as to require either direct support of the Government by the establishment of independent bureaus, finally coming under the direction of the Executive Departments, or aid to agencies which continue under the direction of the Institution, though sustained by Congressional appro- priation, is but a further evidence of the fact that the charter of the Institution has been adhered to both in the spirit and in the letter. The United States Weather Bureau, the Geological Survey, the Fish Commission, and the National Herbarium grew out of its earlier activi ties, and the National Museum, the International Exchanges, the Bureau of American Ethnology, the Zoological Park, and the Astro- physical Observatory are still directed by it. It led the way in the organization of library work in the United States; it took the initial steps and continues to support schemes for international cataloguing, and it maintains a benevolent relation with the American Historical Association and the National Society of the Daughters of the Ameri- can Revolution. Sixty years ago it was relatively the best endowed scientific institu- tion in the United States and one of two or three of national scope. The magnificent endowments in this time of so many universities and colleges have changed this relationship to one of pecuniary inferiority, yet without changing the nature of the Institution’s relations to these. To the organizations aiding in the scientific advancement of the country, which advancement has in large measure contributed to the material welfare of the United States, the interests benefited thereby have in return made large endowments for original research either through the great universities and societies of the land or by the establishment of new academies, institutions, and museums. ‘To all of these the Smithsonian Institution holds out a friendly cooperation, its aim being, while continuing its own work upon its accepted lines and adapting them to new needs as occasion arises, to continue along the established policy of preventing rivalries, promoting wise cooper- ation, diminishing waste, and furthering the search for knowledge, the recording of discovered truth, and its dissemination among the people. It must at no time be forgotten, however, that the Institution, of which the Government is trustee, was not limited either by the founder REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. (l or by Congress to the people of the United States, but was designed for allmen. The spreadingabroad of the work done by scientific men in this country, the bringing to the knowledge of our own workers the researches of men of other lands, the aiding in international con- gresses which take place from time to time in various countries, the promotion, in short, of friendly relations and useful cooperation among scientific men the world over, and the advice and support to our Government in such relations wherever possible, may be counted in no small measure among the important works which the Institution is carrying on. THE REMOVAL OF THE REMAINS OF JAMES SMITHSON. The remains of James Smithson, founder of the Smithsonian Insti- tution, who died June 27, 1829, at Genoa, Italy, were deposited in the little cemetery belonging to the English church, on the heights of San Benigno, a solitary spot planted with cypress trees, and looking down upon the Gulf of Genoa. In 1891 the Secretary of the Institution visited the grave, and, with the approval of the regents, deposited with the secretary of the English church fund a small sum to invest in Italian 5 per cent rents, for its perpetual care. It was visited on two later occasions by the Secretary, who placed a bronze tablet containing a bas-relief of Smithson, in the English church,-and one also at the tomb, whence it was subsequently stolen. In previous reports mention has been made of the suggested removal of the remains of Mr. Smithson to America, in view of the probability that before many years the site of the cemetery might be required by the Italian authorities. In accordance with the resolution of the Regents adopted December 8, 1903 (see p. 3), appointing him a com- mittee to take charge of the removal of the the remains from Genoa to Washington, Dr. Alexander Graham Bell, accompanied by Mrs. Bell, sailed on the 15th of December for the port of Cherbourg in France, and going thence to Genoa, commenced at once the arrange- ments for the transfer of the remains, arrangements which would have occupied a quite indefinite time and incurred a corresponding delay except -for the aid given by the United States consul, Mr. William Henry Bishop, which Dr. Bell gladly acknowledges. On opening the tomb in the presence of Dr. Bell, the United States consul, Noel Lees, esq. (official representative of the British Burial Ground Fund Association), and other witnesses, it was found that the remains of Smithson, represented by the skeleton, were in fair preser- vation, although the wooden coffin in which they had been inclosed had molded away. The remains were placed in a metal casket and deposited in the mortuary chapel of the cemetery, where they rested until January 2, when the casket was inclosed in a coffin of strong wood and covered with the American flag by Consul Bishop. On this ‘ 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. occasion Doctor Bell, Mr. Bishop, and the other witnesses again assembled and the following remarks were made: REMARKS BY WILLIAM HENRY BISHOP, ESQ., UNITED STATES CONSUL. Dr. ALEXANDER GRAHAM Bei: You arrived here, my dear Dr. Graham Bell, charged by the Smithsonian Institution with the mission of removing to Washington the remains of the founder of that Institution, James Smithson, who has been buried till now in the cemetery where we stand since his death at Genoa in the year 1829. Having been invited by you and by the Smithsonian Institution to aid you, to what extent I might be able, in this object, it has been a matter of great pride and pleas- ure to me that I have been allowed to do so. All the steps necessary to such removal have now been taken. We have received the authorization of the governmental heads of the province, the city, and the British Burial Ground Fund, in which latter'the title to the cemetery and the custody of the grave of James Smithson are vested, and all of these have kindly cooperated with us in the work. The body of James Smithson has now been reverently raised from the earth; it has been placed in a case securely sealed, and this case stands ready to pass into the charge of the Steamship company which will convey it to New York. J assure you that it is with a feeling of real emotion that I have just now cast the American flag over the body of this illustrious man, this noble but as yet little known benefactor, as it is on the verge of beginning its journey to the United States. The flag adopts him already, as it were, in the substance, for our country, to which he has so long belonged in the spirit. He is now about to reéeive there a portion of the outward veneration and homage he so supremely merits, and which, owing to the modest circumstances of his life, and his interment here in some sense almost forgotten, he has never had. Shall I admit that on taking possession of my post as consul at Genoa I did not even know who James Smithson was? I may say that I was surprised to learn that he was buried at Genoa; more surprised still that he was an Englishman, who had never even set foot in America. He left his great bequest to the United States, then in its infancy, through admiring confidence in our future. It is likely that many, or even most, Americans are in the same condition as was I myself; for occasion has rarely arisen for taking thought as to the personality of the man. Happily this unen- lightened condition of mind is about to cease. Dr. Graham Bell, I wish you a hearty God-speed across the ocean with your precious freight. The American people will receive it with general gratification, and, through the Smithsonian Institution, will soon delight to pay it great honor. RESPONSE BY DR. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL. Mr. Consut: It is with feelings of deep emotion that I undertake the transporta- tion of the remains of James Smithson from the cemetery where they have so long reposed to their last resting place in the United States. On behalf of the Smithsonian Institution allow me to thank you, Mr. Consul, for the unwearied zeal and care with which you haye given me your assistance. With- out your active cooperation and without your personal sympathy it would have been difficult, indeed, for me to have accomplished the object of my mission here. On behalf of the Smithsonian Institution I beg to thank you, too, Mr. Noel Lees, for your courtesy and attention, and trust that you will convey to His British Majesty’s consul-general and to the committee of the British Burial Ground Fund my thanks, and the thanks of the Institution I represent, for their ready assistance in furthering my mission. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 9 The United States of America will provide, in Washington, D. C., a suitable and permanent resting place for the remains of her great benefactor, James Smithson, through the tnstrumentality of the Smithsonian Institution, the establishment created by the Government to perpetuate his name. REMARKS BY NOEL LEES, ESQ. Dr. GRAHAM Bett: I beg to thank you heartily for the words you have said with regard to the aid you have received from the burial board and myself. Although we regret to lose the remains of James Smithson, we at the same time feel that in the country to which he left his money, with such charitable intent, his remains will receive the honor and glory which have so long been due to them, and we must understand that our loss is America’s gain. To us it will always remain a pleasant memory that, from the date of his burial to the present day, we have had in our cus- tody in this picturesque little churchyard, the remains of a man whose foresight and kindness have enabled so many in the New World to benefit. On the conclusion of these remarks the remains were placed on board the steamer Pr/ncess Irene, of the North German Lloyd Com- pany, which brought them to America in the personal charge of Dr. Bell, the vessel reaching New York on the morning of January 20. By direction of the President of the United States, the U.S. S. Dol- phin met the Princess [rene in the lower bay and escorted her up the harbor. In the presence of Dr. Bell and the Secretary of the Institution, the remains were transferred to a naval tug and conveyed to the Dolphin, and in the continued charge of Dr. Bell were brought to Washington, arriving at the Navy-Yard on Saturday, January 23. On Monday the 25th the remains were transported by the naval authorities, with suitable ceremonies, to the navy-yard gate, where they were taken in charge by a cavalry escort furnished by the War Department, and, accompanied by Assistant Secretary of State Loomis, representing the President, by the British ambassador, the Regents and the Secretary of the Institution, and the president of the Board of Commissioners of the District of Columbia, they were conveyed to the Smithsonian Institution, where the coftin, draped in the American and. British flags, was deposited in the center of the main hall of the building. Dr. Bell, addressing Senator Frye in behalf of the Regents, said: Mr. Senator: I have the honor to hand over to the Smithsonian Institution the mortal remains of its founder, James Smithson, a Fellow of the Royal Society of London, England, who died in Genoa, Italy, on the 27th of June, 1829. For nearly seventy-five years the body of Smithson has reposed in an almost for- gotten grave in the picturesque little British cemetery on the heights of San Beningo, in Genoa. City improvements have led to the expropriation of this cemetery and removal of the remains, and at the last meeting of the board of regents of the Smith- sonian Institution I was appointed a committee to arrange for the transfer of the remains of Smithson to this country. On my arrival in Genoa every facility was afforded me for the accomplishment of my mission by the provincial and municipal authorities, by His British Majesty’s consul-general, Mr. Keene; by the committee of the British Burial Fund Association, in which is vested the ownership of the 10 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. cemetery, as well as by our own consul, Mr. William Henry Bishop, to whom I am much indebted for his yalued services. On the 31st of December, 1903, the tomb of Smithson was opened in my presence, as the representative of the Smithsonian Institution, and in the presence of the American consul and six other witnesses. The remains of Smithson were reverently raised from the grave and placed in a metallic casket, over which the consul of the United States cast the American flag, while the witnesses stood around with uncov- ered heads. The casket was then left in the mortuary chapel of the cemetery, securely sealed and under guard, until the 2d of January, when it was placed in a coffin of strong wood, as demanded by Italian law, and was then transported to the North German Lloyd steamship Princess Irene, accompanied by the American consul and myself. The steamer sailed from Genoa on the 7th of January, and upon arrival in the United States, the remains of Smithson were received with national honors by diree- tion of the President, and of the Secretary of the Navy and the Secretary of War. The remains were brought to Washington on board the U. 8. dispatch boat Dol- phin, and have been escorted to the Smithsonian Institution by United States cavalry. And now, Mr. Senator, my mission is ended, and I deliver into your hands, as the representative of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, the remains of this great benefactor of the United States. Senator Frye replied: Sir: The Smithsonian Institution receives with profound gratitude the remains of its distinguished founder. Providence, every now and then, seems to place in the world a man and inspires him with a purpose to elevate his fellow men. Such a man was Mr. Smithson, the founder of this Institution. The spirit, sir, which prompted you to such earnest endeavor, resulting as it did in taking these remains from their resting place in a country foreign to him and foreign to us, and bringing them here where for so many years we have enjoyed the rich fruits of his splendid benefaction, your countrymen will appreciate. His grave here will be an incentive to earnest, faithful, wise, and discreet endeavor to carry. out his lofty purposes, and, sir, it will be to our people a sacred spot while the Republic endures. The brief but impressive ceremonies of the occasion concluded with the following prayer, offered by the Rev. Dr. Randolph H. McKim: Almighty God, eternal source of light and truth, by whose wise providence all things in heaven and earth are governed, we give thee thanks that thou didst put into the heart of thy servant whose dust we receive with reverence here to-day, to lay the foundation of this school of science, and we pray thee that it may more and more be instrumental in the true interpretation of the laws of nature, and in unveil- ing to the mind of man the glory of God in the work of his hands, to the end that for all the generations to come this Institution may bea beacon light of truth and of progress, to the glory of God and to the good of mankind. All this we beg through Him by whom all things were made, Jesus Christ, our Lord. Amen. The remains rest temporarily in a room which contains the few per- sonal relics of Smithson, until their final disposal by the Regents. ADMINISTRATION. In view of the ever-increasing responsibilities imposed upon the Institution, both by the administration of its own fund and the several dependencies placed by Congress under its direction, a system has been from year to year carefully worked out, which, while retaining REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. tell in a central office under the Secretary’s supervision, the general plan of the whole Institution, has rendered it practicable to leave the carry- ing out of details to those in immediate charge of the work of the bureaus. I record with gratitude the ever-increasing aid rendered me by the Regents, as evidenced not only through the increased amount of time given to the policy of the Institution, but by their advice and help in all matters, whether of policy or administration, in which their aid has been sought. BUILDINGS. The ceiling of the large anthropological hall in the main Smithsonian building has been practically reconstructed and the hall has been painted and decorated anew. There has thus been practically made available for use the largest single exhibition hall in the building, and it is expected that the valuable archeeological collections of the Institu- tion will be seen to better advantage than ever before. It is to be regretted that the uncomfortable tread of the steps and the absence of an elevator may deter many persons from visiting this very attractive room. The repairs to the roof of the main Smithsonian building have been completed, and much-needed repairs were also made to the roof of the Museum building. FINANCES. The permanent funds of the Institution are as follows: BYXOLOVESIE Out MSV OU IH ONS (ON OV, od cys Mo) ane ee en SU ee eA Ne eco ey ee $515, 169. 00 Residuanyaleoacyronnomiutnsomen | S67 eee eee seer eee eres ee ae 26, 210. 63 IDS OSI AyRoNaM-SEINTANAAS CON WO(NOTINS, WO S555 cone Sshesesdoosedscue -oouesee 108, 620. 37 Bequest danmmesy lati tOmsnls (oles) aac rel ee d1, 000. 00 Accumulated interest on Hamilton fund, 1895 ..........---- 1, 000. 00 = 2, 000. 00 BSCE Oe Siianverover ISkoell WGK) ae ee ee eee aoe ee eoedeeudeeese 500. 00 Depositurom™ proceedsiofeale ot bonds, 188ily a= 2 ye en a eee 51, 500. 00 GChiits Oy Aarons, Er 1Slorsleateiney Webley eas Geos Gonoboskeese seeuoseeoe 200, 000. 00 Portion of residuary legacy of Thomas G. Hodgkins, 1894 .......---.--- 8, 000. 00 Depositeinomysayines oOhameconnes 90 Smysas see see eee ee eee a erle 25, 000. 00 RoOtalMermanemtuium done ere cies ne ae eee een eee 937, 000. 00 The above fund is deposited in the Treasury of the United States and bears interest at 6 per cent per annum under the provisions of the act organizing the Institution and act of Congress approved March 12, 1894. In addition to the permanent fund, the Regents hold certain approved railroad bonds which form part of the fund established by Mr. Hodgkins for investigations into the properties of atmospheric air. At the beginning. of the fiscal year, July 1, 1903, the balance, as stated in my last report, was $55,507.67. During the year the total receipts by the Institution were $68,435.56. Of this sum, $57,754.17 was derived from the interest and the remaining $10,681.39 was received from. miscellaneous sources. 12 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. The disbursements during the year amounted to $77,294.90, the details of which are given in the report of the executive committee. The balance remaining to the credit of the Secretary on June 30, 1904, for the expenses of the Institution was $46,648.33. A considerable part of this balance is held against certain contingent obligations which may be expected to mature as a result of various scientific investiga- tions and publications in progress. During the fiscal year 1904, the Institution was charged by Con- gress with the disbursement of the following appropriations: International Exchanges: 22525. 222 Bas 5 es ote ee eae a eee $26, 000 AmericantE thnolopys2. 2155 te oe eta eae See eee rears 40, 000 Astrophysical Observatonyo2 2-2 = 32045 = eee oe ee ee ee ees 15, 000 United States National Museum: Murniture-anc csetinesh esa. eee eae see ae eee $22, 500 Heating and lighting 2. 2 eres eee seen eee eee 18, 000 Preservation omcollection si sae 180, 000 Purchase of 'specimens!2: 5: asc see oe eee eee 10, 000 ROS) ie See eae ew open here eeoseatooucosaas 500 181010) (ds eee eee Oty Pe Seen eee le Be ei eee oe Ne St Ses 2, 000 Rent-of-workshops)- ce so ees ees 4, 400 Repairs\to butldingss= os. 2 seen so ee eee ri ORS ee Rae 15, 000 | a eh oll 0 eer ele tae ans eee eek Pela ee acim Rees Mami ye A 17, 000 —— 269, 400 National’ Zool og icellig ear yey arse eee tre ol ar ere eee eee ee 95, 000 TRG Gea ee oa a peas eve A os Se Ct ae pa ee 445, 400 The following estimates were forwarded, as usual, to the Secretary of the Treasury for carrying on the Government’s interests under the charge of the Institution for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1905. This table shows the estimates and sums respectively appropriated: Appropria- Estimates. one! International Exchanress-seccstece oreo tee ae eaeee ee Cerne ae seer $26, 000 $27, 000 American Ethnoloeyas. oss sseccne fee eee eae see eee eee eee 50, 000 40, 000 Astrophiysicali@ bsecvatowvie == paces eee ee eee eee eee eee eee ee ere 15, 000 15, 000 National Museum: Hurnituretand fixturessss5-2-n cae ceee ceetseceoshe nee ae ee eae | $22, 500 $22, 500 Heatingand lighting. + oor ones ee se eee ane | 18, 000 | 18,000 FRITS ANNO Oi COW HARON 5 .co54 550s ssesbeobasnaaseb sossasacas | 210, 000 | 180, 000 Purchase of/specimensss.c.-- == 242 -- Bai cle staneie theteyaisteletate teeters | OOOO Re irate. .Fers BOOKS Mia eestor aeee ee ners Jikan hae ae Ne ae ee | 5, 000 2, 000 POSED Or css crepare trot a eI eat oe oe NO a eo | 500 | 500 Buildimge repairs; so Additions to the collections.—The number of separate lots of material received during the year was 1,703, comprising 241,547 specimens in all, or 5,000 more than the pre- vious year. The total number of specimens recorded in all departments of the Museum is now 5,894,620 specimens, of which more than 4,100,000 belong to the Department of Biology, nearly 975,000 to the Department of Anthropology, and about 730,000 to the Department of Geology. Collections sent by Dr. W. L. Abbott from the Malay peninsula, northern Sumatra, and the adjacent archipelago contain the most interesting additions in Anthropology, and in conjunction with his previous contributions from the same and other parts of Asia constitute an exceedingly nee and unique feature of the ethnological exhibits. Dr. E. A. Mearns, U. S. Army, who has continued his scientific work in the Philippine Islands, ee collections of special interest obtained by himself during the campaign against the Moros. Another Moro collection, consisting of edged weapons, spears, and costumes, was received from Dr. R. B. Grubb, also of the United States Army. The very valuable collection of archeological objects obtained in Cuba, Trinidad, Grenada, Barbados, Dominica, Porto Rico, and other West Indian islands by Dr. J. Walter Fewkes, of the Bureau of American Ethnology, during the winter of 1903, has been transferred to the keeping of the Museum. It contains a very large variety of objects which will probably aid materially in solving the problem of the ancient relations between North and South America. The same Bureau has also deposited a large series of specimens recently taken from caverns, rock shelters, and village sites in the Ozark region of Missouri and Arkansas. A number of Tlinkit house posts and totem poles was obtained from Dr. George A. Dorsey, of the Field Columbian Museum, and a valuable lot of art objects from south- western Alaska, consisting of carved clubs, knives, embroidered blankets, ete., from Lieut. G. T. Emmons, U.S. Navy. Some curious earthenware vessels from aboriginal graves in Argentina were presented by Mr. Felix F. Outes, of Buenos Aires, and several knives with handles and blades in one piece, as well as flint implements, from the temple of Osiris, Abydos, were contributed by the Egypt exploration fund. The collections in prehistoric archeology have been enriched by a series of Egyptian stone implements presented by Mr. H. W. Seton-Karr, of England, and representing a type peculiar to the Fayum district, as well as by a large series of specimens chiefly from a few localities in the Miami Valley, and forming part of the bequest of the late I. H. Harris, of Waynesville, Ohio. The latter contribution also includes a typical series of earthenware vessels from mounds near Charleston, Mo. To the recently established Division of Physical Anthropology have been added more than 2,000 crania and skeletons by transfer from the Army Medical Museum, 11 crania of Wasco Indians from the Fred Harvey collection, and other desirable specimens. The additions to the historical collections have included a valuable series of relies presented by Gen. John Watts de Peyster, who has also made several contributions of important historical works; the gilt dress sword presented to Gen. Jacob Brown, by the State of New York, for valuable services during the Revolutionary war, donated by his grandson, Mr. Nathan Brown Chase; an oil portrait of George Catlin, painted by W. H. Fisk, R. A., in 1849, deposited by his daughter, Mrs. Louise Catlin Kinney; numerous relics deposited by the National Society of the Daughters of the American Revolution, and the sword and epaulettes worn a Gen. Alex. McComb, U. 8. Army. The technological exhibits have been materially i increased; among the accessions of special interest being a collection of rifles, muskets, and other firearms of his- torical value, 615 in number, deposited by the Bureau of Ordnance of the War 40 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Department; a collection of Morse telegraph keys, insulators, and other electrical apparatus, presented by the Pennsylvania Railroad Company; a collection illustrat- ing the development of the hand camera, by the Eastman Kodak Company; a collection of sporting rifles of the kind used in this country prior to 1850, lent by Mr. Herman Hollerith, and a rare form of flintlock pistol with folding bayonet, presented by Mr. Paul Beckwith. The accessions to the Departme. t of Biology embraced 151,000 specimens, or nearly 41,000 more than the provious year. The collection of insects was increased by about 59,000 specimens, the herbarium by about 43,000, while the remaining 49,000 specimens were divided among the other divisions. The most extensive of the zoological collections, in point of number of specimens, consisted of about 40,000 insects obtained in British Columbia by Dr. Harrison G. Dyar, assisted by Mr. Rolla P. Currie and Mr. A. N. Caudell. The Bureau of Fish- eries transmitted large collections of land and fresh-water shells, reptiles, and crus- taceans from Indiana and other States; a valuable series of marine mollusks, chiefly from Alaska; the types of recently described fishes from Japan, the Hawaiian Islands, ete.; fishes, crustaceans, and corals secured in connection with the Alaskan salmon-fisheries investigation of 1903, and 461 plants from Alaska and Oregon. Especially worthy of mention are the important zoological contributions from the Mentawei Archipelago, Sumatra, and various islands off the eastern coast of Sumatra, obtained and presented by Dr. William L. Abbott. Thirty-one new forms of mam- mals and several new species of birds are represented in the collection from the archipelago, while those from eastern Sumatra also contain very valuable material, including numerous forms of birds and reptiles not previously received. Several valuable lots of zoological specimens from Minnesota and the Philippine Islands were donated by Dr. E. A. Mearns, U.S. Army. A large number of mammals, birds, reptiles, and fishes from the Bahama Islands were secured as the result of the expedition sent to those islands by the Baltimore Geographical Society, and of which Mr. B. A. Bean and Mr. J. H. Riley, of the Museum staff, were members. A valuable collection of birds’ eggs and reptiles from Texas was transmitted by the Biological Survey of the Department of Agriculture. Noteworthy among the mammals received were a specimen of a remarkable species of bat, Huderma maculatum, presented by Mr. E. O. Wooton, of Mesilla Park, N. Mex.; the first authentic specimen of a jaguar from the United States; a rare mouse-deer, Tragulus stanleyanus, obtained from M. Emile Deschamps; a collection of Old World mammals, obtained from W. Schliter; a collection of Japanese mammals from Mr. T. Tsuchida; some rare forms of bats from the British Museum, and a collection of Colombian mammals from the American Museum of Natural History. An interesting series of birds of the Philippine Islands was secured by exchange with the Museum in Manila. Mr. Homer Davenport, of East Orange, N. J., pre- sented a number of young pheasants, and Mr. N. C. Brown, of Portland, Me., a well- prepared series of the birds of North Carolina. Four species of birds of paradise, new to the collection, were purchased. Dr. W. L. Ralph, of the Museum staff, and Gen. J. W. Barlow made generous contributions to the collection of birds’ eggs, and series of rare Mexican eggs and of the eggs of the Hoactzin were purchased. A collection of Japanese reptiles was presented by Dr. Hugh M. Smith, and some rare reptiles of southern Florida by Mr. E. J. Brown, of Lemon City, Fla. The Division of Fishes has received a large number of Japanese species from the Leland Stanford Junior University, and a well-prepared series of specimens from Puget Sound, donated by Dr. J. C. Thompson, U. 8. Navy. A specimen of the Japanese shark, Mitsukuria owstoni, was purchased. Hawaiian land shells and other invertebrates were received from Mr. H. W. Hen- shaw, of Hilo, Hawaii; Dr. R. E. C. Stearns, honorary associate in zoology, now residing in Los Angeles, Cal., presented an extensive series of west American shells, REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 41 and Mr. H. N. Lowe and Mrs. Blanche Trask, several lots of Californian shells; Mr. E. J. Court, of Washington, .B. C., donated a representative series of the land shells of Maryland, Virginia, and the District of Columbia; Dr. Dwight Blaney about 300 shells dredged near Mount Desert, Me., and Mr. C. A. Davis, many Bermuda shells, including several cotypes. Among the specimens obtained by purchase was a large collection of Japanese land and marine mollusks, and land shells from the Pacific coast and the islands off California. The Division of Marine Invertebrates received a collection of Mexican fresh-water crabs from the Biological Survey of the Department of Agriculture; crustaceans from Catalina and San Clemente Islands, presented by Mr. H. N. Lowe; cotypes of a species of shrimp and of a stomatopod crustacean from the National Museum of Brazil; several beautiful specimens of the Japanese precious coral from Dr. Kk. Kishinouye; and a collection of sea urchins, chiefly from the Gulf of Siam, from the Zoological Museum in Copenhagen. The additions to the Division of Insects were numerous and valuable. Among those of greatest importance may be noted two lots of over 6,000 specimens from the Department of Agriculture; an extensive collection of Coleoptera, Lepidoptera, ete., made by Mr. E. A. Schwarz, in Texas; several lots of Philippine insects from Rey. W. A. Stanton, of Manila, and one from Mr. R. C. McGregor, of the Philippine Museum; a large miscellaneous collection irom the grounds of the Washington Biol- ogists’s Field Club at Plummer’s Island; and a valuable collection of Lepidoptera, from Mr. E. M. Anderson, of the Provincial Museum at Victoria, British Columbia. From foreign sources the following collections were received as gifts: Indian Hymen- optera from Maj. C. G. Nurse; Indian spiders from Prof. N. Jambunathan; Venezu- elan beetles from Mr. Edward A. Klages; Peruvian insects from Mr. M. J. Pusey; and Norwegian Lepidoptera from Sir George Hampson, of the British Museum. Of 555 accessions to the Division of Plants, the most valuable was the deposit made by Dr. E. L. Greene, of his collection of about 60,000 sheets of plants, and his entire botanical library. Next in importance was the gift by Mrs. T. A. Williams, of Mem- phis, Nebr., of about 15,000 plants from various parts of the United States. Mr. C. V. Piper, of Pullman, Wash., presented more than 600 plants from that State, and Mr. E. W. D. Holway, of Minneapolis, Minn., an interesting collection of Mexican plants. Important exchanges were made with the Philippine Bureau of Agriculture, the New York Botanical Garden, and the Royal Gardens at Kew, England. Sixty- eight botanical accessions were received from the Department of Agriculture, the most important comprising specimens obtained in Texas by Mr. Arthur Howell, in New Mexico and Oklahoma by Mr. Fred. G. Plummer, and in New Mexico by Mr. Vernon Bailey. Plants from Australia, Mexico, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, and from several of the States were acquired by purchase. The most extensive additions to the geological collections were, as usual, received from the United States GeMogical Survey, prominent among them having been about 40,000 invertebrate fossils, mostly named and including a large amount of material on which Dr. William H. Dalland his assistants have been working for several years. The Survey also transmitted a series of 1,932 tertiary insects, assembled by Dr. Samuel H. Scudder, together with a number of original drawings. The acquisition of this material is believed to make the Museum collection of fossil insects the largest in the United States, if not in the world. A collection of platiniferous rocks from the Demidoff mines in Russia was pre- sented by Juarez Sponville; a series of rocks illustrating the occurrence and associa- tion of diamonds at the De Beers consolidated mines in South Africa, by Mr. Gardner F. Williams, manager of the mines; a rich nugget of native silver, by A. L. Pellegrin, of Nogales, Ariz., and a specimen of diamond-bearing gravel from Minas Geraes, Brazil, to which a small diamond was attached, by Dr. O. A. Derby, of Sao. Paulo. ‘ 42 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. A fine mass of amethystine quartz, weighing about 400 pounds, was obtained from Ward’s Natural Science Establishment, Rochester, N. Y. The Division of Minerals was enriched by a large collection illustrating the occur- rence and association of the zeolites and siliceous minerals of New Jersey, obtained through the assistance of Dr. W. S. Disbrow, of Newark, N. J., who also transmitted one of the first known crystals of American spodumene. Other important gifts were a specimen of pink spodumene, from Mr. F. M. Sickler; a series of artificial stones used in the gem trade, from Mr. Oscar T. Jonassohn; a cut turquoise from North Carolina, from Mr. Eugene A. Smith, and some fine specimens of smoky quartz from Messrs. A. P. Pohndorf and J. R. Wharton. For the meteorite collection specimens illustrating the Trenzano fall, the France- ville iron, the Mukerop iron, and the Finnmarken pallasite have been acquired. Of invertebrate fossils, the accession next in importance to that transferred by the United States Geological Survey was the last portion of the E. O. Ulrich collection, containing about 15,000 specimens, besides 500 lots of original types or of specimens that have been used for illustration. A series of Lower Silurian fossils, selected by Mr. Charles Schuchert while in Russia, was presented by the Imperial Academy of Sciences, of St. Petersburg, through the cooperation of Dr. Frederich von Schmidt, and a valuable donation consisting of nearly 600 specimens of Hamilton brachiopods was received from the Yale University Museum. By exchange with the Zoological Museum of the University of Copenhagen, more than a hundred specimens of identified European mesozoic and tertiary bryozoans were obtained. To the collection of fossil vertebrates were added fine specimens of pterodactyl, ichthyosaurus, and teleosaurus; some fishes from the lithographic limestone, and a fossil skull of Bison Alleni from a placer deposit of frozen gravel, 25 feet below the surface. The object last mentioned was presented by Messrs. MeLain and Ballou, of Rampart City, Alaska, and is especially noteworthy as being the first specimen of the species discovered in Alaska. One hundred and thirty-two fossil plants collected in the Iowa anthracite beds were donated by Mr. C. W. Unger, of Pottsville, Pa., and 190 specimens of fossil plants from Illinois, Ohio, and other localities, forming part of the Carl Rominger collection, were also obtained. Explorations.—But few explorations were carried on last year by members of the Museum staff, owing to the lack of funds. Dr. Walter Hough spent some time in Arizona and New Mexico, where he made a large collection of ethnological and archeological objects. The expedition sent to the Bahamas during the summer of 1903 by the Baltimore Geographical Society and Johns Hopkins University, under the direction of Dr. G. B. Shattuck, was accompanied by Mr. Barton A. Bean and Mr. J. H. Riley, who took an active part in the work of collecting and observation. Dr. Harrison G. Dyar and Mr. Rolla P. Currie were members of a party sent to British Columbia by the Carnegie Museum of Pittsburg. During a trip to Europe Mr. Charles Schuchert collected some valuable fossils, and while seeking material for the Louisiana Purchase Exposition Dr. George P. Merrill obtained many geological specimens for the Museum on the Pacific coast and in Canada and western Mexico. Having been designated by the State Department and the Smithsonian Institution as delegates to the International Congress of Zoology at Berne, Switzerland, during the summer of 1904, Dr. Leonhard Stejneger and Mr. Gerrit 8. Miller, jr., left Wash- ington in May with the object also of making collections of mammals and reptiles in Europe, and of studying the specimens of these groups in the principal European museums. Short collecting trips, not necessary to mention here, were also made by other members of the staff. There have been many explorations through which the Museum has profited, by private individuals and by other Government bureaus, of which a few may be noted. Dr. William L. Abbot has continued his field work in Sumatra, the Mentawei Archi- REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 43 pelago, and along the coast and on the islands east of Sumatra. In connection with the investigations of the Bureau of Fisheries, Dr. Hugh M. Smith has visited Japan, and Dr. B. W. Evermann, Prof. Charles H. Gilbert, and Prof. O. P. Jenkins have made extensive explorations‘in Hawaii. The natural history bureaus of the Depart- ment of Agriculture, and especially the Biological Survey, have made important col- lections in different parts of the United States. Field work under the Bureau of American Ethnology, productive of collections, has been carried on by Dr. J. Walter Fewkes, in the West Indies, and by Mr. James Mooney, Mr. Gerard Fowke, Mrs. M. C. Stevenson, and Mr. J. R. Swanton, in the West. Reference should also be made to the important work conducted in the Phil- ippine Islands by Dr. EK. A. Mearns, U. 8. Army, one of the most frequent contribu- tors to the Museum collections. Researches. —O}{ the material which reaches the Museum, a part has previously been studied and a part not, but the proportion either way would be difficult to state and varies from year to year. The act founding the establishment provides that the collections shall be arranged and classified, and therefore in selecting the caretakers, persons skilled in the various branches represented are chosen to the extent of the funds available. It is recognized that their first obligation is to look out for the safety of the specimens in their charge, and as the technical staff under pay is rela- tively small, attention to this duty consumes the greater part of their time. About one-half of the scientific staff, moreover, consists of volunteers, on whom the same demands can not be made, though some of these are equally attentive to the routine work. The scientific results accomplished each year by the Museum staff as a whole is, nevertheless, relatively extensive, comprising mainly the identification, labeling and description of specimens, and their classified arrangement in cases and drawers, so as to make them convenient for reference. For a large part of the scientific work, however, assistance must be obtained from experts connected with other establishments. Entire groups of specimens may be assigned to individuals for working up, or advantage may be taken of researches in progress elsewhere to have material of greater or less extent identified, and visiting scientific men are often willing to spend some time upon such parts of the collections as come within their knowledge. It is impossible within the limits of this report to account for all the work of this character carried on during the past year, but the number of persons concerned, not including those on the Museum staff, was in the neighborhood of 200, and over 20,000 specimens were sent away for study. The coop- eration with persons living elsewhere is far greatest in connection with the Depart- ment of Biology, whose varied collections have long attracted widespread interest, and have led to many extensive and important investigations. Exchanges.—Many exchanges of duplicate specimens with other institutions and with individuals have been made with satisfactory results for the Museum. The establishments abroad with which such transactions were most extensively carried on were the Albany Museum at Grahamstown, South Africa; the K. K. Naturhis- torisches Hofmuseum at Vienna; the Zoological Institute of the Imperial University at Vienna; the Botanical Museum at Berlin; the Museum of Natural History at Paris; the Zoological Museum of the University of Copenhagen; the Royal Frederick University of Christiania, and the Royal Botanic Garden at Sibpur, Calcutta. The distribution of duplicates to colleges and other educational institutions through- out the country has been limited during the year to fishes, marine invertebrates, and geological specimens illustrating rock weathering and soil formation, of which 97 sets have been sent out. Some duplicate sets of fossils are now being prepared for the same purpose. The applications for such material to aid in the teaching of natural history are far more numerous than’ can be supplied, the assistants qualified to select and label the specimens being generally too busily occupied in other ways. The 44 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. present crowded condition of the Museum also interferes with the overhauling of the collections, which is necessary in picking out the duplicates. The exhibition halls.—A\though no increase in the amount of exhibition space is possible in the present building, yet by resorting to various expedients and removing specimens to storage a little more room may be obtained here and there for the dis- play of exhibits or single objects which it is thought may prove of greater interest to the public. In the Department of Anthropology a few cases have been added in the northwest court gallery for an exhibit of Indian baskets, this subject having gained. special prominence through the publication of Prof. O. T. Mason’s recent paper. Space has also been provided for a portion of the splendid Malaysian collection received from Dr. William L. Abbott. A collection of lamps, a typical series of guns, and three table-cases containing revolvers and pistols of various dates and makes have been arranged in the east hall, and a number of ethnological objects from the Philippine Islands in the gallery of the northwest court. The collection of musical instruments has been partly reinstalled. Among the technological objects has been placed the cylinder of the Hornblower engine, the first steam engine put together on the western continent, haying been imported from England in 1753. The groups of ethnological lay figures returned from recent expositions have been installed wherever a place could be found for them, some having been arranged in the lecture hall. But little was done toward preparing new exhibits in the Department of Biology, as other and more urgent work has interfered. Some of the more valuable birds have been remounted, and four-groups of game birds have been installed in two new cases at the entrance to the Smithsonian building. The unoccupied cases in the southeast range set apart for casts of fishes will soon be filled by new preparations now in course of making. A beginning has been made toward the installation of a series of specimens illustrating the mollusk fauna of the District of Columbia, one case having already been completed. To the display collection in the Department of Geology have been added the skulls of a new genus of Ceratopsia, and of Diplodocus and Trachodon, and also a mounted skeleton of Syornis casuarinus from New Zealand. The Claosaurus, mentioned in last year’s report, is exhibited near the south wall of the southeast court. Visitors.—The number of persons who visited the Museum building during the year was 220,778, and the Smithsonian building, 143,988, being an approximate daily average of 705 for the former and of 460 for the latter. The decrease as compared with the previous year was a result of the large attendance at the time of the encamp- ment of the Grand Army of the Republic in October, 1902. Since the first oecupa- tion of the Museum building in 1881, the total number of visitors recorded has been over 8,000,000. Meetings and lectures.—On February 20 and 27, and March 5, 12, and 19, a series of lectures was given in the lecture hall under the auspices of the Biological Society of Washington by Mr. Charles H. Townsend, Mr. Gifford Pinchot, Mr. E. W. Nelson, Prof. Henry F. Osborn, and Dr. C. Hart Merriam, the average attendance having been about 1,000. The closing exercises of the Naval Medical School and the Army Medical School were held in the same place on March 21 and April 5, respectively. The American Oriental Society had its annual meeting in the lecture hall on April 7 and 8, and the National Academy of Sciences from April 19 to 21. On June 13 an illustrated lecture entitled ‘‘ Botanical Tramps with a Camera’’ was delivered by Dr. C. KE. Waters, of Johns Hopkins University, under the auspices of the Wild Flower Preservation Society of America. Publications.—The publications issued during the year comprised 6 volumes and 59 technical Proceedings papers, being an increase over previous years, due partly to delays in completing volumes belonging to 1903. The 6 volumes referred to were Nos. 25, 26, and 27 of the Proceedings, the Annual Reports for 1901 and 1902, and REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 45 Prof. C. C. Nutting’s monograph on the Sertularian hydroids, forming part 2 of Special Bulletin No.-4. The three volumes of Proceedings contained in all 110 papers, of which 39 relate to fishes, 19 to insects, 18 to marine invertebrates, 10 to birds, and the remainder to mammals, mollusks, plants, reptiles, fossils, and meteorites. The Appendix to the Report for 1901 was made up of five papers, as follows: “Report on the Exhibit of the United States National Museum at the Pan-American Exposition, Buffalo, N. Y., 1901;”’ ‘‘ Flint Implements and Fossil Remains from a Sulphur Spring at Afton, Ind. T.,’’ and ‘‘ Classification and Arrangement of the Exhibits of an Anthropological Museum,” by Mr. William H. Holmes; ‘‘Archeolog- ical Field Work in Northeastern Arizona,” by Dr. Walter Hough, and ‘‘ Narrative of a Visit to Indian Tribes of the Purus River, Brazil,’”’ by Prof. J. B. Steere. The Report for 1902 contained an elaborate paper by Prof. O. T. Mason on ‘‘Abo- riginal American Basketry: Studies in a Textile Art without Machinery ’’; one by Dr. Leonhard Stejneger, entitled ‘‘The Herpetology of Porto Rico’’; and one by Mr. F. V. Coville, entitled ‘‘ Wokas—Primitive Food of the K]amath Indians.’’ Several papers by members of the Museum staff on material contained in the Museum were, by permission of the Secretary, printed in various journals, and a number were also published in the quarterly issue of the Miscellaneous Collections of the Smithsonian Institution. ; The Annual Report for 1903, now ready to go to press, will have a paper by the Assistant Secretary on the buildings occupied by the National Collections, and a translation of the three papers by Dr. A. B. Meyer, director of the Royal Zoological Anthropological-Ethnographical museums in Dresden, on the principal museums of New York State, Chicago, and several European countries. LTibrary.—The library of the National Museum has received asa gift from Prof. Otis T. Mason, in addition to one made some years ago, about 2,000 pamphlets, sepa- rates, and bound quarto volumes mostly on anthropological subjects, for which a special bookplate has been provided. The Museum has also received from Dr. Edward L. Greene his entire botanical library, which has been placed on deposit for a period of ten years in connection with his botanical collections. The aggregate of additions to the Museum library for the year amounted to 1,504 books, 3,187 pamphlets, and 700 parts of volumes. Expositions.—The exhibits prepared by the Museum for the Louisiana Purchase Exposition were properly arranged before the opening day, and the zeal and activity displayed by the curators, preparators and others engaged in their preparation, shipment, and installation are highly commendable. The collections are grouped under the three general heads of anthropology, biology, and geology. saat ae eee eee 2 Nez; Rercesae eee eee ee aan 2) Yankton Si@Ux soa. ae sere ee ene 11 Osage sss sehen As Stee eee eee q COLLECTIONS. The collections of ethnological and archeological specimens made during the year are exceptionally important. A special effort was made to obtain material for the purpose of illustrating the researches of the Bureau at the Louisiana Purchase Exposi- tion. Valuable additions along this line were obtained by Doctor Fewkes in the West Indies, by Mrs. Stevenson in the Pueblo country, by Doctor Swanton in Alaska and British Columbia, and by Mr. Mooney in Oklahoma and Indian Territory. Seven hundred and seventy-eight specimens have been transferred to the National Museum, and such of these as were required for the purpose were sent to the exposition. Other collections were forwarded directly to the exposition and have not been transferred. In order that collections made by the Bureau may receive immediate attention with respect to preservation from moths and other insects, and with the view of having them properly and promptly catalogued, they are, on arrival in Washington, placed in the hands of the head curator of anthropology of the National Museum, who has at hand all necessary facilities for preservation and record. It is understood, however, that these collections are at all times to be at the disposal of the Bureau for purposes of study and illustration. In all, about 1,000 specimens, mostly of excep- tional value, have been acquired during the year. ILLUSTRATIONS, The work of the illustrations division remained in charge of Mr. De Lancey Gill. Illustrations for two annual reports—the Twenty-third and Twenty-fourth—and for Bulletin 28 were edited and prepared for transmittal to the Public Printer; 137 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 53 drawings for the illustration of these volumes were made, and 900 engravings for the same were examined and necessary corrections indicated. In the photographic branch of the work, wherein Mr. Gill was assisted, as heretofore, by Mr. Henry Walther, 166 negatives were taken, 132 films exposed in the field were developed, and 1,373 prints were made. Mr. Gill was also called upon to assist in preparing exhibits for the Louisiana Pur- chase Exposition, and made during the year detailed plans required in the construc- tion of models of the Temple of the Cross at Palenque, and the Castillo at Chiche- nitza, and also of two models illustrating in actual dimensions the remarkable sculptural embellishments characteristic of the ancient Mayan architecture. PUBLICATIONS. The Twentieth Annual Report and Part I of the Twenty-second have been issued during the year, the former in March and the latter in May, 1904. The Twenty-first and Part II of the Twenty-second are in press. The Twenty-third was submitted for publication on February 23, and Bulletin 28 was sent to the Public Printer on March 31, 1904. Publications are sent to two classes of recipients: First, regularly, without special request, to working anthropologists, public libraries, scientific societies, institutions of learning, and to other persons or institutions able to contribute to the work of the Bureau publications, ethnologic specimens, or desirable data; second, to other per- sons or institutions in response to special requests, usually indorsed by members of Congress. During the year 1,946 copies of the Twentieth Annual Report have been sent to regular recipients, and 2,500 miscellaneous volumes and pamphlets have been distributed in response to about an equal number of special requests. More than 250 of these requests have come through Congressmen, and about 500 volumes have been sent in response. One hundred and fifteen copies of Part I of the, Twenty- second Annual Report have been sent out. EDITORIAL WORK. Mr. Herbert 8. Wood has had charge of the editorial work during the year, being assisted in several instances by Dr. Elbert J. Benton, Mr. E. G. Farrell (courteously detailed for the work by the Government Printing Office), and Mr. William Bar- num. The editorial work for the year has consisted chiefly in the reading of proofs of the Twenty-first and Twenty-second Annual Reports, and the preparation for printing of the Twenty-third Annual Report. LIBRARY. At the time of the removal of the Bureau of American Ethnology from the United States Geological Survey building in 1893, the volumes belonging to the Bureau num- bered about 2,500. Through exchange and purchase the growth of the library has been, on the whole, satisfactory. The library now contains 12,165 bound volumes, about 6,500 pamphlets, and a large number of periodicals. In the purchase of books care has been used to add only such works as bear on the subject of anthropology with special reference to the American Indians, although volumes relating to kin- dred subjects are received through exchange. The accessions for the year number 302 bound volumes, about 500 pamphlets, and the regular issues of more than 500 periodicals. CLERICAL WORK. The clerical work of the Bureau has been intrusted largely to Mr. J. B. Clayton, who on June 1, 1904, with the approval of the Civil Service Commission, received the designation of head clerk. Mr. Clayton has had personal charge of the financial 54 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. work of the Bureau, including the purchase of supplies and the preparation of accounts. The clerica! work during the year included the registration and cataloguing of letters, the preparation of replies to letters, and the keeping of miscellaneous records. The method described in the report for the previous year as haying been adopted has been employed during this year, and the clerical work of the Bureau is kept up to date. Asa rule, letters are answered the same day that they are received, and it is only where technical information is called for that there is any delay what- ever. The letters in regard to publications, finances, field work, and miscellaneous information cover 2,835 pages in the press-copy letter books. Miss FE. R. Smedes has given excellent service in connection with the general cor- respondence of the Bureau. The clerical work in the Library has been satisfactorily attended to by Miss Ella Leary. The very considerable work involved in the care and distribution of publications has been in charge of Miss May 8. Clark, who has efficiently met the Bureau’s needs in this direction. Mrs. F. 8. Nichols was certified by the Civil Service Commission for temporary work in connection with the Dictionary of Indian Tribes, and Misses Postley, Stratton, and Taliaferro were employed for brief periods in the same work. PROPERTY. The property of the Bureau is comprised in seven classes, as follows: Office furniture and appliances. Field outfits. Ethnological manuscripts and other documents. Photographs, drawings, paintings, and engravings. A working library. Collections held temporarily by collaborators for use in research. Undistributed residue of the editions of Bureau publications. Respectfully submitted. W. H. Homes, Chief of Bureau. Mr. S. P. LANGLEY, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Juty 15, 1904. APPENDIX III. REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE SERVICE. Str: I have the honor to submit the following report relating to the operations of the International Exchange Service during the year ending June 30, 1904: The term ‘‘International Exchanges’’ has been applied by the Smithsonian Insti- tution almost since its foundation to the interchange of its publications for those of scientific societies and establishments in foreign countries. “A liberal distribution of the works published at the expense of the Smithson fund was one of the principal means adopted in the early plans of the Institution for administering that part of the bequest of its founder relating to the “diffusion of knowledge among men.”’ In order to carry out a systematic exchange of large quantities of books it was nec- essary to enlist the cooperation of institutions and individuals in the populous centers of the world, and as it became known that such arrangement existed, first one then another society and finally the United States Government asked the Smithsonian Institution to perform a similar service in exchanging its publications, until the expense became a heavy tax on the income of the Institution. In 1881 Congress made a small appropriation to the Smithsonian Institution in aid of the Exchange Service, and has since continued to make an annual appropriation, though at no time has it been sufficient to cover the extire expense of the service, consequently the Institution has been obliged to request a partial reimbursement of the pro rata expense from Federal and State institutions. Nearly 159,000 packages were dispatched during the yearended June 30, 1904, each of which was credited to the contributor and debited to the recipient. A recapitula- tion was also made, showing the aggregate contributions and receipts by each country. This necessary detail, in addition to the routine work of receiving and dispatching parcels, requires the continuous service of fifteen employees. The work requires the exclusive use of five rooms, which are arranged along the south basement of the Smith- sonian building. These rooms, though originally remodeled and arranged expressly for the exchange service, have since been enlarged to some extent, but at times, when exchanges are received in unusual quantities, it is necessary temporarily to occupy adjoining rooms and hallways. Aside from packing materials the supplies required are those necessary to a well- regulated office and for the greater part are procured under annual Government contracts. Two instances have been reported during the year of loss or damage to exchange parcels in transit. One case, No. 414, for China, was subjected to the process of ‘general average’’ on account of damage to the steamship St. Bede, but a full report has not yet been submitted. A case containing United States Government documents (designated as No. 90 of the official set), destined for the Parliamentary Library, Hobart, Tasmania, was destroyed while en route from London to Hobart, but most of the publications were fortunately duplicated. The following tables describe the operations of the service during the year, and in comparison with the preceding year show a gain of 8,766 packages, or a total of 158,983, being an increase of 6,183 in the number sent abroad and an increase of 2,583 received from other countries. On the other hand, the total weight of exchanges . 55 56 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. transmitted was less by 14 per cent. This inconsistency in figures was due to a pre- ponderance of unusually large packages forwarded abroad during the year ended June 30, 1903, but the greater number of parcels during the last year shows an increased interest in the service and has resulted in adding several thousand names to the list of correspondents. It is gratifying to note that of the weight of exchanges handled during the year ended June 30, 1904, 75 per cent was from domestic sources and 25 per cent from abroad, while during the previous year the proportions were 73.8 per cent and 26.2 per cent, respectively. In July, 1897, an exchange list of foreign institutions was published which con- tained 9,414 addresses. The necessity for a revised list arising, a new edition was published in September, 1903, containing 12,720 addresses. This list, printed in limited edition at the expense of the Smithsonian Institution, is intended as a work- ing guide for the United States International Exchange Service and its distributing agencies throughout the world, rather than for general distribution. Tabular statement of the work of the International Exchange Service during the fiscal year 1903-1904. INuimbér| Weight Number of correspondents June 30, lpAcknEes of pack-| of pack-| jecae to. pases re han | han- |F°%, [Domestic Foreign | Domestic “°° “abroad. dled. dled. Ones, societies. | als. | dresses. 1903. UWL ere alacant me eee ierete/etelel= We PAY || Z5lL Ole oan codllaoaeaonocollosacacccdllocadoaddodibccsccosbs|lbcasoasd AUS USES Sos ceeetinereeeeeeeine UO C370 | BEES |bescccsalls apa dengon||soaconcad|sonqsccesa||ssssossens||soacesee Septembersaccoseseeeeaece 10}'548 4) 2265: 236) sc sis, cate ell 'saiaatarm'aie oielisteinra'sisreicis|l eros seis sist ele seevomie erell eteiseeistee Octobensaweee cee eaceeeres 10, 216 PX BYE llaoa5s5ed Saas soqood scoass0ds| bocascopcadllosesagacas|so5se0de NOVEMDER? Ser seincecrcicierewisceis BSR GY aye GRY O53 In ee eal on eraaallsaoaposaclloonoaceddu lscconamcas||ocaccace Mecembersesaeseccesseersct PSO) G2 OEP RS |aoooonellacuasocood lbeocanped |ssooacconalesasoanond|isconseuc 1904. UENO E WAVES Sees eeeceeneeonod IBYEEY || SEA es oeSco|ososhcsadlboascsond|Sadeanossaiisasossoqocelbosssoss HebrIMaLryyosss.-caeece senses 14,969 | 56, 962 | Siaiara late siellisterejeree a ofuiel|lereislaloterersia| Sinicia’eteasleeosiere BBE 505| PAGO TOR Marc hie orenaa eee 12: 307 «| HBS S7EOU epxd tele | see ee eae else |e ee ATi sack cmemccice asec ensecls 16, 288 BARAT Soest ate | arajetotarals arslel| sistasetstersia/s|| stainisjevereteler |\e:at=leis tere ia/atal] arelstetateyare Maine meena wees Hees PCW ea ae (ONS het el Re ry al ES otal nce Soc cteepaconuas oosmasau PUM Cracie sjearswey «sins eietolerstesere 16,069 | 50, 486 pepe Cee Penn eee Peer eres Cee e ee Totalees seine sine 003 eee 1B} oben asena Tnhh TSENG IS) o Sones toecoeacnsduccadedecuscuusdos du ceuoeseacenanS S| acecwues ee DP) Il ite pte (BORN OSA Pe sere eee ee Cecer eee eca ae cee ee cee ecm ciseissisiselsiateis Gill fas ccesscalessineteen |eeemerctes LINGO pop aod seadnoeronee peaoce cdaseroceceLpaccdoconondoccoosac 10, 670 4, 687 9, 764 5, 032 BrenehiCochiniC hingessssectisn seas cee cere ce iseincieieiesisieeals/aisiel| (Se anenena Gaeencaoan neers TORSTEN Ga hI Mi A a ooboGedde Secu aeeu aS Onc oe nSoceLopaaeactd laqcsoscad seeseneode Di lecesarAorete GE TIND ae era e area erento ha a aie levees iste cts sloseyere lesa ie rehaceee'| ata stujalsyeve avails ctajetetet wis\ete Die secrete GenmanphastrAiniGasrseseecctraccminc cet materi snecicieeticrine es Sale Sasteert Bul aeeea tees GELM ATV Acetate lo cei ae eindinn Socata ee socens | 17,581 6,085 | 17,621 6, 928 Gibraltar cecee secre cee ere ereere eres ela tails cle leictereeicisisiamiaiase PA Nereee cee LG yet terse Gold Coast aes atetarccrcteictots = seis crane srasstejayalsisteieleainje sleteletsioisisjs siatsie/el i\aaaaanaace Sal ee oeeeere (evorre(y DN) tt tee ARO So ac SOR Eo aT BOCClaSCoC ne oee Seaarne DOM ree staactepsie Kia Been nercse (CR KAIEXO Hn SOGOU RDC ROSE Ate AS BEE OCeIsa or Beso See Se aSaaaeemedrcr AS al kes Sule sane aee Greatsbritainrand slrelam dle sey caacrmisisieiiciee eisiaele sles aerate | 18,038 7, 106 17, 696 8, 383 AT CCCE Re PRED See ol er ORR R en Se rete] (2 a si 4 Green lary ste eae ete sats eesie a clave oe are nromieinietare nig Seissisie wale Gy Seat ogaes a ois selene e's Guadeloupe ze seeas ens cio oa iteee aig eciccjemiss sjstvie sess ci NGS ewecscaras 19) |) tserecceces (Cab RNIN pH eSo5 sdb 545 doce nenadod bono uETaTs HpGOHe Oda pDoD non addeds | betLocuacng loassesaraa AY | ecyersyetosiasee Guatemalasscecsachiacser nc oases = cainmacaciec seers csi cecce 233) Reemeaeere VEIT Beanteccse 13 CIM S Gan Sae canbe nbict Jou oeae Sumas SO CU CaO AOH Ee AOOSn nce Sanape HOSS | Hecece eee 6351 | esters tere Ma wallammlslanmd Sopa ssc ccc nec cee eco a clear ottraac slosleye cies steers 114s |e ee ee OG icant TOM A Uras 2s = xt2)= Ein acsiote ears ere lc arele chars. cies alvie aiclaigjale(aie sreiwieaicis ays s,sisinrs 142 11 SOD cereceraceias HON PK ON Gia eace mawecincaseainee ee esis Seaside cdec est casosaesescee Dil eer ee ASB ere secre are NGO lan eee ae am ceeiciesise sais leis eisai ciel sce cise eleie ee eis ete eee eeoere 55 4 AS i clears stale TLC eee seers Se rene see man in Se ees ne we | 1,815 36 1,844 182 HANTS RES OSe odo RA AAAS SS ae open Om Reopen Aen eRe N I | 5,795 1,395 5, 700 1,405 Cane 3s Sous cs ee Seo oe EE Cea aE ARE eee eset ere DAG hele ets 266 econds RIEU EDTA ee etre malas, Nefere Teds te tatersye eee aco ete aie] Natesoye ste mcrae yee tie 2,245 12 2, 463 18 UEC aS tesa AGU Gh EG aa Ce pp CORA E er A te Srey Soe eae 229 $1 248 18 KOnZORNTCC SLALe mean ecenwae eae eae nent eeiee pace a= Wee eee ell hiss session Sain netieitiole COLCA Tee eee a coe aya eiasctote etn See inne eels hie eon ee chaos s GlGieeacesa-- (Y¥/Wiaanaeacner ME OS eaere ctstsreare orate re teea are as eas nins 5 ctaesee tore Diep ea cic ero Ginlele eines eat Bio ae ene OTN SRC ee eewardbislandsie. a. sjnsce cas oats sece oe ee SARC HAREN S| laceoraceacl aera AO anaciesce MUA DOT Were aces eee a ioe sclae e Sere eases se eerciaoe nee e 66h lease ee Sk (HS emeecetos TOUTE CORMAN QUEZ Sects se ee ects ciecitis ciel wie See naa cteec/selaelel= NEW lieeemseseine hl Rancaeeeee TEREX CMD UIE Gere etter tes ose ce Sores ok iw aaten asin Seno nwclice ee CEN eerancsnoe 88 1 Madagascarsees co -cceneeecee SS OLBC NBEO reac ORBa dears aes Bi |S ae DAG Rua eee Mad C1raeemeeeriee seer ea ccic oals es one vince os Sas be enora seer es I} SeeiGseueue Dada Cemecaadets Me) tates crete aes eeraa eisai ciate lors cieciotels Siais'e tise cisieleleeseisecis see are (Cy (al Geese GU Bsoacseree MarshalllRs] and stances secon csc cer sess ce sae seiscicielos scteietoreraie Weta opaieyose| see erisingins (| bebaenecec WAR BDOIKG ING = Cons pasdoodcondod IoosobsE doe bESnooadDe aqUeScaqGsnK | el lbGdeuoseee 8) lossesccnds PMU GUIDE LS pera ces svar srs cic evate ate erate roo See ee lee esle i otaieite es wiocle Weta Oi |Perssaee cos 75 47 INDE Rs C Oe erate Seis Sse aoe oars Se Be eae eieiwidle mb eistoeinn s wicle Miata wales 2127, 3, 466 2,279 1,619 MOUTON ECRTONSRE eRe ore oie eo one a eae Reais piace eee Lt peer Coat Piece arg et Se tl ese MONIELSO TTS tae meme eee sect ote eiejersets ciclo cee einen a seen noms ei omwarnewiecllioce cise ec 4 seistaniossle MOTO COO meteor eer set Tk ce laiieislaroteretciainte isteisaeis ao eineicelacioueeee TS eosceceke 20)4|sasinsee ec NBA a bassacade SBC US RSA RE EOS Cae aS nr Senne aarti 157 | 30) 133 95 NEE ier] ani Semen ee neh Ie een Soc oP AL ie" cae | 2,479 1, 100 2,495 | 778 ING wal Call cl Omi asian toe ctate coos ors hc aya Recraics Sin er SineeIais wists mie avec Meeerroee ee inten 2 Tal aes INGWiOUn dam Gems rises isciencsicee ceeceocsm ae ce Mien ease eaneeece ADI Berea act 1S} |Seoeeesaen ISU ASTOLEC TE WLS ee ee | 2,021 363 2,109 | 375 New Zealand ....... Dee ets et Sew Rott os es). | 871 6 975 4 62 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Comparative statement of packages received for transmission through the International Exchange Service during the fiscal years ending June 30, 1903, and June 30, 1904—Con. 1903. 1904. Country. Packages. Packages. For— From— | For— From— Nicaragua ...........- Ge Repl Sewer fe ht Ltd pep OEE ASSHlpak Sees 289 -lnk ees see INYO PSE SERB Ok Sae UoToSr Sosa HeconnapSooceebaoeusascaocesconaa 1, 459 940 1,495 663 OrangeiRiver Colonvireesere nese arene ee aeee este eee Diufecminee nee ar eee ste ley Eh Besse SoS SUR aUeA cot On oboneaSebcbuaradcasisaacassuoarooad|pdouadcsuollocsdsscdae O70 AaB Ans J EASE ouoooeacioc soon bean oanecnonbbnsedddoooceadadadacoouacd 98 47 WSiieseeessce LES CSE n Gabo OBEEE ope Gore cacdaot pease aEcobonEpeGnopeoceanoode BO We seeeeees Bi ipaecenaoua J 22) UA Ue ee ae aa oe See nO eae Apa OnoUrodTons 752 i 992 224 Philippimersland see qeseceeseeisee ose cesses trae ee BO nleeseeeeee 86 2 POLtOwRT COs st seer ee eee en lease eo eae eee coe seta PAL Sea aCoDe TRS elas cS 120} RLU Ne boa pc opbocElucsnaaocopcaeaseeoouosadononedse sodcas 947 38 1, 058 337 (Aynieenos Miele aeo ee cca scade Godaakobcoessodooubacaboncnsmaacesas 900 3 979 260 FRE UII OMI eos eet a ore Ree ita eae reer otetetctntetetetstelaletste HOM aoe see 1 Sa aaeoacease NOM ESAs scl sociea re oes cei ine oe aioe anion aie ominletereraisiatetats)aysieiere S01 gancpencrc 20 20 IRCOVHTH IU aonmeansbaddanoosnoaccanpoobodcoqaKbeanccOsSaGOnSoE 261 59 339 1, 233 REUISS Ha ee ence is srekers atte ere ee a eee eae Talore ie teioslopeisicio stelnieteyatelsierete 4, 606 849 4,699 2,346 Sis TREE SKO ONE nooo oooaaasoocus Sooeeo seacoDedoocousueqeonouo|lonooosason||Ge0uc0sdec Grlisteossaae SEACKOUX i. fac ets See eee eee een seas oaineCieieieistste lava ierete Dil pe temrsiseee Le Re ar rete Siig IDEN coop ocasadodcnds contioocanosnencnconsoconecbdueso|acéu0c0ssq||Sa0cucess= 4a Reece aer Sessa bsaaeaqaataccnoacosboucede dba cunaseorooqdcnosaapEdoun 29) Remaster DORIA. Senne SS IRGIIE tS) ues stare beeen ienciene eetaits iste cen nceeestaeicarstels Ch Wasenaoaac QUA lerrciscereers SAUIEIMA NAR aenpbos bono caosooDagcmpddoTcenoode So caeecsegoooddos IPA Re nomecase NGA Semeeemeee St-/Pierrejandy Miquelon ereeecasece asec rise se ees eile Zhe acess LT) || Seeieseeeee inal DONA Coons qaonponcacboonsacdspooo nado asopnadosaadoar AK a emersoeeece Ut eS ar Sts Vic emits Sees Fase lersieteyratarecse orotate aero ice etsiaaie = ietet erate) faye Bl sees Ses iiillgeocedaccs SEN HLOY Ree G Sener OCS SEA GHEE Dena scncnEtoaaces SoooCDOCeoDoSCEnAnS nie eters DO) | erste SES cocodauosgonoaced ee ddceE odes cach cacseansasnononbodssae sl Serocoonacs 1 Ne noacecod SaniSalvad one ccrocccce scree ane eee co eiect as Sateen se see eee eeeee AS 4 lores estes 152 8 Sarnba VOL aoa: 2. saya s ialeietee cree eisie coe aie wis eincisteferstois ete te sami 1 eee 13 esseteee San tomWomingoernayeecsseece cance oe eee ee eee een reecceraceterr Ohh Ee sae aac Sel reste eaters SOnyilaes is jack coo ann Beyer ste wae Shae oe oe ee ee ee ee oils sete reine (DU paeaoaceces 18) \eceseee ae Siamese ye csc pace see ets a A sae ae eeeio nae eraasaasisies Bde Soe. 195 110 Sierra We one.5 set sioner eset cece arse tee ake ere ee eperetate 163s Baer ees 1S) Geaeseeee SHOE UA? JIGIENOGIE: - -abosndooaas Sogo sa0obecosoosebadoSdoSsoggoeNbE IPI Soseescese AY |Rossssease South Australiaheeeces-ces cass ssnese can croc cee emieeetecie aL A Selec see 2, 376 4 Sth Cea Sane Een ane nts Sn ene ren Be MOnn aoe aria sdudaesnceHanaocs 1,525 42 1, 655 110 Straits'Settlementtscaca-eass see eee sec tise een eeeeencemenets 109 11 QOD warrecisteles Sumatra: 22,2525. ooloee secietace ciao ce eisiomee Cee ee eirseice erseceral= Dios mecizres 5 | 5- seeaeetels Sweden sccradcceaes dns see lee cle os ae Se rere So ee aeio ei ee aeons 2,205 374 2,123 928 Siwitzerlan dese ses ocic ech sieieteics soci cio eine toe creme eiciesietereteter 757 829 2, 762 1, 359 Gilad Soe cates cee oar sical serene ecic cise emcees 483 |ieecue sete 115s Shccaseees MASM AMA) Ecce c cs comecloac noe tee eee oe oe eae meio aaaae 569 6 790 f 24 1 bo) 0347 Ieee Re tS SSC GORD Oo DUB SOCUCDOOCICOU> OCON SI SHOCHDES 1b BRAS oes I ee OOS TOM QUIN essai heats ete lelelete ates mas Se R CREE ee MpliSgaicosoo bo lOScoscEoadlcossscsoos Transvaal h-cesccceeeer cee see ee rane meek caseereeae 568 1 OSs Beeeceitome Trinidad ctcea-nasaicoos eee aecise Sen eioee oe eee cee aeee ae 109) | sssnsciees 830 |Pee secon TUMIST. ose seie ec cosine sel ok nctetereteneisiere nie ioe oe eerie BD) =. ae see Bl gaSocsacs TUT Yeccetacecinclnoe ele ee see eeteeevareicine ee cicero 957),|\sseeectee ae S20 aeneerts Durks islands! pics cases cee octets ae esate caro rere PY fal Bere 202 \|aseaeeer United'States’..s.<.5osstheckeesmecaecescecetesssiccctacinascemeean 33,980 | 107, 661 38, 702 116, 087 UU PUR UB, (coe erence te ton tar tee ee cae este a eee 866 80 1, 304 21 Venezuela: .i-22cas8 sees en cas smc we Sie be sistas oe ae oiesiete eee eee 654 1 S46 rl Fo aee ne Victoria -s.cc.s 2 -ct.scm donne teed aia sta os sisie oiotstateseratete ets iete m@alaersreiale 1, 786 1,145 1, 920 816 Western Australiia-.< © <2 / gs cemins salso caren sterahe ee oe melee cloister 619 112 813 214 Windward Wslandss.s2 22sec c= acces snes eee a aiemen cee lia-siaiaiaerarertai| ere aeaeyerenee B jlsocccosoce REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 63 In the main the same arrangements for distributing exchanges in other countries have continued during the year as bave existed in the past. But one change requires special notice. I refer to the death at Leipzig-Gohlis, on February 6, 1904, of Dr. Carl Felix Alfred Fliigel, in his eighty-fourth year. Doctor Fliigel succeeded his father in 1855 as agent of the Smithsonian Institution for the kingdoms and principalities which now constitute the German Empire, and continued in that capacity until his death, a continuous service of forty-nine years. His long term of office gave Doctor Fltigel an exceptional opportunity to further the work of the International Exchange Service throughout central Europe, of which he never failed to take advantage. Doctor Fligel pnblished numerous pamphlets and critical essays on the English language, and was the author of the standard work extensively known as Fliigel’s Dictionary of the English and German languages, which reached its fifteenth edition in 1891. The Institution deeply regrets his loss. Mr. W. Irving Adams, chief clerk of the International Exchange Service, was in Leipzig on official business at the time of the death of Doctor Fligel and took imme- diate steps to recommend the selection of his successor in order that the work of the agency should suffer as little inconvenience as possible. The long and_ faithful service, the scholarly attainments, and wide acquaintance of Doctor Fliigel made the selection of a suitable person a not inconsiderable task; but after careful inquiry Mr. Adams selected Mr. Karl W. Hiersemann, the bookseller of Leipzig, as Doctor Fliigel’s successor, and on March 8, 1904, the Secretary approved the selection by tendering Mr. Hiersemann the appointment. The central location of Mr. Hierse- mann’s establishment and his efficient clerical staff have already shown the selection to have been a fortunate one. The progress of diplomatic negotiations between the United States and China with a view of establishing mutual exchange relations have frequently been referred to in the annual reports of the Exchange Service, and I am now pleased to announce that the matter has been referred by the Chinese department of foreign affairs to the superintendent of trade for the south (Nanking viceroy), with authority to deal with it. It would therefore seem that official exchange relations with China more nearly approach consummation than ever before. Meanwhile only occasional publications are received from China by mail, and no provision exists for sending exchanges from the United States to China except to addresses in Shanghai. The indirect method of forwarding parcels to the West Indies through the Crown agents for the colonies in London has been abolished, and the services of colonial officers and educational institutions in several of the islands have been enlisted instead. In the near future it is hoped that similar arrangements will be perfected with other British colonies. The department of foreign affairs, Bangkok, Siam, has accepted the invitation of the Institution to enter into a mutual arrangement for an exchange of publications, both governmental and scientific. Following is a list of correspondents abroad through which the distribution of exchanges is accomplished. Those in the larger and in many of the smaller coun- tries forward to the Smithsonian Institution reciprocal contributions for distribution in the United States. Algeria (via France). Angola (via Portugal). Argentina: Museo Nacional, Buenos Ayres. Austria: K. K. Statistische Central-Commission, Vienna. Azores (via Portugal). Belgium: Service Belge des Echanges Internationaux, Brussels. Bolivia: Oficina Nacional de Inmigracion, Estadfstica y Propaganda Geogrifica, La Paz. : 64 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Brazil: Servigo de Permutag¢des Internacionaes, Bibliotheca Nacional, Rio de Janeiro. British Colonies: Crown Agents for the Colonies, London. @ Bulgaria: Dr. Paul Leverktihn, Sofia. Canada: Sent by mail. Canary Islands (via Spain). Cape Colony: Superintendent of the Government Stationery Office, Pre Town. Chile: Universidad de Chile, Santiago. China: Shipments temporarily suspended. Colombia: Biblioteca Nacional, Bogota. Costa Rica: Oficina de Depésito y Canje de Publicaciones, San José. Denmark: Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab, Copenhagen. Dutch Guiana: Surinaamsche Koloniale Bibliotheek, Paramaribo. Ecuador: Biblioteca Nacional, Quito. Kast India: India Store Department, India Office, London. Egypt: Société Khédiviale de Géographie, Cairo. France: Bureau Francais des Echanges Internationaux, Paris. Friendly Islands: Sent by mail. Germany: Karl W. Hiersemann, Konigsstrasse 3, Leipzig. Great Britain and Ireland: Messrs. William Wesley & Son, 28 Essex street, Strand, London. Greece: Director of the American School of Classical Studies, Athens. Greenland (via Denmark). Guadeloupe (via France). Guatemala: Instituto Nacional de Guatemala, Guatemala. Guinea (via Portugal). Haiti: Secrétaire d’ Etat des Relations Extérieures, Port au Prince. Honduras: Biblioteca Nacional, Tegucigalpa. Hungary: Dr. Joseph von Korésy, ‘‘ Redoute,’’? Budapest. Iceland (via Denmark). Italy: Ufficio degli Scambi Internazionali, Biblioteca Nazionale Vittorio Emanuele, Rome. Jamaica: Institute of Jamaica, Kingston. Java (via Netherlands). Liberia: Care of American Colonization Society, Washington, D. C. Luxemburg (via Germany). Madagascar (via France). Madeira (via Portugal). Mexico: Sent by mail. Mozambique (via Portugal). Natal: Agent-General for Natal, London. Netherlands: Bureau Scientifique Central Néerlandais, Bibliotheque de I’ Université, Leyden. New Guinea (via Netherlands). New Hebrides: Sent by mail. Newfoundland: Sent by mail. New South Wales: Board for International Exchanges, Sydney. New Zealand: Colonial Museum, Wellington. Nicaragua: Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores, Managua. Norway: Kongelige Norske Frederiks Universitet Bibliotheket, Christiania. Paraguay: Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores, Asuncion. Persia ie EIEN a This ane is enced a communicating with a ee number of the British colonies with which no means is available for forwarding exchanges direct. REPORT Of THE SECRETARY. 65 Peru: Oficina de Reparto, Deposito y Canje Internacional de Publicaciones, Ministerio de Fomento, Lima. \ Portugal: Bibliotheca Nacional, Lisbon. Queensland: Exchange Board, Parliament House, Brisbane. Roumania (via Germany ). ; Russia: Commission Russe des Echanges Internationaux, Bibliothéque Impériale Publique, St. Petersburg. Salvador: Museo Nacional, San Salvador. Santo Domingo: Sent by mail. Servia (via Germany ). Siam: Minister for Foreign Affairs, Bangkok. South Australia: Astronomical Observatory, Adelaide. Spain: Depdsito de Libros, Cambio Internacional y Biblioteca Genesal del Ministerio de Instruccion Publica y Bellas Artes, Madrid. Sumatra (via Netherlands). Syria: Board of Foreign Missions of the Presbyterian Church, New York. Sweden: Kongliga Svenska Vetenskaps Akademien, Stockholm. Switzerland: Service des Echanges Internationaux, Bibliothéque Fédérale Centrale, Berne. Tasmania: Royal Society of Tasmania, Hobart. Tunis (via France). Turkey: American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, Boston. Uruguay: Oficina de Depdsito, Reparto y Canje Internacional, Montevideo. Venezuela: Biblioteca Nacional, Caracas. Victoria: Public Library, Museums, and National Gallery, Melbourne. Western Australia: Public Library of Western Australia, Perth. Zanzibar: Sent by mail. Save in a few instances, in which the mails were employed, parcels sent to foreign countries during the year were packed in boxes and were forwarded by express or freight. Of the 1,987 boxes of publications thus sent, 300 contained complete series of official documents of the United States for designated depositories, and 1,687 boxes contained United States departmental reports and scientific exchanges for miscella- neous addresses. The number of boxes of miscellaneous exchanges sent to each country is given below: PAO CMM Ae etre Sse ace case eeres SO POCHM Aare s oe ce ae eee 21 JNTTRSEEY ee se a (7|| Doon. Crores aess ee aga sesh nae (>) Bar bad OCBhee eet asia et eeicae cece ie eas talc esea aah ee ee see 21 Bel ommmnkases tee Sane cen Seca ss OUP howip tis saeecleas = Seen e eee 3 BEGG anger ae ee ee ee ce I) |) Pranceand colonies. -2----5..--.--- 191 IBOliviaie en mnn eau sens hem eet 4S Germ Queens ae oe re ee eae eae 277 TBS iREVA ics eyes ee ane enla sney ae ee ER 26 | Great Britain and Ireland_.......-- 341 Britishrcolonieseeseeee en ame eee eee Doel GVCCCOss sk eee ee ee eee 6 IBritisnyG,ula nage see == ae Sy Grate al are ees rae eee oe ee 5 JeyHUNEo LE lonavolbheSA eS = BROS eos ae IS MELOMCUnAS Hens et cee 5 Caper olonvas a2 2 sea ois ees ZU a EM Pan Vien epee ee ary sie ec eee 26 (CLOW TRE A Ses eee ape Ar et een Ae ee fe nor | MUbAlya eee ce oety mse Soca e ey oS (@hille ay eyes mn ae Se Pilea MATIN ATCA Memeo ten seer ee une e s 3 Colonia. foe feo kee ee (ih cel eh af at, ae a pee Gees ee 38 (COSfamRICAp eats aoe ee ae Seiibeuiatasto nee erin= fee ee 2 (CUUIDYD) eR (Gaye Vex CO es ee ee me ee (@) 4 Packages sent by mail. = ~—-? Included in transmissions to Netherlands. sm 1904——5 66 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. IN site ess hy Ur eee eee eae (@) a SON Naas 2 eaves ene eee ne (¢) INewasouthe Wales === sees 2 (i SBI sep Sa > cena en eee eee 2 INetherlandsi=i= see eae ee Sie SOUL MBAS hall ee eee iit INew Providen¢es-o2-e =a a-eeeece IIA iho) Ofc U DORR Meee ee Bue SS cee 18 New: Zealand: ==2. 0 ese aeeee 10" | Sweden Je ssi eae yee oe ee 42 INTCATAMA De ne ee ne eee ©) AS WltZerlan Gl = eke eer ee eras 43 NOLWaYoek i: 22oce- 2s eee eee 2a || SIVELY ee 2h fs Sop een See ee 1 Paraguay. =a ore om es 6: | Rasmanta: 25023 fe. See ce eee eee ee 6 Perso. 2 he ae ee Sees ee dl \iransvaali noe ease oe ee eee () Polynesian seo 4a=4e2eee seer ae (2) || pair lade Ss sae eee poe tae 2 Portugaligace 222s See 2S) OK @ yg ee ercre sey es oe eee ae 2 Queensland) os4 aes ease ee neeae eee 12) jUirguay:e S22) sess ery es eee 10 ROUM ANIA ce eee ce ae eee (oe) Mn aVienezelae= 5a: Seer eee 5 IRMSSia aes a eae on eee ieee W854): WACtOT Aiea eee ee eee ee 19 Salvadores.055 s5e0e 55 oes Ale WiesterneAis tralia === ee 15 During the year six consignments of United States Government official publications were made to each of the fifty depositories for which provision was made under the joint resolution of Congress approved March 2, 1867. The transmissions were made to each depository on July 20 and November 20, 1908, and on January 11, February 17, April 15, and June 6, 1904. A list of these depositories follows: Argentina: Library of the Foreign Office, Buenos Ayres. Argentina: Biblioteca Publica Provincial, La Plata. Australia: Commonwealth of Australia, Melbourne. Austria: K. K. Statistische Central-Commission, Vienna. Baden: Universitits-Bibliothek, Freiburg. Bavaria: Konigliche Hof- und Staats-Bibliothek, Munich. Belgium: Bibliotheque Royale, Brussels. Brazil: Bibliotheca Nacional, Rio de Janeiro. Canada: Parliamentary Library, Ottawa. Chile: Biblioteca del Congreso, Santiago. Colombia: Biblioteca Nacional, Bogota. Costa Rica: Oficina de Depdésito y Canje de Publicaciones, San José. Cuba: Department of State, Habana. Denmark: Kongelige Bibliotheket, Copenhagen. England: British Museum, London, England: School of Economics and Political Sciences, London. France: Bibliotheque Nationale, Paris. Germany: Deutsche Reichstags-Bibliothek, Berlin. Greece: National Library, Athens. Haiti: Secrétaire d’ Etat des Relations Extérieures, Port au Prince. Hungary: Hungarian House of Delegates, Budapest. India: Secretary to the Government of India, Calcutta. Ireland: National Library of Ireland, Dublin. Italy: Biblioteca Nazionale Vittorio Emanuele, Rome. Japan: Foreign Office, Tokyo. Mexico: Instituto Bibliogrifico, Museo Nacional, Mexico. Netherlands: Library of the States General, The Hague. New South Wales: Board for International Exchanges, Sydney. New Zealand: General Assembly Library, Wellington. Norway: Storthingets Bibliothek, Christiania. « Included in transmissions to Great Britain. > Packages sent by mail. ¢ Included in transmissions to Germany. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 67 Ontario: Legislative Library, Toronto. Peru: Biblioteca Nacional, Lima. Portugal: Bibliotheca Nacional, Lisbon. Prussia: Kénigliche Bibliothek, Berlin. . Quebec: Legislative Library, Quebec. Queensland: Parliamentary Library, Brisbane. Russia: Imperial Public Library, St. Petersburg. Saxony: Konigliche Bibliothek, Dresden. South Australia: Parliamentary Library, Adelaide. Spain: Seccion de Propiedad Intelectual del Ministerio de Fomento, Madrid. Sweden: Kongliga Biblioteket, Stockholm. Switzerland: Bibliotheque Fédérale, Berne. Tasmania: Parliamentary Library, Hobart. Transyaal: Government Library, Pretoria. Turkey: Minister of Public Instruction, Constantinople. Uruguay: Oficina de Depdsito, Reparto y Canje Internacional de Publicaciones, Montevideo. Venezuela: Biblioteca Nacional, Caridcas. Victoria: Public Library, Melbourne. Western Australia: Public Library of Western Australia, Perth. Wirttemberg: Konigliche Bibliothek, Stuttgart. The fifty sets of United States official publications referred to were delivered to the Smithsonian Institution from time to time as they came from press, and when a sufficient number was received to completely fill the boxes prepared for them, a list was printed to accompany each set, which was then shipped to its respective destination. In addition to the above, either full or partial sets were provided under the joint resolution of Congress approved March 2, 1901, for the purpose of increasing exchanges with countries for which no provision was made under the limited resolu- tion of March 2, 1867. The new depositories which had been designated to the close of the fiscal year 1903-4 were as follows: Austria-Hungary: Burgermeister der Haupt- und Residenz-Stadt, Vienna. British Columbia: Legislative Assembly, Victoria. Bulgaria: Minister of Foreign Affairs, Sophia. Cape Colony: Superintendent of the Government Stationery Office, Cape Town. France: Préfecture de la Seine, Paris. Germany: Grossherzogliche Hof-Bibliothek, Darmstadt. Germany: Senatskommission fur die Reichs- und auswirtigen Angelegenheiten, Hamburg. Germany: Foreign Office, Bremen. Guatemala: Secretary of the Government, Guatemala. Honduras: Secretary of the Government, Tegucigalpa. Jamaica: Colonial Secretary, Kingston. Manitoba: Provincial Library, Winnipeg. Newfoundland: Colonial Secretary, St. Johns. New Brunswick: Legislative Library, Fredericton. Natal: Colonial Governor, Pietermaritzburg. Nova Scotia: Legislative Library, Halifax. Northwest Territories: Government Library, Regina. Prince Edward Island: Legislative Library, Georgetown. Paraguay: Oficina General de Informaciones y Canjes y Commisaria General de Inmigracion, Asuncion. Roumania: Academia Romana, Bukharest. Straits Settlements: Colonial Secretary, Singapore. Siam: Foreign Office, Bangkok. 68 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. As new countries are constantly being added, the sets for the depositories desig- nated under the iast resolution are not forwarded simultaneously with those originally provided, but are delivered to the Institution from the Library of Congress and are dispatched with the next succeeding consignments of miscellaneous exchanges. Messrs. William Wesley & Son and Dr. Joseph yon Korosy continue to represent the Institution in Great Britain and Hungary, respectively, but, as above mentioned, a new agent, in the person of Mr. Karl W. Hiersemann, has been appointed to suc- ceed the late Doctor Fliigel in Germany. To these gentlemen, who’ are compensated by the Institution for their services, to the many individuals and institutions who render valuable aid in the promotion of the exchange service at large, and to Mr. Charles A. King, deputy collector of the port of New York, the grateful acknowledg- ments of the Smithsonian Institution are due. Mr. W. Irving Adams, chief clerk of the International Exchange Service, returned on May 30, 1904, from a journey to Europe, undertaken for the purpose of promoting the interest of the service. It gives me pleasure to say that his observations will result in enlarging the scope of the Exchange Service and in inaugurating many improvements. Permit me to commend the efficient manner in which the work of the Exchanges has been conducted by the office force under the immediate supervision of Mr. Adams, and, in his absence, under Mr. F. V. Berry. The increased work of the service, brought about by its growing usefulness, has sometimes been almost overwhelming, nevertheless there has been no undue delay in the transmission and distribution of the many thousands of packages handled and recorded during the year. Respectfully submitted. F. W. Hones, Acting Curator of Exchanges. Mr. 8S. P. LANGLEY, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Juty 1, 1904. APPENDIX IV. REPORT OF THE SUPERINTENDENT OF THE NATIONAL ZOOLOGICAL PARK. Str: I have the honor to herewith submit the following report relating to the con- dition and operations of the National Zoological Park for the year ending June 30, 1904. At the close of that period the approximate value of the property belonging to the park was as follows: Tetonlkeliaves\ivore giovanni Seas oonedaace ROO OMNn Aa aon co ner osaareuencoreaeas $100, 000 Buvdinesifor administrative PULPOSesr. e222 2-2-2] - ee ine nein 14, 000 OficesurmituresboOOks apparatus metGrss sass eee se eee yeas earl 4, 200 Machineny-qLOOls;anG Implements ee sea sere == sere = ea 2, 200 HencesHinGd OuLdoOorsinclOSUnESEEseeeer eet eee eee eee nese eae eee ee 33, 000 Roadways: bridges, paths, rusticiseats, ete. ---=------.--5---2-=5--4----- 80, 000 INiUISE LCS Pane en sey ae ee er a perce ees cao scare Sects ie 2 1, 000 IBIGREGRIS 62 Sn Se Ooo An CEOS OE le Se Rae ae Seno ee SREP C rene apne ri 400 PAMinimal sie ZzOOLOzical cOlleGtloMysce.: sere mane sae e's ate elope 2 metas i=l 42, 000 A detailed list of the animals in the collection is appended hereto. They may be classified as follows: Indige- : Domesti- ars aE. Foreign. aa. Total. IY ira tet 2s ees a OR ARE Sa en tested a Sin Serer 318 154 69 | 541 Teton ars Pe ee a ge ee ee 290 127 28 445 IRGyc] 00 ABR ee Aen iar ea oP ee ae ee eS ee ee 113 1D ee eae see 125 STG tea pee eee eae ee ore 2A yc pn me ae eae 721 293 | O7 ale elena The accessions of animals during the year have been as follows: FETS Tal eee rey SER REE ce een 1 Ly Laer ney one ARS ee Sera 2 93 Bunechasedean adeeollec tee eee eae ee ete a ee ie aes rs tea ays ore hor ctenche 251 AGT ere eee eerie er a Re gem ee ME ewe ep Ree BE ae a ee es Seal Sci as ae 19 iRecenjedurommvellowstonesNatwonalebark oss sce seen seer sees see eee a Sao 4 ECE Wed pine CMAN Cee | eres hati) fa eek ete See ee eee eee Saat Senate Sens Se 6 BarmMinevanionalyZooloricall Parks 523 .2t26 522s sass eee Pee aan = Jere ses aha 97 ARO taller an re ee a coe eee ae D elegy a EE 470 The cost for purchase, collection, and transportation of these accessions has been $4,500. The appropriation for the general service of the park was made in the following terms: “For continuing the construction of roads, walks, bridges, water supply, sewerage and drainage; and for grading, planting, and otherwise improving the grounds; erecting and repairing buildings and inclosures; care, subsistence, purchase, and transportation of animals, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employ- ees, the purchase of necessary books and periodicals, the printing and publishing of operations, not exceeding one thousand five hundred copies, and general incidental expenses not otherwise provided for, ninety-five thousand dollars.” 69 70 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. For some years past the want of sufficient accommodations for the animals at the park has been severely felt. This need seemed during the past season so urgent that all other objects not imperatively necessary for the maintenance of the collection were deferred, and the available resources were applied to the erection of a new house for mammals. After consultation with Mr. F. L. Olmsted a site for the structure was selected near the principal animal house, in the situation shown in the accompanying plat (Pl. 1). It was decided to build it of stone, using the same gray gneiss, found in the region of Rock Creek, that was used in building the principal house. A plan of the main floor of the structure is shown herewith (Pl. II). Its dimensions are as follows: Inside. | Outside. Ft. in. Ft. in. Lengthot rectancles s: ooh nica ce cies sacle oemiaie caer ee aale See eee ee Oe eee oseereye 120 4 124 4 Width of rectangle. Se os ot one Sues senate ee ee elon eerie Ro See Ee eee 48 6 52 6 Extreme length ssic225 24 aces yet eens oe ae ae ee aoe ee ee ee eee 135 7 139 7 EXtreme With wals = aovesve = aovsswd S,4NVAONGiiv Teter ea, Sect ter AAS) ch Ce j w 9 < sR aN Aaa sees me é | ib aovssvd SANWONZiiv LAceEm =. a ES ®, > aowssvd Sp OLR? CHIN ST ob FOV? aovsSwd SAanVQnausaiv ——) « |e ITE SEAS tive auvnd = \ @) = 4 r a | < 4 > 4 B1INGILSIA | x [lk A9VaS sradage aoNV LN Ret q ‘a ie ” 3 2 ee 7 tive @auwnao Jiveu aquyrno fn ee, al / u aovsswa Sinvaonaiiv aovsswada SANWANGLiv / = : = = y V2) ed (ts Wy eh M4 TRS N iat SSE t=) 2 ada zl Eee We aOvssvd S,AaNVaGNGQiiav n a a : Is =-[l| 3OvsS va ca ca 1 saw salovo 2 alin S A] a © a be s s w~ u 2] Swe cewne ve savas aovssuvd SOLINDWAGUN D3 Lay, Exit Ouase 84 “|) 3LV1d $061 ‘HOodey uRiuOsYyIWS REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. (fal the summer of 1903 the crown was reformed and a new surface dressing of crushed limestone was put on at a cost of $450. (This section of road is still in almost perfect condition, a good example of the ease with which a comparatively level road can be kept in repair as against one ona steep grade. ) This road was also widened at the entrance and reshaped to conform to the new lines of the highway approach outside. Cost, $260. Repairing log bridge.—It was found that the floods in the creek had cut into and undermined the north abutment of this bridge, and additional concrete was put in and faced with stone slabs. The trend of the current against the abutment was pre- vented for the future by removing a gravel bank and burying a few logs in the edge of the stream to turn the water toward the center and prevent scouring. Cost, $250. Water supply from the main on Connecticut avenue extended.—The water supply for the entire park had been furnished by a 6-inch main, laid at the expense of the park, down Quarry road from Columbia road. The supply in the higher parts of the park, on the west side, was not satisfactory, and it was impossible to maintain sufficient pressure when water was being used in the lower levels. A new pipe to supply the western part of the park was laid from the main on Connecticut avenue extended, at a cost of $250. Bookcases for office.—Retference books and bookcases for the superintendent’s office were purchased during the year at a cost of $200. Noteworthy accessions.—A young male lion, presented to the President by King Menelik, of Abyssinia, was deposited in the park by the President. A spotted hyena, presented by N. E. Skinner, special envoy to King Menelik. Twelve American bison were loaned by Messrs. Bailey and Cody. One phalanger and 2 bridled wallabies were received from Dr. F. W. Goding, United States consul at Newcastle, New South Wales. Four coyotes were presented by Major Pitcher, acting superintendent, Yel- lowstone National Park. Nine wandering tree ducks were presented by Carl Hagen- beck. One Himalayan bear was received from the New York Zoological Park in exchange. Purchases.—A Kodiak bear. (This species is the largest carnivorous land animal now in existence; one killed at English Bay, Kodiak Island, weighed 1,756 pounds. ) In this connection it is of interest to note that the male of Ursus dalli gyas, now-in the park, which weighed in June, 1903, 450 pounds, had attained a weight, January 18, 1904, of 625 pounds. A Mexican mountain sheep. Donor. Number. Canada porecupine....---..-.- Jas. HoldcrofMayfield, Mich ...............---------------- 1 Angora guinea pig ....--.--. Chas™We stewart.washinetony Ds Cass2s-hsacsesce asso oce ses 1 english rabbite>---—- 2. =\ [Poe SOT UL ASO VV ets lam Or OID.) Cee teeta ers eee area e miele tees 2 Mani COUn-e eee seceee =se 2 MisssManyeS Ebayer sMonadnocksuNeb.-se--scenecae cen sass 2 Albino opossum ....-.--.---- Jems Olivere Ne wi Ontse Ait keete senestcl silos ella l= hacsseooncdeoes I WiWoyel ana¥es) opie So oogeenceEecae | Mrs. C. E. Merguson Washington Coes joanne cn ances /csieae 1 American magpie ...-.....-- | Jas. Hullerton Red Modeer Montesa ccassecins eee see oe 2 White-fronted amazon ...-.-- Capt. C. F. Shoemaker, Washington, D. C ................-.2- 1 Grass parrakeet.........-.--- Dryh ES Smith Washington Ds Cassese seeeere esse ees eee oe 2 patra keetiar cane oedsece eee. MrsiiWie Me Bia ck Washington Ds Geese s at scecees ce eee e 1 DRS See teee ae eeacescee HIOraceNVVlewVWashino tone Geese seashore eee 1 Great hornedowl.......----- 1B NY Olaelig VSL NAKAO) 015, 1D) (O Gacocdcconnnogcecdsesasocesace 1 DORs eae eee omen uke MeKallown1 @hevivaChaseoM Giseer see ase eceiec cekineece coce 1 D Ome eee ee eee cis Wine Beuchert) WashinetontsD | Cass aereean a se eeese sere cece see 1 Short-earediowl-. so. aac--- =~ = ChE Mallory.sbutialo CentermMlowal sseteecsseeesesee ace eos ce 2 BarrediOwlisaceeesse ccc aae SergeantiCarrolle wWashinstoniDiCis-cssece sss se cece ooneeee 1 DOE See ecm neieceine mae Donor UNM OWiaaceee as nae kine seen fo eeh cis elcoaneneeese ace 1 Barmmowilemeses scene scence GeowR a Moberlyashredeneks iMG socccee eisemicn sete ceeceeecee 1 Golden;eagle’-----2--.------'- Mh evPresidentie sas secs sy teats secesaa a a secowanacerrs iene 1 Red-tailed hawk ......-.-..- IDE Wyovbinavenys \yekclonboyse Koval, ID)s Chane soheoace cosecoceauesaoesasne 1 Venezuelan hawk........-.- E. H. Plumacher, United States consul, Maracaibo, Venezuela. 1 Daubenton’s curassow ......|.-.-- LO ar aera sists crate lalate Te ero Tore ee ePoLS eee Sine oe nicleio tie alae miciniaemna ack: 2 American bitterm............ CeheMalloryeBuitalo Centersowars-cenasseeen cena eee ase : Wandering tree duck ....-.-. Carl Hagenbeck, Hamburg, Germany ..................------ 9 Snakeipindeseeecec sect esisec AC MesNicholsonOrlandowhlasa=-eroaceeeraenese = eee eae 1 JNUEENO Scosaapneeouncboudss ID); ION eGeyonanlsy White oub oye WOVE ID) (ON nao becdasecassoososeonLaBaeEHe 1 DO ise oteewsee ssmiesls Je EVO CHO AW ASE BGO TD) ok Ciera ante peer Ppt este 1 Rough-eyed caiman ........- E. H. Plumacher, United States consul, Maracaibo, Venezuela. 2 Ghuekawallacstcesa. oases OctosHolstein- Mellen wATI Zant ee seat eae eee aeeee eres 3 Hormedslizandiey ert R. H. Fatt and Maj. D. B. Johnson, Washington, D. C......-. 5 Gillass/SNakeG sass. 2 =ses ce Sesicisi- Missi thelBRooseveliticrseececiteccee coset eseee seem le eee 1 Banded rattlesnake -........ Je balahlorensrHancockwMdsssmecee ses ose eeecee eee eeeee 1 Prairie rattlesnake .........- Jas HullertonwRedebodgesMontess+seenscem de eee eseeee eee 2 IMIASSASAUIP AL teecisecee ase sees Prof. Hubertuyman) Clark Olivet, Mich e-22.5.-222--5-02-. 1 Copperhead Pee sees eesase Jeb-eDahloren Hancock Md: -sseeeesceae seen t eee eee cee eee 5 Bullisnalkesseseee sarc ences James Hullerton, RediWwodge> Monta: 2ssss-saeeee eee eee oe one 2 Blacksnakes resect ecee cs Hans Carrico stithntonw hoyesnesencoeseeeeoree coset eeesccen on. 1 DO ssscere rotten saecice ce Drs ope] nesern Washing tonsa Ceaanecrarccesaseeeececes se 1 1 DY SSeS e CCU SUA aos Snaor Prof rubertinyman! Clark @livet--Mich=-oss-s-2 522222 4ecees 3 Milleisnake sss sea ncencscece. Jee DetwalersINe Walslnyiln ay Hl acme eae oases eee cee 1 Garferisniaker a4. eencts cc He Carmconsutotommksyeececemesocemeaccercacoetecices cece 1 Hog-nosed'snake to. 2222-.5.|2---- LOS rereter eters beleisre erases Ste rte secre oa ratete, claln lobes ccajeliacobtcicye cies 1 SCONES OSNAKe eae. access se WinleP seal @elain iNeed ae meee eae seme c cinicitee serge cies ae 1 SUMMARY. Number. ACTUIT ASONIH AGrd aly aaL OOS eran ets oe eee ae ees ce ect ae ieee levee iis sic oes tesccien 1,000 INCCOSSIONS) QUTIN HEN ERY GAT cee ee ae sctataic cis cine ice meter hia ohne in eee atlas acinus cece cet 470 STG Get eee ets ee iar ree ite ca el oy ei e Hy <3 ORR NE Ia eat ere ieee oe ciawieudoase ook 1,470 Deduct loss (by exchange, death, and returning of animals) ...................-.---------- 359 ——— 1,111 Respectfully submitted. Mr. S. P. Lanauey, Frank Baker, Superintendent. Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. APPENDIX V. REPORT OF THE WORK OF THE ASTROPHYSICAL OBSERVATORY FOR THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1904. Sir: The kinds and amounts of Observatory property are approximately as follows: Buildings. ees eS ene te ee eee $6, 300 Apparatus oo sic cS Saye ace Ss pee or cree oI ee ne i ae 41, 400 Library! and ‘reeords.5 05 escalate ae aie et ee 6, 800 TO tall so Se es ee ee om, 54, 500 During the past year the acquisitions of property have been as follows: (a) Apparatus.—Astronomical and physical apparatus has been purchased at an expenditure of $4,500. The most important pieces comprise a new spectrobolometric outfit, to be used in the study of the great solar image of the 140-foot focus horizon- tal telescope, and also for a proposed expedition to some elevated station for the determination of the solar constant. Of the sum expended for apparatus, $2,430 was chargeable to the appropriations of 1901-2 and 1902-3. Shelters for the great hori- zontal telescope and apparatus for the research on the solar constant have been ordered, at an estimated expenditure of $1,230. A ground plan of the Observatory enclosure, including the new shelters, is shown in Plate Y. (b) Library and records.—The usual periodicals have been continued, and a few books of reference purchased. Three new cases haye been procured for storage of books and periodicals. The total expenditure for these purposes is $340. The Observatory buildings have been repainted at a cost of $195. No losses of property worthy of note have occurred during the year. THE WORK OF THE OBSERVATORY. For convenience the work may be classified as follows: 1. Publications and miscellaneous matters. 2. Improvements of apparatus. 3. Investigations. 1. Publications and miscellaneous matters. Eclipse report.—The report of the solar eclipse expedition to Wadesboro, N. C., of May, 1900, referred to in my last year’s report, has been distributed, and has been favorably noticed both in this country and abroad. St. Louis Exposition.—A far more elaborate exhibition of the Observatory work than usual has been prepared and installed for the St. Louis Exposition under your instructions. The great coelostat, mentioned in my last year’s report, is arranged to throw a beam of sunlight into a darkened portion of the room occupied by the Observatory exhibit, where a solar image about a yard in diameter is thrown up by a 6-inch telescope, and the solar spectrum is formed upon the walls of the room by a large concave grating. 78 “OZIS [BNJOV 22 apRos “AYNSOTON] AYOLVAYASEO SHL JO NV1Id GNNOYS “pO6L ‘Woday ueiuosuyiLUS "A alvid ‘AZIS [RNR & ‘s[rRjap fozIs PenIoR * ‘MOTA OpIs "SNLVUVddy OIULSWO10g 4O WHO4 MAN IA aLvid 5 AOlone pHodsy UBIUOSUYIWS REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 79 A display of transparencies showing apparatus, buildings, and results of obserya- tion isa prominent object to visitors as they enter the room, and thence they pass through the darkened chamber above mentioned and get a view of the solar spec- trum and of such sun spots as are visible. As they leave the darkened chamber they come upon a group of bolometric apparatus in actual operation and sensitive enough to give 100 or more scale divisions deflection when the visitor holds his hand in front of the bolometer. Charts and reports illustrative of the work of the Observa- tory are found upon the walls. A large number of copies of a pamphlet descriptive of the Observatory and its studies have been freely distributed. 2. Improvements of apparatus. Bolometer.—The bolometer and its adjuncts had reached so high a state of perfec- tion, as described in my last year’s report, that further improvement could hardly be expected, but in order to make it practicable to set up so sensitive an instrument at the St. Louis Exposition and leave it without expert attention for months, it was felt desirable to combine in compact form the most approved methods of construction, haying special reference to simplicity of manipulation, so that the instrument could be safely left in unskilled hands. Accordingly the bolometric apparatus, shown in Plate VI, was designed at the Observatory and constructed in the Observatory shop. Asin the form shown in Plate XII A of Volume I of the Annals of the Astro- physical Observatory, all the adjuncts to the bolometer, excepting the battery and galvanometer, are combined in a single case, adjusted mechanically from outside, but in this new form the adjusting slide wires are straight, instead of spiral, and no clamping mechanism is required, so that the construction is much simplified and can hardly get out of order. At the same time five slide wires are provided of differing sensitiveness of adjustment, so that by merely turning cranks on the outside of the case any adjustment from 545 to sgyodo000 1M the relative resistances of the balancing arms of the bolometric circuit can be easily effected. It is a principal advantage of this arrangement that all the electrical circuit is in such compact quarters that changes of temperature affect all parts almost alike. These have been the great causes of disturbance of the deflections of the needle in the past, and the great obstacle to an automatic registry. Their bad effects are so nearly eliminated now that apart from the occasional need of a uniformity in the temperature of the prism, the elaborate arrangements for keeping a uniform temperature in the observing room are no longer needed. No difficulty from drift or any disorder has ever been experienced with this adjunct to the bolometric apparatus, and it is so much superior to any earlier form that a duplicate piece has since been constructed for use in a research on the radiation of the stars. Both were made at the Observatory shop and worked perfectly from the very first trial, and they reflect great credit on Mr. Kramer, the instrument maker. Pyrheliometer.—Reference was made in last year’s report to the new form of absolute pyrheliometer then being developed, consisting of a hollow chamber or ‘‘absolutely black body”’ in which the radiation is absorbed and from which the heat is continu- ously removed by a liquid circulating about’ the walls of the chamber. This instru- ment has been tried so successfully in an experimental form that steps are now being taken to provide one for continuous automatic registration of the rate of solar radia- tion. Its principal advantage as an absolute instrument depends on the fact that it may be demonstrated that its indications are correct, for if a known quantity of heat is supplied electrically to a coil within the chamber, this heat will reach the walls by convection and radiation, and being then removed by the flowing liquid its amount may be measured and compared with the known heating actually produced in the coil. But it is obvious that the heat of solar rays, absorbed almost wholly upon the wall of the chamber as they fall upon it, is much more likely to be accurately meas- ured than the heat of the coil, which must first be chiefly communicated to the air . 80 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. and thence to the wall of the chamber by convection. Accordingly, if the measured heating from the coil agrees closely with the known heating ap} lied to the coil, much more closely will the measured heating from the solar rays represent the actual rate of solar radiation. Repeated trials have showed that the new form of pyrheliometer is capable of accurate measurement of the heating of the coil, so that confidence is felt in its meas- ures of the more advantageously applied solar radiation. Preliminary comparisons with the new instrument seem to indicate that the mercury pyrheliometer hereto- fore used as a standard at this Observatory reads somewhat too high. Horizontal telescope.—Tests have been made to determine how completely the defects of bad seeing are removed by churning the air column in the great horizontal tele- scope, according to the plan initiated by you and mentioned in my last year’s report. It has been found that though the churning is of great advantage, and generally indis- pensable to any work whatever on the solar image, yet the definition of an artificial star, whose beam travels twice through the whole tube, is far from perfect even with churning. Much of the disturbed seeing is found to be caused by the heating of the poorly protected tube in the sun, and a ventilated canvas tent has been ordered to screen the tube thoroughly. . Plans are also formed for making additional tests on other methods of churning the air in the tube. Recalling the more perfect results secured in experiments on a smaller scale in 1902, and the evident improvement of definition obtained in the present large tube with the churning device now installed, no doubt is felt that bad seeing within the tube itself may at length be wholly removed. A second serious defect in definition was found to be caused by warping of the large plane mirrors of the coelostat, one of which is inclined forward and was at first supported by a ring in front, while the other mirror, made originally for much less severe work, was too thin to keep flat with an ordinary system of support. Both mirrors have been almost entirely cured of these defects by the introduction of the Ritchey supporting system composed of numerous balanced plates. For the mirror which is inclined forward, Mr. Ritchey’s original design had to be somewhat modi- fied because the mirror must be stuck to the plates instead of resting on them by its weight as in mirrors supported face up. We have heretofore employed here ground brass plates to which the mirror is stuck with rubber cement, but it would probably be better to make the plates slightly concave and connect them by flexible tubes to a large reservoir from which the air is partially exhausted, so that the mirror would be held to the plates by suction. But even as we have used it, the Ritchey system has wonderfully improved the definition secured on the solar image. All the work on these support systems was done in the Observatory shop. A third serious defect in the definition of the horizontal telescope is due to the tremor of the mirrors continually kept up by the city traffic, notwithstanding the costly and massive piers on which the apparatus rests. Very great improvement in steadiness has come from placing 13-inch rubber blocks under the coelostat and under the coneave mirrors. Before the improvements noted, the solar focal image, 40 cm. in diameter, was an ill-defined circle at a focal distance varying often 10 feet during a single day, and with the sides at different focal distances from the top and bottom. Now the image is pretty sharply defined, comes to focus on all sides in the same plane, and stays within less than a foot of the same focus all day; while its wanderings rarely reach much over a millimeter in amplitude. It is now possible to observe the absorption in the solar envelope with accuracy at within 1 or 2 per cent of the radius from the sun’s limb. But further improvements of the horizontal telescope are in progress, notably the provision of well-protected shelters over the coelostat, the concave mirror, and @ Astrophysical Journal, y, 148, 1897. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 81 the spectro-bolometric apparatus, in place of the canvas shelters thus far used, and with these, the improved churning device proposed, and the tent to shelter the tube already ordered, it is confidently expected to have the horizontal telescope in very satisfactory condition during the coming fiscal year. 3. Investigations. Sun’s possible variability.—Notable progress has been made with the researches you have initiated on the amount of solar radiation and its absorption in the solar enyel- ope and in our atmosphere. Within the last seventeen months three independent kinds of evidence have been collected here, pointing toward the conclusion that the radiation supplied by the sun may perhaps fluctuate within intervals of a few months through ranges of nearly or quite 10 per cent, and ‘that these fluctuations of solar radiation may cause changes of temperature of several degrees centigrade nearly simultaneously over the great continental areas of the world. Further evidence must, however, be awaited to verify this important conclusion. The three kinds of evidence referred to are as follows: First, on all favorable days the ‘‘solar constant’’ of radiation outside our atmosphere has been determined here, and changes of about 10 per cent in the values obtained have been found which can not be attributed to known causes. Second, the solar image formed by the horizon- tal telescope has been examined with the spectro-bolometer to determine the absorp- tion of radiation within the solar envelope itself. If we grant for argument’s sake that the rate of solar radiation outside our atmosphere fluctuates rapidly from time to time, then as you have observed, the cause of this fluctuation can not reasonably be a variability of the temperature of so immense a body as the sun itself, but must rather be in a change in the absorption of a more or less opaque envelope surrounding thesun. Accordingly the two researches I have mentioned are intimately associated, for if we find a considerable increase in the rate of solar radiation outside our atmos- phere we ought to find a corresponding decrease in the absorbing power of the solar envelope. Such is in fact one of the most notable results of the year’s work. In August, September, and October, 1903, the observations of the ‘‘ solar constant’’ of radiation indicated that the rate of radiation was about 10 per cent below that observed in February, 1904. On the other hand measurements of the absorption of the solar envelope indicated considerably less absorption in February, 1904, than in Septem- ber, 1903. The third kind of evidence of change in solar radiation is based on a study of the temperature of the North Temperate Zone, as indicated by the Internationaler Deka- denberichte published by the Kaiserliche Marine Deutsche Seewarte, and received at the Observatory through the kindness of the Librarian of the United States Weather Bureau. This publication gives the mean temperature at 8 a. m. for each ten days at each one of about one hundred stations distributed over the principal land areas of the North Temperate Zone, and for about ninety of these stations there is also given the normal temperatures for the same ten-day periods, representing the mean of many years. From these data there have been computed here the temper- ature departures from the normal since January 1, 1903, and these are compared graphically in the accompanying chart, Plate VII,/@ oan the measures of the solar constant made in 1903. It will be seen that shortly after the observed fall of solar radiation in March, 1903, a general fall of temperature occurred, which would be < natural result of such a change. It has been shown here, in accordance with the known laws of radiation, that 10 per cent fall in the solar radiation could not pro- duce more than 7°.5 C. fall in terrestrial temperatures, and that several causes, notably 9) aShown San in your Peale on Pen Possible Variation of the (gone Radiation. Astrophysical Journal, June, 1904. SM 19046 82 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. the presence of the oceans, would prevent so great a change of temperature as this resulting from a temporary diminution of solar radiation of only a few months’ dura- tion. The observed fall of about 2°.5 C. in the mean temperature of the land areas of the North Temperature Zone during April, 1908, seems to be therefore in good accord with the observations of solar radiation. Owing to the uncommon cloudiness of the first six months of 1904 few measures of the ‘‘solar constant’? worthy to be compared with the series of 1903 have been obtained, but taking the best of the measures it appears that high values of solar radiation in February, 1904, and lower ones in the subsequent months are indicated, as shown in Table 2, given below. This appears to be in general accord with the mean temperatures observed over the North Temperate Zone, except that it seems probable that the solar radiation was high in January as well as February, but the lack of good observing weather prevented our recognition of it. Forecasts of temperature.—If subsequent research shall confirm these indications of a general parallelism between measures of solar radiation and terrestrial temper- atures, we are now entering upon a new field of climate forecasting. But if such fore- casts had to depend on measures of the solar radiation outside our atmosphere the observing station should be removed from Washington to a more favorable situation, for the experience of the last two years has shown that hardly a score of days in a year are uniformly clear enough to allow even relatively good ‘‘solar constant’’ values to be obtained, and these good days are very unevenly distributed. Fortu- nately, the distinct work which you have planned on the absorption of the solar envelope, already mentioned, seems to promise a far easier method of forecasting, which requires much less of constancy in the atmospheric conditions. Owing to the preliminary nature of the installation of the great horizontal telescope as thus far used, and to the fact that the great coelostat has been sent to the exposition at St. Louis, only the single instance above mentioned of a comparison of the radiation outside our atmosphere with solar absorption has yet been made; but if future work shall confirm the general agreement between the indications afforded by the study of the absorption of the solar envelope and those afforded by the measures of total solar radiation, the significance of the result will be very great, for the bolometric investigation of the solar image can be made at any time when the sun shines clear for five minutes, by a method practically independent of the disturbances of our own atmosphere, whereas the measures of total radiation require three hours of unvarying transparency of the air. Accordingly the former measurements may be made almost daily, and will, it is hoped, prove of great service in temperature forecasts. The effects of changes of the transparency of our own atmosphere are, perhaps, of equal importance in temperature forecasts, and the recognition of these of course depends on such spectro-bolometric measures as are involved in determinations of the “solar constant.’’ Referring to my last year’s report, it will be remembered that the earlier months of 1903 were found distinguished by more than the average absorption of light in our atmosphere. In September, 1903, there was a marked increase in transparency, so that in the latter months of the year the clearness was almost as great as that of 1901-2. Of course as these studies are made only at Wash- ington no general conclusions as to the transparency of the air at other stations can safely be drawn. But if the clearing aboye mentioned was general it might perhaps explain the upward tendency during the last months of 1903 of the curve of average temperatures shown in Plate VII. I venture to think the importance of studies of atmospheric absorption at other stations would warrant observers elsewhere in taking up the spectro-bolometric work involved in measures of the ‘‘solar constant.’’ Measures of the absorption of the solar envelope, on the other hand, which require the provision of a great solar image, would not necessarily be duplicated elsewhere. Smithsonian Report, 1904. TEMPERATURE DEPARTURES . PLaTe VII. NorTH AMERICA. 20 STATIONS. AzZorES,MADEIRAS, BRITISH ISLES, SWEvrorPeE, © N. AFRICA. 18 STATIONS NW.Eurore. 15 STATIONS. CENTRAL EuROPE. 10 STATIONS. EuROPEAN RussiA 11 STATIONS. eal 4a) E ASIATIC RuSssIA. 8 STATIONS olf HicH ALTITUDES SW.EurRore. fo) 7 STATIONS. ithe =e na + oa GENERAL MEAN *!| NoRTH O TEMPERATE = dahie: ZONE. 2.25|CAL. 89 STATIONS. SoLAR TRADIATION 210(caL OUTSIDE THE 2oslcar AATMOSPHERE. 2 00 Jan. une July Mug Sept. Oct. TERRESTRIAL TEMPERATURE AND SOLAR RADIATION, 1903. Nov. Dec. qa LD 2 ‘4yods uns Surpnypour ynq ‘syysuey OAR 1B SAT ‘709°T YaSuoy OARA\ 9B ‘TIT :700'T Yasuo] OAR YR “TT Mee’9 YISUOT OABA 1V "J ‘C061 ‘YSEW31d]aS ‘OSIG YV10S JO YALAWVIG SNOTIY NOILVIGVY 4O ALISNSLN] “ITLA aLWd 706 ‘Oday veiuosUyIWS REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 83 RESULTS IN DETAIL. Referring to my report of last Vear and to your recent publication @ on ‘‘A possible variation of solar radiation’’ for further information, the following three tables sum- marize the detailed results of the work already broadly discussed. Tables 1 and 2 are given in continuation of similar tables in last year’s report, and perhaps it needs only to remark concerning them that the first six months of 1904 have proved uncom- monly unfavorable to such studies as are here set forth, by reason of unusual cloudi- ness. Owing to the bad atmospheric conditions there have been no days when results as satisfactory as many of those of 1903 have been secured, and only two days’ work of 1904, February 11 and May 28, are regarded here as worthy of much confi- dence. Taking the whole series together and comparing with the results of 1902-3, it appears probable, however, that excepting during the month of February, the solar radiation thus far in 1904 has been below the normal, although not so low as during the latter half of 1903. The atmospheric transmission of 1903-4 seems to be generally below that of 1902. TaBLeE 1.—Coefficients of atmospheric transmission for radiation from zenith sun. be i b. Me I Me K. I be Wiaiverlene ties: a= s2-c55 seer 0.40} 0.45] 0.50] 0.60) 0.70} 0.80} 0.90] 1.00 | 1.20 1.60 Date. Transmission coefficients for unit air mass. 1903. ULL iia eer c SS cee ance 0.42 | 0.60 0. 66 0.69 0.77 0. 82 0.85 0. 86 0.88 | 0.89 IAN UST 24S oe J arcinz ests eeioiet .40 ~ol 59 69 .78 84 . 86 . 87 . 89 90 Septemberil4: 22 - eee aseeeee 62 ail . 80 62 87 . 90 91 92 .93 | .93 October 4 eeescce eee eae . 64 . 70 | 76 . 80 .89 .88 .89 stil Sot || 32 October:290ia- [ste eee eee .938 . 59 | 64 5 1K) .80 | 82 . 83 .85 .88 | .S$1 Decemberyi 22 ee ae eee .59'| .65 75 . 82 . 85 .87 . 89 . 92 . 94 .95 December 23 .........-2----+- 64} .70 Tai 279) ens Soni 0 89h OO! 910 |" 99h) 94 1904, | | | January D7 eee SCO BU eer) ES) | CE pe eee || er eve ME DLUaTY plese ese eee Be: BZ 56 59 99 Re Sieh il Sant 89 92 ~99 SAND Daas era sem ieee ec eeace 42 63 . 67 aie .79 . 8d 88 .89 91 94 CAST Tell 621 reps eee OP SD te oe rr Ba 45 .60 | .67 7OH mars? 85 .88 . 89 92 IMiaivR Dies yee en ea hee ee 130 .0D | 71 79 So|\pues con 89 90 92 90 Mian 28 yon oe arate eee chiar cise ard .40 OF 63 Sale .83 87 90) een 90) atl Ae ae 2 = 4 =| ai et ZI a oe General mean.......--. . 494 . 607 . 683 . 741 . 802 . 848 . 876 . 893) =. 908 . 926 Mean, July 1, 1903, to Jan- WEY O04 aes eee nsiais.cs . 04 . 6387 . 707 . 766 . 821 . 860 S76} 887 . 907 . 920 Mean, January 1, 1904, to | ullivall il QO04S ees oercreryaee © .436| .572| .655| .710/ .777| .835| .876| .898| 909) ..980 @ Astrophysical Journal, June, 1904. Phil. Mag., July, 1904. 84 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. TaBiEe 2.— Values of the solar constant of radiation outside the earth’ s atmosphere. | Solar radiation per | square centimeter per minute— Date hare SES aceasta ee oulnent wel Atearth’s| corrected suriace. | to mean solar distance. 1903. h. m. Cal, Cal. DULY Loe tscsecle cttayeetse eo maiioateceeaeieseene Wain sca .eseseeees 0 51 1.07 1.31 2.16 DO sede ets eae ee tales pete eee eae GOeeE sear eeicl)) Bb 8B 1.51 1.10 2.11 AMICUSE oe Wiener scien Men eerie ener mete Goods aesseeeene 7 1.18 ileal! 1.93 DOG Sete Se hae Se re aoe ee ean | teenie VON See Seedsoe ile 47, 1.24 Lal 1.95 October 4232. . cess eae ee See ees eens GQOEe sere ee 1 58 1.72 528} 1.98 DD) Oiaccicte pete iatn dee re sae OEE ere | Seer Gloyassedooncase Py 95) 1.88 1.18 1.94 October 29h 25-22. sets ceemien eee rea eee Ouest ecee os 059] 1.69) T1183 1,97 Mecembersese ao eee yee eee ee ee dows: seas lee 2ierd5ulieshsdal .92 1.94 Pecember23!= 2 ssh csr eee ene eee leneee OWaspscsccccssl ab oe 2252, 1.16 1.96 DOE 355s oe Sa eee en Pe SRR: GRe eepeen | De Aiulieasss 1.02 2.01 1904. | JANUALY 215 ccm- cee eceeete ene nearer Mair 225 ao-a6 oes ete) 2.20 1.18 2.05 TO): fon ods eee tee eee es | ems does ee | @ Gai) sear 99 1.98 Pebruanry dices ee ee eee ere eel ore Ota al ak) TL Gil 1.18 2.29 ID Or Se ose eee ee eee eet een ean (Cece ee 2 29 PX PA | 1. 02 2.24 ATU ls 2S AS Re ne cee mee Se oer eee Indifferent ....--- 037 UBDAL 1.39 2.08 DO Eee Se eee pee ieee ee EE peataye rw RP (oKehsaraos semao. 3) 2 Us) | 125) 2.15 May d2ece = 25 eee ors. scons oa nies tee cera teas linearis GORE ee ee (0), sil 1.08 | 1.29 1.90 DO see ea ene Pe ee ton rae Er Osis tecesceee 3 35 1.59 | 1.19 2.07 I ga tae PU aces 8 ee igt fats em Umea Soe NAGE dome eee fey Ss eas) | 1.08 2,24 DO se ae a eee es ee eo ato ee fol large Okosobeaenoss 4°25 1.94 - 96 2.301 Ma Vi28 eee eee ie eee eee Cee ae mete igre rote ee et 1.09 | 42 2.14 DEAS. Ree Sere eee eee See eae Cee ee | 4 15] 1.81 1.16 2.05 Mean value of direct atmospheric transmission.—Since Table 2 was prepared, which was done without any reference to the subject of the present paragraph, at your request the numbers in the fifth column have been corrected to represent the solar radiation at the earth’s surface for zenith sun, and those in the sixth column to actual rather than mean solar distance. The ratio of the amount of heat which reaches the earth’s surface for zenith sun to that outside the atmosphere is then obtained by dividing the former values by the latter, and the mean result is 68 per cent; whence the average absorption in our atmosphere is found to be 32 per cent, which is the amount by which the sun’s radiation is diminished in a vertical trans- mission to the surface of the earth. In this connection attention may be invited to a paper published by you in the American Journal of Science, as long since as Sep- tember, 1884, in which you have stated that observations made up to that time by the best authorities gave a value of absorption for the zenith sun of about 20 per cent, and that owing chiefly to the neglect of selective absorption, this nearly unanimous value is nevertheless far inferior to the truth. The value just deduced from selective absorption methods may be consided as a confirmation of your then statement. You have elsewhere stated that the solar constant values obtained from high and low sun measures at a low altitude station are likely to be below rather than above the truth, and it may at least be admitted that there is a certain direct reflection of radiation in passing from outer space into our atmosphere, differing as it does from space in its optical density, and that a portion of radiation is here lost which car not REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 85 be measured at any single station high or low. Accordingly we must suppose that our solar constant values are diminished from one or both the above causes, and hence that the atmospheric abserption here estimated is too little rather than too much. TRANSMISSION OF SOLAR ENVELOPE. TasLE 3.—Preliminary values of coefficients of transmission in the solar envelope. b b in b aN) ere be bu be Wave length.......| 0.45 0.50) 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 | 1.00 1.20 1.60 2.00 Date. Coeflicients for vertical transmission. 1903. | | | September25......- 0::53(?) | 0.58 0. 66 | 0.70 0. 72 0.75 | 0.77 0. 80 0.83 0. 84 1904. | February 20--.-.... | .62(?) | . 65 72 | . 76 | .78 . 80 . 82 . 85 . 87 . 88 | : | Turning now to Table 38, which purports to give the vertical transmission for dif- ferent wave lengths in the solar envelope, this depends but little on our own atmos- phere, and much is hoped from a continuation of the work with the great horizontal telescope on which these results rest. As this work is but newly developed Here, a short description of the procedure and assumptions involved in estimating the trans- mission of the solar envelope will not be out of place. A spectro-bolometer, provided with a slit only about 5 millimeters high, is set so that rays of a certain known wave length reach the bolometer from the slit. Then with the prism stationary, but with the automatic recording plate moving before the galvanometer as usual, the solar image is allowed to drift by the earth’s diurnal motion across the slit of the spectro- bolometer. Thus is produced a curve like those shown in Plate VIII, in which hori- zontal distances from the center of the figure are proportional to distances along the radius of the solar disc, and the height of the curve is proportional to the intensity of the radiation of the given wave length at the corresponding point on the solar dise. Apparently the figure would be “‘flat-topped,’’ if there was no absorption of the rays by the solar envelope, and the curvature of the figure gives a rough indication of the amount of the absorption.© If the curve fora given day’s observation has steeper sides than that of another, greater absorption would be indicated for the former day, and such was the case for the two days’ work represented in Table 3. But in order to estimate quantitatively the change in absorption in the solar envelope, it is necessary to make two assumptions whose truth can as yet only be verified by the accuracy with which they represent the experimental results. First, it may be supposed that the radiation of the absorbing envelope is negligible com- pared with that of the photosphere, and that the absorption is, like that of the earth’s atmosphere, represented by such an exponential formula as would apply to a homogeneous atmosphere. Second, the thickness of the absorbing layer being unknown, its relative thickness compared with the solar radius must be assumed in order to compute the exponent of the formula. In the first computations made here it was assumed that the thickness of the absorbing envelope was very small as compared with the sun’s radius. Upon this # You have suggested the possibility that owing to a columnar structure of the solar surface we might find the limb of the sun brighter than the center of the disc in the absence of an absorbing envelope, by reason of our seeing near the limb only the supposedly brighter tops of the columns. No allowance for this is made in these preliminary computations. | s $6 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. basis logarithmic plots¢ prepared from the observed results showed great departures from straight lines for all wave lengths, so that either the absorbing layer is not so thin as first assumed, or the phenomenon is not a simple one of absorption. Acting on the former supposition, it was found that when the absorption was assumed to take place in a homogeneous stratum of about 45,000 miles thickness outside the photosphere, or in other words, a rather thick stratum, yet well within the thick- ness of the brighter part of the solar corona, very little curvature was exhibited in the logarithmic plots at any wave lengths, or for any distance less than 99 per cent of a radius from the center of the disc, or on either day of observation. Evidently the assumption of homogeneity is a very strained one, hardly perhaps to be tolerated even in a preliminary computation. I have, however, given the transmission coeffi- cients found in this way in Table 3. Estimates have been prepared of the amount by which the total radiation of the sun would be increased were this envelope wholly removed, but these are so far dependent upon the assumption referred to that I defer their presentation for the present. I wish, in closing, to particularly commend the zeal and ability with which Mr. F. E. Fowle, jr., has aided in carrying through all the work above reported. Mr. Fowle has also published ® during the year a valuable study of the absorption of water vapor in the earth’s atmosphere, which summarizes measurements and computations he has made from bolographie data collected here in the last three years. He finds the transmission in each of the water-vapor bands studied to follow Bouguer’s expo- nential law, but with coefficients of transmission varying greatly in amount for dif- ferent bands and for different wave lengths in the same band. In passing from band to band the absorption is generally greater the greater the wave length of the band, but taking each band by itself the shorter wave lengths are most absorbed. CONCLUSION. The work of the year has been distinguished by useful improvements in the appa- ratus of the Observatory, notably in the bolometer, the pyrheliometer, and the great horizontal telescope. But chiefly it is marked by a great advance toward what you have set as the far-off final goal of our efforts, namely, the establishment of a sound basis for long range forecasting of climate, in the study of the solar radiation, and its absorption in our atmosphere. The work of the year has made it seem possible, though not yet certain, that fluctuations of the amount of solar radiation as great as 10 per cent may occur, and that independently of them there are marked changes of the transparency of our atmosphere. Both causes must profoundly influence cli- matic conditions, and both are being studied here with increasing facility, accuracy, and success, by the aid of the spectro-bolometer. In short, it now seems not improb- able that successful general forecasting of climate will be the not too far distant outcome of our work. Respectfully submitted. C. G. Assor, Aid in Charge. Mr. S. P. LANGLEY, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. «Compare Plate VI of last year’s report. b Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. I], Part 1. APPENDIX VI. REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN. Str: I have the honor to present the following report on the operations of the library of the Smithsonian Institution for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1904. The number of publications received and recorded in the accession books of the Smithsonian deposit, Library of Congress, is as follows: Quarto or Octavo or | | larger. smaller, | Potal. BUC) UIT IN CS spars tape ertes Syetee ierate fateh cer cp tat a aay Varstel ofa ate SS eet te Moise a Serie 526 1, 760 2, 286 Parts olay O WUMes ecco cae ery toet= ais nisecleiete Ieee Since Toe ee tee aes 10, 296 6,022 | 16,318 Jet ch eal o) oU ACY Rp eS rate Rl eee Siecle BSG rE Stan Someta an ceeance 623 4,526 5,149 Charts Soa «gee ste esicteeciet ee Ere ree Ie ee te Sf eacecray ofall ac] ete eicistevore a | isles crestor 215 HO SiS “8 Ga eh OSS Peon Gen m aA SOUS BEE OCHE Cr ace RUSSEL arise a 4e0te Soae op mearen a eee ee 23, 968 27R The accession numbers run from 452466460376. A few of these publications have been temporarily held at the Institution for the use of the staff, but the larger number have been sent direct to the Library of Congress. About 355 boxes and 18 packages were used in transmitting the sendings to the Library of Congress, and they are estimated to have amounted to the equivalent of 14,920 octavo volumes. This does not include a large number of public documents presented to the Institution and transmitted without being recorded. The selecting and sending to the Library of Congress of volumes and parts of vol- umes belonging to the Smithsonian deposit which had been held at the Institution and Museum in the past has been carried on in connection with the other work of the library, and while a large number have been sent up there still remain from last year many volumes ready for checking on the accession books. No separate count has been kept of these sendings, and they are included in the above estimate. The libraries of the Secretary, Office, and Astrophysical Observatory have received during the year 337 volumes, pamphlets and charts, and 2,048 parts of volumes, making a total of 2,385, and a grand total, including books for the Smithsonian deposit, of 26,353. The parts of serial publications that were entered on the card catalogue numbered 24,126. Six thousand slips for completed volumes were made, and about 510 cards for new periodicals and annuals were added to the permanent record from the periodical-recording desk. Inaugural dissertations and academic publications were received from universities at the following places: Baltimore (Johns Hop- Halle. Paris. kins). Heidelberg. Philadelphia (University Basel. Helsingfors. of Pennsylvania). Berlin. Ithaca (Cornell), Rostock. Bern. Jena. St. Petersburg. Bonn. Kiel. Toulouse. Breslau. Konigsberg. Tubingen. Erlangen. Lafayette (Purdue). Utrecht. Freiburg. Leipsic. Wurzburg. Giessen. Louvain. Zurich. Geneya. Marburg. Greifswald. , New York (Columbia). 87 88 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. The plan inaugurated by the Secretary to effect new exchanges and to secure miss- ing parts to complete sets, has been continued. In doing this 945 letters were written and 285 new periodicals were added to the receipts, together with the completion of 349 defective series. The sending out of postal cards for missing numbers has been continued, and 105 were mailed, with the result that 53 missing parts were received in response. In the reference room the members of the scientific staff and others have consulted the transactions and proceedings of the learned societies; and in the reading room 20 bound volumes of periodicals and 2,900 separate periodicals were taken out for con- sultation. The sections maintained in the Institution are the Secretary’s library, Office library, and the Employee’s library, together with the sectional libraries of the Astrophysical Observatory, Aerodromics, International Exchanges, and Law Reference. At the close of last year 64 volumes in the Astrophysical Observatory library had just been completed and made ready for binding, and in the early part of this year they were bound. The collection of. books in the library at the National Zoolgical Park has had an addition, by purchase, of 15 works on the life and habits of animals and birds, and one or two exchanges of periodical publications have been effected by the Institution for its special benefit. The employees have availed themselves of the privileges of the Employee’s library, and 3,220 books were borrowed, that number being a considerable increase over last year. The library has had an addition, by purchase, of 37 new books, and 120 magazines were bound. The sending of a collection of books, numbering about 40, each month to the National Zoological Park has been continued with such success that an arrangement was made in the early part of June to make a similar sending to the Bureau of American Ethnology, and a case containing about 26 volumes was sent. The increase in the number of books presented by General de Peyster, for the Watts de Peyster collection Napoléon Buonaparte, created the necessity for more shelf room, and 22 cases were constructed to hold the additions to this collection that have been received during the last two years. These cases were placed against the north and south walls of the lower corridor of the office wing of the Institution. General de Peyster continues to add many valuable yolumes to the collection, together with several bronze busts. There have also been received from him oil paintings and many historical relics of the colonial period, which have been placed in the United States National Museum for exhibition. INTERNATIONAL CATALOGUE OF SCIENTIFIC LITERATURE. The work of the International Catalogue has been continued under the auspices of the Institution, and the addition to the allotment for this year has made possible the increase of nearly 50 per cent in the total number of references sent to the central bureau at London. The following table gives the number in detail: WiteratwTre @ LUGO epee res Se ey nee to a ica ey en Sp 3, 044 Literature: of, 1.902. ce Ree 6. S627 tO 4 ay es re Se et ee 9, 424 Juiteratire Of O03 ec. bie ete tes ee 2 eae ap gg a ene ce 8, 745 Nota... 202) So yee ye ee ice so hee ee tape ere ye yee eee aan 21, 213 All of the first annual issue of the catalogue has now been published and distrib- uted, together with the following volumes of the second annual issue: Astronomy, Bacteriology, Mechanics, Physics, Mathematics, Mineralogy, and Physical Geogra- phy. This country still leads in the number of subscribers to the catalogue. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 89 In the near future an effort will be made looking to a more complete cooperation of the authors and publishing bodies in the United States with this Regional Bureau by requesting immediate noticeyand subject abstract of new publications coming within the scope of the International Catalogue. The international convention, which has the power of revision of the classification schedules, will meet in London in July, 1905, and has asked tor suggestions from this country through the Smithsonian Institution. MUSEUM LIBRARY. The National Museum library has received a gift from Prof. Otis Tufton Mason, in addition to the one of some years ago, of about 2,000 pamphlets, separates, and bound quarto volumes, mostly on anthropological subjects. A special book plate has been provided for this collection. The Museum has also received from Dr. Edward L. Greene his entire botanical library, which has been placed on deposit for a period of ten years in connection with his botanical collection. The conditions regarding Doctor Greene’s library are that the books shall be accessible on the same terms as other books in the Museum library, with the exception that they are not to be lent to persons outside the District of Columbia or abroad without Doctor Greene’s consent. In case of the death of Doctor Greene during the time specified, the library becomes the property of the United States. In the Museum library there are now 20,548 bound yolumes and 35,950 unbound papers. The additions during the year consisted of 1,504 books, 3,187 pamphlets, and 700 parts of volumes. There were catalogued 938 books, of which 40 belonged to the Smithsonian deposit, and 2,130 pamphlets, of which 70 belonged to the Smith- sonian deposit, and 11,520 parts of periodicals, of which 1,887 belonged to the Smith- sonian deposit. In the accession book 1,387 volumes, 2,187 pamphlets, and 629 parts of volumes were recorded. The number of cards added to the authors’ catalogue were 4,090, which does not include 2,855 cards for books and pamphlets recatalogued. In connection with the entering of periodicals 171 memoranda were made report- ing volumes and parts missing in the sets, together with a few titles of publications which were not represented in the library. The result of this work was the com- pleting, or partly filling up, of 70 sets of periodicals. The number of books, pamphlets, and periodicals borrowed from the general library amounted to 26,456, including 5,679, which were assigned to the sectional libraries. There has been no change in the sectional libraries established in the Museum, and they are as follows: Administration. Fishes. Paleobotany. Administrative assis- Geology. Parisites. tant. History. Photography. Anthropology. Insects. Prehistoric archeology. Biology. Mammals. Reptiles. Birds. Marine invertebrates. Stratigraphic paleontology. Botany. Materia medica. Superintendent. Children’s room. Mesozoic fossils. Taxidermy. Comparative anatomy. Mineralogy. Technology. Editor. Mollusks. Ethnology. Oriental archzeology. In the following table are summarized all the accession for the Smithsonian deposit for the libraries of the Secretary, Office, Astrophysical Observatory, United States 90 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. National Museum, and National Zoological Park. That of the Bureau of Ethnology is not included, as it is separately administered: Smithsonian deposits se G eset ee ee es ee ee 23, 968 Secretary, Office, and Astrophysical Observatory libraries..............--.- 2, 385 United States National’Museunt library = 5-25-22—- S32 eer os (ee eee 5, 491 National: Zoological "Parkes 15205 Xoo Se hie ose eno are eae nee eee 17 Potall 2. fe ate Ge Eye ale ee ee nh 22 31 86 Respectfully submitted. Cyrus Apuer, Librarian. Mr. S. P. LANGLEY, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. JuLty 29, 1904. AppENDIx VII. REPORT OF THE EDITOR. Sir: I have the honor to submit the following report on the publications of the Smithsonian Institution and its bureaus during the year ending June 30, 1903: I. CONTRIBUTIONS TO KNOWLEDGE. To the series of Contributions four memoirs have been added during the last year. 1413. Hodgkins fund. On the Absorption and Emission of Air and its Ingre- dients of Wave Lengths from 250 wy to 100 wu. By Victor Schumann. City of Washington: Published by the Smithsonian Institution, 1903. Quarto. Pages tv, 30, 4 plates. Part of Vol. X XIX. 1414. The Whalebone Whales of the Western North Atlantic Compared with those Oceurring in European Waters with Some Observations on the Species of the North Pacific. By Frederick W. True. City of Washington: Published by the Smith- sonian Institution, 1904. Quarto. Pages vi, 332, 50 plates, 97 text figures. Vol. XXXIII, Contributions to Knowledge. [In press. ] 1438. A Comparison of Features of the Earth and the Moon. By N.S. Shaler. City of Washington: Published by the Smithsonian Institution, 1903. Quarto. Pages v, 79 (explanation of plates, pp. 81-130), 25 plates. Part of Vol. XXXIV. 1459. On the Construction of a Silvered Glass Telescope of Fifteen and a half Inches in Aperture, and its Use in Celestial Photography, by Henry Draper; and The Modern Reflecting Telescope and the Making and Testing of Optical Mirrors, by George W. Ritchey. City of Washington: Published by the Smithsonian Institution, 1904. Quarto. Pages 55-+ 51, 13 plates. [In press.] Part of Vol. XXXIV. Il. SMITHSONIAN MISCELLANEOUS COLLECTIONS. To the Miscellaneous Collections 36 numbers have been added, most of them being articles published in the Quarterly Issue recently established to meet a special need for early publication of scientific papers. 1374. Index to the Literature of Thorium, 1817-1902. By Cavalier H. Jouwct. City of Washington: Published by the Smithsonian Institution. Octayo, Pages 154. 1417. Phylogeny of Fusus and its Allies. By Amadeus W. Grabau. Octavo. Pages 111, 157 (158-192 explanation of plates), 18 plates, 21 text figures. 1419. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, Vol. XLV. (Quarterly Issue, Vol. I, parts 1-2. July-September, 1903.) City of Washington: Published by the Smith- sonian Institution, 1904. Octavo. Pages 223, 56 plates, 28 text figures. 1420. Seventy New Malayan Mammals. By Gerrit 8. Miller, jr. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 1-73, plates i-x1x, | text figure. 1421. Recent Studies of the Solar Constant of Radiation. By ©. G. Abbot. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLY. Pages 74-83, plates xx—x XII. 1422. The new Ceelostat and Horizontal Telescope of the Astrophysical Observatory of the Smithsonian Institution. By C.G. Abbot. Reprinted from the Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 84-90, plate x x11. 91 . 92 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 1428. On Some Photographs of Living Finback Whales from Newfoundland. By Frederick W. True. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quar- terly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 91-94, plates xx1v—xxv1, 1 text figure. é 1424. A Skeleton of Hesperornis. By Frederic A. Lucas. Reprinted from Smith- sonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Page 95, plate xxvi. 1425. A New Plesiosaur. By Frederic A. Lucas. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Page 96, plate xxvul. 1426. Shell Ornaments from Kentucky and Mexico. By W.H.Holmes. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 97-99, plates XXIX—XXxXx. 1427. On the Glacial Pothole in the National Museum. By George P. Merrill. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 100-1038, plate xxx1. 1428. Notes on the Herons of the District of Columbia. By Paul Bartsch. Re- printed from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLY. Pages 104-111, plates xx x1I-XxxXxvVIIt. 1429. Preliminary Report on an Archeological Trip to the West Indies. By J. Walter Fewkes. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 112-133, plates xxx1x—xLvml. ; 1480. Form Regulation in Ccelentera and Turbellaria. By C.M. Child. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 134-148. 1431. New Genera of South American Fresh-water Fishes, and New Names for some old genera. By Carl H. Eigenmann. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscella- neous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 144-148. 1432. Korean Headdresses in the National Museum. By Foster H. Jenings. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV Pages 149-167, text figures 3-28. 1433. The Hodgkins Fund of the Smithsonian Institution. By Helen Waldo Burnside. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 168-174, plate L. 1454. A Notable Success in the Breeding of Black Bears. By Arthur B. Baker. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 175-179, plates LI-uIt. 1435. Chinese Medicine. By James M. Flint. Reprinted from Smithsonian Mis- cellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 180-182. 1436. Notes on the Rocks of Nugsuaks Peninsula and its Environs, Greenland. 3y W. C. Phalen. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quar- terly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 183-212, plates LuI-Ly. 1440. A Select Bibliography of Chemistry, 1492-1902. By Henry Carrington Bol- ton. Second Supplement. City of Washington: Published by the Smithsonian Institution, 1904. Octavo. Pages 111, 462. 1441. Hodgkins Fund. Researches on the Attainment of Very Low Tempera- tures. By Morris W. Travers. Part I. City of Washington: Published by the Smithsonian Institution, 1904. Octavo. Pages 1, 32, text figures 1-11. 1445. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, Vol. XLV. (Quarterly Issue, Vol. I, parts 3 and 4, October-December, 1903.) City of Washington: Published by the Smithsonian Institution, 1904. Pages x, 225-463, plates Lvii—crn, text figures 29-45. 1446. A Method of Avoiding Personal Equation in Transit Observations. ByS. P. Langley. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLY. Pages 225-229, plates Lv1. 1447. On a Collection of Fishes made by Mr. Alan Owston in the Deep Waters of Japan. By David Starr Jordan and John Otterbein Snyder. Reprinted from Smith- REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 93 sonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 230-240, plates Lvim-Lxiil, text figure 29._ 1448. Description of New ©yprinoid Fish, Hemibarbus Joiteni, from the Pei Ho, Tientsin, China. By David Starr Jordan and Edwin Chapin Starks. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 241-242, plate LxIv. 1449. The Removal of the Remains of James Smithson. ByS. P. Langley. Re- printed from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 243-251, text figure 30. 1450. Notes on the Breeding Habits of the Yellow-bellied Terrapin. By Hugh M. Smith. Reprinted from the Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 252-253. 1451. A New Pelican Fish from the Pacific. By Barton A. Bean. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 254-255, text figure 31. 1452. A Revision of the Paleozoic Bryozoa. Part I. Ctenostomata. By E. O. Ulrich and R. S. Bassler. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 256-294, plates Lxv—Lxvu, text figures 52-33. 1453. A Remarkable Genus of Fishes, the Umbras. By Theodore Gill. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 295-305, text figures 34-38. 1454. A New Occurrence of Unakite. By W.C. Phalen. Reprinted from Smith- sonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 306-316, plates LXIxX-LXxXI. 1455. The Dinosaur Trachodon Annectens. By F. A. Lucas. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 317-320, plates Lxx1-Lxx11, text figures 40-48. 1456. Classification of the Hares and their Allies. By Marcus Ward Lyon, jr. Reprinted from Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections (Quarterly Issue), Vol. XLV. Pages 321-447, plates Lxxrv-c, text figures 44-45. 7. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, Vol. XLV (containing Quarterly Issue, Vol. I, Parts 1-4). 1904. Several other works for the series of Miscellaneous Collections are in press, includ- ing a Catalogue of North American Diptera, by Prof. J. M. Aldrich, and Researches in Helmintnology and Parasitology, by Dr. Joseph Leidy. III. SMITHSONIAN ANNUAL REPORTS. The annual report is in two parts or volumes, one devoted to the Institution proper and the other to the National Museum. The contents of the Smithsonian volume for 1902 were given in the last report of the editor when the work was all in type, although the bound volume and all the separate papers had not then been distributed. 1377. Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, show- ing the operations, expenditures, and condition of the Institution for the year ending June 30, 1902. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1903. Octavo. Pages LvI, 687; 114 plates, 59 text figures. Additional copies of several papers from the annual reports of previous years were printed to supply continued demands. These included: 1443. On the Various Modes of Flight in Relation to Aeronautics. By Dr. James Bell Pettigrew. From the Smithsonian Report for 1867, pages 325-334. Washing- ton: 1904. The Secretary’s report for the year ending June 30, 1903, was put in type in November, 1903, for the use of the Regents. The General Appendix of the 1903 . 94 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. volume was sent to the Public Printer in May, 1904, and most of it had been put in type before the fiscal year closed. The contents of this report are as follows: 1489. Journal of Proceedings of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institu- tion at meeting of January 28, 1903. Report of Executive Committee. Acts and resolutions of Congress. Pages XV—LXI. 1437. Report of 8. P. Langley, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, for the year ending June 30, 1903. Pages 1-97, plates I-v11. 1490. General Description of the Moon. By N.S. Shaler. Pages 103-113, plates I-x, with explanation pages. 1491. The Pressure due to Radiation. By E. F. Nichols and G. F. Hull. Pages 115-188. 1492. The Sun-spot Period and the Variations of the Mean Annual Temperature of the Earth. By Ch. Nordmann. Pages 139-149. 1493. Methods of Forecasting the Weather. By J. M. Pernter. Pages 151-165. 1494. Progress with Air Ships. By Maj. B. Baden-Powell. Pages 169-171, plates I-IV. 1495. Aerial Navigation. By O. Chanute. Pages 173-181. 1496. Graham Bell’s Tetrahedral Kites. Pages 183-185, plate 1. 1497. Radium. By E. Curie. Pages 187-198. 1498. Radium. By J. J. Thomson. Pages 199-201. 1499. Experiments in Radio-activity and the Production of Helium from Radium. By Sir William Ramsay and Frederick Soddy. Pages 203-206. 1500. The N Rays of M. Blondlot. By C. G. Abbot. Pages 207-214, plate 1. 1501. Modern Views on Matter. By Sir Oliver Lodge. Pages 215-228. 1402. Modern Views on Matter; the Realization of a Dream. By Sir William Crookes. Pages 229-241. 1503. The Atomic Theory. By F. W. Clarke. Pages 243-262. 1504. Intra-atomic Energy. By Gustave Le Bon. Pages 263-293. 1505. The Electric Furnace. By J. Wright. Pages 295-310. 1506. High-speed Electric Interurban Railways. By George Gibson. Pages 311— 321, plates I-v. 1507. The Marienfelde-Zossen High-speed Electric Railway Trials. By Alfred Gradenwitz. Pages 323-331. 1508. The Beginnings of Photography: A Chapter in the History of the Develop- ment of Photography with the Salts of Silver. By Maj. Gen. J. Waterhouse. Pages 330-061, 1509. The Relations of Geology. By Prof. Charles Lapworth. Pages 363-390. 1510. Terrestrial Magnetism in its Relation to Geography. By Capt. Ettrick W. Creak. Pages 391-406, plates 1-11. 1511. An Exploration to Mount McKinley, America’s Highest Mountain. By Alfred H. Brooks. Pages 407-425, plates I-1x. 1512. North Polar Exploration: Field Work of the Peary Arctic Club, 1898-1902. By R. E. Peary. Pages 427-457, plates 1-1x. 1513. The First Year’s Work of the National Antarctic Expedition. By Sir Clem- ents R. Markham. Pages 459-465, plate 1. 1514. The Swedish Antarctic Expedition. By Otto Nordenskiold and others. Pages 467-479, plate 1. 1515. Food Plants of Ancient America. By O. F. Cook. Pages 481-497. 1516. Desert Plants as a Source of Drinking Water. By Frederick V. Coville. Pages 499-505, plates 1-11. 1517. A New Theory of the Origin of Species. By A. Dastre. Pages 507-917. 1518. The Evolution of the Human Foot. By M. Anthony. Pages 519-635. 1519. The Name Mammal and the Idea Expressed. By Theodore Gill. Pages 537-544. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 95 1520. Experimental Studies in the Mental Life of Animals. By N. Vaschide and P. Rosseau. Pages 545-566. " 1521. Animals that Hunt.* By Henri Coupin. Pages 567-571. 1522. Flamingoes’ Nests. By Frank M. Chapman. Pages 573-575, plates I-n. 1523. Upon Maternal Solicitude in Rhynchota and Other Nonsocial Insects. By G. W. Kirkaldy. Pages 577-585. 1524. The Psychical Faculties of Ants and Some Other Insects. By | sHl/ala| p06 1 ‘uoday ueiuosyyiWS “NOITIAVd NVINOSHLINS SHL GYVMOL HLYON ONIMOO7 ‘31SIY YSLNADO “WNASNI IVNOILVN S3H1 SO LISIHXQ SINOF “LS AHL SO MAIA IWYAN3S) Xe eLVal cl “b06| ‘Hodey ueiuOsU}IWS REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 101 SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION PROPER. IO The exhibit of the Smithsonian Institution occupied a space of about 625 square feet in the central court of the pavilion mentioned above. A special table case -~was placed in the middle of this court in which were displayed copies of the History of the First Half Century of the Smithsonian Institution, the seal of the Institution, and several Hodgkins medals. A continuous seat extended along the east wall of the court, above which were displayed two portraits of James Smithson, copies of his scientific papers, a cast of the bronze tablet which was placed on his tomb at Genoa, Italy, and pictures of the “tomb itself. Adjoining these objects was a series of photographs of the chan- cellors and regents of the Institution and portraits of the secretaries. On the south wall of the court was exhibited a portrait of Thomas G. Hodgkins and circulars and papers relating to the Hodgkins fund. A portion of the north wall of the court was occupied by an exhibit from the Bureau of International Inxchanges, consisting of a large statistical chart, showing its operations for a period of fifty-three years. A complete series of the publications of the Institution and all its dependencies. comprising 278 volumes, was also exhibited in this space. Hung in midair over the pavilion was the quarter-size model of the Langley gas-driven aerodrome of 1904. The Langley steam-driven aerodrome of 1896 was also hung in midair about 30 feet in front of the former. Three enlarged photographs of the steam-driven aerodrome when in motion were hung on the side-walls of the pavilion. The Children’s Room occupied the portion of the pavilion abutting on the main aisle. In shape, size, and character of fittings and exhibits, the room was, aS nearly as possible, a replica of the original room in the Smithsonian building. Around the walls were specially constructed low cases of light- colored wood, while in the center of the room, on a low stand, was an aquarium, and near by a cage of living song-birds. A portion of the wall-case was oc- cupied by birds of interest to children, among which were the following: Familiar birds of the United States; birds-of-paradise, and others noted for their brilliancy of coloring: interesting water-birds, such as the eider duck, lapwing, avocet, European stork, penguin, barnacle goose; other noteworthy birds, such as the apteryx, rook, jackdaw, and lyre bird, the harpy eagle, the condor, and examples of the largest and smallest owls. In this room were also exhibited the duckbill, or platypus, and the spiny ant-eater, peculiar egg-laying mammals from Australia. ‘To illustrate how animals are protected by their color and form, or ‘how creatures hide,” was shown a weasel in the white winter coat on snow-covered ground, and another in the brown summer coat amid dead leaves; also an underwing moth on bark, and such peculiar insects as the katydid and walking-stick. Curious forms of life were shown in the finger sponge, the glass sponge. the organ-pipe coral, and the sea-horse, as well as brilliantly colored parrot fishes. The room also contained a small exhibit of useful minerals. In the south and east part of the wall- ease was a collection of beautiful and interesting shells, including those of the giant clam, Jridacna. In another part of the room were some comparative exhibits, such as a cast of the egg of the extinct bird Hpyornis and the egg of a hunmingbird, representing the largest and smallest eggs. Groups of brilliant North American and South American butterflies, and of familiar forms, arranged to show life-histories, were also exhibited. As a part of the exhibit of the Smithsonian Institution, may be mentioned a descriptive pamphlet of 35 pages and 12 plates, for gratuitous distribution to the public, being an account of the Smithsonian Institution, its origin, his tory, objects, and: achievements. 102 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. ASTROPHYSICAL OBSERVATORY. As already mentioned, this exhibit occupied the south court of the main pavilion, which could be entered only from the court devoted to the Smith- sohnian proper. At previous expositions, the exhibit of this Bureau consisted of publications, charts of the infra-red spectrum, and other charts relating to astrophysics, some small pieces of apparatus, and a series of transparent photographs of solar eclipses and of sun spots. All these objects were exhibited at St. Louis, and in addition a working exhibit was prepared. This consisted, first, of a bolometer connected with a galvanometer, on which was attached a mirror which threw a spot of light on a horizontal scale, so that any change of temperature in the bolometer would be transmitted to the galvanometer and the spot could be seen to move. This change of temperature could be brought about by a visitor simply holding his hand over a hole in the case in which the bolometer was placed. The whole exhibit was carefully labeled, and there was scarcely a moment during the day when visitors could not be found watching the workings of this delicate instrument for measuring slight changes in temperature. The other moving exhibit consisted of a large two-mirrored coelostat, specially constructed for this exposition, which, as before mentioned, was located about 30 feet south of the Government building, opposite the court in which the astro- physical exhibit was made. This coelostat on sunny days reflected a large beam of sunlight through a window into a dark room which occupied over half of the astrophysical court. Part of the beam of sunlight was thrown through a tele- scope, which in turn threw a large image of the sun on the north wall of the dark room. At scarcely any time during the seven months of the exposition was the visitor unable to find large sun-spots, or groups of spots, on this image. Another portion of the beam of light was reflected by a series of mirrors to a grating of speculum metal, which in turn threw a brilliant solar spectrum around the east and south walls of the dark room. To make this exhibit more intelligible to the public, a descriptive illustrated pamphlet, written by the director, was distributed gratuitously to those desiring copies. NATIONAL ZOOLOGICAL PARK, At previous expositions the exhibit of the National Zoological Park has con- sisted of pictures of the buildings and paddocks in the park, with the addition, usually, of a small model of the park itself. It was felt that such a representa- tion of this Bureau at the St. Louis Exposition would be inadequate, and, after a careful Consideration of possibilities, an extensive exhibit of birds, placed in a eage large enough to permit them to fly about, was decided upon. The cage was 228 feet long, 84 feet wide, and 50 feet high, and was erected by the Super- vVising Architect of the Treasury Department at the request of the representa- tive of the Institution from the appropriation for Government buildings, at a cost of about $17,500. This cage, which was designed by the superintendent of the park, was probably the largest of its kind ever built. It was traversed by central arched passageway, open to the public, extending the entire length of the cage. As alrendy mentioned, the cage was situated 100 or 200 yards south of the main building, in a small valley, amid trees, several of which were in- closed by the cage. It was divided into two portions by a longitudinal parti- tion. In the north half were confined the larger birds, among which were gulls, three species of wild geese, trumpeter swans, Cuban flamingos, roseate spoonbills, four species of ibis, three species of heron, demoiselle cranes, white pelicans, brown pelicans, European pelicans, and other birds, such as darters, REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 108 cormorants, Curassows, and vultures. In the south half of the cage were placed the smaller birds, such as quails, partridges, doves, ducks, canaries, Iinglish blackbirds, jays, thrushes, Javan sparrows, bullfinches, goldfinches, weaver birds, linnets, cardinals: orioles, ete. The exhibit of the National Zoological Park proved one of the most attractive in the exposition grounds, and was surrounded by visitors at all times during the day. The exhibit re- quired the constant attention of two men. The records show that the large fish-eating birds consumed an average daily amount of 40 pounds of fish and 5 pounds of chopped meat, while for the smaller birds large quantities of fresh vegetables, grains, and other seeds were required. BUREAU OF INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES. It will be appreciated that the work of the Bureau of International Exchanges does not lend itself to exhibition by material objects. The exhibit at St. Louis consisted of a large chart showing the number of packages transmitted each year from the establishment of the bureau to the present time. There were also shown photographs of the offices of the bureau in the Smithsonian building. In order to explain more fully the functions and operations of the bureau a small descriptive pamphlet was prepared, copies of which were given to those desiring them. THE BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. The exhibit of the Bureau of American Ethnology was for the most part incorporated with that of the department of anthropology of the United States National Museum, both of which were under the direction of Mr. W. H. Holmes, chief of the bureau. This exhibit was chiefly illustrative of the symbolic art, decorative designs, and heraldry of the American Indians, and represented the researches of the ethnologists of the bureau. Included with it was a series of objects representing the archeology of the West Indies. These exhibits were installed in recesses in the front wall of the Smithsonian pavilion, in a portion of the south wall case. and in two large floor cases. Further notice of this exhibit and of the special significance of the various objects shown will be found on pages 47 to 49 of this report. +CRcRRRtercrrveh hie rae | “Etat ocHRat: +> SOv> ONNGR' Gos Rae 4. moeys—( (ss OM ORR Be oR *hee eRe eeaT ae 8 Mkeotteehs+e IX S3LV1d ‘pO61 ‘HOday ueiuosyziws Smithsonian Report, 1904. PLATE XII. ENTRANCE TO ST. Louis EXHIBIT OF THE ASTROPHYSICAL OBSERVATORY, SHOWING TRANSPARENCIES OF THE TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN AS OBSERVED AT WADES- BorO, N. C., 1900. REPORT OF THE SECTETARY. 105 the botanical division of the department consists at present practically only of an herbarium, the collections of which it was thought could not be made inter- esting to the general publie. The most striking feature of the exhibit at St. Louis was the cast of 2 sulphur- bottom whale, the largest known animal. This large piece was suspended over the central aisle of the Museum space. Placed on the floor near it, was a skeleton of the same species. The cast was obtained through the courtesy of the Cabot Steam Whaling Company, and the skeleton by gift from the Colonial Manufacturing Company, at Balena, Hermitage Bay, Newfoundland, by Messrs. F. A. Lucas, William Palmer, and J. W. Scollick, who made a special expedition to Newfoundland in the spring of 1904 to secure the material. Another prominent feature of the exhibit of this department comprised a group of 20 game mammals from all parts of the world, namely: From North America, a black bear, a polar bear, an Alaska moose, a Mexican sheep, a Green- land musk-ox, a specimen of Osborn’s caribou, and an Olympie elk; from Africa, a giraffe, a zebra, a two-horned rhinoceros, a white-tailed gnu, a hippopotamus, and a lion; from Asia, a tiger, a sambar stag, a specimen of Marco Polo’s sheep, an axis deer; from Europe, a chamois, a moufflon or wild sheep, and a Norway elk. Hach was placed on a separate pedestal and the whole group inclosed by brass railing. A small but very popular part of the exhibit of the department was a select collection of birds’ eggs, installed in two special table-cases. In one was a series showing variations in size, form, color, and texture, and in the number laid at one time. Among these eggs was one of Hpyornis maximus, an extinet bird of Madagascar, whose eggs are the largest known. By a fortunate coin- cidence, an opportunity occurred to purchase a remarkably fine example for addition to this series. Other interesting eggs in this case were those of the apteryx, the great auk, three species of ostrich, several species of tinamou, and the ruby-throated hummingbird. In the second case was placed a very complete collection of the eggs of North American birds of prey. The main exhibit of birds was installed in four 30-inch screen-cases, and con- sisted of a series of pheasants especially noteworthy for the brillianey of their plumage, such as Lady Amherst’s pheasant, fire-back pheasants, tragopans, ete. Three species of peafowl were included in this series, each represented by a male and a female. Among the other birds exhibited was a pair of the rare and curious Harris’s cormorant, from the Galapagos Islands, a species incapable of flight owing to its dwarfed wings and to the soft, flexible nature of the primary feathers. Installed in a special floor case was a group of hoaczins, Opistho- comus hoaczin, showing the life-history of the species. This material of group consisted of 4 adults, 3 nestlings, 2 half-grown young, 2 nests, 2 eggs, together with bushes and other accessories, and was specially collected for exhibition at St. Louis. The young of this singular bird possess well-developed claws on the first and second digits of the wing, by means of which they climb from branch to branch with comparative ease. Reptiles were represented by mounted specimens of the American crocodile and alligator, which were placed near one another, so that the differences between these two largest of American reptiles could be readily seen. In addi- tion, two special cases of snakes were exhibited; one contained a reticulated python, probably the largest species of snake in existence, and the other a small series of especially noteworthy poisonous and harmless snakes, such as the cobra, the rattlesnake, the harlequin snake, and the king snake. A unique exhibit of unusual significance and interest consisted of a series of models of deep-sea fishes, installed in two short sections of the wall-case. . 106 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. These models were based chiefly on speciinens in the National Museum, from the rich collections of the U. S. Fish Commission steamer Albatross. Owing to the small size of the originals, it was necessary to enlarge the models so that the extraordinary modifications and fantastic appearance of these inhabitants of the deep-sea could be appreciated by the public. Accompanying this series was a diagram showing the great depths at which these peculiar forms are found, in comparison with the other fishes of the sea. The following species were represented: Deep-sea chimera (Harriotta raleighana), hatchet fish (Sternoptyx diaphana), rag fish (Acrotus witloughbyi), pelican fish (Gastros- tomus bairdii), snipe eel (Nemichthys scolopaceus), lesser angler (Cryptopsaras couesii), viper fish (Chauliodus sioani), Bathypterois quadrifilis, great swal- lower (Chiasmadon niger), deep sea gurnard (Peristedion miniatwn), and the species Caulolepis longidens, Malacosteus choristodactylus, and Malacosteus niger. Invertebrates were represented by two series of specimens, installed in stand- ard Museum unit boxes, arranged in frames along the wall. The first was a syn- optie series of invertebrates displaying the principal groups, the more important forms in each group, their structure, and, so far as possible, important or inter- esting features in their life histories. This series was designed especially to show methods of Museum installation. In two sections of the wall case near this series was a special display of fan corals, and another of crabs. The second principal series of invertebrates consisted of about 500 species of butterflies and moths from all parts of the world, selected with special reference to beauty or singularity of color and markings or large size. Hach species was represented by a pair of specimens, making about 1,000 in all. The specimens were remark- able for their perfection, and the whole series was, as might be imagined, hardly to be surpassed in briilianey. Department of Geology—tThe exhibit of this department was planned by Dr. George P. Merrill, head curator, assisted by members of his staff, and embraced four main groups: First, an exhibit of minerals: second, one of meteorites ; third, of invertebrate fossils, and, fourth, of vertebrate fossils. (1) A systematic series of minerals was installed in eight standard 15-inch Museum cases. ‘This series was remarkably complete, and the various species were represented by specimens of the largest size. A complete and particularly fine series of all the known forms of silica occurring in nature was shown in a special 36-inch screen case. This included examples of agates, jasper, wood- opal, ete. In a companion case was exhibited a similar series comprising all the known natural forms of calcium carbonate, such as Iceland spar and other calcites, stalagmites, limestone, pearls, ete. In proximity to the silica exhibit was displayed one of the largest masses of amethyst crystals known, and a giant quartz erystal. The amethyst crystals weighed about a quarter of a ton. Another mineral exhibit consisted of a series of cones from hot springs, showing the deposit of crystals on the interior. (2) Meteorites: Special pains were taken to assemble an exhibit of meteor- ites worthy of the occasion. To this end endeavors were made to obtain representations of the largest known examples. Through the courtesy of Com- mander R. E. Perry, U. 8. N., casts were secured of the three great masses from Greenland, known as the “ Peary meteorites,’ and with the concurrence of the Mexican Government and the friendly assistance of José G, Aguilera a cast of the Bacubirito meteorite was also secured. A special trip to Mexico for the pur- pose of obtaining a mold was undertaken by Dr. George P. Merrill and Mr. Wil- liam Palmer, with entirely satisfactory results. A cast was also made of the PLATE XIII. 1904, Smithsonian Report, ST. Louis EXHIBIT OF THE NATIONAL ZOOLOGICAL PARK, SHOWING CENTRAL ARCHED PASSAGE IN THE GREAT BIRD CAGE. Smithsonian Report, 1904. PLATE XIV. ST. Louis EXHIBIT OF THE BUREAU OF EXCHANGES. A STATISTICAL CHART AND PHOTOGRAPHS. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. KO Irwin-Ainsa or Tucson meteorite, in the National Museum. These great casts, which include representations of the largest masses which are known to have fallen from the sky, were assembled near the rotunda of the building, and pre- sented a most impressive appeatance. Adjacent to the casts was installed a series of actual specimens of meteorites and sections of specimens, and a chart showing the distribution of known meteoric falls, and pictures of falling ineteorites. (3) Vertebrate fossils: The most popular feature of this exhibit was the life- size restoration of an armored dinosaur, known as Stegasaurus ungulatus, based on remains from Colorado and Wyoming. The skeleton of the horned dinosaur, T'riceratops, previously exhibited at Buffalo and Charleston, was also shown at St. Louis. Standing side by side, in order to show their similarity in size and details of structure, were exhibited the skeleton of an American mas- todon and that of an African elephant. The skeleton and the cast of an egg of one of the moas (extinct birds from New Zealand) were exhibited in a special case. Other vertebrate fossils were represented by specimens on the slabs of stone in which they were found, embracing fossil fishes, fossil fish-like and crocodile-like reptiles, as well as a very complete specimen of the remarkable flying reptile, Rhamphorhynchus, which shows the impress of the wing and tail membranes in the rock. (4) Invertebrate fossils: ‘These were installed in a section of the wall-case, and comprised cephalopod and other mollusks, including a fine series of ammon- ites, and crustaceans, crinoids, echinoderms, and corals. (5) Fossil palm: An opportunity to obtain an exceptionally fine Tertiary fossil palm, Latanites vicentinus, having occurred during the preparations for the exposition, the specimen was purchased and added to the geological exhibit. It was obtained in Monte Bolka, province of Verona, Italy. Dr. F. W. True, representative for the Institution and Museum on the Gov- ernment board, was also chairman of the committee on installation and decora- tion. Dr. M. W. Lyon, jr., was chief special agent. SUMMARY OF ALLOTMENT MADE TO THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION AND NATIONAL MUSEUM. Orsi ery area Ete rage re eee S111 05000; '00 Transfer to general fund for expenses of United States Marine EXE MOVE | aN 5 CSB] OXOVS VE COON, a I I I a a 300. 00 INGtAOLME n= Se ae ee ee eee ee ee _— 109, TOO, 00 Classified statement of expenditures of funds allotted to the Smith- sonian Institution, corrected to January 26, 1905. Services of clerks, mechanics, and laborers and care of exhibits_____ $13, 8386. 69 rans pPOrtAvlON Ot pCLSONS= 2. === ae ne EN nO ere irene ee 3, 893. 18 ELA eMseine ll eCULOm SUbSISTeCMCOm a= en ee ee ee es Ee 7, GO4. 50 Mreichtweartage, and: expressaves 22. 2) See ee ee ee Siew eee 3, 252. 43 Cases, including all material, and supplies and labor_____~____- Papeete 15, 920. 26 FFAG lsitt Oman ae yee] Spee eee a ee ee hig pee 1, 489. 72 Miscellaneous supplies (stationery, office furniture, janitors’ sup- PLES CL C5 eens Ni ekertrecrae PER NER ns 2 eRe of ON at 1, 802. 50 Labels (including printing three descriptive pamphlets and painting labels for the exhibit of the National Zoological Park) —~-_____-__- 2, 398. 03 Rent of shop and construction of shelter for whale cast---__-----——- 655. 19 108 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Specimens and construction of exhibits, including materials, services, field expenses, ete. : U.S. National Museum— Department of Anthropology__—__—__ $12, S47. 56 Department of Biology___________- 19, 819. 95 Department of Geology____________ 12, 500. 94 ————_—— $45, 168. 45 Other bureaus of the Institution, including supplies and salaries of keepers for exhibit of National Zoological SRALvK eS 2s Sane! se ee 9, 249. 038 $54, 417. 48 i Woy cri ees. <0 es 16 NAb y= erence nce = ALR aes et ee ee eee 105, 269; 92 Wimexpen ded! Wailer lee Fea Se a Ae NO See SO peg en ee ee 4, 480. 07 Neto allotment=2—.—-—— ce ha Se ee Sa ee a enc ea ee 109, 700. 00 Respectfully submitted. FE. W. TRUE, Representative, Smithsonian Institution and United States National Museum, Louisiana Purchase Exposition. Mr. 8S. P. LANGLEY, me Pe Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. JANUARY 26, 1905. GENERAL APPENDIX SMITHSONTAN Re PORT FOR 1904. 109 — + ADVERTISEMENT. The object of the GenrraLt Apprnpix to the Annual Report of the Smithsonian Institution is to furnish brief accounts of scientific dis- covery in particular directions; reports of investigations made by collaborators of the Institution; and memoirs of a general character or on special topics that are of interest or value to the numerous correspondents of the Institution. It has been a prominent object of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, from a very early date, to enrich the annual report required of them by law with memoirs illustrating the more remarkable and important developments in physical and biological discovery, as well as showing the general character of the operations of the Institution; and this purpose has, during the greater part of its history, been carried out largely by the publication of such papers as would possess an interest to all attracted by scientific progress. In 1880 the Secretary, induced in part by the discontinuance of an annual summary of progress which for thirty years previous had been issued by well-known private publishing firms, had prepared by com- petent collaborators a series of abstracts, showing concisely the prom- inent features of recent scientific progress in astronomy, geology, meteorology, physics, chemistry, mineralogy, botany, zoology, and anthropology. This latter plan was continued, though not altogether satisfactorily, down to and including the year 1888. In the report for 1889 a return was made to the earlier method of presenting a miscellaneous selection of pages (some of them original) embracing a considerable range of scientific investigation and discus- sion. ‘This method has been continued in the present report for 1904. 111 "6061 ‘Z YSSOLOO 3JO HONNV7] SHL SO HdVYDOLOHd SNOANVLINVISN] ‘| aLV1d ‘Ka|Sueq7— +4061 ‘Hoday ueiuosy}ius EXPERIMENTS WITH THE.LANGLEY AERODROME. By S. P. LANGLEY. The experiments undertaken by the Smithsonian Institution upon an aerodrome, or flying machine, capable of carrying a man have been suspended from lack of funds to repair defects in the launching apparatus without the machine ever having been in the air at all. As these experiments have been popularly, and of late repeatedly, rep- resented as having failed on the contrary, because the aerodrome could not sustain itself in the air I have decided to give this brief though late account, which may be accepted as the first authoritative state- ment of them. It will be remembered that in 1896 wholly successful flights of between one-half and one mile by large steam-driven models, unsup- ported except by the mechanical effects of steam engines, had been made by me. In all these the machine was first launched into the air from “ways,” somewhat as a ship is launched into the water, the machine resting on a car that ran forward on these ways, which fell down at the extremity of the car’s motion, releasing the aerodrome for its free flight. I mention these details because they are essential to an understanding of what follows, and partly because their success led me to undertake the experiments on a much larger scale I now describe. In the early part of 1898 a board, composed of officers of the Army and Navy, was appointed to investigate these past experi- ments with a view to determining just what had been accomplished and what the possibilities were of developing a large-size man- carrying machine for war purposes. The report of this board being favorable, the Board of Ordnance and Fortification of the War Department decided to take up the matter, and I having agreed to give without compensation what time I could spare from official duties, the Board allotted $50,000 for the development, construction, and test of a large aerodrome, half of which sum was to be available immediately and the renrainder when required. The whole matter had previously been laid before the Board of Regents of the Smith- sonian Institution, who had authorized me to take up the work and sw 1904 — 6 113 4 114 J)XPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. to use in connection with it such facilities of the Institution as were available. Before consenting to undertake the construction of this large machine, I had fully appreciated that owing to theoretical considera- tions, into which I do not enter, it would need to be relatively lighter than the smaller one; and later it was so constructed, each foot of sustaining surface in the large machine carrying nearly the same weight as each foot in the model. The difficulties subsequently experienced with the larger machine were, then, due not to this ‘ause, but to practical obstacles connected with the launching, and the hike. I had also fully appreciated the fact that one of the chief difficul- ties in its construction would le in the procuring of a suitable engine of sufficient power and, at the same time, one which was light enough. (The models had been driven by steam engines whose water supply weighed too much for very long flights.) The construction of the steam engine is well understood, but now it would become necessary to replace this by gas engines, which for this purpose involve novel difficulties. I resolved not to attempt the task of constructing the engine myself, and had accordingly entered into negotiations with the best engine builders in this country, and after long delay had finally secured a contract with a builder who, of all persons engaged in such work, seemed most likely to achieve success. It was only after this contract for the engine had been signed that I felt willing to formally undertake the work of building the aerodrome. The contract with the engine builder called for an engine developing 12 brake horsepower, and weighing not more than 100 pounds, includ- ing cooling water and all other accessories, and with the proviso that a second engine, exactly like this first one, would be furnished on the same terms. The first engine was to be delivered before the close of February, 1899, and the frame of the aerodrome with sustaining surfaces, propellers, shafting, rudders, etc., was immediately planned, and now that the engine was believed to be secured, their actual con- struction was pushed with the utmost speed. The previous experi- ments with steam-driven models, which had been so successful, had been conducted over the water, using a small house-boat having a cabin for storing the machine, appliances and tools, on top of which was mounted a track and car for use in launching. As full success in launching these working models had been achieved after several years spent in devising, testing and improving this plan, I decided to follow the same method with the large machine, and accordingly designed and had built a house-boat, in which the machine could not only be stored, but which would also furnish space for workshops, and on the top of which was mounted a turntable and track for use in launching from whatever direction the wind might come. EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. LES Everything connected with the work was expedited as much as possible with the expectation of being able to have the first trial flight before the close of 1899, and time and money had been spent on the aerodrome, which was ready, except for its engine, when the time for the delivery of this arrived. But now the builder proved unable to complete his contract, and, after months of delay, it was necessary to decrease the force at work on the machine proper and its launching appliances until some assurance could be had of the final success of the engine. During the spring and summer of 1899. while these delays were being experienced in procuring suitable engines, former experiments on superposed wing surfaces were con- tinued, time was found for overhauling the two steam-driven models which had been used in 1896, and the small house boat was rebuilt so that further tests of these small machines might be made in order to study the effect of various changes in the balancing and _ the steering, equilibrium preserving and sustaining appliances, and the months of June, July, and a portion of August were spent in actual tests of these machines in free flight. : A new launching apparatus following the general plan of the former overhead one, but with the track underneath it, was built for the models, and it was used most successfully in these experi- ments, more than a dozen flights in succession being made with it, while in every case it worked without delay or accident. As soon as these tests with the models on this underneath launching apparatus were completed, that for the large machine was built as an exact duplicate, except for the enlargement, and with some natural con- fidence that what had worked so perfectly on a small scale would work fairly on a large one. It was recognized from the very beginning that it would be desir- able in a large machine to use “superposed” sustaining surfaces (that is, with one wing above another) on account of their supe- riority so far as the relation of strength to weight is concerned, and from their independence of guy wiring; and two sets of superposed sustaining surfaces of different patterns were built and experimented with in the early tests. These surfaces proved, on the whole, inferior in lifting power, though among compensating ad- vantages are the strength of a “bridge” construction which dis- penses with guy wires coming up from below, which, in fact, later were the cause of disaster in the launching. It was finally decided to follow what experiment had shown to be successful, and to construct the sustaining surfaces for the large machine after the “single-tier” plan. This proved to be no easy task, since in the construction of the surfaces for the small machines the main and cross ribs of the framework had been made solid, and, after steaming, bent and dried to the proper curvature, while it was 116 EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. obvious that this plan could not be followed in the large surfaces on account of the necessity, already alluded to, of making them rela- tively lighter than the small ones, which were already very light. After the most painstaking construction, and. tests of various sizes and thicknesses of hollow square, hollow round, I-beam, channel, and many other types of ribs, I finally devised a type which consisted of a hollow box form, having its sides of tapering thickness, with the thickest payt at the point midway between contiguous sides and with small partitions placed inside every few inches in somewhat the same way that nature places them in the bamboo. These various parts of the rib (corresponding to the quill in a wing) were then glued and clamped together, and after drying were reduced to the proper dimensions and the ribs covered with several coats of a special marine varnish, which it had been found protected the glued joints from softening, even when they were immersed in water for twenty-four hours. Comparative measurements were made between these large cross ribs, 11 feet long, and a large quill from the wing of a harpy eagle, which is probably one of the greatest wonders that nature has pro- duced in the way of strength for weight. These measurements showed that the large, 11-foot ribs (“ quills’) for the sustaining sur- faces of the large machine were equally as strong, weight for weight, as the quill of the eagle; but much time was consumed in various con- structions and tests before such a result was finally obtained. During this time a model of the large machine, one-fourth of its linear dimensions, was constructed, and a second contract was made for an engine for it. The delay with the large engine was repeated with the small one, and in the spring of 1900 it was found that both contract engines were failures for the purpose for which they were intended, as neither one developed half of the power required for the allotted weight. I accordingly again searched all over this country, and, finally, ac- companied by an engineer (Mr. Manly), whose services I had engaged, went to Europe, and there personally visited large builders of engines for automobiles, and attempted to get them to undertake the conStruc-. tion of such an engine as was required. This search, however, was fruitless, as all of the foreign builders, as well as those of this country, believed it impossible to construct an engine of the necessary power and as light as I required (less than 10 pounds to the horsepower without fuel or water). I was therefore forced to return to this country and to consent most reluctantly, even at this late date, to have the work of constructing suitable engines undertaken in the shops of the Smithsonian Institution, since, as I have explained, the aerodrome frame and wings were already constructed. This work upon the engines began here in August, 1900, in the immediate care EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. ai of Mr. Manly. These engines were to be of nearly double the power first estimated and of little more weight, but this increased power and the strain caused by it demanded a renewal of the frame as first built, in a stronger and consequently in a heavier form, and the following sixteen months were spent in such a reconstruction simultaneously with the work on the engines. The flying weight of the machine complete, with that of the seronaut, was 830 pounds: its sustaining surface, 1,040 square feet. It therefore was provided with slightly greater sustaining surface and materially greater relative horsepower than the model subse- quently described which fiew successfully. The brake horsepower of the engine was 52; the engine itself, without cooling water, or fuel. weighed approximately 1 kilogram to the horsepower. The en- tire power plant, including cooling water, carburetor, battery, ete.. weighed materially less than 5 pounds to the horsepower. Engines for both the large machine and the quarter-size model were completed before the close of 1901, and they. were immediately put in their respective frames and tests of them and their power-transmission apphances were begun. It is well here to call attention to the fact that although an engine may develop sufficient power for the allotted weight, yet it is not at all certain that it will be suitable for use on a machine which is necessarily as hght as one for traversing the air, for it would be impossible to use, for instance, a single cylinder gasoline engine in a flying machine unless it had connected to it prohibitively heavy fly- wheels. These facts being recognized, the engines built in the Smith- sonian shops were provided with five cylinders, and it was found upon test that the turning effect received from them was most uniform, and that, by suitable balancing of rotating and reciprocating parts, they could be made to work so that there was practically no vibration, even when used in the very ght frames of the aero:lromes. The engine is not all the apparatus connected with the development and delivery of power, for obviously there must be shafts, bearings, and in the present case there were also gears; and all of these parts must necessarily be phenomenally heht, while all of the materials must be capable of withstanding repeated and constant strains far beyond their elastic limit. It is also evident to anyone having famil- larity with such constructions that it is most difficult to keep the various bearings, shafts, gears, ete., in proper alignment without adding excessive weight, and also that when these various parts once get out of alignment when subject to strain, the disasters which are caused render them unfit for further use. The engines themselves were successfully completed before the close of 1901, and were of much more power than those originally designea: but nearly a year and a half had been spent not only in their con:ple- . 118 EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. tion, but in properly coordinating the various parts of the frame carrying them, repairing the various breakages, assembling, dis- mounting, and reassembling the various parts of the appliances, and in general rebuilding the frame and appurtenances to correspond in strength to the new engines. There are innumerable other details, for the whole question is one of details. I may, however, particularly mention the carburetors, which form an essential part of every gas engine, and such giving fair satisfaction for use in automobiles were on the market at the time, yet all of them failed to properly generate gas when used in the tests of the engine working in the aerodrome frame, chiefly because of the fact that the movement of the engine in this hght frame must be constant and regular or the transmission appliances are certain of distortion. It was, therefore, necessary to devise car- buretors for the aerodrome engines which would meet the required conditions, and more than half a dozen were constructed which were in advance of anything then on the market, and yet were not good enough to use in the aerodrome, before a satisfactory one was made. These experiments were made in the shop, but with an imitation of all the disturbing influences which would be met with in the actual use of the machine in the air, so as to make certain, as far as possible, that the first test of the machine in free flight would not be marred by mishaps or unseen contingencies in connection with the genera- tion and use of power. It is impossible for anyone who has not had experience with such ynatters to appreciate the great amount of delay which experience has shown is to be expected in such experiments. Only in the spring of 1903, and after two unforeseen years of assiduous labor, were these new engines and their appurtenances, weighing altogether less than 5 pounds to the horsepower and far lighter than any known to be then existing, so coordinated and adjusted that successive shop tests could be made without causing injury to the frame, its bearings, shafts, or propellers. And now everything seemed to be as nearly ready for an experi- inent as could be, until the aerodrome was at the location at which the experiments were to take place. The large machine and its quarter-size counterpart were accordingly placed on board the large house boat, which had been completed some time before and had been kept in Washington as an auxiliary shop for use in the construction work, and the whole outfit was towed to a point in the Potomac River, here 3 miles wide, directly opposite Widewater, Va., and about 40 miles below Washington and midway between the Mary- land and Virginia shores, where the boat was made fast to moorings which had previously been placed in readiness for it. Although extreme delays had already occurred, yet they were not EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. Lag so trying as the ones which began immediately after the work was thus transferred to the lower Potomac. The object in constructing the quarter-size counterpart of the large machine was to duplieate in it the balancing and relative pro- portions of power, surface, ete., that had been arranged in the large one, so that a test of it might be made which would determine whether the large machine should be tried as arranged or the bal- ancing and other arrangements modified. The launching appa- ‘atus, which had proved so eminently successful with the original steam-driven models in 1896, was considered a thing so well tested that it had, as I have stated, been duplicated on a suitable scale for use with the large aerodrome, and it was felt that if this apparatus were exactly similar to the smaller one it would be the one appliance least likely to mar the experiments. In order to test the quarter-size model it was necessary to remove its launching track from the top of the small house boat and place it upon the deck of the large boat, in order to have all the work go on at one place, as it was impossible, on account of its unseaworthiness, to moor the small house boat in the middle of the river. While this transfer of the launching apparatus from the smail boat to the large one was being made, the changed atmospheric con- ditions incident to a large body of water over which thick fogs hung a great portion of the time, from those of a well-protected shop on the land, began to manifest themselves in such ways as the rusting of the metal parts and fittings, and the consequent disarrangement ot the adjustment of the necessarily very accurate pieces of apparatus connected with the ignition system of the engine. These difficulties might have partly been anticipated, but there were others concerning which the cause of the deterioration and disarrangement of certain parts and adjustments was not immediately detected, and conse- quently when short preliminary shop tests of the small machine were attempted just prior to launching it, it was found that the apparatus did not work properly, necessitating repairs and new constructions and consequent delay. Although the large house boat with the entire outfit had been moved down the river on July 14, 19038, it was not until the 8th of August that the test of the quarter-size model was inade, and all of this delay was directly due to changed atmospheric conditions incident to the change in locality. This test of the model in actual flight was made on the 8th of August, 1903, when it worked most satisfactorily, the launching apparatus, as always heretofore, performing perfectly, white the model, being launched directly into the face of the wind, flew directly ahead on an even keel. The bal- ancing proved to be perfect, and the power, supporting surface, 2zuiding, and equilibrium-preserving effects of the rudder also. The 120 EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. weight of the model was 58 pounds, its sustaining surface 66 square feet, and the horsepower from 24 to 3. This was the first time in history, so far as I know, that a success- ful flight of a mechanically sustained flying machine was made in public. The flight was not as long as had been expected, as it was found afterwards that one of the workmen, in his zeal to insure an especially good one, had overfilled the gasoline tank, which would otherwise have enabled a flight several times as long. However, as such a Hight would have given absolutely no more data than the short one did, and as the delays in getting ready for testing the large machine had already far exceeded what was expected, it was thought best not to make any more tests with the small one, as all cf the data which was desired had been procured, and it was accordingly stored away and every energy immediately concentrated in getting the large ma- chine ready for its first test, which at that time seemed only a few days away. During all these delays it may be remarked that we necessarily resided near the house boat, and therefore in a region of malaria, from whose attacks a portion of us suffered. I have spoken of the serious delays in the test of the small machine caused by changed atmospheric conditions, but they proved to be almost negligible compared with what was later experienced with the large one. I have also alluded to the fact that the necessarily light ribs of the large sustaining wing surfaces were covered with several coats of a special marine varnish which many tests had shown enabled the glue to withstand submersion in water for more than twenty-four hours without being affected. This water test was made with a view to guarding against the joints of the ribs being softened when the machine came down into the water, as it was planned for it to do at the close of its flight, and these submersions had apparently shown that no trouble need be anticipated from the effects of the sustaining surfaces getting wet. It is an instance of the unpre- dictable delays which present themselves, that when preparations had been begun for the immediate trial of the large machine, already down the river, it was found that every one of the cross ribs had been rendered almost useless by the damp, though under shelter. As it would take months to build new ones, a temporary means of repairing them was used. There were other delays too numerous to mention, but chiefly incident to working over the water, some of the principal of which were due to storms dragging the house boat from its moorings and destroying auxiliary apparatus, such as launches, boats, rafts, ete., to say nothing of the time consumed in bringing workmen to and from the scene of the experiments. The propellers were even found to break under the strain of the actual EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. | engines in the open, though they had not done so in the shop, and this is mentioned as another instance of the numerous causes of trying delay which it was impossible to foresee. Finally, however, on the 8d of September, everything seemed to be in readiness for the experiments, and the large aerodrome was accordingly placed in position and all orders given and arrangements made for a test that day. After stationing the various tugs, launches, etc., at their predetermined positions so that they might render any assistance necessary to the engineer or the aerodrome, in case it came down in the water at a point distant from the house boat, and after the photographers, with special telephoto cameras, had been sta- tioned on the shore in order that photographs with their trigonomet- rical data might be obtained, from which speed, distance, etc., might be later determined, and when everyone was anxiously expecting the experiment, a delay occurred from one of the hardly predictable ‘auses just mentioned in connection with the weather. An attempt was made to start the engine so that it might be running at its proper rate when the aerodrome was launched into free air after leaving the track, but the dry batteries used for sparking the engine, together with the entire lot of several dozen which were on hand as a reserve, had become useless from the dampness. I have merely instanced some of these causes of failure when every- thing was apparently ready for the expected test, but only one who was on the spot and who had interest in the outcome could appre- ciate trials of this sort, and the delays of waiting for weather suitable for experiments. It was found that every storm which came anywhere in the vicinity, immediately selected the river as its route of travel, and although a 10-mile wind on the land would not be an insurmountable obstacle during an experiment, yet the same wind on the river rendered it impossible to maintain the large house boat on an even keel and free from pitching and tossing long enough to make a test. While speaking of the difficulties imposed by the weather, it should also be understood that to take the aerodrome in parts from under the shelter of the roof and assemble and mount it upon the upper works was a task requiring four or five hours, and that during this time a change in the weather was altogether likely to occur, and did re- peatedly occur, sufficient to render the experiment impossible. Expe- rience has shown, then, that the aerodrome should be sheltered by a building, in which it shall be at all times ready for immediate launch- ing. During all the delay resulting from this and other causes since it was never known on what day the experiment might take place—a great expense for tug boats waiting at a distance of 40 miles from the city, was incurred, and this was a part of the con- 122 EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. tinuous drain on the pecuniary resources, which proved ultimately more fatal than any mishap to the apparatus itself. Following the 3d of September, and after procuring new batteries, short preliminary tests inside the boat were made in order to make sure that there would be no difficulty in the running of the engine the next time a fair opportunity arrived for making a test of the machine in free flight. Something of the same troubles which had been met with in the disarrangement of the adjustments of the small engine was experienced in the large one, although they occurred in such a different way that they were not detected until they had caused damage in the tests, and these disarrangements were responsible for broken propellers, twisted shafts, crushed bearings, distorted frame- work, ete., which were not finally overcome until the Ist of October. After again getting everything in apparent readiness, there then ensued a period of waiting on the weather until the 7th of October (1903), when it became sufficiently quiet for a test, which I was now beginning to fear could not be made before the following season. In this, the first test, the engineer took his seat, the engine started with ease and was working without vibration at its full power of over 50 horse, and the word being given to launch the machine, the car was released and the aerodrome sped along the track. Just as the machine left the track, those who were watching it, among whom were two representatives of the Board of Ordnance,’ noticed that the machine was jerked violently down at the front (being caught, as it subsequently appeared, by the falling ways), and under the full power of its engine was pulled into the water, carrying with it its engineer. When the aerodrome rose to the surface it was found, that while the front sustaining surfaces had been broken by their impact with the water, yet the rear ones were comparatively unin- jured. As soon as a full examination of the launching mechanism had been made, it was found that the front portion of the machine had caught on the launching car, and that the guy post, to which were fastened the guy wires which are the main strength of the front surfaces, had been bent to a fatal extent. «¢ Major Macomb, of the Board of Ordnance, states in his report to the Board, that “the trial was unsuccessful because the front guy post caught in its support on the launching car and was not released in time to give free flight, as was intended, but, on the contrary, caused the front of the machine to be dragged downward, bending the guy post and making the machine plunge into the water about 50 yards in front of the house boat.” bThis instantaneous photograph, taken from the boat itself and hitherto unpublished, shows the aerodrome in motion before it had actually cleared the house boat. On the left is seen a portion of a beam, being a part of the falling ways in which the front wing was caught, while the front wing itself is seen twisted, showing that the accident was in progress before the aerodrome was free to fly. EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. 23 The machine, then, had never been free in the air, but had been pulled down as stated. The disaster just” brietly described had indefinitely postponed the test, but this was not all. As has been said before, the weather had become very cold and the so-called equinoctial storms being near it was decided to remove the house boat at the earliest time possible, but before it could be done, a storm came up and swept away all the launches, boats, rafts, ete., and in doing so completely demolished the greater part of them, so that when the house boat was finally removed to Washington, on the 15th of October, these appurtenances had to be replaced. It is necessary to remember that these long series of delays worked other than mere scientific difficulties, for a more important and more vital one was the exhaustion of the financial means for the work. Immediately upon getting the boat to Washington the labor of constructing new sustaining surfaces was begun, and they were com- pleted about the close of November. It was proposed to make a second attempt near the city, though in the meantime the ice had formed in the river. However, on the 8th of December, 1903, the atmosphere became very quiet shortly before noon and an immediate attempt was made at Arsenal Point, quite near Washington, though the site was unfavorable. Shortly after arriving at the selected point everything was in readiness for the test. In the meantime the wind had arisen and darkness was fast approaching, but as the funds for continuing the work were exhausted, rendering it Impos- sible to wait until spring for more suitable weather for making « test, it was decided to go on with it if possible. This time there were on hand to witness the test the writer, members of the Board of Ordnance, and a few other guests, to say nothing of the hundreds of spectators who were waiting on the various wharves and shores. It was found impossible to moor the boat without a delay which would mean that no test could be made on account of darkness, so that it was held as well as possible by a tug, and kept with the aerodrome pointing directly into the wind, though the tide, which was running very strong, and the wind, which was blowing 10 miles an hour, were together causing much difficulty. The engine being started and working most satisfactorily, the order was given by the engimeer to release the machine, but just as it was leaving the track another disaster, again due to the launching ways, occurred.‘ 4@Major Macomb again states in his official report to the Board: ‘“ The launching car was released at 4.45 p.m. * * * The car was set in motion and the propellers revolved rapidly, the engine working perfectly, but there was something wrong with the launching. The rear guy post seemed to drag, bringing the rudder down on the launching ways, and a crashing, rending sound, followed by the collapse of the rear wings, showed that the machine had been wrecked in the launching; just how it was impossible to see.” . 124 EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. This time the rear of the machine, in some way still unexplained, was caught by a portion of the launching car, which caused the rear sustaining surfaces to break, leaving the rear entirely without sup- port, and it came down almost vertically into the water. Dark- ness had come before the engineer, who had been in extreme danger, could aid in the recovery of the aerodrome, the boat and machine had drifted apart, and one of the tugs, in its zeal to render assist- ance, had fastened a rope to the frame of the machine in the reverse position from what it should have been attached and had broken the frame entirely in two. While the injury which had thus been caused seemed almost irreparable to one not acquainted with the work, yet it was found upon close examination that only a small amount of labor would be necessary in order to repair the frame, the engine itself being entirely uninjured. Had this accident occurred at an earlier period, when there were funds available for continuing the experiments, it would not have been so serious, for many accidents in shop tests had occurred which, while unknown to the general pub- lic, had yet caused greater damage and required more time for repair than in the present case. But the funds for continuing the work were exhausted, and it being found impossible to immediately secure others for continuing it, it was found necessary to discontinue the experiments for the present, though I decided to use, from a private fund, the small amount of money necessary to repair the frame so that it itself, together with its engine, which was entirely uninjured, might be available for further use if it should later prove possible, and that they themselves might be in proper condition to attest to what they really represent as an engineering achievement. Entirely erroneous impressions have been given by the account of these experiments in the public press, from which they have been judged, even by experts; the impression being that the machine could not sustain itself in flight. It seems proper, then, to emphasize and to reiterate, with a view to what has just been said, that the machine has never had a chance to fly at all, but that the failure occurred on its launching ways; and the question of its ability to fly is consequently, as yet, an untried one. There have, then, been no failures as far as the actual test of the flying capacity of the machine is concerned, for it has never been free in the air at all. The failure of the financial means for continu- ing these expensive experiments has left the question of their result where it stood before they were undertaken, except that it has been demonstrated that engines can be built, as they have been, of little over one-half the weight that was assigned as the possible minimum by the best builders of I'rance and Germany; that the frame can be made strong enough to carry these engines, and that, so far as any possible prevision can extend, another flight would be successful if EXPERIMENTS WITH THE LANGLEY AERODROME. 125 the launching were successful; for in this, and in this alone, as far as 1s known, all the trouble has come. The experiments have also given necessary information about this launching. They have shown that the method which succeeded per- feetly on a smaller scale is insufficient on a larger one, and they have indicated that it is desirable that the launching should take place nearer the surface of the water, either from a track upon the shore or from a house boat large enough to enable the apparatus to be launched at any time with the wings extended and perhaps with wings independent of support from guys. But the construction of this new launching apparatus would involve further considerable expenditures that there are no present means to meet; and this, and this alone, is the cause of their apparent failure. Failure in the aerodrome itself or its engines there has been none; and it is believed that it is at the moment of success, and when the engineering problems have been solved, that a lack of means has pre- vented a continuance of the work. RELATION OF WING SURFACE TO WEIGHT. By R. von LENDENFELD.4 Successive investigators, myself among them, have studied the comparative relation between the weight and the dimensions of fly- ing animals, with special reference to the extent of wing surface. Some hundred species of bats, birds, and flying insects have been examined in this way, the results of these researches being given in the following table, in which the animals are arranged according to weight of body. ene i Wing Animal. Weight. Wane, Ate 5 ae eran weight. Grams. Sq.cm. | Sq. mm. A DAULOSS! CDLOMeAeATeTULAITS) a) sect aes eae eee 12, 000 8,000 67 IBUStAT ON (OtstCi CO imme ee ae nae = es eee ee ee sete ee 9, 600 5, 937 62 MOmMea lel CHAM LUS MLOLCULLG) een tae oe eee eee eee A ree ae 5,000 7,937 160 Stonka(CiCcan7zGialod) mae ee re ee oe eee ae ra pS ee cl bre | 2,265 4,506 199 IBM Alraye2 ako pre (Vena ROF ION) Ce MAID) soe Sees sepeeoe cones oeenecesce ses eee | 1,380 1, 630 118 Bheasanit CERASiONUS COLERTCUS) soe on oe eee ie eee eee eee | 1,000 | 880 | 88 Ferningse lly (co nusangenualus)) sees seen ee es ee eee 1,035 2,380 230 Grows (Canvusicormin) ito. x 20:8 Suse tlon de wih ee | 59 | 1,286 216 Parone: CRT OUuiCUnen ed) ce ae eee eee ee eee | 320 336 105 DOvieRpISeOny(COlMMOCILL Cl) seen eye nse ene eae ee eee eae 293 | 608 207 Sparrow, naw CHOLCOMIMNUIUCULUS eae seen ae oe ee eee 260 680, 261 Baugchinerenlll Garwstatounadus) sass) = eae ae eee ee A 197 662 336 BIEN TSUIS 1AM CLL USHIOLL CL IGES ee ee ne eee ee | 100 186 186 Swaibr(GypSsevisia pus) meee ee see ee Sen ee oae ne ae es Soca Sad 33.5 144 430 Sparrow (CRaSSCTECOMESEL CUS a mets stra a= anjle nee ee eee oe ere | 28 7 200 Swallow (Hirundo rustica) -...----------- See Ey ee ee 18 110 611 ERG OUSON CL CGIUSRNLO) 01g) a eeett ee sae see ee ae ae eee eee 14.5 62 427 SMa Mai GMespen alco WU USETELUUS) = aan ee ee eee 3.7 50 1,351 Sphinx moth (Sphinx ligustri).........-..--.---------------------- 1.92 18.64 | 971 Flatbellied dragonfly (Libellula depressa) ____...---------.-------- 6 13.3 2, 216 Bumiblebeer (bones pia bor 1) ease sees peer renee naa ene 44 1.03 234 Swallowtailed butterfly (Papilio podalirius) ---....._.----_-__--- .B4 1SZ | 3, 294 Maiden dragonfly, (Calopterys virgo). .-...-_.-..--.---_--.-.--.--< | a2 13.94 6,970 Cabbage butterfly, (Pieris brassice) ...._-..-.---.--------+---.-+.- 08 9. 28 11, 600 Lone ypees CA Us LCLULCd)) Naeem ee Cee ee ere ee rae en 074 39 | 528 EOUse iva CUAISCOCONTES CACO eae eee ae see eee penne a ne Moran 01 18 | 1,800 Ciniatn(Ciwlexipupsens) areae een ace nee ae Shee seo Sw Ab | .0038 .38 | 10,000 It is seen from the foregoing table that the relation of the extent of wing surface to the weight of body is not uniform, as might have been expected, but exceedingly variable. For instance, to 1 gram of weight the bustard has 62 mm? of wing surface, while the cabbage but- «Translated from Natur wissenschaftliche Wochenschrift, November 20, 1904. : 127 128 RELATION OF WING SURFACE TO WEIGHT. terfly has 11,600. Careful observation shows, however, that 1n the main the variation of this ratio depends on the size of the animal, or, stated in general terms, the wings are relatively larger the smaller and lighter the animal to which they belong. It is shown also that the variations from the general rule depend on the fact that the mode of flight is dif- ferent in different animals. Some flying creatures overcome weight by the rapid movement of their wings; others, especially at the beginning of a stroke, take advantage of the internal atmospheric currents, and use the enormous resistance of the air for their purpose. The first class, to which the sparrow and the honeybee belong, may be desig- nated as flapping flyers, and the last class, of which the albatross and the sea eagle are examples, as sailing flyers. These extreme types of the so-called flapping and sailing flyers are connected by an unbroken chain of flying creatures, not all of which are so exclusively either flappers or sailers as the birds just named. As might be expected, the flapping flyers have comparatively small wings, which move swiftly by the aid of powerful muscles, while the wings of the sailers are moved by weaker muscles and more slowly. If we take these two classes into consideration separately, as in the following tables, it is clearly shown that the wing surface increases with decreasing weight of body. Flappers. Wing sur- Animal. | Weight. | ee 1 weight Grams. Mm BUS tard yee sete ae see ee ce Re tea eee eee en eae See) eae os eee 9, 600 | 62 IPHCASa Nt 2s aoe eke Bee eee eae Seas NO eee Pa eS 1,000 88 Partridge: . 0.2523. 25 che ees ci ee ee ee ea ala ate aes Sree 320 105 STORRS AO Raab ans coaUneee leon aeSoekesseeeitacs+nsseneascaonosceeeeunse seohasi as 28 | 200 Bumble veers setescs seceee peeeeee 2 nes Oe eee, Na ee Neer ae epee en 44 234 OTN GY, 10 CO ee ae eae ee 074 528 ROUSE Fy: soo oe soe ase se oe ae aces ee eee aire oe eters te eee OL 1,800 (Ey a: PA gee a Pe eens = faeces et is Se Se ete eae bane bere see aenee . 003 10,000 Sailers. | Wing sur- Animal. Weight. oe t weight. Grams. | Mm? Allibatrose! is ote ao ees ee ee ee ae ee eee le ee ee eet 12,000 | 67 Seaveaele. 28 se oe Se 2 See Ss es rer ee oe eae 5, 000 | 160 Stores Mac) re oe RN epee Lea Se ape pe Ee i os 2,265 199 Silversun es es a I 1,035 230 Sparrows haiwikioce. so ee seo eee oe Sasa cece eee a eee ee een 260 261 laughing cules seee sees saeeee SRE tates te cpa ee, ES TEN Re eae 197 336 Vir rinidirag ont yee ne eee eee eens 2255 Soe eeeaee ees eSiceet 2 6, 970 Wiemmon ibritter tly eee eee a 183 | 28,710 RELATION OF WING SURFACE TO WEIGHT. 129 Of this fact there can be no doubt, and the question arises why this is so. Miillenhoff and others who have interested themselves in this inquiry have answered it from the morphological point of view. From the entirely correct principle deduced from the position of these investigators, that with increasing size the linear diminsions increase in the first, the magnitude in the second, and the weight in the third ratio, they conclude that the wing surface is not to be compared directly with the weight, but the square root of this sur- face with the cube root of the weight. In fact, however, the figures thus obtained show no constancy, even when comparing animals of O antace a Vv surtace the same mode of flight. Thus the formula Y = Sa gives in the partridge 4.03, in the sparrow 2.86, and in the bumblebee 1.33. If, however, such a constancy existed, which we see is not the case, the paradox that hes in the relative increase of wing surface with decreasing weight of body would by no means be set aside; but in similarly formed flying creatures it is not so essential that they shall be morphologically alike as that all shall perform the task of over- coming weight equally well, and thus be functionally the same. Tn sustaining and propelling the body it thus becomes a question of the power of the wings to press down upon the air, and this power depends not only on their size, but in a very great degree upon the swiftness of their movement against the air and its consequent resistance. Hence, as is evident, the flapping flyers, whose wings move in a comparatively small angle, have greater lifting power the longer their wings and the more strokes they make in a second. A sparrow has a wing length of about 10 cm. and makes about 12 wing strokes in a second; a bee with a wing length of approximately 6.3 mm. makes, as Marey has shown, about 190 strokes in a second. 6.8 times 190 about equaling 100 times 12. The slow wing movement used by the sailing birds when needed shows the same. The stork has a wing length of 68 em. and makes 12 strokes in a second, and the laughing gull with a wing length of 39 cm. makes 3! strokes in the same time. In these instances also the results are not dissimilar. In general, one may therefore say that the movement of the wings against the air in many birds of the same mode of flight is of equal rapidity, this being true of the flapping flvers as well as the sailers. Although the smaller flyers have relatively larger wings than the greater, one can not for this reason assert that the movement of the wing surface against the air would be slower. In view of the biological principle that organs are not greater than demanded by their function, we must conclude from the known facts that the smaller animals need relatively larger wings to accomplish what the larger and heavier attain with their relatively smaller ones. sm 1904——9 130 RELATION OF WING SURFACE TO WEIGHT. The fact that a wing surface of 67 mm? per gram enables the alba- tross to sail, while the laughing gull requires 836 mm? for the same purpose, and that the bustard gets along with 62, while the sparrow needs 200 and the fly 1,800 mm?, can be explained only on the supposi- tion that the resistance of the air against moving wings is not directly proportional to their size, but that in enlarging the wings the resisting power of the air against them increases in a greater ratio than their superficial dimensions. Knowing that the air requires an appreciable time to yield to the pressure of the moving wing, and that the larger the wing surface the greater the quantity of air displaced and the greater the resistance of this compressed air to the subsequent wing strokes which must act upon it, it is evident that this conclusion is correct. There can therefore be no doubt that increasing size of body is accompanied by a relative decrease of wing surface, and from this fact we are able to draw interesting conclusions as to the size of the wings a man would need to be able to fly. If we show the relation of the weight to the size of the wing by the means of coordinates, con- necting the points thus gained by a curve, and then extend this curve as demanded by the relative weight of the heaviest animal, we secure an approximate illustration of the wing size which such bodies would require. Since the muscular power of a human being would by no means suffice for flapping flight, it could only be a question of sailing flight in this case. I have therefore drawn a curve for sailing flyers on the principle above indicated, from which the following is deduced: 70 kilograms, weight of body, would require 32 mm’ of wing surface per gram. 80 kilograms, weight of body, would require 31 mm’ of wing surface per gram. 90 kilograms, weight of body, would require 80 mm’° of wing surface per gram. 100 kilograms, weight of body, would require 29.5 mm’ of wing surface per gram. According to the foregoing, if the combined weight of the body and the mechanical flying apparatus amounts to 90 kilograms, in order to sail lke an albatross a man would require 90,000 times 30, or 2,700,000 mm? of wing surface; that is to say, two wings furnishing together 2.7 square meters of surface. RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH OF THE YERKES OBSERVATORY .¢ By Georce I). HALE and FERDINAND HLLERMAN.O INTRODUCTION. The application of the spectroscope in 1868 to the observation of solar prominences in full sunlight opened an extensive field of research and directed the attention of astronomers to the importance of applying the powerful instruments and methods of the physical laboratory to the study of the sun. Since that time the rise and development of stellar spectroscopy have further emphasized the importance of solar investigation. For it can not be too often repeated that the sun is the only star whose phenomena can be studied in detail; in interpreting the spectroscopic phenomena of all the other stars we must therefore return in every instance to the sun. If its infinitely varied and complex activities were well under- stood, the problems encountered in the study of stellar evolution would be greatly simplified.” But although the constant use of the spectroscope, dating back to the discovery of the chemical constitu- tion of the sun in 1859, has furnished an immense amount of valuable information, there appears to be an exceptional opportunity at the present time to secure new and important results, especially through the use of the large spectroscopes and other powerful instruments of the physical laboratory. For solar spectroscopy has by no means kept pace with laboratory spectroscopy; few large grating spectro- scopes, such as are found in every physical laboratory, have ever been employed to study a large image of the sun. This being true, it is less remarkable that other laboratory instruments not so gen- erally available are still awaiting application in solar research. a4 Abstract, by permission, from the Publications of the Yerkes Observatory, Vol. III, Part I, 1904. 6 Although this paper has been written by myself, for convenience of refer- ence to previous studies and opinions it belongs also to Mr. Ellerman, because of his important share in the work,—G. E. H. 131 132 RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH. The widespread interest in total solar eclipses and the great ex- penditure of time and money so freely made in observing them surely tend to emphasize what has been said. For if it is worth while, as it certainly is, to travel thousands of miles and to undergo hardships in order to spend a few flying seconds in making observa- tions, it would seem no less advantageous to continue solar work at home, where entirely new phenomena can be observed daily with a much smaller expenditure of effort. Total eclipses of the sun will always be of great importance, as the corona can not be observed in full sunight. But the study of many other solar phenomena, which can be observed whenever the sky is clear, is quite as likely to advance our knowledge of the solar constitution. It was with some such ideas in mind that the work of the Kenwood Observatory was undertaken in 1888. It seemed obvious that even a very slight appreciation of the subject should suffice to render possible some improvements of method. A first step in this direc- tion was attempted by the invention of the spectroheliograph in 1889. The original purpose of this instrument was the photography of the chromosphere and prominences, in order to simplify and ren- der more accurate the daily delineation of their form. It was subse- quently found, as will be shown in the present paper, that the instru- ment had a far wider range of application, and that it could be applied in directions which had not suggested themselves in 1889. The principle of the spectroheliograph is exceedingly simple. Imagine a direct-vision spectroscope in which the eyepiece ordina- rily employed is replaced by a (second) slit. If an image of the sun is formed on the first shit of this spectroscope, the second sht will permit the passage of only a narrow region of the spectrum corre- sponding in width to this slit. If the sht is now moved until it coin- cides with the H# line, for example, only hydrogen light will pass through the instrument. If, then, a photographic plate is placed behind and almost in contact with the second slit, and the spectro- scope is moved at right angles to its optical axis, an image of the sun, in monochromatic hydrogen light, will be built up on the plate from the successive images of the slit. If the exposure is suitable, the chromosphere and prominences will be shown surrounding this image. Such is the spectroheliograph in its simplest form. It is obvi- ously immaterial whether the motion be given to the spectroscope, on the one hand, or to the solar image and photographic plate, on the other. It is only necessary that the relative motion of the solar image and first slit be such that light from all parts of the solar disk shall pass successively through the slit, while the photographic plate and second slit experience a corresponding relative motion. The second slit serves simply to isolate any desired line in the spectrum; RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH. 1,3) hence its width must be such as exactly to include this line and to exclude all light from ether parts of the spectrum. It is evident that the spectrohehograph may be considered simply as a form of monochromatic exposing shutter, differing from the ordinary focal plane shutter only through the use of a narrower exposing slit and the inclusion of an optical train which limits the light to a single line in the spectrum. Although this idea suggested itself to me quite independently in 1889, I subsequently learned that the principle was by no means new. Indeed, Janssen had suggested it as early as 1869, while Braun, of Kalocsa, and Lohse, of Potsdam, had designed instruments involv- ing the same principle in 1872 and 1880, respectively. Indeed, Lohse had constructed and experimented with the instrument he de- signed, but his work was not successful. This may have been due in part to the fact that the hydrogen line which he employed is not nearly so well adapted for prominence photography as are the H and K lines of calcium. This was one of the difficulties experienced in my first (unsuccessful) experiments, which, through the kindness of Professor Pickering, were made at the Harvard College Observa- tory in the winter of 1889-1890. In April, 1891, after the Kenwood Observatory had been equipped with a 12-inch equatorial refractor and a powerful solar spectroscope, a photographie study of the ultra-violet spectrum of the chromosphere and prominences was undertaken in the hope of finding lines better adapted than those of hydrogen for the photography of the promi- nences. The brilliant H and K lines of calcium, previously observed visually in full sunlight by Professor Young and photographically at total eclipses, were found in all cases to be the most conspicuous lines in the spectrum of the chromosphere and prominences. The remark- able brightness of these lines, and more particularly their position at the center of the dark, broad shades, due to the denser calcium vapor in the lower portion of the solar atmosphere, render them peculiarly well adapted for the purposes of prominence photography. Indeed, it was possible with their aid to obtain good photographs of single prominences merely by opening the slit of the spectroscope to such an extent as to include a considerable part of the prominence and giving a very short exposure to the image formed directly upon a photo- graphic plate. But this method was too limited to be of general application. In order to record photographically the entire surface of the sun, with the chromosphere and prominences, 1t Was necessary to employ the principle of the spectrohehograph, involving the use of narrow slits, moved with reference to the solar image and photo- graphic plate. The first successful spectroheliograph was brought into use at the Kenwood Observatory in January, 1892. After this time it was employed regularly on every clear day until May, 1895, 134 RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRA PH. soon after which the instruments of the Kenwood Observatory were removed to the Yerkes Observatory. My spectroscopic studies of the sun during the spring and summer of 1891 were not confined to the chromosphere and prominences. It was found that the H and K lines, previously recognized as no less characteristic of the prominences than the hydrogen lines themselves, were reversed from dark to bright in regions scattered all over the solar disk. This fact had not escaped the attention of Professor Young, who had long before remarked the presence of these lines in the neighborhood of active sun spots. But the greater delicacy of the photographic processes showed these bright lines to characterize very extensive regions on the sun’s surface, not confined to the immediate neighborhood of spots, but scattered throughout the sun-spot zones, and even extending from pole to pole. It was noticed from the out- set that these bright regions corresponded closely with the well-known facule, and in my earlher work they were called by this name. It has since become clear, however, that a distinctive term should be adopted, and I now propose the name “ flocculi ” for the regions on the sun’s disk which are shown only on photographs made with the spectro- hehograph. The possibility of photographing these bright regions on the sun’s disk with the spectroheliograph at once greatly extended the range of that instrument, as it was thus shown to be capable of recording, not only the prominences, which could be observed, though very laboriously, by visual methods, but also extensive and important phenomena invisible to the eye and not shown on photographs taken in the ordinary manner. Spectroheliographs were accordingly adopted for use at other observatories, first by Mr. Evershed in Eng- land, and subsequently (in 1893) by M. Deslandres at the Paris Ob- servatory. Both of these spectroscopists introduced modifications and improvements of the instrument, Mr. Evershed constructing a direct-vision spectroheliograph of remarkable simplicity and beauty, and M. Deslandres, with a different type of instrument, obtaining photographs of great excellence. Tt had been hoped and expected that the interruption in the daily series of photographs, caused by removal to the Yerkes Observatory in 1896, would be of short duration, but unfortunately this did not prove to be the case. The 12-inch refractor, devoted at Kenwood entirely to solar work, was needed at the Yerkes Observatory for general purposes. It therefore became necessary to remove the spec- troheliograph from this telescope, and to modify the mounting in order to adapt it for general observational work. The spectrohelio- graph was remodeled for use with the 40-inch refractor as a solar spectroscope, and it was expected that a new spectroheliograph, large enough to photograph the 7-inch (17.8 em.) image at the focus of RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH. 16355 this telescope, would soon be ready for use. But the funds required for the construction of*the new spectroheliograph were not forth- coming, and when it finally “became possible to undertake work on this instrument (through a grant from the Rumford fund, and the gifts of friends of the observatory) progress was slow, owing to the limited funds available. For a 7-inch solar image, collimator and camera lenses of about 10 inches (25.4 cm.) aperture were needed ; but the considerable cost of such lenses rendered their purchase impossible, and a pair of 64-inch (15.7 em.) Voigtlinder portrait lenses, obtained from second-hand dealers after a year’s search, were adopted. With lenses of this aperture it is evident that much heht must be lost at the extremities of the slit, and that the resulting image of the sun must therefore be deficient in brightness at the correspond- ing limbs. Even after the lenses had been secured, the demands of other phases of the observatory’s work greatly retarded the construc- tion of the instrument, and it was not until the latter part of 1899 that it was ready for trial? * * PRELIMINARY ACCOUNT OF RESULTS OBTAINED WITH THE RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH. Prior to 1903 the Rumford spectroheliograph was used for experi- mental purposes, the numerous photographs obtained during the sun- spot minimum being of service mainly in perfecting the adjustments of the instrument. It had been expected that the spectroheliograph would be transfered from the 40-inch refractor to the 30-inch ccelostat reflector for the purposes of the daily record; but the destruction of the latter instrument by fire in December, 1902, prevented the reali- zation of this plan.’! The work with the 40-inch refractor was accord- ingly resumed in February, 1903, and since the latter part of that month photographs of the calcium flocculi have been made on each clear day (Sundays usually excepted). Since early in April this series has been supplemented by a daily series of (low-level) photo- eraphs, made with the slit set at some distance from the center of the H or K band, and since May 16 photographs have been made as often as possible with the Hf line. In addition to this routine work many photographs of special regions have been taken in a study of the ealeium vapor at various levels, and some results have also been obtained with the calcium line A 4,226.9, the iron line (4,383.7, and with various other dark lines. It will thus be seen that while the material represented by the photographs obtained with the Rumford a There follows a description of the Rumford spectroheliograph, for which the reader may consult the original publication. b> Through the generosity of Miss Helen Snow the coelostat reflector has been rebuilt and is now in regular use. A spectroheliograph will soon be employed with it. ‘ 136 RUMFORD SPEOTROHELIOGRAPH. spectroheliograph is not yet sufficient for extended generalizations, the variety of phenomena recorded is such as to call for some comment here. A more complete discussion of the results must be reserved for a future occasion. ON THE NATURE OF THE CALCIUM FLOCCULI. In my first published note on the bright calcium regions recorded for the first time with the Kenwood spectroheliograph I briefly described the results in the following words: The reversed regions are of great extent and in appearance closely resemble facule. Several explanations may be suggested to account for them. They may be: 1.. Ordinary prominences projected on the disk. 2. Prominences in which H and K are bright, while the hydrogen lines are absent. 3. Facule. 4. Phenomena of a new Class, similar to faculze, but showing H and K bright, and not obtained in eye observations or ordinary photographs because of the brilliant background upon which they are projected.¢ Tt was subsequently shown that the bright calcium regions in gen- eral coincide closely with the facule, and it was concluded that they represent the hot calcium vapor in the upper part of the facule and in the lower part of the adjoining chromosphere. Fig. 1, plate m1, which is reproduced from a photograph of the K line taken at Ken- wood Observatory, shows that the bright reversals of the K line fre- quently occur in regions of the disk where the continuous spectrum is considerably strengthened. These regions are the facule proper. The facule, though apparently but little brighter than the photo- sphere, are conspicuously visible near the sun’s limb, ‘This is prob- ably due to the fact that they reach a higher level, and thus escape much of the general absorption exercised by a comparatively thin stratum of a smoke-like nature which lies in close contact with the photosphere. The facule are, in general, the regions above which the calcium vapor is hottest and most brilliant. But it appeared later that the calcium vapor is not confined to the facule, but extends beyond their boundaries and frequently occurs in regions of the solar disk where they are absent. ‘The generally close coincidence of the calcium clouds with the faculz, and a natural hesi- tation to propose a new name before the results obtained with the spectroheliograph had been sufficiently studied, led me to apply this term to the bright calcium regions photographed with the spectro- heliograph. From my present point of view I think it would have tended to clearness, as M. Deslandres has pointed out, if some other name had been adopted. aAstronomy and Astrophysics, Vol. If (1892), p. 159. RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH. 137 M. Deslandres’s latest explanation of the calcium regions is un- doubtedly more nearly eorrect than my earlier one, though at the time I did not appreciate this. His solar investigations at the Paris Ob- servatory were confined for some years to the photography of the spectrum of various parts of the sun’s disk, but in 1894 he undertook work with the spectrohehograph. ‘The bright reversals of the H and KX lines photographed by M. Deslandres on the sun’s disk were at first considered by him to represent the prominences; later he ascribed them to bright regions at the base of the prominences, and finally he spoke of them as the brighter regions at the base of the chromosphere projected on the disk. This last designation now appears to me to describe the facts much more accurately than the term “ facule ” (meaning calcium vapor of the facule) at first em- ployed by myself. In suggesting the term flocculi (flocculus, dim. of floccus, “a bit of wool”) to distinguish the vaporous clouds phote- graphed on the disk from the underlying facule, I have distinctly avoided the use of a name which might in any sense be taken as indi- cating the nature of the phenomena. A glance at plate mm will show that the word is more or less descriptive of the photographs, so far as their appearance is concerned.“ It is necessary to speak of calcium flocculi, hydrogen floecul, ete., as the photographs show that the forms of the various vapors in the same part of the disk are not identical. Some of the phenomena com- prised under this name are undoubtedly prominences seen in projec- tion, but most of them correspond to much lower levels, near the base of the chromosphere, or within the reversing layer. MINUTE STRUCTURE OF THE FLOCCULI. The extensive literature which embodies the long discussion regard- ing the “ willow leaf” and “ rice grain ” structure of the photosphere has in large part become obsolete since the publication of Langley’s important paper “ On the minute structure of the solar photosphere,” and of Janssen’s excellent photographs, now generally accessible in the first volume of the Annals of the Observatory of Meudon. After speaking of the cloud-like character of the photosphere, Langley goes on to describe the more minute details in the following words: ? Under high powers used in favorable moments, the surface of any one of the fleecy patches is resolved into a congeries of small, intensely bright bodies, irreg- ularly distributed, which seem to be suspended in a comparatively dark mediun, and whose definiteness of size and outline, although not absolute, is yet striking by contrast with the vagueness of the cloud-forms seen before, and which we now perceive to be due to their aggregation. ‘The “ dots” seen before are con- aThe name was suggested by my friend, Dr. L. F. Barker, after seeing the photographs. bAmerican Journal of Science, Vol. VIT (february, 1874). 138 RUMFORD SPEOGTROHELIOGRAPH. siderable openings caused by the absence of the white nodules at certain points, and the consequent exposure of the gray medium which forms the general back- ground. These openings have been called pores; their variety of size makes any measurements nearly valueless, though we may estimate in a very rough way the diameter of the more conspicuous at from 2” to 4”. The bright nodules are themselves not uniformly bright (some being notably more brilliant than their fellows and eyen unequally bright in portions of the same nodule). neither are they uniform in shape. They have just been spoken of as relatively definité in outline, but this outline is commonly found to be irregular on minute study, while it yet affects, as a whole, an elongated or oval contour. Mr. Stone has called them ‘ rice grains,’ a term only descriptive of their appearance with an aperture of 3 to 4 inches, but which I will use provisionally. It depicts their whiteness, their relative individuality, and their approximate form, but not their irregular outline, nor a certain tendency to foliate structure which is character- istic of them, and which has not been sufficiently remarked upon. This irregu- larity and diversity of outline have been already observed by Mr. Huggins. Estimates of the main size of these bodies vary very widely. Probably Mr. Huggins has taken a judicious mean in averaging their longer diameter at 17.5 and their shorter at 1”, while remarking that they are occasionally between and 3’, and sometimes less than 1”, in length. * * %* Tn moments of rarest definition I have resolved these “ rice grains’ into minuter Components, sensibly round, which are seen singly as points of light, and whose aggregation produces the “ rice-grain”’ structure. These minutest bodies, which I will call granules, it will appear subsequently, can hardly equal 0.3 in diameter, and are probably less. * * 3 Tt seems to me that there is no room for doubt that “ filaments ” and “ oranules ” are names for different aspects of the same thing; that filaments in reality are floating vertically all over the sun, their upper extremities appearing at the surface as granules, and that in spots we only see the general structure of the photosphere, as if in section, owing to the filaments being here inclined. * * * Speaking without reference to spectroscopic investigations, it seems to me that we have in the behavior of our filaments a presumption as to the existence of ascending currents in the outer penumbra, and of both ascending and descending currents at the umbral edge; ascending ones being the more usual. or Ft 73 bd ’ An examination of the minute calcium flocculi photographed with the Rumford spectroheliograph will show that they closely resemble the photospheric “ grains” described by Langley and illustrated in Janssen’s photographs. Plate v1 is reproduced from one of our nega- tives on the scale chosen for the majority of the photographs in YVol- ume I of the Meudon Annals. This photograph was made with the slit set at the center of the H line on a day when the seeing was par- ticularly good. In fig. 3, pl. m1, squares 10 seconds of are on a side are shown. These permit of an accurate determination of the size of the individual elements of the structure. Measurements made on our best negatives show that the minute calcium floceuli range in diameter from less than 1 second to several seconds of arc, thus cor- responding closely with the “ grains ” of the photosphere. On the working hypothesis at present employed to interpret the results obtained with the Rumford spectroheliograph, it is considered RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH. 139 that these minute floceuli are columns of calcium vapor, rising above the columns of condensed vapors of which the photospheric * grains ” are the summits. On such an assumpticn it becomes interesting to inquire whether the larger calcium flocculi are made up of similar columns of calcium vapor. Asa rule, the seeing is hardly good enough to permit a deci- sion to be reached on this point. But under the best conditions there appears to be distinct evidence of a filamentary structure, the fila- ments seeming to spread out like the branches of a tree (fig. 2, pl. v). Tt is evident that much light could be thzown on the question if it were possible to photograph sections of the flocculi at different cleva- tions above the photosphere, since in this way the form and size of distinct columns of calcium vapor, if such were present, could be determined at different levels. FORM AND EXTENT OF CALCIUM FLOCCULI AT VARIOUS ELEVATIONS ABOVE THE PHOTOSPHERE. Fortunately, it is possible to accomplish this very result, if the present mode of explaining the photographs may be regarded as sound. We hive already had oecasion to consider some of the charac- teristics of the H and K reversals of the chromosphere. In the solar spectrum itself the appearance of the H and K lines clearly indicates that calcium vapor occurs under widely different conditions of inten- sity at various levels above the photosphere. It is a well-known fact that if a considerable quantity of calcium vapor is introduced into an electric are, broad bands, bright in the center and fading toward both edges, will appear at the position of the TT and K lines (fig. 2, pl. 11).¢. The width of the bands may be taken as an approximate measure of the density of the calcium vapor, which decreases toward the outer part of the arc, where the bands are reduced to narrow lines. The narrow dark lines at the center of the bright bands are caused by the absorption of the comparatively cool and rare calcium vapor in the outer part of the are. A similar condition of things undoubtedly exists in the sun. In the first place, we have broad diffuse dark bands in the solar spectrum at H and K, produced by comparatively dense calcium vapor close to the photosphere. For convenience of reference these bands will be called H, and K,. As the bright reversals at the base of the chromosphere, when photographed at the sun’s limb with a tan- gential slit, or at a total eclipse, are much narrower than these bands, it may be concluded that the dense calcium vapor in the chromo- «Photographed in the electric are with the solar spectrograph of the Snow horizontal telescope. The grating temporarily employed gives strong ghosts, which are conspicuous in the photograph. . 140 RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH. sphere lies beneath the lowest level that can be observed at the limb. On the basis of Kirchhoff’s law, the comparative darkness of these bands in the solar spectrum would be ascribed to the fact that the calcium vapor which they represent is cooler than the photosphere below it. With increasing elevation, in a region of lower pressure, the density of the vapor decreases, and to this decrease of density there corresponds a decrease in the width of the bands. In the lowest portion of the chromosphere that can be observed at the sun’s limb the density of the vapor is so far reduced that the broad and diffuse bands are replaced by fairly well-defined lines (H,, K,), which main- tain their width up to a certain elevation in the chromosphere and then grow narrower, thinning out to much narrower lines (H,, K,) in the upper chromosphere and prominences (fig. 2a, pl. m). On the disk H, and K, appear as fairly narrow dark lines at the center of the broad H, and K, bands. They occur in practically all parts of the disk, but differ greatly in intensity in different regions. Every bright calcium flocculus on the disk is characterized by the presence of bright H, and K, lines at the center of H, and K,, with narrow dark H. and K, lines, due to the absorption of the cooler and rarer vapor in the upper chromosphere superposed upon them. Intensity curves showing these peculiarities of the H and K lines are given by Jewell in the Astrophysical Journal, mr (1896), page 100, where the displacements of the lines are also discussed. They are also illus- trated in the photographs reproduced in plates 1m and 111. From a strict application of Kirchhoff’s law it would appear that the calcium vapor in the lower chromosphere is actually hotter than the calcium vapor which hes above and below it. It seems improb- able that the law can be rigorously applied in this case, and hence it may be necessary to attribute the strong radiation of the intermediate layer to causes other than temperature alone. In view of the composite character of the calcium lines, it should be possible with the spectroheliograph to photograph sections of the calcium floceuli at levels corresponding to their several elements.¢ If, for example, the second slit were set at the extreme edge of K,, the resulting photograph should show only that calcium vapor which is dense enough to produce a line of this breadth, 1. e., a sec- tion across the base of the calcium flocculus, should be obtained. Under no circumstances could the upper and rarer portions of the a Experiments of this kind were not undertaken with the Kenwood spectro- heliograph, since the instrument was not well adapted for work with dark lines. Some of the photographs, however, apparently show low-level (IX,) phenomena, and Mr. Evershed informs me that his plates do likewise. M. Deslandres made photographs with K, and K, in 1894, but T have seen no statements of conclusions derived from a study ef the K, plates, and do not know whether the method has since been employed at Meuden, RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH, 141 flocculus be shown on such a photograph, since the line they produce is not broad enough to enter the second slit. If the slit were set nearer to the center of the line the photograph should represent a section of the flocculus corresponding to a higher level, where a narrower line is produced. It is evident that while none of the higher and rarer calcium vapor could be shown in this photograph, it might nevertheless include regions lying below it, where the calcium vapor is dense enough to produce a broader line. However, since the calcium vapor is rising from a region of high pressure to one of a much lower pressure, it must expand as it rises, and there- fore a section at any level should, in general, be of a larger area than a section of the same flocculus at any lower level. As a con- sequence of the increasing extent of the vapor with the altitude, and the increase of brightness observed when passing from K, to K,, a photograph corresponding to a given level is not necessarily af- fected in any considerable degree by the existence of the denser vapor below, except in cases where the high-level vapor does not he imme- diately above the low-level vapor. Low-level phenomena, even when very bright, may be wholly concealed by general excess of radiation, or in some cases by absorption, of the calcium vapor at high levels. Moreover, it is of course to be understood that the term “level” is not used here in a strict sense. A section of a large floceulus photographed with K, might, for example, correspond to a much greater height above the photosphere than that of the minute floceuli shown on the same photograph. It must never be for- gotten, when examining the photographs, that composite effects are very likely to be present. Such considerations regarding the possibility of photographing sections of the flocculi at different levels are borne out by the photo- graphs, as will be seen by reference to the accompanying illustra- tions. Plates vir and vur represent the spot group of 1903, April 29, as photographed with four different settings of the second slit. These were taken within such time limits and in such an order that, as no distinctly eruptive phenomena were present, the principal dif- ferences between the photographs are therefore to be attributed to differences in the extent and brightness of the vapor at various levels, and not to changes going on in the sun at the time. The assumption that these photographs represent sections of the calcium flocculi at different elevations seems to be the simplest and most satisfactory way of explaining the results obtained. Essen- tially conclusive evidence in favor of this assumption is afforded by the photographs of the recent great sun spot. (Pls. xm to xyrmt.) With the aid of this additional means of research we may return to a consideration of the structure of the flocculi. It has already been remarked that the general surface of the sun appears to be cov- . 142 RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRA PH. ered with columns of bright calcium vapor, varying in diameter from less than a second to several seconds of arc, separated by darker spaces, which correspond in appearance to the darker spaces that separate the photospheric “ grains.” The summits of these columns seem to lie in the second stratum, corresponding to the bright lines H, and K,. In the larger flocculi the surmise of a structure composed of ex- panding columns of calcium vapor seems to be borne out by the pho- tographs. Compare, for example, figures 1 and 2 in plate vi. At the lower level (fig. 1) the flocculus is resolved into a series of well- defined elements, of comparatively small area. At the higher level (fig. 2) the area of the entire flocculus is greatly increased, and there seems to be evidence (hardly visible in the cut) that the columns composing it have arched over, so that they are no longer seen end on. Few photographs are sufficiently well defined to bring out such details, and it can not be said with certainty that the effects seen at the higher level are always due to separation and bending of the col- umns, as well as to expansion of each of the individual columns. In any event, the increase in area at this level is sometimes very great, in many cases sufficient to cover not only the penumbra, but also entire spots. Another illustration of the expansion at increasing altitudes may be seen in the four photographs, corresponding to dif- ferent levels, which are reproduced in plates vir and vir. A much finer illustration is afforded by the photographs in plates xt to xv of the recent great sun spot. HYDROGEN FLOCCULI. The method of photographing the sun with the aid of the dark Fraunhofer lines has already been explained. The spectroheliograph is employed exactly as in the case of the bright calcium lines, but the dispersion is increased sufficiently to insure that the width of the dark lines shall be greater than that of the second slit. Under such circumstances photographs corresponding to the hydrogen lines, or to any other dark lines of sufficient width, may be obtained. The first photograph made with a dark hydrogen line (/7f/) was taken with the Rumford spectroheliograph on May 16, 1903. On developing the plate we were surprised to find a structure differing materially from that obtained with H, and K,. Closer examination and a comparison of the photograph with a K, photograph made on the same day showed that the bright calcium flocculi were replaced on the f/f photograph by dark structures of similar, though by no means identical, form. There could be no doubt about the adjust- ment of the 7 line on the second slit, since a prominence was shown on the photograph extending above the sun’s limb. At a point near a sun spot a brillant object appeared. The same bright object was RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH. 143 found on a high-level KK, photograph, but it did not appear on a K, photograph. This was confirmed by other exposures. The results given by this first photograph have been borne out in subsequent work. It is found-that the hydrogen flocculi are in gen- eral dark, though they are sometimes bright in disturbed regions, usually in the neighborhood of sun spots.“ CONCLUDING REMARKS. In coneluding, we may perhaps be permitted to speak of a few of the numerous investigations which can be undertaken by the student of solar physics. If proper use is to be made of the numerous meth- ods of research which are now available, a large number of investiga- tors will be needed, working, if, possible, on some cooperative plan, at many stations widely separated in longitude. Even the adequate use of the spectroheliograph alone would be beyond the capacity of any single institution, for when suitably designed this instrument will furnish as many photographs of the sun as there are elements present in its atmosphere, and in addition to these many others which repre- sent the peculiarities of certain lines. For example, we have already seen that it will be desirable to ascertain in what degree photographs taken with enhanced lines differ from those taken with other lines of the same element. With a large image of the sun important results might be expected to follow from a study of photographs of sun spots taken with the aid of the widened lines and with bright lines or other lines which are peculiar to the spot. In view of the constant changes which are going on in the sun, a few photographs made in any of these ways will not suffice. What is wanted are series continued through at least one sun-spot period, in order to discover the laws which govern the intensity and the distribution of the various gases and metallic vapors. Furthermore, the great importance of eruptive phenomena, their comparative rarity, and the brief time in which all their phases are exhibited, call for special preparations and methods of work. Spectrohelographs capable of taking several photographs at once through different lines will be essential for any suitable study of eruptive phenomena. If a chain of observatories well distributed in longitude could arrange their work so as to keep the sun almost constantly under observation, many important eruptions which are now lost would be recorded. But it is by no means sufficient merely to take photographs of the sun with the spectroheliograph. In order to extend greatly the range of the attack, and also to explain the spectroheliograph results, «Many additional interesting details and conclusions regarding both caleium and hydrogen flocculi are given in the original paper and should be consulted by the special reader. 144 RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH. simultaneous observations, both visual and photographic, with other instruments are essential. For example, while a photograph is being taken with the spectroheliograph exposures on the spectrum of the region under investigation, for the purpose of showing the widened lines in sun spots as well as the motions in the line of sight of the ‘aleclum vapor in the floceuli, should be provided for. ‘These must be made with an instrument of sufficient dispersion to permit the photographs to be measured with high precision. At the same time large scale photographs of the photosphere and spots, made by direct photographie methods, are needed for comparison with the spectro- heliograph results. Many bolometric studies are also required, as well as numerous other investigations which will suggest themselves to the reader. The essential. point is that a simultaneous attack should be made on solar phenomena with a series of powerful instru- ments, each designed to answer definite questions, and thus to furnish some of the material that will be required for solving solar problems. But such an attack, comprehensive as it might be made, would be greatly hampered if the atmospheric conditions were not favorable. The difference between the effects of good and bad seeing may be seen by comparing the blurred photograph reproduced in fig. 1, plate vir, which was the best that could be obtained at the time, with the (larger scale) photograph reproduced in plate v1, which was made with precisely the same instruments and adjustments at a time when the conditions were unusually good. If such conditions as these latter could be had day after day for long periods of time, with occasional periods of even finer definition, many questions now out of reach could be solved. A report on the instrumental and atmospheric conditions needed in future work on the sun may be found in the forthcoming Year- book (No. 2) of the Carnegie Institution. OcrosrEr, 1903, DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATES. The accompanying illustrations are selected from the quarto plates published in the original work and in some cases are reduced in sIZe. sm 1904——10 145 PLATH I. The Rumford spectroheliograph, attached to the forty-inch Yerkes refractor. The shaft which is driven by the declination motor may be seen at the right. It carries a grooved pulley near its lower end connected with a similar pulley at the end of the camera box by means of a round leather belt. On the same shaft with this second pulley is a spur gear, which engages with the two gears on the projecting ends of the screws that pass through the camera box. The keys used to operate the split nuts that clamp the plate carriage to the screws, the windows for observing the spectrum at the middle and at the ends of the second slit, and the screw-drivers employed to push forward the plate holder after the slide is withdrawn, are on the top of the camera box. At the left end of the box may be seen the door through which the plate holder is inserted, and the narrow slid- ing door in its outer face through which the slide is withdrawn, as well as the micrometer heads of the screws for controlling the width of the second slit and for moving it as a whole. The first slit, at the end of the collimator, is almost hidden from view by the metallic screen required to shield its mounting from the great heat of the solar image. Light reaches the first slit through a long narrow opening in this screen. Mounted on four posts above the screen, at such a height as to lie in the visual focal plane when the first slit is at the focus for the K line, is a narrow metallic plate, on which a line is drawn in the direction of dispersion. During an exposure, the limb of the Sun is made to follow this line. At the end of the electric cable may be seen the switches used for operat- ing the declination motor, and (just below) the rod with which the mirror in the prism box is rotated. 146 PLATE |. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Hale and Ellerman. ae ae ~ THE RUMFORD SPECTROHELIOGRAPH ATTACHED TO THE 40-INCH YERKES REFRACTOR. PLATE II. d Ellerman. , 1904.—Hale an sonian Report Smith (LEG RCA ESOT IM IC SOLAR SONAR NG NO ERLE 1 Fic. 2.—H AND K LINES ON THE DISK, IN THE 1.—CURVATURE OF LINES IN THE SPECTRO- HELIOGRAPH. Fia. CHROMOSPHERE, AND IN A PROMINENCE (8), PLATH If. Fig. 1.—Full-sized reproduction of a photograph of the H and Kx lines in the solar spectrum, made with the curved first slit. The two curved slits regularly employed with the spectroheliograph to eliminate distortion of the solar image have a radius of 522 mm.. equal to that of the curved lines here shown. Fig. 2.—H and K lines on the solar disk and in the chromosphere (radial slit). Fic. 2a.—Shows H, and Kk, (very faintly) in a prominence. 147 PLATH III. Ite, 1.—The K line on the solar disk and in the chromosphere at the limb (radial slit). The bright reversals (KK.) are due to the floceuli. Where facule are present the continuous spectrum is more or less strengthened. Fig. 2.—Reversals of the H and K lines in the electric arc, showing the de- crease in width from the inner (dense) to the outer (rare) calcium vapor. Fic. 3.—Minute calcium flocculi, resembling the granulation of the photo- sphere. The squares are 10” of arc on a side. 148 Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Hale and Ellerman. PLATE III. Fic. 2.—H AND K LINES IN ELECTRIC ARC, SHOWING REVERSALS. FiG. 1.—K LINE ON THE DISK FiG. 3.—MINUTE CALCIUM FLOCCULI (Hz2). AND AT THE LIMB. The squares are 10 inches on a side. PLATE IV. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Hale and Ellerman. CG. Ss Ws LEVEL), AUGUST 12, 1903, 8" 52". THE SUN, SHOWING CALCIUM FLOCCULI (H: PLATE IV. Entire disk of the Sun, as photographed August 12, 1908, 8* 52" C. 8. T. with the H, line. Same size as original negative. The squares of the half-tone screen are too coarse to permit the smallest details to be shown. 149 PLATH VY. Fic. 1.—Low level (H,) section of calcium flocculi, showing how these floc- culi appear to be made up of vertical columns of calcium vapor. Fic. 2.—High level (H.) section of the same flocculi, showing (faintly) how the vapor columns seem to be bent over at the summit, as well as expanded. 150 Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Hale and Ellerman. PLATE V. Fic. 1. 388 40™. Low Hy, level. Slit at 43962. Fig. 2. 34 31™,. Hy level. Slit at A3968.6. Same region as fig. 1, MINUTE STRUCTURE OF THE CALCIUM FLOCCULI, SEPTEMBER 22, 1903. Scale: Sun’s diameter=0.890 meter, *‘TaAol “FT YB YStp suns Jo vouvavoddy [V19Uudy) ‘IG yf “19 9UI N68'N=1JOJOWMIBIP S,UNY :o[Bog “SO61 ‘dd YSdWALdaS ‘11ND0014 WNIOIVD AHL 4O SYNLONYLS 3LANIW “VN SBA! PLATH VI. Minute caleium floceuli, H. level, showing their normal appearance under excellent conditions of seeing. PLATE VII. lic. 1.—For this photograph the second slit was set on the continuous spec- trum at 3924. Consequently no flecculi are shown, though the faculs are faintly visible. The forms of the latter should be compared with those of the flocculi in the other figures. Fic. 2.—Low K, level. Slit set at 3929. This shows the dense calcium vapor not far above the photosphere. Compare with fig. 1 and note that even at this low level the calcium yapor overhangs and sometimes completely covers small spots. 152 i ae Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Hale and Ellerman. PLATE VII. E Fic. 1. 11 32m, Facule. Slit on continuous spectrum at A3924. W Fig. 2. 115 22™, Calcium floceuli, low K, level. Slit at A3929. FACULAZ AND SECTION OF CALCIUM FLOCCULI, APRIL 29, 1903. Seale: Sun’s diameter=0.280 meter. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Hale and Ellerman. PLATE VIII. Fig. 1, 106 28". Calcium flocculi, higher K, level. Slit at A3982. Fig. 2. 11511". Calcium floeculi, Ky level. Slit at A3933.8. SECTIONS OF CALCIUM FLOCCULI AT DIFFERENT LEVELS, APRIL 29, 1903. Seale: Sun’s diameter=0.280 meter. PLATE VIII. Fic. 1.—Higher K, level. Slit at 3932. Though taken before the photographs reproduced in Plate VII, this picture further emphasizes the differences noted at lower levels. The fact that the changes are progressive largely eliminated the time element, which might otherwise be suspected of causing the observed dif- ferences. As a matter of fact, these flocculi are quiescent and slowly changing, differing very decidedly from eruptive phenomena. Fic. 2.—K, level. Slit at 3933.8. Here the calcium vapor is very brilliant and covers a larger area. The photograph contains distinet evidence of dark absorbing masses at higher levels. Perhaps the best instance of this is the dark tongue which runs somewhat north of west from the small spot south preceding the largest one of the group. ‘This tongue seems to form a part of an extensive dark area, which completely surrounds the bright flocculi of the group. 153 PLATE IX. Fic. 1.—As remarked in the text, the contrast is too great in this photograph, and the appearance of the brighter regions is deceptive. In reality the dark regions in general represent the hydrogen flocculi, though there may be a few places near the spot where bright flocculi are present. Fig. 2.—This cut represents more nearly the appearance of the dark hydrogen fiocculi on the negatives. As the slit did not coincide with the 7 line through- out its length, the flocculi are not shown to the west of the spot. A small bright flocculus may be seen at the extreme edge of the figure on the left adjoining the small spot. 154 Smitnsonian Report, 1904.— Hale and Ellerman. PLATE IX. Fic. 1. 95 39m, Hydrogen flocculi. Slit at center of Z/p. Fig. 2. 250™, Hydrogen flocculi. Slit at center of HB. HYDROGEN FLOCCULI, JULY 7, 1903. Seale: Sun’s diameter=0.290 meter. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Hale and Ellerman. PLATE X. Fic. 1. 1140™, Hydrogen floceuli. Slit at center of Hy. Bright eruptive floeculi west of spot. Fig. 2. 357m, Calcium floceuli, Ky level. Slit at A3933.8. HYDROGEN AND CALCIUM FLOccULI, JULY 7, 1903. Seale: Sun’s diameter=0.290 meter. PLATE X. Fic. 1.—The contrast in this photograph is more nearly what it should be, though the background is in general too bright. Some well-defined examples of bright hydrogen flocculi may be seen to the west of the spot, where small spots were developing at the time. Fic. 2.—The contrast here is rather too great, and for this reason the back- ground appears too dark. The general character of the bright calcium flocculi is nevertheless fairly well shown. The bright tongue extending into the small spot on the left is eruptive in character, and corresponds with the bright hydro- gen flocculus referred to in the deseription of fig. 1. 155 PLATE XI. Low-level photograph, showing the dense calcium vapor lying just above the photosphere. In this photograph very little of the penumbra is covered by the calcium vapor, but evidences may be seen, especially in the southern part of the penumbra of the largest spot, of the columns of vapor which are greatly devel- oped at the higher levels, 156 ‘IX 3Lv1d Id} « UT OGG" = IoJouU IDS.UNS :9[BIS “wZh uf “6 10G0JDO “ZOSEY IV ALIS “[OAO| I MOT ‘TPNOVO UNL RO Y3SO1L00 4O LOd§ NNG§ LV3aYD 3H ‘E061 ‘ueuda||3 pur ajey—p06| ‘oday ueiuosyziLUS *19JOUI NCG'D=AOJOUIBIP SUNY :oTROG ‘web qe ‘'G 4dqGOI0Q «"996eY IBIAS “[oAeT SA O[pprum ‘Tpno000g UInTOlRD “S061 ‘YSPOLOO 43O LOdG NNS LV3aYH SHL WX SLV1d N ‘uBWa||q Ppue eJeH—'p06| ‘Hoday ueiuOsYy}WS PLATE XII. In this photograph the calcium vapor is much better shown than in Plate XI, and the beginnings of eruptive phenomena have become more distinctly evident. It is to be understood that although the changes going on in the eruptive phe- nomena of the spot group prevent a perfect comparison of all the details of the successive photographs in this and the subsequent series, the large masses of flocculi change so slowly in form that they may be compared without danger of serious error. In general, the differences between the successive pictures are therefore due to differences in the extent and brightness of the vapor at different levels rather than to changes in form which have taken place between exposures. In order to render possible a satisfactory comparison of the high and low level floceuli surrounding this spot, the matched pair of photographs, reproduced in Plates XV, XVI, is given for examination with the stereoscope. 157 PLATE XIII. This photograph, which represents the high-level calcium vapor, should be compared with figs. 1 and 2, Plate X. It will be seen that at this level the penumbra is almost completely covered, while many of the smaller spots are blotted out. There are also distinct evidences of dark floceuli, due to absorbing yapors at still higher levels. The illustration necessarily fails to indicate the brillianey of the brightest eruptive phenomena, which on the original negatives are easily distinguished from the ordinary flocculi. 158 ‘LOJOUT NGG N=ALOJOUVIP SUNG :o[BOS "wOS uF ‘6 1OGO}OO “9 S96EXYIV ANS “TAoT *H ‘TMoooy wWNDTRD ‘S061 ‘YadOL9D0 JO LOdS NNS LV3aHD 3HL ‘S) “WIX BLWI1d ON *URWIa||Q pue ajey—'pO6| ‘Hodey uriuosyyiwS PLATE XIV. Hale and Ellerman, Smithsonian Report, 1904. THE GREAT SUN SPOT OF OcToBER, 1903 0 meter, 5d iameter=0 Sun’s d October 9, 15 04m, Seale Slit set on Zp. Hydrogen floeculi, PLATE XIV. This photograpb, which shows the hydrogen flocculi surrounding the spot group, Should be compared with fig. 1, Plate X. The brighter regions are in most cases eruptive. In general, the hydrogen fiocculi in the less disturbed regions are dark, though they may perhaps be bright or neutral where they overhang the penumbra, and cover some of the smaller spots of the group. PLATE XY. The photograph reproduced in this plate represents the low level floceuli sur- rounding the spot group, as they appeared on October 10. ‘The changes in the group may be seen by comparing this photograph with Plates XNI-XII. 160 “IOJOUL COG’ N—J9OJOWIVIP SUNS :d9[BIQ ‘wy ‘OL 19G0IDO 'ZOBEY IB UTS “[PeAd]| Ty MOT ‘TPMOOOY uMND[RO ‘S061 ‘Y3d0L900 4O LOdS NNG Lv3Y¥H 3HL “AX ALV1d N ‘uRW9||q PUue ajeHH— p06] ‘Hoday ueluOsYyIWS JOJO COCO =IOOUIEIP 8,1 [LoS ‘me u6 ‘OT 0G0}0 “G'996EV IVINS “[0A0T TH OLPPIUT “TMO00G wANFoTKO ‘€06| ‘YaSOLOO 40 LOdG NNS Lv3¥H 3HL IAX 31LV1d N ‘uBWa||4 pue ajeH—+PO6| ‘HOdey ueRIUOSy}IWS TEA Gyats DIDS De) i fe The photograph reproduced in this plate represents the medium level floeculi surrounding the spot group, as they appeared on October 10.) ‘The changes in the group may be seen by comparing this photogrpih with Plates XITI-NIYV. sm 1904——11 161 PLATE XVII. The difference in tevel between Plate XI and Plate XII is too great to permit of a satisfactory study of the changes in form of the flocculi at different heights above the photosphere. In the present series it is fortunately possible to give in intermediate step, obtained by setting the second slit immediately outside of H.; the level shown therefore lies between that of Plate XV and that of Plate NVIILT. : PLATE XVIII. This photograph is given here in the endeavor to bring out the bright eruptive tongues, hardly to be distinguished from the less brilliant floceuli. The abnormally dark background necessarily results from the deep printing required to show the exceedingly brilliant details. 162 TOPOUL GOG'O=IOJOUIBIP SUNG :9[BOS “mE yOL ‘OL 9qowO “G'296EVIBATIS “[EAd[ UZ YSry ‘t~Moooy wnpRD “E061 ‘YAGOLOO 4O L0dG NNG Lvayuy SHE S “MAX 3LV1d N ‘ueUual|3 pur a\eY—'pO6| ‘Woday uRiuosy}IWS ‘{OJOUI COG’D=IOJOWIVIP S,UN :d[BOS ‘m60 46 ‘OL 19G0}0H + “9'R9SEYIB IIS “[OAo] *H ‘T[Mo00y wun1oypRg "CO6| ‘YASOLOO 4O LOdS NNS LVaYD 3SHL S) “WIAX SLVI1d N uRWUJa||q pue ajeH—'pQ6| ‘Hodey ueiuosu}iwsS CONSTRUCTION OF LARGE TELESCOPE LENSES.¢ By Dr. C. FAULHABER. The three principal instruments for the study of the heavenly bodies are the telescope, the spectroscope, and the photographic camera; and since the two latter are made useful only as they are attached to the former, it is the telescope which we must still regard as the key to unlock the doors of the universe. Readers have all doubtless seen a large telescope, and many have had an opportunity of looking through one, for most observatories reserve certain hours for the public. Accordingly a description of the instrument as a whole may be omitted, and we will merely recall that, notwithstand- ing it is so long and heavy, complicated mechanical and electrical means are provided for pointing and accurately guiding the telescope, so that it follows automatically the motion of any chosen celestial! object. But no less hard than the difficulty of providing these mechanical adjuncts is the optical problem of providing the great double lens called the objective at the upper end of the tube. The objective is the fundamental part of the telescope, on whose excellence the value of the whole instrument depends, and not only its quality but its size also is of the highest importance to make possible the observation of objects otherwise forever invisible. Hence it is that telescopes are designated, not by the maximum magnification which they can produce, nor by their length, but rather by the diameter of their objectives. Thus one speaks of the 40-inch of the Yerkes Observatory, the 26-inch of the Lick Observatory, and the 32-inch Potsdam refractor. In order to study the construction of a great telescope objective, the attention of the reader is now invited to a great optical glass works, of which there are but three principal ones in the world, namely, those of Schott & Genossen, in Jena; Mantois, in Paris; and Chance Bros. & Co., in Birmingham. a Translated, by permission, from Prometheus, Berlin, Vol. XV, Nos. 34-35 1904. 163 164 CONSTRUCTION OF LARGE TELESCOPE LENSES. To begin the process of construction a crucible of fire-proof clay, which already has been warmed gradually for several days, is placed within a melting oven of peculiar construction. This oven is then closed and slowly heated to white heat, while at the same time the materials to compose the glass are admitted to the melting pot through a peehole about as large as a man’s head in the wall of the oven. . The material varies with the kind of glass to be made. Until the beginning of the year 1880 only twe kinds of optical glass were in use, of which one—the so-called crown glass—wascomposed of quartz sand, potash, soda, and calespar, and the other—the so-called flint glass— was composed of quartz sand, potash, and lead oxide. There are now more than 100 vareties of optical glass produced by the intermixture of other materials, such as phosphorus, boric acid, magnesium, zine, barium, antimony, which are distinguished by different properties of dispersion and refraction. The choice of the proper. glass for the two lenses depends on the purpose which the telescope is to serve, and particularly whether it is to be employed for visual or photo- graphic observations. About thirty hours is consumed in the introduction of the ma- tirals. If there be no mishap—for sometimes at the temprature of 1,600° to 1,800° the melting pot cracks or even the stones of the oven burst—the impurities are then skimmed off from the surface, and for about fifteen hours the mixture is stirred by means of a hook- shaped, white-hot clay cylinder. When the ingredients of the glass are melted they have a tendency to separate in layers according to their specific gravities, and thus to destroy the homogeneity required for optical purposes. This dif- ficulty is chiefly overcome by the continuous stirring of the melted mixture. By repeated tests the moment is at length found when the charge assumes the proper color and degree of fluidity. When this moment arrives the farther side of the oven is opened and a two- wheeled truck with long handles is backed up to the opening. Two projecting pieces of the truck reach out under a ring which is made for this purpose on the clay melting pot, and the latter is carefully lifted from the floor of the oven. On account of the overflow of melted glass, which often cements the pot to the bottom of the oven, this is an operation involving a great risk that the fragile white-hot clay melting pot may break, owing to the shaking required to free it from the oven. The melting pot is next moved over to a great circular iron mold, and is then set down upon the fleor, in order to reenforce the pot with an iron band. On opposite sides of the iron band are steel pins fitting on hooks attached to the truck. By means of this arrange- ment the pot is lifted above the mold and its contents poured therein. CONSTRUCTION OF LARGE TELESCOPE LENSES. 165 Contrary to what might perhaps be expected, this process is accom- plished with little noise beyond a shght crackiing and rustling sound. This is the culminating point in the whole process of glass making, and gives rise not only among unaccustomed onlookers, but also among the skilled workers themselves to mingled feelings of great anxiety and exalted admiration. The mold with its fiery contents is then covered with an iron plate and pushed over to the cooling oven, which has in the mean- while been carefully heated and opened ready to receive the charge. Here the mold is lifted by a tackle and thrust into the cooling oven, where, after the walls have been sealed up as tightly as possible, it remains from four to six weeks undisturbed. Very gradual lowering of the temperature is required, else the cooled mass might burst with the slightest touch, or at least show prejudicial strains in the interior. When at length the oven is opened the mold is found to contain a solid, feebly lustrous, milk-white plate, which is easily removed from its iron bed. There now begins a week-long process of grinding and polishing of the glass plate preparatory to a preliminary examination as to its freedom from strie, bubbles, and conditions of interior strain. Ex- perience shows that in general only a part of such a plate is of optical value. This part is cut out by means of a glass saw and again heated till soft in a crucible, which corresponds approximately with the final form of the objective. After this comes a second gradual cooling during a period of several weeks and another rough polish- ing and testing of the quality of the resulting plate of glass. In favorable cases the product is now ready for removal to the optical shop, but commonly there are ten or more unfavorable trials before securing a successful result in the manufacture of a disk of glass for a lens of 1 meter diameter. Since, as we know, there are two such disks of equal size required for a telescope objective, weeks and months of further work are required for the production of the second. The process is in all respects the same, except that somewhat different materials are employed for the mixture, corresponding to the differ- ences 1n optical properties desired. In outward appearance crown and flint lenses do not differ much, but one is somewhat heavier than the other. The description just given relates to the most modern methods of glass making as they would now be pursued at Jena in the manufac- ture of glass disks for a telescope of 1.25 meters aperture. In the older processes it was customary to melt a charge about three times as large as required, and after this had reached the proper color and consistency, to allow the melting oven to cool slowly and thus to take the place of the special cooling oven. On opening the oven the glass block would be found broken in several pieces, and if there was 166 CONSTRUCTION OF LARGE TELESCOPE LENSES. none among these which would answer the purpose the process would then be repeated. When a rough block of suitable size and quality was obtained it was put in a crucible of about the proper lens form. The whole was then again melted and cooled and then polished for testing. As an example of the cost in time spent in this procedure, it will be reealled that the Paris glass works required four years for the production of the two lenses of the 36-inch Lick objective. The melting was done twenty times, and each time a month was spent in the cooling. On the other hand, the Jena glass works employing the improved processes, prepared both disks of the slightly smaller Pots- dam 80-centimeter objective in a few months. It may be of interest to rehearse briefly the story of the rapid devel- opment of the industry of optical glass making in Germany, prin- cipally during the last ten years. The pioneer in the production of glass for astronomical purposes, according to purely scientific methods, was the renowned Joseph von Fraunhofer, of Munich (1787-1826). But it is only twenty years since Professor Abbe and the glass manufacturer, Doctor Schott, of Jena, took up the work where Fraunhofer laid it down, and sueceeded in replacing the old flint and crown glasses by new varieties of glass, by means of which the chromatic differences of spherical aberration are nearly eliminated. The production of the new glasses on a commercial scale began in the autumn of 1884. In order to support the very costly preliminary experiments, the Prus- sian Government made considerable grants of money in consideration of the national value of the work. This governmental support was required but two years, for the undertaking progressed favorably and the productions found recognition almost immediately in the whole optical world, so that soon not only German, but foreign optical establishments, placed most of their orders for material in Jena. Not only are the common crown and flint glasses made here, but also a great number of improved crown and flint glasses, con- taining boric and phosphoric acids, to diminish the secondary spec- trum on the one hand, and on the other containing metallic oxides, by means of which the dispersion and refraction may be increased or diminished. An extensive exhibition of these products was witnessed by the visitors who attended the Berlin Gewerbe-Ausstellung in 1896. There were shown disks for the construction of telescopic objectives of 110 and 125 centimeters diameter, and these were the largest pieces of optical glass which had then been made. Not only is optical glass produced for all kinds of instruments of precision, but also there is made at Jena glass tubing for physical, chemical, manufacturing, and medicinal purposes, and all sorts of chemical glassware, such as flasks, beakers, and retorts, besides cylinders for gas and petroleum CONSTRUCTION OF LARGE TELESCOPE LENSKES. 167 lighting. There are now employed in this industry about 650 per- sons, and the value of the yearly output reaches 3,000,000 marks. We are now prepared to trace to the further stages in the prepara- tion of a great objective, and the attention of the reader is invited to the optical workshop. Here the glass disks are first ground and polished on both sides preparatory to a thorough testing. Tor this purpose there is a machine with a vertical spindle carrying an iron plate. Upon this plate the glass disks are in their turn cemented with pitch, and above is a second iron plate, the grinder, provided with a spindle in the center. By means of this spindle the grinding plate is shoved hither and thither over the glass disk by machinery. The grinding material is emery powder and water. After the rough grinding is done the rough polishing on the same machine follows similarly, excepting that the grinding tool is replaced by a cloth- covered polishing tool, covered with rouge instead of emery. After this preliminary work, a careful investigation of the disks is made in the laboratory by the aid of the microscope and polarization apparatus. If the objective is good it must appear bright in the polariscope, with the exception of being marked by a regular dark cross. If an irregular cross is seen or, in certain conditions, brightly colored figures of various shapes, the disk must be returned to the glassworks to be remelted and cooled. In case of a satisfactory outcome of these tests small pieces are cut off and prisms are prepared from them, whose refractive indices are determined by means of the spectrometer. Upon these measurements are based the accurate computation of the objective—that is to say, the determination of the four radu of curvature and the thickness— a tedious piece of work which requires repeated independent checking. After this begins the real preparation ot the objective lenses, one of which is to be ground concave, the other convex, on the same ma- chine which was used in the rough grinding. This present procedure is similar to that already described, except that grinding tools oppo- site in curvature to the lenses and made of iron, brass, or glass are fed with finer and finer emery powder as the work approaches its finish. Since everything depends on the proper guiding of the grinding tool to obtain the regular spherical surfaces, the operating of the machine demands great experience and care, and the work requires frequent testing by the application of the spherometer. When finally the right curvature is reached, after many days of work, repeated and accurate testing of the lens is made by the Toppler “ Schheren- methode ” for small errors, nonhomogeneity, and other faults. The fine-ground lens is now put upon a lathe and centered by means of a fine adjusting crane. This centering consists of shifting the 168 CONSTRUCTION OF LARGE TELESCOPE LENSES. lens about upon the spindle of the lathe until exact coincidence is reached between the optic axis (common axis of curvature of the two surfaces) and the mechanical axis of the spindle. Recognition of this condition depends on observing the reflections from the’ two glass surfaces, and accurate centering is reached when these reflec- tions do not move with the rotation of the spindle. When the right adjustment is made the edge of the disk is turned off true by means of a grinding band fed with emery and water, and by this means the lens is reduced to the proper diameter. After the centering follows the fine polishing on a special polishing machine. The process is much the same as that of rough polishing, excepting that instead of a cloth-covered tool there is provided for each face a series of great pitch-covered plates. Frequent trials of the surfaces are made by means of so-called “ test glasses.” These are small glass plates ground and polished accurately to fit the desired curve; that is to say, convex for a concave surface, and vice versa. Their employment in testing depends on the following principle: If two closely fitting polished surfaces are laid one upon the other there is retained between them a thin film of air which exhibits the so-called ‘“* Newton’s colors,” seen in soap bubbles and similar thin transparent. structures. The color is the same over the whole surface only when the thickness of the inclosed film is everywhere uniform, which only occurs when the Jens has the same curvature as the test glass. At the beginning of the polishing the Newton’s colors appear as rings of more or less width. By the proper use of polishing tools of different sizes, and by suitable regulation of the stroke and velocity of the machine, the condition is finally reached when a uniform color supersedes the rings, no matter where the test glass is laid upon the lens. By stich methods of measurement in terms of the wave length of light, deviations of thickness of only one ten-thousandth millimeter (one two-hundred-and-fifty-thousandth inch) can be accurately de- tected, a magnitude scarcely appreciable to the lay mind. It is obvious that the fine polishing in such conditions is an exceptionally difficult task, the more so that care must always be exercised to avoid all blemishes on the surfaces, such as scratches and the lke, and only the most competent and experienced workers can succeed with it. A conception of the difficulties to be overcome may be found when it is said that the fine polishing of a single lens surface takes several months. When both lenses have passed through the processes of fine grind- ing and polishing they are inserted in brass or iron mountings which have meanwhile been prepared for them and in which they le sepa- ‘ated by a small free space. Cementing together with Canada balsam or turpentine, as generally practiced with small lenses, and formerly with large ones also, has more recently been discontinued on account CONSTRUCTION OF LARGE TELESCOPE LENSES. 169 of the difficulty of separating large cemented lenses for subsequent cleaning. . After the lenses have been placed in their cell there remains only the final testing in the telescope tube itself. I shall not describe the complicated centering apparatus employed in this test. The errors of an objective and their causes are numerous, and their discovery and correction demand great experience and skill. In conclusion, we may inquire where the telescopes of largest objec- tives are located, and by whom they were made. In the first place, there is the objective made for the Paris Exposition of 1900, but not among the telescopes in present use. It is 1.24 meters in diameter, and the glass alone weighs 580 kilograms, of which the convex lens weighs 360 and the concave lens 220 kilograms. The cost of the two lenses was 75,000 francs. These disks were poured by Mantois and ground by Martins, both of Paris. Up to the present time the objeec- {ive has not been usefully employed. The second and third places, as regards size alone, are taken by the objectives of the Yerkes Observatory, near Chicago (1897), and that of the Lick Observatory, at Mount Hamilton, Cal., with diameters, respectively, of 105 and 91 centimeters. Both were poured at the Paris glass works and fig- ured by Alvan Clark in Cambridgeport, Mass. They are both satisfactory, though not prepared entirely on the basis of computation, but rather by repeated trials, and brought to their completion by the so-called method of local correction. After them in size comes the great refractor of the Potsdam Observatory, prepared solely for celestial photography and having a diameter of 80 centimeters. This objective was poured in Jena and figured at the optical works of C. A. Stemheil S6hne, in Munich, in 1899. ¥¢ is recognized to be of the highest order of merit and is a strong testi- mony to the ability of German manufacturers in this line. The Pots- dam refractor has, in addition to the 80-centimeter photographic lens, a second visual lens of 50 centimeters diameter, and being thus a double refractor is perhaps the largest astronomical instrument in use in the world. Both of the great American telescopes are devised solely for visual purposes, and can only be used for photography by the aid of auxiliary lenses which cut off some of the light. Among other large objectives may be enumerated the Pulkova refractor, at St. Petersburg, by Clark, diameter 76 centimeters; objec- tive of the Observatory of Nice, of equal diameter, by Henry Brothers, of Paris; the objective of the Vienna Observatory, of 71 centimeters aperture, by Martins, and the Treptower objective, of 70 centimeters «The Yerkes telescope is used as a photographic instrument by interposing in front of the plate a color screen for removing the violet rays and exposing plates sensitive for the yellow rays. 170 CONSTRUCTION OF LARGE TELESCOPE LENSES. aperture, poured at Jena, ground in Munich (1896), and costing 55,000 marks. The objective of the Dorpat refractor, with 25 centimeters aperture, which, as it came from the master hand of Fraunhofer, was regarded as a wonder of the world, can scarcely be counted among the large telescopes to-day, for already more than 100 exceed its dimensions. « would lead too far to mention them all, but 1t is not out of place to remark that there is work of great value also for the smaller lenses. Interesting studies of the features of the planets have been made even in recent times with smaller instruments. Thus Schiapa- relli, the famous discoverer of the so-called Martian canals, made his earlier valuable observations with an 8-inch telescope, which would now be classed as a minor instrument. In planetary observation the advantages of fine optical definition, together with good atmospheric conditions, combined with practiced eyes, are of more consequence than high power or great light-gathering capacity. The advantages of the largest instruments lie in the possibilities they afford of observing the fainter fixed stars and nebule which he at immeasurable distances. SOME REFLECTIONS SUGGESTED BY THE APPLICA- TION OF PHOTOGRAPHY TO ASTRONOMICAL R#E- SEARCH.+ By Hoe BURNER Y DS Sel) Hea. It is a familiar fact that there are epochs in the history of a science when it acquires new vigor; when new branches are put forth and old branches bud afresh or blossom more plenteously. The vivi- fying cause is generally to be found either in the majestic form of the discovery of a new law of nature or in the humbler guise of the invention of a new instrument of research. The history of astron- omy has been rich in such epochs, notable among them being that when Newton announced to the world the great law of gravitation, and that when Galileo first turned his telescope to the skies. We have within the last half century been fortunate enough to include another great epoch in astronomical history, characterized by the birth, almost a twin birth, of two new scientific weapons—the spectroscope and the sensitive film. It is, of course, somewhat diffi- cult and scarcely necessary to assign an exact date for the origin of either of these. The spectroscope was perhaps first systematically used on the heavenly bodies by Huggins, Rutherfurd, and Secchi in the fifties, but we may trace it back to the early work of Fraunhofer, who described the spectrum of Sirius in 1817, or further back to the experiments of Newton with a prism; and the dry plate, which in particular has conferred such benefits on our science, had of course its precursors in the collodion plate or the daguerreotype. But the greater part of the influence on astronomy of both the spectroscope and the photographic method dates from the time when the dry plate was first used successfully, not much more than a quarter of a cen- tury ago; and in that quarter of a century there have been compressed new advances in our knowledge which perhaps will compare favor- a Address delivered by H. H. Turner, D. Sc., F. R. S., Savilian professor of astronomy in the University of Oxford, in the section of astrophysics at the Congress of Arts and Sciences at St. Louis, or Wednesday, September 21, 1904. Reprinted from the Obesray tory, London, November-December, 1904. : 171 12 PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. ably with the work of any similar period in centuries either past or to come. It is difficult to estimate at their true value historical events in which we play a part, and any review of such a period undertaken now must be necessarily imperfect, for we are advancing so rapidly that our point of wiew is continually changing. But it is an encour- aging thought that obvious difficulties may enhance interest in the attempt and suggest kindly excuses for its shortcomings. From the embarrassingly large number of possible topies which the period provides I have selected that of astronomical photography, and I invite your attention to some characteristic features of the photographic method in astronomy, and some reflections thereupon. It is scarcely possible to avoid repeating much that has been said already, but I hope it will be clear that no claim to originality is advanced. In what follows I wish to claim nothing as mine save its imperfections. The advantages of the photographic method, which attracted atten- tion from the first, may be grouped under three heads—its power, its facility, and its accuracy. The lines of demarcation are ill defined, but the classification will help us a little, and I proceed to consider the groups in this order. The immense power of the photographic method as compared with the eve arises from the two facts that (@) by the accumulation of Jong exposures fainter and fainter objects can be detected, and that (>) large regions of the heavens can be recorded at the same exposure. No property of the photographic plate has excited more marvel than the former—that it can detect. objects too faint to be seen even by our largest telescopes; objects of whose very existence we were In ignorance and should have remained in ignorance. Early successes have been followed up by others more striking as years have rolled on, as better instruments have been devised, and the patience of the watchers has proved equal to greater strain. It is here that the change from the “ wet ” plate to the “ dry ” has proved most advantageous. The possibilities with the former were limited to the period during which it would remain wet; with the latter, exposures may be continued for hours, days, even years—not, of course, continuously in the case of astronomical photography, for the camera must be closed when daylight approaches; but it can be opened again at nightfall and the exposure resumed without fault. In this way objects of extraordinary faintness have been revealed to us. When Nova Persei had flashed into brilhance in 1901, and then slowly faded, long-exposure photographs of its region revealed to us a faint nebulous structure which we could never have seen; they told us that this structure was changing in appear- ance in a manner which it taxed our ingenuity to explain, and about which speculation is still rife. But a greater triumph was to come; oe PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. ies even the spectrum of this faint object has been photographed. When we consider that in the spectrum each point of light in the object is enormously diluted by being spread out into a line, the difficulty of this undertaking seemed almost prohibitive; but it was not sufficient to prevent Mr. Perrine, of the Lick Observatory, from making the attempt, and he was deservedly rewarded by success. IT may be wrong in regarding this success as the high-water mark in this diree- tion at the present time, and it will probably be surpassed by some new achievement very shortly; but it will serve to illustrate the power of photography in dealing with faint objects. But may we here pause for one moment to marvel at the sensi- tiveness of the human eye, which is such that it is, after all, not left very far behind in the race? The eye, sensitive as it is merely to transient impressions, is no match ultimately for the plate, which ean act by accumulation. But with similar instruments the plate must be exposed for minutes or even hours to seize the impression of a faint object which the eye can detect at a glance. There seems to be no reason in the nature of things why the eye should not have been surpassed in a few seconds; and in the future the sensitiveness of plates may be increased so that this will actually be the case, even as in the past there was a time when the sensitiveness was so small that the longest exposure could not compete with the eye. But this time is not yet come, and at the present moment the eye is still in some departments superior to its rival, owing to this very fact, that though it can only see by glances, it can use these glances to good effect. In the study of the planets the more clumsy method of the photographic plate (which, by requiring time for the formation of the image, confuses good moments with bad) renders it almost use- less as compared with the eye; and again, we have not as yet used photography for daylight observations of stars. But there is another direction in which the photographic plate is immensely superior to the eye in power; it cain record so much more Professor Barnard. He throws on the screen a picture of a large nebula which the photographic plate has no difficulty in portraying all at once; but the picture is, in the first instance, covered up by a screen, except for a small aperture only, and this aperture, he tells his audience, represents all that can be seen by the eye at one time, using the giant telescope of the Yerkes Observa- tory sy moving the screen about, different portions of the picture may be viewed successively, as also by moving the telescope about in looking at the sky itself. But what a revelation follows when the screen is removed and the full glory of the nebula is exhibited at a single glance! We can well understand that the true character of these objects was hopelessly misinterpreted by the eye using the imperfect method of piecemeal observation, which alone was formerly possible. 174 PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. and others, this property of the plate has been used to record the presence in the sky of vast regions of nebulosity such as, we may safely say, the eye would never have satisfactorily portrayed, not altogether because of their faintness (for in one of his papers Pro- fessor Barnard tells us that he was actually led to photograph such a region because he had become vaguely conscious of it by eye obser- vation), but because of their diffusion. It 1s noteworthy that these beautiful photographs were taken with comparatively humble in- struments, and we may be as yet only on the threshold of revelations still to be made in this direction. Secondly, the photographie method represents a great advance in facility of manipulation. A familiar example may be taken from the domain of planetary discovery. In old time to recognize a new object among numerous fixed stars it was necessary either labori- ously to map out the whole region, or to learn it by heart, so that it was practically mapped in the brain. Now all this labor is avoided ; two photographs of the same region, taken without any strain on the memory or the measuring ability of the observer, can at a glance, by a simple comparison, give the information that a strange object 1s or is not present—information formerly obtained at so much cost. Sometimes, indeed, the cost was so great that the information was not obtained at all. For fifteen years Hencke searched without suc- cess for a planet, and for nearly forty years after the discovery of the first four small planets, in 1807, no further discoveries were made, though hundreds were constantly crossing the sky, and a dozen new planets are now found every year with little trouble. But though this instance of increase in facility is striking, it is far from being the only one or even the most important. Wherever we require a record of any kind, whether it be of the configuration of stars, or of solar spots, or of the surface of the moon, or of a spec- trum, the labor of obtaining it has been enormously reduced by the photographic method. Think for a moment of what this means in the last instance only—think of the labor involved in mapping one single spectrum by eye observation; of the difficulty of settling by such a method any doubtful question of the identity of certain lines in the spectrum of a star. A few years ago Doctor McClean an- nounced that he had found oxygen in the star # Crucis. Up to that time this element, so familiar to us on this earth, had appeared to belong to us alone in the universe, for in no spectrum had its lines been detected. The proof of its existence in # Crucis depended on the identity of a number of lines in the spectrum with some of those of oxygen; and the measures were sufficiently difficult on a photo- eraph, so that for more than a year the scientific world refused to pronounce a verdict. How long would the case have dragged on if ( only visual measures had been possible? We may fairly doubt PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. 175 whether a definite conclusion would ever have been reached at all. By the sheer facility,of the new method of work we have advanced by leaps and bounds.where we could only crawl before. Thirdly, there has been a great gain in accuracy from the intro- duction of photography; and it is this quality which is above all of value in the science of astronomy.” The wonderful exactness of the photographic record may perhaps best be characterized by saying that it has revealed the deficiencies of all our other astronomical apparatus—object glasses and prisms, clocks, even the observer him- self. It has almost been forgotten that in the early days the accuracy of a photograph was doubted. Even now it can scarcely be said that we know definitely the stage of refinement at which we must begin to expect irregular displacements of the images from distor- tion of the photographic film; but we have learned that they do not occur in a gross degree, and that other apparatus must be im- proved before we need turn our attention seriously to errors aris- ing from such a cause. Consider, for instance, what photography has told us about our optical apparatus, which we regard as having reached a high state of perfection. We are accustomed to think of properly made optical apparatus as being sufficiently similar in all its parts; it 1s tacitly assumed in the principle of the heliometer, for example, that one half of the object glass is sufficiently similar to the other. But a stock adjustment recently adopted in photograph- ing a spectrum for accurate measurement exhibits clearly the errors of this assumption. Photographs are taken of the spectrum through the two halves of the objective; and if they were properly similar the lines in the two halves of the spectrum should fit exactly. A mere glance 1s usually sufficient to show discordances. It is true that one of the photographs is taken through the thick half of the prism and the other through the thin, so that errors of the prism are in- cluded; but these, again, are optical errors. They are, however, not the only sources of error which at present mask photographic imperfections. Glass plates are not flat, and this want of flatness introduces sensible errors. Even with the great improvements in our driving clocks which were called for immediately photographs were to be taken—with electrical control and careful watching on ‘driving error ” 6 the part of the observer—there is apt to creep ina which gives bright stars a spurious displacement relatively too faint. We must get flatter plates, better driving clocks, and watch more 4@Two things may be measured on a photographic plate—the position of an object, or the density of the image; the former being an indication of its posi- tion in the heavens, and the latter of its brightness. With the latter topic I do not propose to deal, for the reason that it is in the hands of a much abler and more experienced exponent; but the former alone will provide enough food for reflection, 176 PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. carefully before we can certainly accuse our photographs of a failure in accuracy. Nevertheless, there are indications that we may be near the limit of accuracy even now. Examination of the réseau lines on various plates appears to show small displacements for which no cause has yet been assigned; and the end of our tether may not be far away. But as yet we have not been pulled up short, and there is hope that the warning may be, as on one or two previous occasions, a false alarm. Such being the accuracy of the photographic method, it is sur- prising that it should not as yet have been more fully adopted in that field of work where accuracy is of the greatest importance— namely, in what is called fundamental work, with the transit circle or other meridian instruments. The adoption of new methods is always a slow process, and there are at least two classes of diff- culties which hinder it. The first class has it origin in the in- stinctive conservatism of human nature, wherein men of science differ little from their fellows. The second has to do with available vapital; and in this respect we are distinctly at a disadvantage compared with other men; for when a new instrument of general utility is invented at once a large amount of capital is invested in working out the details and improving them to the utmost, whereas for a scientific instrument no such funds are available. Think, for instance, of the money spent in perfecting the bicycle, and the time occupied in developing it from the earliest forms to those with which we are now familiar—from the “* bone shaker” of the sixties through the high bicycle which we saw twenty years ago to the modern machine. Think, too, how totally unexpected have been some of the incidents in the history of this machine, such as the introduction of pneumatic tires. In the case of such an instru- ment, now universally adopted, if rapid development could have been secured by expenditure of money and brains, surely enough of both commodities were forthcoming to attain that end; and yet simplicity and finality have probably not yet been attained in a period of thirty years. When we compare the small amount of money and especially the small number of persons that can be de- voted to the perfection of a new scientific method, such as the use of photography in astronomy, it will excite little surprise that progress during the same period of thirty years has been slower. In com- merce old machines can be thrown on the scrap heap when improve- , ments suggest themselves; but who can afford to throw away an old transit circle? The very fact that it has been in use for many years renders its continued use in each succeeding year the more important from considerations of continuity. It is doubtless for such reasons as these that little has yet been done in the way of utilizing photography for meridian observation, PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. Ieper Although one or two meritorious beginnings have been made, which have sufliced to show that there are no insuperable difficulties in the way, up to the present moment no meridian instrument of repute is in regular work using the photographic method. And this fact can not, after all, be completely explained by the reasons above men- tioned. Opportunities for setting up costly new instruments do not occur frequently in astronomy, but they do occur. In the last decade, for instance, large transit circles have been sét up both at Greenwich and the Cape of Good Hope; but in neither instance bas any attempt been made to adopt the photographic method. The Washington Observatory was reconstructed well within the period since the great advantages of photography have been recognized, and yet not even in the United States, the land of enterprise, was a start then made in a direction in which it is certain that we must some day travel. That day has probably been deferred by the stimulation of competing methods which a new one brings with it. When electric hght was iirst introduced into England the gas companies, stimulated by the stress of competition, adopted a new and improved form of light (the incandescent gas) which put them at a much less serious disadvantage compared with their new rival. So when photography began to show what new accuracy was attainable in measurement of star positions, it would almost seem as if the devotees of the older visual methods were compelled to improve their apparatus in order not to be left wholly behind in the race. The registering micrometer” was «We have been accustomed hitherto to determine the position of a star by observing the instant when it crossed a fixed wire; but it has long been knewn that two different observers record systematically different instants—they have a personal equation. Recently we have learned that this personal equation varies with the brightness of the star observed, and with other circumstances, and to make the proper corrections for it has severely taxed our ingenuity and involved much work. Before the invention of photography we might well bear this with patience, since it seemed to be inevitable; but the photographic plate which is free from human errors, offers a way of escape from all troubles, at the expense, no doubt, of some little experimenting, but with every prospect of speedy success. Eye observation, which had borne this burden so long, must get rid of it if it was to march alongside the untramimeled photographic method; and the surprising thing is that it has actually done so. The.adopted device is extremely simple: Replace the fixed wire which the star crosses by a wire which moves with the star and registers its cwn movements. The register- ing is done automatically, but the motion of the wire is controlled by the observer, and there is still room for a new form of personal equation in this human control. But none manifests itself, probably for the reason that we no longer have two senses concerned, but only one. In recording the instant when a star crosses a wire we employ either the eye and the ear, or the eye and the sense of touch, and personal equation arises from the different coordination of the two senses in different people. But in making the wire follow the star the eye alone is concerned, and there is no longer any room for difference in “ latent period ” or other coordination of two senses. sm 190+——12 1738 PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. produced by. Messrs. Repsold, with the astonishing result that the troubles from personal equation, which have so long been a difficulty in all fundamental work, have practically disappeared. This beautiful invention has placed the eye once more in a position actually superior to the photographic plate, for with the eye we can observe stars in daylight, and so secure information of great impor- tance, whereas no photographic method of doing this has as yet been devised. And there is also the fact that .for faint stars a long exposure would be required for what the eye can accomplish in a few seconds. Thus in one or two astronomic channels the effects of the rising tide of photography have scarcely yet been felt; but into all the others it has swept with ever-growing force. Looking back over the thirty vears of advance, we may be well satisfied. With more funds, and especially with more men, no doubt more could have been done; let us even admit that we might have done better with the same funds and the same limited staff. But on the whole we have been fortunate. At a critical time, when we might have felt the want of larger endow- ments acutely, the need was almost anticipated by a stream of bene- faction. If this stream had its chief source in the United States, its beneficial effeets have poured over the whole world, and induced cur- rents have begun to flow elsewhere. We may reflect with thankful- ness how much harder our advance might have been but for the noble gifts to the Harvard, the Lick, and the Yerkes observatories, and sarnestly hope that the cheerful expectations of a great American astronomer, that these are but the foreshadowing of much larger gifts to science, may be adequately realized. May I now turn to one or two of the problems with which this new development of our work has brought us face to face? They are numerous and serious, and it is impossible to consider many of them, perhaps even the most important of them. One of the most pressing is the problem of rendering generally accessible the vast accumula- tions of material for study that have been suddenly thrust upon our attention. How are our photographs to be stored, preserved, and published? Even now troubles have gathered, and time will only multiply them. It is many years since Professor Pickering drew attention to the difficuities in storing the photographic plates taken at the Harvard Observatory. When many thousands of photographs have been accumulated, not only the space they occupy, but the actual weight of glass isan embarrassment. And there seems to be no doubt concerning the duty of accumulation. May I confess an early and mistaken view which I formulated on this matter? I reasoned thus: The proper moment for making use of a photograph taken last night is to-day. It is useless to defer the examination until to-morrow, for there will then be new photographs claiming attention. Hence it is PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. 179 unscientific to take more photographs than can be dealt with imme- diately. This seemed to be a plausible argument and to show a way out of the difficulty, for if a photograph had once been adequately examined it need not be stored so carefully, and there would not in any case be many to store. But Professor Pickering has demon- strated many times over that the view is untenable. By taking photo- graphs almost recklessly and without any hope of dealing with even a fraction of them, he has created the possibility of tracing the his- tory of celestial events backward. When new objects are discovered he can go to his shelves and tell us how long they were visible previous to discovery; and this information is so valuable that we must cer- tainly arrange our future plans with reference to it. It is quite cer- tain that we must be prepared to deal with enormous accumulations of plates, to store them in proper order, and to catalogue them; and if it has already been found difficult to do this for the collection of a single observatory during twenty years, what can we look for in the centuries to come 4 Possibly the second difficulty, that of preservation, may be an anti- dote to the first. It is by no means certain that our photographs will last long, and if not there will be a natural limit to the time during which they need be kept. Sir William Crookes has, however, veminded us that by toning them, by substituting sturdy gold for the perishable silver, we may prolong their life indefinitely, though this will, of course, sensibly increase the cost of each plate. As yet I have not heard of any toning process being systematically adopted. Our course is, however, comparatively clear in this direction. It would seem imperative that a selection of the earliest photographs, at any ‘ate, should be carefully toned, so that they may be available for comparison in years as far distant as possible. Although this is a matter of detail, it seems to me to compare in Importance with almost any practical question which may claim the attention of astronomers, and if some decision of the kind were the only outcome of this gath- ering I think we might be well content with the result. The question of publication 1s chiefly one of funds, and is only worthy of special remark because these particular funds are so often forgotten in planning enterprises. I need not labor the point, for the experience of any astronomer will supply him with plenty of mstances. The difficulties of publication have much in common with those of storage. They will increase year by vear, and even when the money for printing has been found the storage of publications re- ceived from other observatories will itself become an embarrassment. There is, however, one way in which some of the stress may be relieved, namely, by efficient cataloguing. If we have before us a list of all the photographs existing in the world, and know that we can send for a copy of any one of them which may be required, it is no . 180 PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. longer necessary to have copies of all. This applies, of course, to other publications as well, and though we may take some time to grow out of the sentimental desire for a complete library, and though the existence of a few such complete institutions may always be desirable, I venture to think that many observatories will ultimately be driven to the plan of acquiring only what is certainly and imme- diately useful, depending on temporary loans from central institu- tions for other material. But there is a class of problems differing totally in character from these practical questions of storage and preservation of plates. A period of suddenly increased activity such as we have been passing through in astronomy is not without important effects on astronomers themselves. The human element in our scientific work is sometimes overlooked and generally accorded only a subordinate importance ; but, coming as I do from an old university devoted to the humanities, I may be perhaps forgiven for calling attention to a few human con- siderations. In the first piace, I have felt some anxiety lately for that very important body of astronomers who are sometimes called “amateurs,” though the name is open to criticism—those whose opportunities for work are restricted to a more or less limited leisure. it is a body which is somewhat sensitive to the feeling that astronom- ical work has gone beyond them; that in the presence of large instru- ments and of the special knowledge acquired by those using them their own efforts and their own humbler instruments are no longer of any value. If I am right in supposing that this feeling has been ‘alled into existence lately by the rapid advances made in photog- raphy, it is certainly not for the first time. At previous epochs this ‘liffidence has found expression, and has, I am glad to say, been met by careful contradiction; but it is necessary to repeat the expostula- tion agai and again, for the anxiety 1s apt to crop up with every new development of astronomical activity. The earlier days of photography were better ones than usual for the amateur; indeed, the introduction of the photographic method is largely due to the work of such men as Rutherfurd and Draper in America, De la Rue and Common in England. But now that we have passed beyond the stage when each new plate taken was a revelation ; now that we are tolerably familar with, at any rate, the main types of possible photographs which can be taken with modest apparatus; more especially now that we have begun to discuss in elaborate detail the measurement of star positions or of stellar spectra, the old shyness is beginning to crop up again. But it is of the utmost importance that this shyness should be zealously overcome. Perhaps, after all, it is not suflicient to assert that there is still good work for amateurs to do, nor even to mention a few instances of such work urgently re- quired; perhaps it should be made easier for them to follow what is PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. 181 being done. Especially do we want more and better books, written by the best men on each’subject.. The original memoir, though it may be the proper form of publication for the workers themselves, does not satisfy all requirements. There is much to be done in the way of extension and collation before the work can be presented in a form attractive to those who would gladly keep in touch with it if the process could be made a little easier. Huxley was constantly urging scientific men that it was not sufficient to attain results; they must also express them in an intelhgible and attractive form. Of course it is not easy for the same man to do both. There are few who could have determined, like Schiaparelli, that the period of rotation of the planet Mercury was eighty-eight days instead of one, but there are fewer still who, after making the discovery, could have given the beautiful lecture which he gave before the King of Italy, developing fully in attractive detail the consequences of the discovery; and yet it is probably true that many more could make, at any rate, an attempt in this direction if adequate opportunity and inducement were pro- vided. Could not a part of the sums available for the endowment of research be devoted to the endowment of text-books? It is, of course, an inducement to write such a book that it is a good thing well done: but in the case of a scientific worker this is scarcely sufficient, because the same could be said of his continuing his particular work. If we ask him to pause and render the treasures he has collected accessible to others there must be some additional inducement. Publishers are not able to offer pecuniary encouragement, because books of the type T have in mind would not appeal to a very large public. But why should they not be subsidized? I do not think it need be a very costly business, if the money were placed in the hands of a central body to issue invitations for books to be written. An invitation would be in itself a compliment, and the actual pecuniary value of the inducement would shrink in importance, just as the actual amount of gold in a medal awarded by one of our leading scientific societies is not very seriously regarded. It may be objected that to ask the best men to write text-books is to set them to inferior work, and so to delay true scientific progress; but are we sure that the real march of selence is being delayed? There are pauses in a journey which merely waste time, but there are others without which the whole journey may be delayed or prevented, as when a man should neglect to rest and feed the horse which carries him. But the development of photography has brought with it much more than a recurrence of diffidence in some amateurs; it has fore- shadowed a serious rearrangement of astronomical work generally— a new division of labor and a new system of cooperation. To quote one notable instance, a very small number of observatories could take enough photographs to keep the whole world busy examining or meas- 182 PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. uring them, and we are already face to face with the question whether this is a desirable arrangement. Let me give a concrete example of this modern situation. In the winter of 1900-1901 the small planet Eros offered a specially favorable opportunity for determining the solar parallax, and some thousands of photographs were taken at a number of observatories for the purpose. It is not yet very clear how a definitive result will be obtained from the mass of material accumulated, most of which is being dealt with in a very leisurely manner; but a small portion of it has been discussed by Mr. A. R. Hinks, of Cambridge, and one of the many important results obtained by him in a recently published paper (Mon. Not. R. A. S., June, 1904) is this: That the plates taken at the Lick Observatory are susceptible of such accurate measurement, and so numerous, that a determination of the solar parallax from them alone would have a weight nearly equal to that from the whole mass of material. If the Lick plates can be measured and reduced, it will not much matter if all the others are destroyed. Whence we may deduce two conclusions: Firstly, that it is eminently desirable that these beautiful pictures should be meas- ured and reduced as soon as possible; secondly, that we must consider future plans of campaign very carefully if we are to avoid waste of work and discouragement of workers. It is tolerably easy to reach the first precise conclusion. I wish it were easier to arrive at some- thing more definite in regard to the second. It seems clear that we may expect some readjustment of the relations between the better- equipped observatories and those less fortunate, but it is not at all clear what direction that readjustment should take. One possibility is indicated by the instance before us. The discussion of the Lick photographs was not conducted at the Lick Observatory, but at Cam- bridge. The price paid for the fine climate of Mount Hamilton is the accumulation of work beyond the powers of the staff to deal with, and the new division of labor may be for the observatories with fine climates and equipment to take the photographs and astronomers elsewhere to measure and discuss them. Professor Kapteyn has set us a noble and well-kuown example in this direction, and in view of the pressing need for a study of many photographs already taken, it is to be hoped that his example will be followed, especially in cases similar to his own, where no observatory is in existence. If in such cases the investigator will set up a measuring machine instead of a telescope, he will deserve the gratitude of the astronomical world. But the case is not so clear when a telescope is already in exist- ence. Mr. Hinks had a fine telescope at Cambridge, and it required some self-denial on his part to give up observing for a time in order to discuss the Lick photographs and others. If the accumulations already made, and others certain to be made in the future, are to be dealt with, this kind of self-denial must certainly be exercised, PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. 183 but it does not seem quite clear that it should always fall to the lot of those with a modest equipment. Considerations of strict econ- omy might suggest this view, but there is a human side to the argument which is not unimportant. The danger that the minor observatories should feel their work unnecessary is even graver than the similar possibility in the case of amateurs already mentioned, and calls for prompt attention from astronomers generally if it is to be averted. It is the more serious because of another set of considerations of a quite different kind, viz, the funds available for research show a rather alarming tendency to accumulate in the hands of a few large observatories, leaving many astronomers who could do useful work without the means of doing it. A conspicu- ous example is afforded by the present state of the work for the astrographic chart initiated in Paris seventeen years ago. On the one hand, a few of the large observatories have easily acquired funds not only for taking and measuring the plates and printing the results, but for publishing an expensive set of charts which will be of very little use to anyone; on the other hand, some of their colleagues have found the utmost difficulty in getting funds for even taking the plates; others have got so far, but can not proceed to measure them; and very few, indeed, have yet funds for printing. If there had been a true spirit of cooperation for the general good in this enterprise, surely some of the funds being squandered on the comparatively useless charts would have been devoted to the proper completion of the only part of the scheme which has a chance of fulfillment. I do not mean to imply that this would have been an easy matter to arrange, but it is noteworthy that no attempt in this direction has been made, and that as a consequence a prom- ising scheme is doomed to failure in one important particular. For though the survey of the whole sky to the eleventh magnitude may some day be completed, it will be sadly lacking in homogeneity. Some sections are finished before others are begun, so that in the vital matter of epoch we shall have a scrappy and straggling series instead of a compact whole. Cooperation in scientific work, the necessity of which is being borne in upon us from all sides, is nevertheless beset with difficul- ties, and no doubt we shall only reach success through a series of failures, but we shall reach it the more rapidly if we note carefully the weaknesses of successive attempts. In the particular scheme of the astrographie chart, I think an error which should be avoided in future was made by those who have access to the chief sources of astronomical endowment. They have made the enterprise doubly difficult for their colleagues, firstly, by setting a standard of work which was unattainable with limited resources, and, secondly, by depleting the reserves which might have gone to assist the weaker observatories. 184 PHOTOGRAPHY IN ASTRONOMICAL RESEARCH. It is easier to draw attention to these modern tendencies than to suggest a remedy for them. It may, perhaps, be questioned whether | a remedy is either possible or necessary; it may be urged that it is both inevitable and desirable that astronomical observation should gravitate more and more to those well-equipped observatories where it can be best conducted, and that new resources will obtain the greatest results when added to a working capital which is already large. From the purely economical point of view of getting results most rapidly, these conclusions may be true. But if we look at the human side of the question, I hope we shall dissent from them; 1f we think first of astronomers rather than of the accumulation of astro- nomical facts I hope we shall admit that something must be done to check the excessive specialization and the inequalities of opportunity, toward which there is a danger of our drifting. We can not afford the division of astronomers into two types; one isolated in a well- equipped observatory in a fine but rather inaccessible climate, spend- ing his whole time in observing or taking photographs; another in the midst of civilization, enjoying all the advantages of_inter- course with other scientific men, but with no telescope worth using, and dependent for his material on the observations made by others. Some division of labor in this way is doubtless advantageous, but we must beware lest the division become too sharply pronounced. Will it be possible to prevent its undue growth by some alternation of duties? Can the hermit observer and the university professor take turn and turn about to the common benefit? The proposal is, perhaps, a little revolutionary, and has the obvious disadvantages of inconvenience and expense at the epochs of change, but I do not think it should be set aside on these grounds. I must admit, however, that IT am not ready with a panacea. It has been chiefly my object to draw attention to some modern tenden- cles In astronomical work, hoping that the remedies may be evolved from a general consideration of them. Such questions of the rela- tionship of the worker to his work are even harder to solve than those we meet with in the work itself. But there is at least this excuse for noticing them on an occasion like the present, that they are to some extent common to all departments of knowledge, and our difficulties may come to the notice of others who have had occasion to consider them in other connections and may be able to help us. Or, again, we may take the more flattering view that the human problems of astronomy to-day may be those of some other science to-morrow, for astronomy is one of the oldest of the sciences and has already passed through many stages through which others must pass. In any case, we must deal with these problems in the sight of all men, and of all the consequences entailed by our lately acquired oppor- tunities none are more interesting and none can be more important to us than those affecting the astronomer himself. RADIATION IN THE SOLAR SYSTEM.-* lea 124 Roe dis ISL Ietomanpmence, is JRC MSy I propose to discuss this afternoon certain effects of the energy which is continuously pouring out from the sun on all sides with the speed of light, the energy which we call sunlight when we enjoy the brilliance of a cloudless sky, which we call heat when we bask in its warmth, the stream of radiation which supports all fe on our globe and is the source of all our energy. As we all know, this ceaseless stream of energy is a form of wave motion. If we pass a beam of sunlight or its equivalent, the beam from an electric are, through a prism, the disturbance is analyzed into a spectrum of colors, each color of a different wave length, the length of wave changing as we go down the spectrum from, say, one thirty-thousandth of an inch in the red to one eighty-thousandth of an inch in the blue or violet. But this visible spectrum is merely the part of the stream of radia- tion which affects the eve. Beyond the violet are the still shorter waves which affect a photographic plate or a fluorescent screen, and will pass through certain substances opaque to ordinary ght. Here, for instance, 1s a filter devised by Professor Wood which stops visi- ble rays, but allows the shorter invisible waves to pass and excite the fluorescence of a platinocyanide sereen. Again, beyond the red end are still longer waves, which are present in very considerable amount, and can be rendered evident by their heating effect. We can easily filter out the visible rays and still leave these long waves in the beam by passing it through a thin sheet of vuleanite. A piece of phosphorus placed at the focus of these invisible rays is at once fired, or a thermometer quickly rises in tem- perature. The waves which have been observed and studied up to the present time range over some nine octaves, from the long waves described to the section yesterday by Professor Rubens, waves of «Afternoon address delivered at the Cambridge meeting of the British Asso- ciation, August 28, 1904. Reprinted from author’s corrected copy. . 185 186 RADIATION IN THE SOLAR SYSTEM. which there are only 400 in an inch, down to the short waves found by Schumann in the radiation given off by hydrogen under the influence of the electric discharge, waves of which there are a quarter of a million in an inch. No doubt the range will be extended. Radiant energy consists of a mixture of any or all of these wave lengths, but the eye is only sensitive at the most to a little more than one octave in the nine or more. This radiation is emitted not only by incandescent bodies such as the sun, the electric arc, or flames. All bodies are pouring out radiant energy, however hot or cold they may be. In this room we see things by the radiation which they reflect from the daylhght. But, besides this borrowed radiation, every surface in the room is send- ing out radiation of its own. Energy is pouring forth from walls, ceiling, floor, rushing about with the speed of light, striking against the opposite surfaces, and being reflected, scattered, and absorbed. And though this radiation does not affect our eyes, it is of the utmost importance in keepimg us warm. Could it be stopped, we should soon be driven out by the intense cold, or remain to be frozen to death. As the temperature of a body is raised, the stream of radiation it pours out increases in quantity. But it also changes in quality. Probably the surface always sends out waves of all lengths from the longest to the shortest, but at first, when it is cold, the long waves alone are appreciable. As it gets hotter, though all the waves become more intense, the shorter ones increase most in intensity, and ulti- mately they become so prominent that they affect our sense of sight, and then we say that the body is red or white hot. The quality of the stream depends on the nature of the surface, some surfaces sending out more than others at the same temperature. But the stream is the greatest from a surface which is, when cold, quite black. - Its blackness means that it entirely absorbs whatever radiation falls upon it, and such a surface when heated sends out radiation of every kind, and for a given temperature each kind of radiation 1s present to the full extent—that is, no surface sends out more of a given wave length than a black surface at a given tempera- Cure: A very simple experiment shows that a black surface is a better radiator, or pours out more energy when hot, than a surface which does not absorb fully, but reflects much of the radiation which falls upon it. If a platinum foil with some black marks on it be heated to redness, the marks, black when cold, are much brighter than the surrounding metal when hot; they are, in fact, pouring out much more visible radiation than the metal. It is with these black surfaces that I am concerned to-day. But, inasmuch as it seems absurd to call them black when they are white RADIATION IN THE SOLAR SYSTEM. 187 hot, I prefer to tall them full radiators, since they radiate more fully than any others. , ’ For a long time past experiments have been made to seek a law connecting the radiation or energy flow from a black or fully radiat- ing surface with its temperature. But it was only twenty-five years ago that a law was suggested by Stefan which agrees at all satisfac- torily with experiment. This law is that the stream of energy is proportional to the fourth power of the temperature, reckoned from the absolute zero 273° below freezing point on the centigrade scale. This suggestion of Stefan served as the starting point of new and most fertile researches, both theoretical and practical, and we are glad to welcome to this meeting Professors Wien, Lummer, and Rubens, who have all done most brilliant work on the subject. : Among the researches on radiation recently carried out is one by Kurlbaum, in which he determined the actual amount of energy issuing from the black or fully radiating surface per second at 100° C., and therefore at any temperature. Here is a table which gives the amount at various temperatures, as determined by Kurlbaum: Rate of flow of energy from 1 cm of fully radiating or ** black’ surface. Absolute temperature. heated 1° per | second. | Grams of water | | | | Calories. ROSE ee et June Sew oli ee Sirs epalclew | (). 000000 100 airipoils sees eee eee er) Meee es | 0.000127 | 300° earth’s'surface.-. 5.---...2-41.).| 0.010300 | 1,000° red heat ............__....____.. | 1.270000 | 3,000° arc carbon__........_...-...--- | 103.000000 | GlOC OMe an Brera eto Gaara) cali | 1,650. 000000 | G25 0 Cree ae SRE Ot NS ee poner 1,930. ODO000 — | As an illustration of the “ fourth power law,” let us see what value it will give us for the temperature of the sun, assuming that he is a full radiator, or that his surface, if cooled down, would be quite black. We can measure approximately the stream of energy which the sun is pouring out by intercepting the beam falling on a surface exposed to full sunlight, measuring the heat given to that surface per second, and then calculating what fraction the beam is of the whole stream issuing from the sun. This was first done by Pouillet, and his method will serve to illus- trate the principle of all other methods. In his apparatus the sunlight fell full upon a box containing water, and the rate at which the water rose in temperature gave the energy in the’stream of solar radiation falling on the box. 188 RADIATION IN THE SOLAR SYSTEM. Simple as the experiment appears, the determination is beset with difficulties, the chief beimg the estimation of the fraction of the energy intercepted by the atmosphere, and we are still unable to give a very definite value. Indeed, we can not yet say whether the outflow of energy is constant or whether it varies. In all probability, however, it does vary, and Professor Langley, who has devoted years of work to the subject, has recently obtained evidence indicating quite considerable variation. We may, however, assume that we are not very far from the true value if we say that the stream of radiation from the sun falling perpendicularly on 1 cm? outside the earth’s atmosphere will heat 1 gm. of water one twenty-fourth of a degree centigrade every second, or will give one twenty-fourth of a calory per second. Now, the area of a sphere round the sun at the distance of the earth is 46,000 times the area of the sun’s surface. The energy from 1 em? of the sun thus passes through 46,000 cm? at the surface of the earth. It is therefore 46,000 multipled by one twenty-fourth calories, or 1,920 calory-seconds. But from the table already given a black sur- face at 6,250° absolute, say 6,000° C., gives 1,930 calories per second, or the temperature of the sun’s radiating surface is 6,000°, if he is a full radiator—and there is good reason to suppose that no great error is made in taking him to be one. Let us now take another illustration of the fourth power law. Imagine a little black body which is a good conductor of heat placed in full sunlight at the distance of the earth. Let it be 1 em? in cross section, so that it is receiving one twenty-fourth of a calory per second. It will soon warm up to such a temperature that it gives out just as much as it receives, and since it 1s so small heat will rapidly flow through it from side to side, so that it will all be very nearly at the same temperature. A sphere 1 cm? in cross section has area 4 em*, so that it must be giving out from each square centimeter of its surface iy = 0.0104 calory each second. From the table above it will be seen that this corresponds very nearly indeed to a temperature of 300° absolute or 27° C., say 80° F. It is to be noted that this only apples to a lttle round body. A flat plate facing the sun would be about 60° C. hotter, while if it were edgewise to the sun it might be very much colder. Let us now see what would be the temperature of the small black sphere at other distances from the sun. It is easily seen that inas- much as the heat received, and therefore that given out, varies inversely as the square of the distance, the temperature, by the fourth power law, will vary inversely as the square root of the distance. Here is a table of temperatures of small black spheres due to solar radiation : RADIATION IN THE SOLAR SYSTEM. 189 Distance from sun’s center. Temperature, centigrade. aiemniliionemilessepec snes se aan e a eee 1, 200°, cast iron melts. 23 million miles--¢._--_-- 5 le eee 327°, lead nearly melts. At Mercury’s distance _—__-..---. --- 210°, tin nearly melts. AVE AVIONUS Si GiStan COsa=. ese as ee 80°, alcohol boils freely. | At Caines GIstanCOsa ssa se es 27°, warm summer day. | At Mars’s distance _............._..-- 30° arctic cold. At Neptune’s distance -.-_....__=---- —219°, nitrogen frozen. We see from this table that the temperature at the earth’s distance is remarkably near the average temperature of the earth’s surface, which is usually estimated as about 16° C., or 60° I. This can hardly be regarded as a mere coincidence. The surface of the earth receives, we know, an amount of heat from the inside almost infinitesimal com- pared with that which it receives from the sun, and on the sun, there- fore, we depend for our temperature. The earth acquires such a tem- perature, in fact, that it radiates out what it receives from the sun. The earth is far too great for the distribution of heat by conduction to play any serious part in equalizing the temperature of different regions. But the rotation about its axis secures nearly uniform tem- perature in a given latitude, and the movements of the atmosphere tend to equalize temperatures in different latitudes. Hence we should expect the earth to have, on the average, nearly the temperature of the small black body at the same distance, slightly less because it reflects some of the solar radiation, and we find that it 1s, in fact, some 10° C. less. Professor Wien was the first to point out that the temperature of the earth has nearly the value which we should expect from the fourth power law. Here is a table showing the average temperatures of the surfaces of the first four planets on the supposition that they are earth-lhke in all their conditions: Table of temperatures of earth-like planets. : SoC: IMGT CUT yee re ee ee eee ee eer Se Ei) a a ied see 194 AVG TTT Stee ee air Seer ve ee ese Se ee ee Bae Ae Nie oy Se a Se 69 HAT Ge eee ee Se eee a 5 fel en ee ee Sn eee ps ee 17 DAMES GS} | Sag a ee eee eee oe re ed ee ee eee — 38 The most interesting case is that of Mars. He has, we know, a day nearly the same in length as ours. His axis is inclined to the ecliptic only a little more than ours, and he has some kind of atmosphere. — It is exceedingly difficult to suppose, then, that his average temperature ean differ much from —38° C. His atmosphere may be less pro- tective, so that his day temperature may be higher, but then, to com- pensate, his night temperature will be lower. Even his highest equa- 190 RADIATION IN THE SOLAR SYSTEM. torial temperature can not be much higher than the average. On certain suppositions I find that it is still 20° below the freezing point, and until some new conditions can be pointed out which enable him to establish far higher temperatures than the earth would have at the same distance it is hard to believe that he can have polar caps of frozen water melting to liquid in his summer and filling rivers or canals. Unless he is very different from the earth, his whole surface is below the freezing point. Let us now turn from these temperature effects of radiation to an- other class of effects, those due to pressure. More than thirty years ago Clerk Maxwell showed that on his elec- tromagnetic theory of ight, hght and all radiation like light should press against any surface on which it falls. There should also be a pressure back against any surface from which radiation is reflected or from which it is issuing as a source, the value in every case being equal to the energy in a cubic centimeter of the stream. The exist- ence of this pressure was fully demonstrated independently by Lebe- dew and by Nichols and Hull some years ago in brilliant experiments in which they allowed a beam of hght to fall on a suspended disk in a vacuum. The disk was repelled, and they measured the repulsion and found it to be about that required by Maxwell’s theory. Nichols and Hull have since repeated the experiment with greater exactness, and there is now no doubt that the pressure exists and that it has Maxwell’s value. The radiation, then, poured out by the sun is not only a stream of energy, but it is also, as 1t were, a stream of pressure pressing out the heavenly bodies on which it falls. Since the stream thins out as it ‘liverges, according to the inverse square of the distance, the pressure on a given surface falls off according to the same law. We know the energy in a cubic centimeter of sunlight at the distance of the earth, since, moving with the velocity of light, it will supply one twenty- fourth of a calory per second. It is easy to calculate that it will press with a force of 6 by 10 ° degree on a square centimeter, an amount so small that on the whole earth it 1s but 75,000 tons, a mere trifle compared with the 3,000,000 billion tons with which the sun pulls the earth by his gravitation. But now notice the remarkable effect of size on the relation between the radiation pressure and the gravitative pull. One is on the sur- face and proportional to the surface, while the other penetrates the surface and pulls every grain of matter throughout the whole volume. Suppose we could divide the earth up into eight equal globes. Each would have half the diameter of the earth and a quarter the surface. The eight would expose twice the surface which the earth exposes, and the total radiation pressure would be doubled, while the total gravi- tative pull would be the same as before. Now divide up each of the RADIATION IN THE SOLAR SYSTEM. 191 eight into eight more equal globes. Again the radiation pressure would be doubled, while gravitation would be the same. Continue the process, and it is evident that by successive division we should at last arrive at globes so small and with total surfaces so great that the pressure of the radiation would balance the pull of gravitation. Mere arithmetic shows that this balance would occur when the earth was divided up into little spheres each one forty- thousandth of a centimeter in diameter. In other words, a little speck one forty-thousandth of a centi- meter, say one one-hundred-thousandth of an inch in diameter, and of density equal to that of the earth, would be neither attracted nor repelled by the sun. This balance would hold at all distances, since both would vary in the same way with the distance. Onur arithmetic comes to this, that if the earth were spread out in a thin spherical shell with radius about four times the distance of Neptune, the repulsion of sunlight falling on it would balance the inward pull by the sun and it would have no tendency to contract. With further division repulsion would exceed attraction, and the particles would be driven away. But I must here say that the law of repulsion does not hold down to such fine division. The repulsion is somewhat less than we have calculated, owing to the diffraction of the hght. Some very suggestive speculations with regard to comets’ tails have arisen from these considerations, and to these Professor Boys directed the attention of section A last year. We may imagine that the nucleus of a comet consists of small meteorites. When these come near the sun they are heated and explosions occur, and_ fine dust is produced not previously present. If the dust is sufficiently fine, radiation may overpower gravitation and drive it away from the sun, and we may have a manifestation of this expelled dust in the tail of the comet. I do not, however, want to dwell on this to-day, but to look at the subject in another way. Let us again introduce our small black sphere, and let us make it 1 em.? in cross section, 1.13 em. in diameter, and of the density of the earth. The gravitation pull on it is forty-two thousand times the radiation pressure. Now let us see the effect of size on the radiating body. Let us halve the diameter of the sun. He would then have one-eighth the mass and one-quarter the surface. Or, while his pull was. re- duced to one-eighth, his radiation push would only be reduced to one-quarter. The pull would now be only twenty-one thousand times the push. Halve the diameter again, and the pull would be only ten thousand five hundred times the push. Reduce the diam- 192 RADIATION IN THE SOLAR SYSTEM. eter to one forty-two-thousandth of its orignal value, that is, to about 20 miles, and the pull would equal the push. In other words, a sun as hot as ours and 20 miles in diameter would repel bodies less than 1 em. in diameter, and could only hold in these which were larger. 3ut it is, of course, absurd to think of such a small sun as this hav- ing so high a temperature as 6,000°. Let us then reduce the tempera- ture to one-twentieth, say 306° absolute, or the temperature of the earth. Then the radiation would be reduced to the fourth power of one-twentieth, or one one-hundred-and-sixty-thousandth, and the diameter would have to be reduced to one one-hundred-and-sixty- thousandth of 20 miles, or about 20 cm., say 8 inches, when again radiation would balance gravitation. It is not very difficult to show that if we had two equal spheres each of the density and temperature of the earth they would neither attract nor repel each other—their radiation pressure would balance the gravitative pull—when their diameters were about 2.26 em., when, in fact, they were about the size of large marbles. It must be remembered that this is only true for spheres out in space receiving no appreciable radiation from the surrounding region. It would appear that we have arrived at a result of some impor- tance in considering the aggregation of small meteorites. Imagine a thinly scattered stream of small meteorites at the distance of the earth from the sun. Then, even if they be as large as marbles, they may have no tendency to move together. If they are smaller they may even tend to move apart and scatter. In conclusion, let me mention one more effect of this radiation pres- sure. You will remember that radiation presses back against any surface from which it issues, If, then, a sphere at rest in space 1s radiating equally on all sides it is pressed equally on all sides, and the net result is a balance between the pressures. But suppose that it is moving. It is following up the energy which it pours forth in front, crowding it into a smaller space than if it were at rest, making jt more dense. Hence the pressure is slightly greater, and it can be shown that it is greater the greater the velocity and the higher the temperature. On the other hand, it is drawing away from the energy which it pours out behind, thinning it out, as it were, and the pressure at the back is slightly less than if the sphere were at rest. The net result is a force opposing the motion, a force like a viscous friction, always tending to reduce the speed. Thus calculation shows that there is a retarding force on the earth as it moves along its orbit amounting in all to about 2,500 kgm. Not very serious, for in billions of years it will only reduce the velocity by one in a million, and it will only have serious effects if the life of RADIATION IN THE SOLAR SYSTEM. 1938 the earth is prolonged at its present temperature to hundreds of bil- lions of years. E 3ut here again size is everything. Reduce the diameter of the moving body, and the retarding effect increases in proportion to the reduction. If the earth were reduced to the size of a marble, the effect would be appreciable in a hundred thousand years. If it were reduced to a speck of dust a thousandth of a centimeter in diameter, the effect would be appreciable in a hundred years. Note what the effect would be. Imagine a dust particle shot out from the earth and left behind to circulate on its own account round the sun. It would be heated by the sun and would be radiating out on all sides. As it journeyed forward there would be a resisting force tending to stop it. But instead of acting in this way the resist- ance would enable the sun to pull the particle inward, and the fall inward would actually increase the velocity. This increase in the velocity would increase the resistance, and at the same time the approach to the sun would raise its temperature, increase the radia- tion, and so increase the resistance still further. The particle would therefore move in a mere and more rapid orbit, and ultimately it would fall into the sun. Small marble-sized meteorites would fall in from the distance of the earth probably in a few million years. Small particles of dust would be swept in in a few thousand years. Thus the sun is ever at work keeping the space round him free from dust. If the particles are very minute he drives them forth into outer space. If they are larger he draws them in. It is just possible that we have evidence of this drawing in in the zodiacal light, that vast dust-like ring which stretches from the sun outwards far beyond the orbit of the earth and is at once the largest and the most myste- rious member of the solar system. sm 1904 13 A igh Seas ie it ee ‘ ri rep rn mo ¢ Ae hy ibe : * my a) Ni ag. a. + : iy} v ova, ‘ CONDENSATION NUCLEI-¢ By @s TR. WILSON. HeURS:; Fellow of Sidney Susser College, Cambridge, England. If we take the ordinary air of a room and inclose it in a gtass vessel containing some water and provided with some means of increasing or diminishing the volume at will, we are able to observe the follow- ing phenomena: If the air has been allowed to stand sufficiently long to become saturated with water vapor, any increase of volume, even if very shght, causes the formation of a fog throughout the volume of the moist air. This is easily made visible by concentrating a powerful beam of light on the contents of the vessel; or, by placing a small source of light behind the vessel, brilliant-colored rings or coronas may be seen surrounding the source. If the air be made to contract again to its original volume, a second expansion like the first will again give a similar fog, but when this process has been several times repeated the fogs become thinner, the drops being fewer and larger; we get at length a fine rain on expansion rather than a fog, the drops falling to the bottom of the vessel within a few seconds instead of remaining in suspension for many minutes like the first- formed fog particles. When this stage has been reached, the next and all succeeding expansions produce no drops at all, no condensation resulting elsewhere than on the walls of the vessel. If ordinary air be now admitted into the vessel, drops will again be seen on expan- sion, unless the air introduced has entered through a tightly pressed plug of cotton wool, or has been otherwise filtered, in which case no drops are seen. The phenomena are readily explained if we suppose that water can not under ordinary circumstances condense in the form of drops unless suitable nuclei are present to serve as starting points for the drops. These nuclei are present in very varying numbers in ordinary atmospheric air, from which they may be removed by filtering, or aA paper presented at the International Mlectrical Congress of St. Louis, 1904. Reprinted from author’s revised copy. . 195 196 CONDENSATION NUCLEI. by repeatedly forming a cloud by expansion, and allowing the dreps to fall to the bottom of the vessel. Both the facts and the explans- tion have been long known. The particles which serve as the nuclei of the drops formed, when ordinary atmospheric air is allowed to expand shghtly, are conveniently called “ dust ” particles; they are generally too small to be themselves visible, and it would be difficult to find a means of determining whether they consist of solid particles or of minute drops of liquid. The number of these dust particles per cubic centimeter of air in different localities and under different weather conditions has been investigated by Aitken and by others with the aid of the ingenious dust-counting apparatus invented by him. It is not difficult to understand why nuclei should be necessary for the condensation of water in the form of drops. Lord Kelvin proved that the pressure of aqueous vapor necessary for equilibrium over a convex or concave surface of water differed from that over a flat surface, being less over a concave and greater over a convex surface, He shows how we may calculate the difference. A very small drop of pure water will, if we assume the surface tension to remain the same for very small drops as for large ones, evaporate even when sur- rounded by vapor many times more dense than that in equilibrium at the same temperature over a flat surface. Thus unless the initial stages of the growth of the drops can be, as it were, omitted, owing to the presence of not too minute nuclei, a high degree of supersatu- ration may exist without any condensation in the form of rain cr cloud resulting. Lord Kelvin showed that to alter the equilibrium vapor pressure by one part in a thousand the radius of curvature of a spherical drop must amount to about 10—* cm. Thus very minute nuclei will enable a cloud to be formed with a very slight degree of supersaturation; in other words, as a result of a very slight expansion of the air if this has been initially saturated with water vapor. Lord Kelvin refrained from extending his calculations to curyva- tures of greater amount, as the surface tension can not remain inde- pendent of the radius much beyond that mit. It is- convenient, however, to extend the calculations to greater curvatures; for although the results obtained can not be considered as quantitatively correct, they enable us to form a picture of the mode of action of nuclei of different kinds. Let us imagine an arrangement equivalent to that considered by Lord Kelvin; but since we are only here con- cerned with convex surfaces, let the capillary tube be joined as a side tube to the lower part of a tall vessel of water. The capillary must be supposed to have walls of such a nature as not to be wetted by water, and let us suppose the open end of it to be bent round, so that it points vertically upward, and that the height of the vertical por- tion can be adjusted to bring the meniscus to the open end of the tube. CONDENSATION NUCLEI. 197 Let the whole apparatus be contained in a closed vessel containing only water vapor. — p We have then the convex water-air meniscus*depressed below the level of the flat surface in the large vessel to a depth /, such that guwh = 2T/r, where g is the acceleration due to gravity, w the density of the liquid (w= 1 in the present case), T is the surface tension, and 7 the radius of curvature. Thus the pressure of the vapor in contact with the meniscus must be greater than that over the flat surface by that due to the weight of a column of water vapor of height /. the pressure at the top of the column being that required for equilibrium over a flat surface at the given temperature. This increased pressure must, moreover, be the pressure necessary for equilibrium over the curved surface; distillation from the one surface to the other would otherwise take place, resulting in a continuous circulation. To find this pressure p,, p, being that at the flat surface we have dp=gpdh, Fess ih dp GJ / p being the density of the steam. If we assume Boyle's law to be obeyed, this gives h —Rt log, P2— Rt log. Pa g PP, g Py R being the constant in the equation pvu—=Rz, ¢ being the absolute tem- perature, p,, 9, the density of the vapor at the two surfaces respec- tively. Buty —2 iro, thus log, P2= log P2— + 4 2T nD Puke r We have thus the means of calculating the pressure, or the density, which water vapor must have in order that it may be in equilibrium im contact with a drop of any size. The equilibrium is obviously unstable; a drop, if too big for equilibrium, will grow so long as the supersaturated condition is maintained ; if too small it will evaporate completely. The possession of a charge of electricity by the drop or the existence of a dissolved substance within it will cause the drop to be stable if its size be less than a certain limit, depending on the mag- nitude of the charge or the quantity of dissolved substance. Let us consider the case of electrification. We may imagine the water sur- face in one limb of a U tube in an arrangement like that described above, to be uniformly charged with electricity by holding a very short distance above it a parallel conducting surface maintained at a different potential. It is immaterial whether the water surface be flat or curved; a tension of 2 26? dynes per square centimeter will be exerted on the end of the column, @ being the charge per square centi- meter. This will raise the electrified surface above the level which it . 198 CONDENSATION NUCLEI. would have occupied in the absence of the charge through a distance 270 */g, and there will be a corresponding diminution in the satura- tion vapor pressure. The vapor pressure necessary for equilibrium over a charged drop is now given by the equation log, ??= u (2 2 16) — i Ge —— “Fon Rue NE ; IRA NX GR 8 zr where p, is the saturation vapor pressure over a flat, uncharged sur- face, p, that necessary for equilibrium at the same temperature in presence of the drops, and e¢ is the charge on each drop. In an at- mosphere saturated with respect to a flat uncharged surface a drop carrying a charge e would be in stable equilibrium if its radius were such that the two terms on the right-hand side of the above equation were equal, 1. e., when 7°==e?/162 T. If the density of the vapor were increased the drop would become larger, the equilibrium remaining stable until the vapor pressure reached the maximum value corre- sponding to the above equation. To find this we have on differen- tiating WiC oe F/ Gere a ale nes p dr t Te te TER The maximum vapor pressure in contact with the drops occurs when 7*—¢°/4 2 T, and has the value given by log P2— 3T p, 2 Rir If the pressure of the vapor be increased beyond this limit the unstable condition is reached, and the drop increases in size so long as the supply of vapor is unlimited. In most cases the final size of the drops would be determined by the amount of vapor initially present, and the number of drops among which the water is distributed ; unless they are very numerous, and, therefore, very small when full grown, they will grow until the vapor is not sensibly supersaturated ; it will only be in very rare cases that the final size of the drops is so small that equilibrium will be reached while the vapor is at all con- siderably supersaturated. . It is easily seen that the behavior of drops containing dissolved sub- stances will be quite similar. If we start with very small drops, there is for a given size of drops a certain vapor pressure corresponding to equilibrium; if we increase the density of the vapor the drop grows, the equilibrium remaiming stable, until a certain size is reached, after which the drops suddenly grow to their full size. The theory of con- densation on ions or other nuclei has been treated by J. J. Thomson ¢ and by Langevin and Bloch.? aJ. J. Thomson, Conduction of Electricity through Gases, p. 149. 6 Bloch, Recherches sur la conductibilité électrique de Vair produite par le phosphore et sur les gaz récemment préparés (Paris, 1904). CONDENSATION NUCLEI. 199 LIMITING SUPERSATURATION IN DUST-FREE GASES. When air saturated With water vapor has been freed from dust particles no drops are formed on expansion, provided that a certain critical degree of supersaturation has not been exceeded. To pro- duce the supersaturation necessary for condensation in the form of drops in dust-free air the air must be allowed to expand suddenly, ull the final volume is 1.25 times the initial volume. The condensa- tion is rainlike in form, and the number of drops remains small although the expansion considerably exceeds this lower limit. Ex- pansions exceeding a second limit, v./v,—=1.38 give fogs, which increase ‘rapidly in density, 1. e., in the number of the drops as the expansion is increased’ beyond this limit. In such experiments it is of course necessary that the apparatus used should be such that a very rapid change of volume can be brought about, and that the ratio of the final to the initial volume is known with certainty. Some years ago I introduced a method which has proved suitable for the purpose. When this method is used it would appear from the consistency of the results obtained with cloud chambers varying in capacity from 15 to 1,500 ce. that the expansion is adiabatic and is completed before any appreciable quantity of water has had time to separate out. From the ratio of the final to the initial volume, knowing the initial temper- ature, we can deduce the temperature at the moment when the expan- sion was completed from the equation for the cooling of a gas by adiabatic expansion. a=( ar 6, Vo y may be taken as not differing sensibly from its value for the dry gas. Knowing the final temperature we have the data from which we ean obtain the density of the vapor which would be required for sat- uration at the moment of completion of the expansion, and we know the actual density at that moment from the initial temperature and the ratio of the final to the initial volume. Thus the supersaturation measured by the ratio of the actual density of the vapor at the instant when the expansion is completed to the density of the saturated vapor at the temperature which the supersaturated gas then possesses can be calculated. The supersaturation required for the rainlike condensation is found in this way to be approximately fourfold, that required for the cloud- like condensation being nearly eightfold. There are these two classes of nuclei always present in ‘moist dust-free air, and always being pro- duced, for however often the process of condensing water on the nuclei and allowing the drops to settle is repeated the number of drops formed in subsequent expansions is undiminished. The nuclei . 200 CONDENSATION NUCLEI. which give rise to the rainlike condensation and which are at any moment present in quite small numbers are, as we shall see, ions con- tinually being produced in the gas. They can be removed by an elee- tric field. The cloudlike condensation occurring with large expan- sions is entirely unaffected by an electric field; it is independent also of the nature of the gas. If we calculate how large a drop of water would require to be in order that it should just be able to grow in vapor of eightfold supersaturation, we obtain the very small value .4 by 10—* em. for the radius of such drops. Thus drops not large in comparison with molecular dimensions might be expected to grow into visible drops in an atmosphere supersaturated to this extent. THE IONS AS CONDENSATION NUCLEI. If we expose the cloud chamber of an expansion apparatus to the action of Roentgen rays, the air having been previously freed from dust, just the same expansion is required as in the absence of the rays to produce drops, but now we get comparatively dens? fogs in place of the rainlike condensation. The cloudlike condensation obtained with expansions exceeding the second limit is not sensibly affected. Thus, when X rays pass through moist air they produce nuclei of exactly the same efficiency in promoting condensation as those which are always being produced in small numbers and to which the rainlike condensation is due. The conducting power imparted to air by the action of X rays being explained as due to the setting free of ions in the gas, it was natural to identify the nuclei with the ions. This view was verified by studying the action of an electric field on the nuclei produced by X rays. Between two parallel plates, which formed the top and bottom of the cloud chamber of an expansion apparatus, a difference of potential of some hundred volts could be applied. With the electric field acting, the number of drops produced on expansion in air exposed to the rays was exceedingly small in comparison with the number seen in the absence of the field. The nuclei carry a charge of electricity, and are driven by the electric field against the plates immediately after being set free. The direct proof that the few nuclei, which are always present and give rise to the rainlike condensation, are also ions has been more difficult to ‘arry out. Attempts made with small apparatus led to negative results, the number of drops being inconveniently small whether the field was applied or not. Recent experiments on a large scale, how- ever, showed in a striking way the removal of these nuclei by the electric field. The subject has been further cleared up by the inde- pendent proof by purely electrical measurements that the air in a closed vessel is continually being ionized. CONDENSATION NUOLFEI. 201 Air ionized by any of the various types of Becquerel rays or con- taining ions from a zime plate exposed to weak ultra-violet light behaves on expansion like air exposed to X rays, fogs being produced in air initially saturated if the lower expansion limit ¢,/¢,—1.25 be exceeded. The action of an electric field in removing the nuclei is the same in air ionized by Becquerel rays as in air lonized by X rays. The ions produced by the discharge from a point are similar in their action, but there is here a tendency, due probably to the products of chemical combinations brought about by the luminous discharge, for the nuclei to grow or for larger uncharged nuclei to be formed, so that a much smaller degree of supersaturation may be required to produce a cloud. The ions produced by these various methods are also identical in the velocity with which they move through air under a given potential gradient. The degree of supersaturation required to make water condense on the ions is independent of the gas. If we make use of the equation which has been given above, con- necting the maximum supersaturation with the charge of the drop, we obtain the result e=6 10—?° electrostatic units for a fourfold supersaturation. To obtain this number, we have, of course, ex- tended to drops of almost molecular smallness, r=7X 10—* em., an equation which could only be used with confidence when the radius was at least a thousand times as great. It is therefore somewhat remarkable that the value obtained approximates fairly closely to the values found by J. J. Thomson and by H. A. Wilson for the ionic charge. The action of the ions as condensation nuclei is not, however, completely explained, for our formula would make effi- ciency of the electrification in helping condensation independent of the sign of the charge. Now, the negative ions are found to require a less degree of supersaturation to make water form visible drops upon them than do the positive. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE IONS. To study this question we may use an expansion apparatus pro- vided with a cloud chamber, in which the air under examination is contained between two hcrizontal plates kept at shghtly different potentials. A thin stratum of the air immediately over the lower plate is exposed to the action of X rays. ee : ye 4 * I t i a + te oie Ae ] = S\; ae i sco ] Ee by Ly IE a _agho Nf (| nn A OF Omir araADe IE, 9 MUS ao 20+ ‘IA aLvdd ‘snieg—'p06| ‘Wodey ueiuosyyiWws ‘ojo “uns s ‘“MouS ws ‘ured. ‘Apnolo @ ‘ + Or Ie, ene na) _ = ee. is eet Oars or resale AEE a eat ‘', ie pers a y : ; an LS ev rh - - a. | or iv wy i 7 7 — ) 7 ‘ nS ’ so 2 ad nu 7 ral is Ve a ee rag mere) qe 2 See pr ieee »-. Ce as “sath i ad ae hf a ee a Smithsonian Report, 1904.—von Rosen. PLATE VII. Fic. 1.—LOESS FORMATION IN THE TARWA VALLEY. IN FOREGROUND FossitL BONES OF THE MASTODON ANDIUM, WASHED OuT By RAIN. Fic. 2.—MODERN INDIAN HUT IN THE TARWA VALLEY. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—von Rosen. PLATE VIII. Fia. 1. PAINTED CLAY VESSEL, TARIJA. HEIGHT, 17 CmM.—FiG. 2. RED CLAY VESSEL, TARWA. HEIGHT, 20.7 Cm —Fic. 3. COPPER IMPLEMENT, CASABINDO. BREADTH, 6.9 CM—Fla. 4. MUTILATED STONE ADZ, CASABINDO. LENGTH, 11 CM. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—von Rosen. PLATE IX. Fia. 1. WOODEN IMPLEMENT, OvO DE AGUA. LENGTH, 47 CM.—Fic. 2. WOODEN Im- PLEMENT, OvO DE AGUA. LENGTH, 31 CM.—Fia. 3. WOODEN GOBLET, CASABINDO. HEIGHT, 16.1 Cm.—FiG. 4. COPPER CHISEL WITH WOODEN HANDLE LENGTH, 14.5 Co. Smithsonian Report, 1904 —von Rosen. PLATE X. 14 15 IG 17 18 OBJECTS FOUND AT THE ANCIENT DWELLING PLACE NEAR TOLOMOSA, IN THE TARIWA VALLEY. NATURAL SIZE. A GENERAL VIEW OF THE ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. By Enaar lL. HEWETT. I. Limits or THE ReEcIon. The term “pueblo region” has not yet been acceptably defined. As used in this paper it designates that portion of the United States over which are distributed the archeological remains and the living remnants of those aboriginal North American tribes which from their chief common characteristic, that of permanent substantial house building, received from the Spanish conquerors the name of Pueblo or town Indians. It embraces almost the whole of New Mexico and Arizona, with small portions of southwestern Colorado and southeastern Utah. There is probably no reason why the term should not be extended to embrace large portions of the states of Sonora and Chihuahua, in Old Mexico. To determine the exact limits of the pueblo region is one of the tasks of American archeology that awaits completion. Special ex- ploration with a view to the determination of these limits has not yet. been undertaken. However, the archeological remains are of so conspicuous a character that the boundaries are approximately revealed. I accept the Pecos valley, in eastern New Mexico, with its tributary the Gallinas, as the eastern limit. Straggling ruins are found farther east, in Scott County, Kans., and in the Canadian valley, in Texas; but these are remains of temporary settlements. There is no well-established evidence of serious attempts by the aborigines to form permanent substantial settlements upon the “oreat plains.” Those easterly remains of pueblo culture in the Gallinas valley near where the city of Las Vegas now stands and in the Pecos valley in the vicinity of the present Anton Chico were also comparatively transitory. The northern limit is less definite, but is approximately the northern rim of the San Juan Basin, im Colorado and Utah. Such pueblo settlements as were formed north of the San Juan-Grand divide—for example, those of the Lost Canyon 583 584 GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. and others in the Dolores drainage—were of little importance. On the west and northwest the limit is the northwestern outline of the basin of the Rio Colorado. Pueblo settlements beyond this boundary were few. On the east side of the river typical pueblo culture flourished. Passing to the western side we find it gradually ceased to be characteristically pueblo. On the south the boundary as accepted in this paper is the southern rim of the Gila valley. This limitation is purely arbitrary, however, as traces of identical or but shghtly differing culture extend much farther south. An examination of the physiography of the frontiers of this cul- ture is instructive. East of the Pecos and of the Rocky mountains are the vast unbroken grassy plains, the great cattle range of recent years, and the favorite buffalo range of earlher times. The buffalo afforded the principal food supply for the plains Indians. It was an unstable source of subsistence. This, in primitive life, induces a correspondingly mobile population, whereas a culture of the Pueblo type is based on sedentary habits. Physiographic conditions account for the arrest of Pueblo culture east of the Pecos. Its failure to extend west of the Colorado is likewise a matter of physi- ography, for along the lower course of this river absolute aridity prevented settlement, while farther up the great chasm of the Grand Canyon barred migration. The reason for the arrest of the Pueblo frontier on the north with the San Juan-Grand watershed is not so apparent. To the northeast was an excellent game country, full of warlike hunting tribes, forming an effective barrier in that direc- tion, but to the northwest through Utah and Nevada the physi- ographic conditions were altogether favorable to the Pueblo culture, and an open gateway in that direction is found east of the Colorado. On the south the Gila does not constitute either a physiographic or ethnographic boundary, since similar conditions extend down into Mexico. By common usage the name “ Pueblo” is applied only to tribes within the United States, disregarding the ethnic similarities of north Mexican tribes. Here we find natural gateways for the entrance of early immigrants into Pueblo territory from the Rio Grande at the southeast and along the Gila and its tributaries from the southwest. ‘ There is thus inclosed within the boundaries above described a physiographic area which is accurately characterized by the term “semiarid,” the limits of which are approximately coextensive with the limits of the Pueblo culture. The climatic conditions are pecul- larly definite. Dryness is the prevailing condition. Precipitation is very unequally distributed throughout the year. Heavy rainfalls of from a few hours to some days’ duration are followed by months devoid of moisture. The character of the soil is such thatthe effects of rainfall rapidly disappear. Absorption, evaporation, and drain- GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. 585 age proceed with great rapidity. Between the Pecos and the Colo- rado are extensive plateaus of inferior grass lands, timbered moun- tain ranges, narrow arable valleys, and vast stretches of sandy desert. Much of the area exceeds a mile above sea level. The country was probably always deficient in game, neither were wild fruits plentiful, nor was any indigenous food supply abundant. These physiographic conditions exercised a coercive influence over the primitive culture of the Southwest, making fixed abodes and an agricultural basis of food supply necessary. To the east and north nomadic hunting tribes followed where the food quest led them. They shunned the southwestern desert for the same reason that the buffalo did. Navahoes, Comanches, and Apaches did not invade this region until comparatively recent years, for obvious reasons. In the economic systems of primitive men we find the germs of up- to-date commercialism. Wealth is obtained by producing it and by dispossessing others of it. The tribes mentioned belonged to the predatory class. As game was scarce in the Southwest, there was no reason for their going there until it became worth while for predatory reasons. The true indigines of the Southwest were necessarily agricultur- ists. Coming into a region where game and wild fruits afforded insufficient subsistence, they, probably partly from previous experi- ence and partly from immediate necessity, were constrained to sup- plement their food supply by the cultivation of food plants. The preparation of ground for agriculture and the necessary devices for the utilization of water for irrigation induced a comparatively per- manent abode and substantial house building. Settlements, with rare exceptions, were perforce clustered in narrow valleys along water- ways, or in cliffs, or on mesa tops, within reach of streams or peren- nial springs. Thus the indigines of the Southwest were and are Pueblos (town builders) throngh the coercion of physiographic environment. As an ethnic division they are a most indefinite one, embracing several well-established linguistic stocks and numerous minor dialectic groups, which become more numerous the farther back they are traced. Every existing Pueblo tribe that has been studied has been found to be composite, formed by combination of sundry ethnic groups more or less amalgamated. Incoming bands, regardless of blood or previous condition, if they came seeking permanent abode, became Pueblos, whether they amalgamated closely by blood with previous settlers or not, by virtue of their enforced adoption of the mode of life made necessary by the physiographic conditions of the region. Similarity of house life, of food, of method of acquiring the same, of inventions necessary to food production, of utensils for con- serving and transporting the secant and precious water supply, of 586 GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. experience with the elements and soil, of suffering from far ine and foes, in time led to a degree of like-mindedness which found corre- sponding expression in religious belief, in esthetic feeling, in social organization. The Pueblo tribes, while remaining unlike »s to lan- guage and somatic characteristics, naturally became alike in general and specific culture. Some of these elements of likeness may be stated as follows: They were all producing rather than predatory tribes; they preferred sedentary to nomadic life; they preferred stable rather than transitory homes; they developed a societary sys- tem founded on “mother right;” they evolved a highly complex theogony, characterized by elaborate rain and growth ceremonials; they developed highly the art of pottery with elaborate symbolic ornamentation. The name “* Pueblo” is thus almost without ethnological signifi- cance, having no reference to tribal or linguistic relationship, but relating mainly to a type of culture that developed in response to the influence of a definite physiographic environment, the limits of which were fixed by nature as above set forth. II. Crasses or ARCHEOLOGICAL REMAINS. A much greater variety of archeological remains exists in the Southwest than in other parts of the United States, owing to the per- manence of abodes, the adaptation of climate to the preservation of artifacts usually perishable, and the comparatively uninhabited con- dition. While in other parts of the country little save the contents of graves, consisting of stone implements, pottery, and osseous re- mains, now exist, and the majority of these lost or disturbed by the progress of agriculture, here we find not only graves and all the usual mortuary remains, but extensive remains of houses in every stage of preservation, with all the appurtenances of domestic life preserved therein, and numerous shrines, ceremonial deposits, and an extensive paleography displaying the esthetic and religious life. The ruins of domiciliary structures are capable of division, not on structural differences, but by situation, into the two general classes— pueblos and cliff dwellings. The first embraces all those multiple- chambered structures, either single or in clusters, that are situated on mesas or In valleys independent of support from natural rock walls. The second includes those that are wholly or in part embraced within cliffs, built against cliffs, or situated on ledges under overhanging cliffs, either single or multiple chambered. The location of the vil- lage of a pre-Columbian sedentary tribe was selected primarily with reference to water and arable lands. This was modified in time by the necessities of defense against incoming predatory enemies, which multiplied as the Pueblos accumulated food supphes sufficient to make them desirable prey. The kind of a house to be bwilt was Smithsonian Report, 1904.+-Hewett. PLATE I. tL. ae Fic. 1.—RUINS OF PUYE PUEBLO, PAJARITO PARK, NEW MEXxXICco. Fic. 2.—CLiFF DWELLINGS IN SANDIA CANYON, PAJARITO PARK, NEW MExIco (RESTORED). Restoration by Kenneth M. Chapman. ‘uBnmdeyD “WT Yjouuoy Aq WONRIOJSoy ‘(GAYOLSSY) OOIXAI) MAN ‘MYVd OLINVEVd ‘ADSYIHO] 40 O184Nd "| 3LV1d emayH—'p06| ‘oday ueiuosyziWs GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. 587 determined by the geology of the location. If in the open, sandstone or tufa blocks, bowlders, and adobe were used, as furnished by the environment, and the structure timbered with what nature supplied. If considerations of defense necessitated a cliff dwelling, its character was a geological question. Great natural caves and recesses under overhanging cliffs were selected, and houses not structurally differ- ent from the pueblos in the open were built within them. Such for- mations occur numerously throughout the Rio Colorado drainage area. Accordingly we find this class of cliff dwellings distributed over the valleys of the San Juan, Little Colorado, Gila, and their tributaries. In cliffs of volcanic tufa, or other material sufficiently friable to permit of easy working with stone tools, dwellings were excavated. Small natural caves in such regions were utilized as dwellings, with or without further excavation, and both with and without masonry. Large open caves were sometimes walled up. Interior walls were sometimes built. Houses not structurally unlike pueblos in the open were built in front of these excavated rooms against the cliffs. The name “ cavate dwelling” (originally proposed by Professor Mason) has long been applied to excavated cliff dwellings. They are distrib- uted over the four drainage basins of the pueblo region, being most numerous on the western tributaries of the Rio Grande, the northern tributaries of the San Juan, and the northern tributaries of the Gila, particularly the Rio Verde. III. Distrreurion. The distribution of the Pueblo culture, as disclosed by archeolog- ical remains, was determined primarily by drainage. The region lies on both sides of the Continental divide. The eastern portion is drained by the Rio Grande and its tributaries; the western by three principal tributaries of the Rio Colorado, viz, the San Juan, the Lit- tle Colorado, and the Gila. These four drainage basins constitute the primary seats of Pueblo culture. The primal needs of primitive man are water, food, and shelter. In the Southwest, water was first in importance. Where water was, food was possible. Such game as the country supported frequented waterways and springs, and here only were to be found the conditions necessary to the production of food plants. Accordingly, the exten- sion of the indigenous culture was directed by the drainage, and so thoroughly did it overspread the region under consideration that there is not a valley of any consequence from the Pecos to the Colo- rado, and from the San Juan to the Gila, that is without its charac- teristic archeological remains. Following is a list of the principal valleys, basins, canyons, and mesas containing ruins: 588 GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. 1. Rio Grande Drainage. Main valley from E1 Paso to Embudo Canyon. Hastern tributaries : The upper Pecos. The Gallinas. The Tunque. The Galisteo. The Pojoaque. The Nambe. The basin of the Manzano salt lakes. The Tajique. The San Pedro. The Santa Fe. The Tesuque. The Santa Cruz. Western tributaries : The Chama. The Santa Clara. Western tributaries—Continued. The Alamo. The Pajarito. : The Rito de los Frijoles. Canada de Cochiti. The Puerco. The Cebollita. Montezuma Mesa. The Ojo Caliente. The Chupadero. The Sandia. The Bravo. Canada de la Cuesta Colorada. The Jemez. The San Jose. The Alamosa. The Mimbres (inland). Numerous dry creeks of the Acoma Piateau and Magdalena district. 2. San Juan Drainage. Main valley from source to junction with Pine Creek. Southern tributaries : In New Mexico— Canyon Largo. Companero Canyon. Gobernador Canyon. Chaco Canyon. In Arizona— The Chinlee. The Hospitito. Canyon del Muerto. Gothic Wash. Marsh Pass. Canyon de Chelly. The Carrizo. Monument Canyon. The Nashlini. -aiute Canyon. Northern tributaries : In Colorado— Las Animas. Northern tributaries—Continued. In Colorado—Continued. The Mancos. Moccasin Canyon. Ute Canyon. Johnson Canyon. The Yellowjacket. la Plata. The Mesa Verde. Navaho Canyon. Ruin Canyon. The MecHIno. In Utah— The Hovenweep. The Recapture. Butler Wash. Grand Gulch. The Montezuma. The Cottonwood. Comb Wash. 3. Little Colorado Drainage. Main valley, entire course. Northern tributaries : The Moencopie. Corn Creek. The Puerco. The Carrizo. The Hopi Plateau. Le Roux Wash. Cottonwood Wash. Northern tributaries—Continued. The Zuni. Southern tributaries : Silver Creek. Walnut Canyon. The Cheyvlon. Chavez Pass. GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. 589 4. Gila Drainage. Main valley from source to below Phenix. Northern tributaries : Northern tributaries—Continued. The Verde. Beaver Creek. Oak Creek. Pine Creek. Clear Creek. The Salt. The Hast Verde. Cherry Creek. The Tonto. The Cibicu. Canyon Creek. White Mountain Creek. The Carrizo. The Pinal. The Bonito. Eagle Creek. The San Carlos. The Blue. The San Francisco. Southern tributary : The Tularosa. The San Pedro. The Cottonwood. TV. PRESERVATION. Present state——The present state of preservation of the south- western ruins depends upon several conditions. Cliff dwellings, because of their sheltered situation, are much better preserved than pueblos in the open. Of the former class those of the excavated type are naturally the best preserved, since in many of them there are no artificial walls at all and deterioration occurs only with the falling away of the natural rock. This form of deterioration does occur to a destructive extent in many places and manifestly is not preventable, but even in the absence of all protective measures thousands of speci- mens of this class of domiciles would remain in a state of perfect preservation for ages. The pueblo-like cliff dwellings being situ- ated under heavy overhanging ledges are well protected from the elements and unmolested would endure for centuries. But their destruction seems to have been made the peculiar pastime of a cer- tain class of human beings. The early explorers of the Mancos Canyon would now find, in many cases, unrecognizable heaps of stone where thirty years ago were well-preserved structures. The excava- tion of cliff dwellings without due regard to the preservation of walls should be made a grave misdemeanor. ‘The preservation of these remains is now almost entirely a matter of protection from vandals, since they are quite perfectly sheltered from the elements. The ruins of pueblos are exposed not only to vandalism but also to the constant destructive effects of the weather. In most cases the buildings are almost totally destroyed, only small fragments of walls remaining standing above the débris. Noted exceptions to this are illustrated in accompanying plates. The height of walls bears little relation to the age of ruins. The difference in the state of preser- vation is due principally to the character of the material used in con- struction and the degree of exposure to vandalism. In some cases walls have been taken down by the settlers and the stones used in the 590 GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. construction of buildings, corrals, ete. Much destruction was wrought in earlier times by the removal of the timbers for firewood by settlers and passing campers, thus causing the collapse of all walls above the first story. Ruins in the treeless desert have suffered especially from this cause. The material used in building has much to do with the state of preservation. Other things being equal, the pueblos that were built of small bowlders and adobe were the first to succumb to the elements and are most reduced, the convex surfaces of the stones affording little stability to the walls as the plastering and chinking material weathered out. The Rio Grande pueblos were mostly of this class and are reduced to mounds. Somewhat more durable were those built of tufa blocks as in the Pajarito Park oueb- los. But here also the imperfectly flattened surfaces of the stones are readily freed by the weather from the supporting mortar and chink- ing stones, and collapse of the walls readily occurs. The best pre- served of all are those built of laminated sandstone as in Chaco Canyon. The flat slabs fit together perfectly with but little mortar or chinking to weather out, so that the walls, even in the absence of timbers, remain intact until thrown down by human agency. Future preservation—The subject of preservation of American antiquities is now receiving an amount of attention never heretofore accorded it. For a quarter of a century certain thoughtful people have been calling attention to the matter and the continuous publica- tion of archeological and ethnological Hterature is bearing fruit. Learned societies, scientific and educational institutions, legislative bodies, and public-spirited individuals are beginning to devote to the question consideration commensurate with its importance. The prob- lem is an intricate one. A more general diffusion of information con- cerning it is urgently needed. Of the archeological remains in the Southwest, probably nine- tenths are on lands yet owned or controlled by the Governinent of the United States, mainly upon forest reserves, Indian reservations, lands withdrawn from entry for special purposes, military reserva- tions, and unappropriated public lands. So the question may still be dealt with through the National Congress and Ixecutive Depart- ments. In some cases it may become necessary to interest States and Territories in preservative measures, and in others private owners, railroad companies, and companies owning land grants will need to be impressed with the importance of preserving these remains for archeological research. Preservation must be: (1) Permanent in cases where the condition and historic or ethnic significance of the ruins give them special educational value. (2) Temporary in the case of all aboriginal buildings, graves, and other archeological remains not included in the first class, the pro- ‘OOIX3IN MAN ‘ASTIVA ZSWS0 ‘oNgIq NVS JO NOISSI[| GNV YMASNID 40 O1945Nd JO SNINY ‘ SUE Val II d PeameH —-'b06 1 ‘Hoday UBIUOSY}IWUS Smithsonian Report, 1994.—Hewett. PLATE IV. 1 ~ - “Seti “ne FiG. 2.—CLIFF DWELLING, MONTEZUMA MEsA, New Mexico. GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. 591 tection to be afforded until all data of importance to science have been investigated and all artifacts in connection therewith removed to inuseums for permanent preservation. Preservation is to be secured : (1) Through Congress: Under special legislation creating national archeological reservations or parks and general legislation establish- ing a system of custodianship and administration over all archeo- logical remains on the lands owned or controlled by the Government of the United States. Up to date but one measure looking toward the preservation of antiquities has ever been passed by the National Con- gress, and this provided for the preservation of a single building— Casa Grande, in Arizona. As early as 1896 a general bill was pre- pared and presented to the National Congress and similar measures have been introduced since from time to time down to the 58th Congress, but none have passed. (2) Through Executive Departments: By the exercise of powers inherent in such departments under the Constitution and General Statutes. With the single exception above noted, all that has been accomplished by way of protection of antiquities has been by this method. It is exceedingly fortunate that, as will be seen further on, so much can be provided for incidentally in connection with the ad- ministration of our great economic, Indian, and military interests, thus involving but little additional expense. By virtue of section 441, United States Revised Statutes, the care and custody of the public lands is vested in the Secretary of the Interior, and section 453 declares that the Commissioner of the Gen- eral Land Office shall perform, under the direction of the Secretary of the Interior, all executive duties in any wise respecting such lands. There can be no question that this statute places upon the Department of the Interior and the General Land Office the obligation to protect the archeological remains that are upon the public lands as definitely as it does any other values thereon. In the exercise of the power thus conferred a policy has developed in the General Land Office and Office of Indian Affairs, under the Department of the Interior, that is highly commendable as far as it goes. This policy utilizes forest supervisors and rangers, special agents, Indian school superintendents, Indian agents, additional farmers, and police in the protection of ruins in connection with and as one of their regular duties for the avowed purpose of preserving them for scientific investigation. It establishes the liberal policy that any competent scientist who desires to place the material se- cured in a public museum will be authorized by the Department of the Interior to examine ruins, but that no person will be permitted to excavate them for the purpose of acquiring specimens for traftic or private gain, and that willful destruction of historic and prehis- 592 GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. toric landmarks must cease. Especially noteworthy is the emphasis laid by the Commissioner of the General Land Office on “ the im- portance of furthering in every way possible researches with a view to increasing the knowledge of such objects and aiding the general advancement of archeological science.” Every thinking man will uphold this policy most cordially. As above stated, practically all that has been accomplished thus far has been through the exercise of powers inherent in the executive branches of the Department of the Interior. This authority is read- ily invoked, and in the past has responded with great promptness to every reasonable recommendation. By this means the following pro- tective measures have been secured: 1. Through the General Land Office: (a) All ruins on forest reserves * have been placed under the care of the regular forest rangers. This includes the vast number of ruins on the Gila Forest Reserve, the Black Mesa Forest Reserve, the San Francisco Mountains Forest Reserve, and a considerable num- ber on the Grand Canyon Forest Reserve. (6) The Pajarito Park, in New Mexico; the Mesa Verde Park, in Colorado, districts containing vast numbers of prehistoric ruins, and a tract on which stands El Morro or Inscription Rock, in New Mexico, a most important historic landmark, have been withdrawn from dis- posal under the public-land laws and recommended for permanent preservation as national parks, as has also the petrified forest in Ari- zona, withdrawn primarily for preservation as a natural wonder, but also containing important ruins. (c) The proposed Jemez and Taos forest reserves, in New Mexico, and the proposed Rio Verde Forest Reserve, in Arizona, have been withdrawn from entry or disposal. This will incidentally preserve a vast number of important ruins. (d) The ruins situated on unappropriated public lands have been held to be subject to the authority of the Department of the Interior and orders have been issued through special agents prohibiting injury and unauthorized excavation. 2. Through the Office of Indian Affairs: (a) Special custodians have been appointed for ruins-in Canyons del Muerto and de Chelly on the Navaho Reservation in Arizona; for those on Mesa Verde on the southern Ute Reservation in Colo- rado, and for those on the Zuni Reservation in New Mexico. (b) The office prohibits all unauthorized persons from entering Indian reservations and despoiling ruins or carrying away remains of antiquity. a Jurisdiction over forest reserves transferred to Bureau of Forestry, Depart- ment of Agriculture, February 1, 1905. GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. 598 (c) Order of February 11, 1905, prohibits licensed Indian traders from dealing in prehistoric wares, thus removing from the Indians and other persons the temptation to despoil the ancient cemeteries for the sake of the small profits to be derived therefrom. This corrects an abuse that has been very prevalent and disastrous. Up to the present time there has been no coordination of the efforts of the various departments of government along this line; no general supervision Is exercised ; no systematic reports on the condition of the ruins are required; no system for regulating excavations and the disposition of specimens exists. The matter should no longer be dealt with sporadically. What is needed is a comprehensive system of administration and regulation for the whole subject. Measures for the preservation of antiquities can not be intelligently framed without consideration of their situation with reference to ownership or jurisdiction. In this respect all those of the Pueblo region may be classified as in the following list. Below each class I have indicated the executive officer having jurisdiction over the class of lands named and necessarily of all antiquities thereon. 1. Those on national reservations or parks: The Secretary of the Interior. & 2. Those on forest reserves : The head of the Bureau of Forestry, under the Secretary of Agriculture. 3. Those on Indian reservations : The Commissioner of Indian Affairs, under the Secretary of the Interior. 4. Those on military reservations : The Secretary of War. 5. Those on unappropriated public lands: The Commissioner of the General Land Office, under the Secretary of the Interior. 6. Those on lands withdrawn from entry for special purposes : The Commissioner of the General Land Office, under the Secretary of the Interior. Those on State lands. Those on private lands (railroad lands, grants, homesteads, ete.). cs GO In the appended list of important districts and sites the jurisdiction if known is indicated. The first class includes at present only Casa Grande in Arizona, but important additions to this class are contemplated by certain bills that have been before Congress for some years. The protection of ruins in such reservations or parks is always adequately provided for by special service. The second class, those on forest reserves, includes, as will be seen by reference to the list, a large proportion of the most important ruins. By act of Congress of February 1, 1905, the administration of forest reserves was transferred from the Commissioner of the General Land Office, Department of the Interior, to the forester and sm 1904——38 594 GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. chief of the Bureau of. Forestry, Department of Agriculture. Forest reserves are constantly patrolled by a force of forest rangers, and the policy developed in the General Land Office of making it the duty of these officials to protect ruins from despoliation is continued under the Bureau of Forestry. This is all that could be desired. It may be said that ruins of this class are the most fortunately situated of all, for they are no longer lable to alienation by sale or entry of the lands, and are adequately policed, with little or no expense for special service. Large additions will be made to this class when the pro- posed Jemez, Taos, and Rio Verde forest reserves are established. The third class, those on Indian reservations, includes a large pro- portion of the most important sites. The Office of Indian Affairs fully recognizes the obligation to protect the ruins and prevent unau- thorized excavation, and is, moreover, furnished with appropria- tions and clothed with authority to utilize the same for the em: ployment of such additional service as is necessary. Special cus- todians are employed in districts of unusual importance, and this service will doubtless be extended as need therefor is shown. It may be said that all ruins that come under this class are in a position to be adequately protected. The fourth class, those on military reservations, are not numerous, and the attention of the War Department has not of late been called to the necessity of protecting them. Undoubtedly this Department would take the necessary steps if advised of the desirability of the same, and it doubtless has facilities for effective custodianship with- out providing special service therefor. The fifth class, those on public lands, are quite numerous, but not nearly so numerous as has been supposed. The inadequacy of all general archeological measures that have been proposed heretofore, so far as I have been able to determine, lies fundamentally in the fact that they have not taken cognizance of the legal definition of the term “ public lands.” The courts have held the term “ public lands ” to signify the Federal lands lying open on the market for preemp- tion or homestead, and that when the Government has reserved cer- tain holdings from preemption they ceased to be * publie lands.” 4 Thus limited, class five will probably not include over 15 per cent of all the ruins on lands owned or controlled by the Government of the United States, and on the list of important districts and sites it will be seen that very few fall within this category. These lands, with everything situated thereon, are constantly being alienated by pre- emption, railroad selections, and lieu selections. Furthermore, with «Oral opinion rendered by Judge Wellborn in civil suits in southern district of California against A. H. and I. A. Blassingame. See also United States v, Tygh Valley Land and Live Stock Company (76 Fed. Rep., 693). Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Hewett. PLATE V. Fia. 1.—RUINS OF HUNGOPAVI, CHACO CANYON, NEW MEXICco. FiG. 2.—RUINS OF KINKLIZHIN, NEAR CHACO CANYON, NEW Mexico. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Hewett. PLATE VI. Fia. 2.—CLIFF DWELLING, MESA VERDE PARK, COLORADO. GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. 595 the admission of New Mexico and Arizona as States, about 23,000,000 acres of public lands within their borders will pass to those Common- wealths, and their legislatures will have to be invoked for the pro- tection of ruins thereon. There are few, if any, remaining cases where it is desirable that agricultural or otherwise useful lands should be withheld from preemption or other disposal because of the ruins situated upon them. Where such cases do exist, it would be possible for the General Land Office, if informed by recognized authority, to withhold by temporary withdrawal the smallest acre- age adequate to the protection of the buildings, cemeteries, ete., until excavated and reported on, after which the tracts should be released. There are several important isolated sites and some tnportant dis- tricts situated on lands completely worthless for agricultural or other economic purposes which should be withdrawn by the General Land Office, since any preemption of them would be solely for the purpose of securing possession of the antiquities thereon in violation of the spirit of the land laws. Cases in point are the Chaco Canyon ruins, in northwestern New Mexico, and those of Montezuma Mesa, south- west of Acoma. The status of ruins on public lands, as that term is here used, in not at all satisfactory. The General Land Office has done what was possible by way of withdrawal and recommendation for Congressional action in cases of exceptional importance in which no economic interests were involved, and has prohibited unauthorized excavation, but it has been ruled that under no existing provision of law can funds be used to pay for custodianship. Accordingly the protection afforded must of necessity be inadequate. A slight amend- ment to the sundry civil bill would remedy this. Those of the sixth class, situated on lands withdrawn from entry or other disposal for special purposes, are very numerous, as may be seen from the list of important districts and sites. It is to be hoped that all in this class may be speedily transferred to classes 1 and 2, as contemplated by their withdrawal. With the establishment of Pajarito National Park and the Jemez and Taos forest reserves the efficient and permanent protection of a large proportion of the most important of the ruins of the Rio Grande drainage will be assured. The creation of the Mesa Verde National Park and saving, by with- drawal, of as many of the Chaco Canyon pueblos as are on lands still open to preemption, would insure the preservation of a fair propor- tion of the important sites of the San Juan drainage. With the establishment of the Rio Verde forest reserve all the great groups of the Gila drainage will have been brought incidentally under ade- quate permanent custodianship. ‘The status of ruins of: the sixth class is more satisfactory than those of the fifth. They are preserved from alienation by preemption or other disposal and warning notices 596 GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. are kept posted thereon, prohibiting injury and unauthorized exca- rations, but these lands are not policed for the same reason that those of class 5 are not. However, the orders of the Department of the Interior have been effective to a great extent and ruins on withdrawn lands are suffering but little from vandalism. The seventh class, those situated on State lands, is inconsiderable at present, but with the admission of the Territories and subsequent segregation of their lands this class will require consideration. As segregation will not, as a rule, be in large areas, but by single sec- tions, large districts of ruims will not be affected, but important isolated sites will be, and the State governments should then be invoked to exercise protective authority over them. The eighth class, those on private lands, includes many important sites. The number of private land grants. in New Mexico espe- clally, is very large, and some of them are covered with important ruins. Many are on railroad selections and some on small holdings or homesteads. Some owners of homesteads and grants realize the importance of preserving these ruins for scientific research and exercise due custodianship over them. Others use the stones for building material, and timbers, if any, for firewood. The above is as comprehensive a presentation of the status of archeology in the pueblo region as I am capable of making within the limits set for this paper. It is based on many years of personal residence and field work in the Southwest, in connection with the researches of all other investigators of the pueblo field, the results of which I have freely availed myself of. During the past six months T have had the opportunity to give considerable attention to the phases of the subject dealt with in this paper, for which the resources of the General Land Office, the Office of Indian Affairs, the Bureau of Forestry, and the Bureau of Amercian Ethnology have been most cordially placed at my disposal. I feel that my con- clusions are at least not hastily drawn. V. Synopsis oF Imporrantr Districts AND SITES. In this arrangement I have endeavored to point out only those archeological districts and special sites which, by reason of their character, situation, state of preservation, or ethnic significance, are particularly worthy of investigation. The list is by no means a complete one. Doubtless many are omitted that are as important as those named, and it is to be remembered that every aboriginal site or object is of sufficient importance to warrant investigation. In order to indicate, when known, how the various sites are located with reference to jurisdiction, I have used the following abbrevia- tions; GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. Nat. Res., situated on national reservation or park. For. Res., situated on forest reserve. Ind. Res., situated on Indian reservation, Mil. Res., situated on military reservation. Pub. L., situated on public lands. With. L., situated on withdrawn lands. Pri. L., situated on private lands. The asterisk is used to indicate sites of sufficient importance demand permanent preservation. I.—THE RIO GRANDE DRAINAGE, 1. In Upper Pecos Valley: * Pecos, Ind. Res. Seyupa. Tonchun. San Antonio. 2. About the Salt Lakes of the Manzano: *Tabira (Gran Quivira) Pri. L. Quarra. Abo. Tajique. . In the Galisteo Basin: Yamphamba (San Cristobal). Ipera (San Lazaro). Tagewinge (Galisteo). Hlishi (Pueblo Largo). 4. In the San Pedro Basin: Tunque. Paako or WKukua, Pri. L. 5. In the Santa Fe Basin: Tsinatay (La Bajada). Tsiguma (La Cienega). Kuaka. Kuapoge (It. Marey) Mil. Res.¢ 6. In the San Ildefonso Basin: Sacona, Ind. Res. Kyamunge, Ind. Res. In the main valley of the Rio Grande: Katishtya (Old San Felipe) Ind. Res. Perage (Old San Ildefonso) Ind. Res. Puaray. Kuaua. 8. In the Chama Basin: Tsawari. Jaa hroty ers gia) Oy Sepawi. Homayo, Pri. L. 9. The Taos region ® With. L.: Numerous sites in the vicinity of Taos and Picurts. Sy) aCeded to the city of Santa Fe. CO = to b'This is partly included in the lands withdrawn for the proposed ‘Taos Forest . Reserve, 598 GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. The majority of the above (1 to 9) are sites occupied within the last four centuries and abandoned at intervals from the time immediately preceding the Spanish occupation down to 1838. The years imme- diately following 1680 were particularly disastrous to the Rio Grande Pueblos. Archeological research at these sites should be fruitful in throwing light upon the first influences of the exotic civilization upon the indigenous tribes. They are all ruins of considerable magnitude, but in many cases reduced to mounds. 10. * Pajarito Park,¢ With. L.: Shufinne. Otowi. Puye. (Plate 1, fig. 1.) Tsankawi. ‘ Cliff dwellings of Shufinne Mesa. Cliff dwellings of Puye Mesa. Cliff dwellings of Chupadero Canyon. Cliff dwellings of Sandia Canyon. (Plate 1, fig. 2.) This is strictly a prehistoric district and archeologically one of the richest in the Pueblo region. The cliff dwellings are of the excavated type and exist in vast numbers, almost every southern escarpment being honeycombed with them. Besides the identified pueblo ruins named, several others of almost equal importance and hundreds of minor ones are scattered over the district. The permanent reserva- tion of this tract will preserve intact a fairly complete exhibit of the prehistoric civilization of the Rio Grande Valley. This is now assured, for it falls within the limits of the proposed Rio Jemez Forest Reserve, and will in due time come under the custodianship of the Bureau of Forestry if it does not become a national park. The only collections that have been made from this district are in the museum of the New Mexico Normal University at Las Vegas. 11. On Ramon Vigil Grant,® Pri. L.: (Tewa; Tchire, bird; ge, house = house of the bird people: Spanish, Pajarito, a little bird.) * Tchirege. (Plate 11.) Cliff dwellings of Pajarito Canyon. Navakwi. Numerous large and small pueblos of Mesa del Pajarito. ay here restrict the name Pajarito Park to the district 10 miles long by 4 wide that is under withdrawal and consideration for a national park. (H. R. 9269, 5Sth Cong.) As originally proposed and withdrawn, it was much more extensive, and received its name from what was the central geographical feature of the entire district, viz, Pajarito Canyon. This has since been found to be largely on Ramon Vigil Grant, which was almost surrounded by the proposed park. As the lines are now drawn, it creates Pajarito Park with the “ Pajarito nN left out. b'This is the original Pajarito Park. The value of the ruins is appreciated by the owners and they are under proper custodianship. ‘YNOZIUY ‘AIISHO 30 NOANVO ‘VONV1g vSV9 pe ae < ee ‘HA S3Lv1d HEMeH—'PO6 | ‘HOdey ueluosy}Wws ‘VNOZIYY ‘OLYSNI 140 NOANVO ‘SAVOD AWWA ONY SNITTIAMG 44119 TWA 341d GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. 599 12. Cochiti district,¢ With. L.: * Tyuonyi. Pueblo Viejo. *La Cueva Pintada. Haatse. IKuapa. * Stone lions of Potrero de las Vaecas. * Cliff dwellings of Rito de los Frijoles. Cliff dwellings of Canada de la Cuesta Colorada. 13. In upper Jemez Valley,2 With. L.: * Giusewa and Mission Church of San Diego. (Plate 111.) Large number of important pueblo ruins in valley and gn adjoining mesas. 14. In the San Jose Valley : San Mateo, Pri. L. Cubero, Ind. Res. 15. * In Ceboliito Valley and Montezuma Mesa, Pub. L. : A large number of important pueblo sites unnamed. (Plate ty.) 16. In the Magdalena region, Pub. LL. : A number of important pueblo sites unnamed. II.—THE SAN JUAN DRAINAGE. 1. * In Chaco Canyon: Pueblo Pintado, Pub. L. Wejiji (sindoklis), Pub. L. Hungopavi,¢ Pri. lL. (Plate v, fig. 1.) Una Vidase— Brit 1. Chettrokettle,@ Pri. L. Pueblo Bonito,@ Pri. L. Casa Rinconada,@? Pri. L. Vueblo del Arroyo@ (Tabakin), Pri. L. Kinkletsoi, Pub. L: (Plate vi, fig: 2.) Casa Chiquita, Pub. L. Pueblo Alto, Pub. L. Penasco Blanco (Talakin), Pri. L. Sinkletzin,¢ Pri. L. This is unquestionably the finest and best preserved group of pueblo ruins on American soil. It is a matter of great regret that the General Land Office was not invoked in time to preserve intact a} apply this name to the district north of Cochiti, which embraces the ruins of the former habitations of the Cochiti Indians. It was included in the original withdrawal for the proposed Pajarito National Park, but is omitted from the bill (H. R. 7269, 58th Cong.) creating the same. It includes the lovely Rito de los Irijoles of Bandelier and Lammis. It is fortunately included within the limits of the proposed Rio Jemez Forest Reserve. b'These ruins are upon the lands withdrawn for the proposed Rio Jemez Forest Reserve. ¢'These pueblos are on railroad lands to which title has passed irrevocably. d'These are 6n the homestead of Mr. Richard Wetherill. This homestead has been suspended by the General Land Oftice and entry may be canceled. 600 GENERAL VIEW OF ARCHEOLOGY OF THE PUEBLO REGION. this remarkable group of prehistoric buildings with all their auxil- lary remains when it could have been done by the withdrawal of the entire tract. This is no longer possible, since every alternate section is now patented railroad land. The central group of ruins, 1. e., Pueblo Bonito and its environs, have passed to private ownership unless annulled by the General Land Office. This tract of country is absolutely worthless for any economic purpose. The fate of the great body of ruins situated here is a striking illustration of the need for comprehensive legislation on this subject. This loss to science and history is solely the result of there being no one whose business it is to look after such matters. Through the generosity of the Messrs. Hyde, of New York City, a splendid collection obtained by the partial excavation of Pueblo Bonito is preserved in the American Museum of Natural History in New York City. 2. On tributaries of Chaco Canyon, Pub. L. : *Kinklizhin. (Plate v, fig. 2.) * Kinyaah. * Kinbiniola. Kinahzin. These buildings are of the same class and state of preservation as those of Chaco Canyon and probably belong with them ethnically. 3. In Canyon de Chelly and its tributaries, Ind. Ies.: Cliff dwellings and pueblos of Canyon de Chelly. (Plate vit.) Cliff dwellings and pueblos of Canyon del Muerto. (Plate vit.) Cliff dwellings and pueblos of Monument Canyon. This is a remarkable group, consisting of a large number of pueb- los and pueblo-like cliff dwellings in an excellent state of preserva- tion, and being on an Indian reservation, under a custodian, their protection is assured. Corresp. Bl. d. d. Gesellsch. f. Anthr., Ethnol., Urgesch., Dec., 1903, p. 176 (Arch. f. Anthrop., n. f. I, 4, 1904). THE PAINTING OF HUMAN BONES AMONG THE INDIANS. 615 are unearthed eight to fourteen days after burial. The bones are thoroughly cleaned.’ . ‘They were brought and all parts of the skeleton were, before our eyes, painted red. They began with the skull. The whole was apparently a mode of decoration.” ‘The painted skull was additionally pasted over with red feathers. All the bones, skull included, were placed in a basket, which served for the final interment and which also received a coat of red, being in addition well covered with red feathers. The red pigment was a vegetable substance obtained from a certain seed.” IT have thus far found no historical evidence of bone painting in Peru. There is no example of it among the over 200 Peruvian skulls in the National Museum. Among more than 500 ancient Peruvian crania of the Bandeher collection in the American Museum there is but one that shows distinct red stains, but these seem to be more accidental than otherwise. But in the more recent Gaffron collection in that museum there is a male adult skull, from the neigh- borhood of Cuzco (No. 99-3682), which shows over large portions of its surface a firm pink incrustation, in all probability the remnant of intentionally applhed paint. According to E. Krause there is in the teifs-Sttibel collection of crania from Ancon, Peru, one of which the we face is covered with * zinnober.” “ The painting of designs on human skulls on this continent requires but few words. I have seen only five specimens of this sort and found no mention of others. Four of the crania, one from Cali- fornia, two Wasco from the Columbia River, and one from the Santa Cruz Island, California, are in the National Museum, and one found by Mr. H. I. Smith at Lytton, British Columbia, is in the American Museum of Natural History. The design on all but the Santa Cruz Island specimen consists of red, or in one of the Wasco skulls red and blue, cross made in very much the same manner (see fig. 2, pl. mm). It is in all probability a recent work of some of the Chris- tianized Indians. The Santa Cruz Island skull shows a partly faded, apparently ancient design, in black, above and under the orbits and on the maxille (see fig. 2, pl. 1).. A human skull, the vault of which has been cut off, while the remainder was painted with brown streaks and fitted into a stringed musical instrument, is pre- served in the Metropolhtan Museum of Art, New York, and was supposed to be of south American origin, but it came in all proba- bility from Africa. THK SIGNIFICANCE OF BONE PAINTING AMONG INDIANS. Bone painting among the American aborigines 1s most probably a development of the custom of painting the corpse, just as the latter is an extension of the custom of painting the living. Paint. @ Globus, 19 Dee., 1901, p. 861; Verhandl. Berl. Anthr. Ges., 30, 285. > 616 THE PAINTING OF HUMAN BONES AMONG THE INDIANS. particularly red paint, was, and to some extent still is, among many American Indians, a part of the warrior’s preparation for battle, and it was a mark of fitness, elevation, bravery, honor; and some of the tribes honored their distinguished dead, or even all their dead, with the same paint, apphed in more or less the same manner in which it was used by the living. The bones of at least the naturally deceased friends were generally regarded with rev- erence. According to Brinton (op. cit., p. 257) the opinion underlying all customs connected with the preservation of bones among various American people was “that a part of the soul, or one of the souls, dwelt in the bones; that these were the seeds which, planted in the earth, or preserved unbroken in safe places would in time put on once again a garb of flesh and germinate into living human beings. Language in some localities seems to strengthen this theory. The Iroquois word for bone is ‘ eshen, for soul, ‘ atéshen, literally that which is within the bone. (Bruyas, Rad. Verborum Troquceorum. ) ™ an Athapascan dialect bone is * yani, soul, ‘i-yune.’ (Busch- mann, Athap, Sprachstamm, pp. 182, 188.)” Yet there may have been instances in which the flesh or the bones of the dead were partly or wholly painted for other reasons. It is probable that in some instances the paint was considered a necessary or advantageous or proper equipment for the journey to the future world. Lafitau (vol. 11, 8, p. 388) says that the Indians “ apphed the paint to the head and face in order that the horrors of death should not be seem.” According to Boas, among the Chinook, who bury their dead mostly in canoes raised above the ground, after a time that in this tribe such paint is connected with some superstition, Finally, according to Bandelier, among the Muysca in Bogota, New Granada, bodies painted with red ocher were a sign of deep mourn- ing. Judging from the general want among Indians of rational notions regarding the natural processes in the living or dead, it seems very improbable (though I formerly was inclined to think otherwise) that the paint was in any instance applied simply as a preservative. oe the burial place is made good with red paint,” which imphes REFERENCES. ANTONOVITCH. Transactions of the Archeological Congress of Vilna, 1893; ref. in L’Anthropologie, Paris, 1894, p. 73. BANDELIER, A. FE. Gilded Man, New York, 1893, p. 14. BARTRAM, WM. ‘Travels through North and South Carolina, London, 1792, p. 514. Brier. Voyage de la Terre Equinoxiale, 111, chap. 14. BRINTON, D. G. Myths of the New World, p. 257. CATLIN. GEO. Manners, Customs, ete, of North American Indians, 1884, 1, p. o. CHARLEVOIX, P. F. X. Journal d’un Voyage, ete., vI, p. 107. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Hrdlicka. PLATE III. MALE SKULL, PAINTED RED, FROM LA PAZ, LOWER CALIFORNIA. THR PAINTING OF HUMAN BONES AMONG THE INDIANS. 617 CorRRESPOND. Bl. d. deutsch. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., ethnol., Urgesch., Nov., 1903, 155; Dee., 1908, 175-176 (Arch. f. Anthrop., N. F., 1, 4, 1904): Stieda, Thilenius, Klaatsech, Martin, Adachi, von den Steinen, Ranke. Dicuet, Leon. Rapport sur une Mission Scientifique dans Ia Basse-Californie, Nouy. Arch. d. Missions Scientifiques, Paris, 1x, pp. 41—H. Douciass, A. BE. Thomas’s Catalogue of Prehistoric Works East of the Rocky Mountains, p. 40; Proce. A. A. A. S., xxx1, 1882, pp. 586, 587. PHRENREICH, P. Congrés des Américanistes, Comptes Rendus, Paris, 1890; ref. in L’Anthropologie, 1891, p. 514. GARCILASSO DE LA VEGA. Historia de Ja Conquista, 1, 4, p. 15. GoMARA, LOPEZ DE. Historia General de las Indias, t1, Cap. 2. GuMILI.A. Historia del Orinoco, 1, p. 199 et seq.: ref. in Brinton, Myths of the New World, p. 255. JESUIT RELATIONS. IKXRAUSE, HE. Zur. Frage der Rotfiirbung vorgeschichtlicher Skelettknochen ; Globus, 19 Dee., 1901, 861-867 (with bibliograph. references). LAFITAU, J. F. Moeurs des Sauvages, Paris, 1724, 11, pp. 388, 408, 413. LAWSON, JOHN. A New Voyage to Carolina, London, 1709, pp. 21-22. Lewis and Chark. Expedition to the Sources of the Missouri, Dublin, 1817, book 1, p. 259. Loskiet, G. H. Hist. of the Mission of the United Brethren Among the Indians of North America, London, 1794, part 1, pp. 49, 118, 119. MAKOovSKy. A. Verhandl. Berl. Anthrop. Ges., 26, 425. Matieana, J. Verhandl. Berl. Anthrop. Ges., 27, 688. Morecan, L. H. League of the Ho-De-No-Sau-Nee or Iroquois, Rochester, 1851, pp. 174, 175. Noanis, P. W. See YARRow, H. C. PERRIN DU LAc. Voyage dans les deux Louisianes, Paris, 1805, p. 275. PornHertie£. Histoire de l’Amérique Septentrionale, Paris, 1722, 111, pp. 9, 10. RomANs, B. Klemm: Werkzeuge und Waffen, p. 31 et seq. ¢ Lumboltz: Unter Menschenfressern, 1, 122 et seq. SLING CONTRIVANCES FOR PROJECTILE WEAPONS. 621 throwing,’ the discharge, therefore, occurring by the forward thrust of the sling-lengthened arm. This male spear sling occurs in different forms in Australia and in South America. + The female spear sling is provided with a groove along the upper side, which terminates in a cavity near the outer end. Into this groove the spear is laid lengthwise, and either its somewhat tapering end or hook set-thereon is inserted into the cavity. (See the second variety of Greenland spear slings.) The spear hes firmly upon the shaft and easily releases itself from the cavity. The use is, in gen- eral, the same as the male spear slings. This class, with various modifications, is dispersed throughout Melanesia (especially in New Guinea), Micronesia, and Greenland. Mixed spear slings are intermediate between the other two kinds. In these, at the end of the grooves on the upper side, a hook whittled from the shaft or inserted independently protrudes horizontally, or forward somewhat obliquely. On this the hollowed end in the butt of the spear is hooked. Its use is the same as in the other kinds. This class has the widest dispersion, being found among the north- astern Asiatics, American Eskimos, in southern North America. in Central America, and one variety in South America; also very prob- ably in France. The spear slings of the Greenland Eskimos are some- what analogous in construction and use. The grips of the spear slings are greatly varied, in many classes no special grip being present; the shaft is grasped at the smoothed end (Austrahan). With others, on the contrary, care is taken that the hand may have a firm hold, and that the grip may not slip out of it easily. Tor this purpose the shaft at that point is made either rough by indentations or notches (Australian), wrapped with hair (Austra- lian), or covered with rosin, in which a shell or stone is often stuck, to make a firm grip easy; a hole is made, in which the forefinger is inserted (Eskimo) ; one or more pegs project from the border, against which the index and other fingers rest (Eskimo, South American) ; or, finally, a grip is set on, in which again finger holes occur (Eskimo, Central and South American). The operation of the spear sling is very important, as with it one should be able to send the implement three or four times as far as with the bare hands. The natives of Australia, for instance, hit quite accurately at 40 paces;’ at 10 paces their spears still bear de- struction to the victim;° and an Englishman saw a native of Port Jackson (Sidney) aiming the spear sling at a mark 276 feet away.” While spears can be thrown 50 to 75 feet with the bare hand, from a4\Kklemm: Unter Menschenfressern. > Klemm: Werkz. und Waffen. p. 31 et seq. ¢ Lauterer: Austral. u. Tasmania, p. 272 et seq. 622 SLING CONTRIVANCES FOR PROJECTILE WEAPONS. the spear sling they easily reach 200 to 300 feet. Indeed, according to Clutterbuck,’ the Australians are said to have made even 150 yards with the spear sling. Whether these last statements are entirely accurate we can not decide, but one constantly sees references to great distances attained by aid of the spear sling. LOCALITIES AND TYPES. We now turn from this general view to the localities where the spear sling is used, to familiarize ourselves with the types there occur- ring. The region in which spear slings are most frequent, even at the present day, is Austraha. The principal weapon of the Australians is the spear, 3 to 4 meters in length, and all Australian spears except those used in catching fish are thrown by means of a sling, ralled “ wommera,’”’ which is used both in war and in the chase. It was at one time distributed throughout Australia, but, being sup- planted more and more by firearms, slings are now limited to West Austraha from the north and the territory beyond New South Wales and Victoria. The male type only is found in Australia, and may be divided into two large groups. In the first the hook and shaft are in one piece, while in the second group the hook is a separate piece (bone, tooth, wax), often of different material than that of the shaft, fastened on by winding with reed and thread and smeared with wax. This first group occurs only in Melbourne and vicinity. The grip of the shaft is rounded, often thickened by means of wax, sometimes roughened by means of incisions to prevent the hand from slipping during slinging. The shaft broadens toward the center and sud- denly tapers to a point at the outer end. The under side from the center out is slanted or rounded toward both edges, the upper side shehtly hollowed. Very broad and very narrow forms occur, as well as round, between which are all intermediate degrees. They are often carved, especially on the back, with all sorts of figures and with the line ornamentation so general in Australia (pl. 1, figs. 1 and 2). Those of the second group, with the hook composed of wood, bone, tooth, or wax set into the outer end of the handle, are subdivided into two types, with numerous subdivisions. ‘Type I comprises broader or narrower blades, or those slightly hollowed on the under side, while Type IT is of round shafts. Type I again falls into two sub- divisions: (a@) The spear sling is more or less broad, therefore leaf- shaped; the hook is fastened at the upper end upon one side; (0) a Wallace: Australasia, 3d ed., p. 124 et seq. b Waitz: Anthropol. der Naturvoélker, VI, p. 472 et seq. ¢ Ratzel: Volkerkunde, II ed., p. 45 et seq. SLING CONTRIVANCES FOR PROJECTILE WEAPONS. 623 the slings are likewise rather broad, the hook not fastened to the flat surface but to the edge of the shaft. The spear slings with the hook upon the face are found from King Georges Sound to Geography Bay,” in the great west Australian desert, in Nullagine, on the table- land, and by the Sherlock River.2. The second kind is therefore restricted to West Australia. It is a thin, extremely broad, long-oval board, often hollow on the upper side and slightly curved upon the lower, the small wooden hook is set upon the face, so that great wind resistance is overcome during use; why the shaft is so wide is not known; at least, no advantage is to be derived from the breadth. The grip is composed of a lump of gum, applied either symmetrically or slightly sidewise, from which protrudes a piece of shell or stone, the latter serving for a firmer grip, sharpening the spear points, and generally as a cutting instrument, since it has an edge.“ This type of spear sling is quite abundant (pl. 1, fig. 3). The type found among the Nannines (West Australia)? is similar, it is a not very broad, parallel-sided, flat stick, about 1.20 meters long, tapering at both ends. The wooden hook is attached above. on the face, a piece of gum is applied for a grip, in which is a piece of shell or stone (pl. 1, fig. 4). 'This leads to the type used from Beagle Bay north- ward as far as Port Darwin,’ at Carpenter Gulf, and in the northern territory of South Australa;! perhaps even farther inland to the Eiry Lake. The shaft is of nearly the same form as the preceding, execept that it is not parallel-sided, but tapers toward the outer end. The grip is clearly defined and allows a firm grasp. The hook being bound to the shaft with cords and gum, the entire shaft is then covered with a reddish earth. Decorative figures are often carved upon the sides (pl. 1, fig. 5). The type found from Port Darwin to Port Essington and on Mel- ville Island is quite as flat, narrow, and pointed, it differs from the foregoing in that the shafts are bent and very elastic. The handle consists of a pear-shaped piece of gum. That. part of the shaft next the grip is ornamented in lines. What advantage these particular shafts present is not known, as they are elastic, they permit a bow thrust, and at all events, they make throwing a greater distance pos- sible. They are quite rare (pl. 1, fig. 6). A class which but partly «According to y. Luschan: Das Wurfholz in Neu-Holland und Oceanien, p. 138. » According to statements found with the shafts in the Leipzic Museum of Ethnography (Grassi Museum). e Schurtz: Urgeschichte der Kultur, p. 339. @ Pour examples of this type are in the Leipziger Museum fiir V6lkerkunde. e After v. Luschan: Das Wurfhoiz, p. 140. ? According to statements on the shafts in the Leipzic Museum. y After King. See Waitz; Anthropologie der Naturvélker, VI, p. 742 et seq. 624 SLING CONTRIVANCES FOR PROJECTILE WEAPONS. belongs to this group is used on the Murray River. The grip is very long and cylindrical; the shaft then swells to a broad central portion, arched underneath and flat on top, which graduates toward the outer end and terminates into a rounded staff, where a kangaroo tooth is fastened. The grip is made rough or has opossum fur applied to prevent the slipping of the fingers. This kind forms the transition to the second type, the rounded stick (pl 1, fig. 5). The second group of the first type is of broader or narrower shafts, to which the hook is attached, not upon the face, but upon the edge. They are found particularly upon the Cape York Peninsuia and in northern Queenland; perhaps also in New South Wales. Certain ‘ariations again appear within this type: On one kind, usual on Cape York Peninsula, two long oval shells are attached slantingly above. Whether these serve merely as a grip for the hand or some further advantage is to be attained through them is not known (pl. 1, fig. 8). Another kind, also from Cape York Peninsula, is substantially narrower and shorter and does not have the shell, but a quite smooth grip, which, however, has distinct lashings. It may be that the shell has been lost; in that event both these types would be in a single group (pl. 1, fig. 9). Lastly, a third type similar to the boomerang occurs in northern Queensland. As the tooth protrudes beyond the edge, it is quite probable that this shaft was also a boomerang, and is a doubly useful weapon (pl. 1, fig.°10.) Only with these three weapons is it possible to swing the stick in a circle, accord- ing to v. Luschan’s principle. But at all events, as the hook is on the edge, these three types serve to develop the utmost shnging force of the shaft, for by it the wind resistance is easily overcome and distance and accuracy substantially increased. These are, per- haps, the most perfect spear slings in Australia. One reported by Klemm “¢ may also belong here, as it occurs at Port Jackson and in the vicinity of Sydney. He merely says that a native attained a distance of 276 feet with the spear sling. He characterizes the implements generally as 5 feet long, with a small peg or hook at the outer end and a shell at the opposite for ornament, which serves as a grip. The second type of the second group presents long, rounded shafts, and is usual in northeastern Australia, especially in the northern territory. These are plain, rounded shafts about 1.20 meters long, tapering slightly toward the outer end. The grip is thickened by means of concentric layers of gum? or wound with cords twisted from human hair, showing a large tuft at the end,’ and the hook is a aKlemm: Werkzeug und Waffen, p. 31 et seq. b According to vy. Luschan; Das Wudfholz, pp. 142-145. ce Schmeitz: Intern. Arch., 1, p. 136 et seq.; Uhle: Intern. Arch., I, p. 196. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Krause Peace nee aN SLINGS FOR HURLING WEAPONS. PLATE II. Krause. Smithsonian Report. 1904. SLINGS FOR HURLING WEAPONS. SLING CONTRIVANCES FOR PROJECTILE WEAPONS. 625 large wooden tooth or a lump of gum which ends in a sharp point (plea hie. 11). ee Luschan “ gives ten or twelve sharply defined types of Australian spear slings, which are characteristic of the localities where found. These types have been discarded here, and a new division made as follows: The chief characteristic on the spear sling is the hook. According to its various modes of attachment, spear slings are divided into those having hook and shaft in one piece, and those in which the hook is attached independently. The latter, according to shape, have broad shafts, board-shaped, or round shafts, with two smaller groups of those with hook on the face and those with hook on the edge. In the greater or less breadth of the shafts, in the variety of grips, in the straight or twisted forms of shafts, there are not such varieties for characterizing a main division as in the different fastenings of the hook, the principal piece on the male spear sling. AIL these slight differences must be regarded as local modifications of the present main type. The second area in which spear slings appear is northeast from Australia, in Melanesia, or, rather New Guinea and Micronesia, in which area spear slings are chiefly used as weapons of war,? whether also of the chase there are no accounts. It probably earlier spread through Melanesia and Micronesia, but is known only from New Guinea, the Fiji Islands, the Carolines, Pelew, and Marianas. ’ Diction. archéol. de la Gaule. Atlas. ¢ Ibid. 644 MATERIALS TO WRITE UPON BEFORE INVENTION OF PRINTING. (fig. 10),¢ in West Gothland, which presents runic characters of the third century of our era; the upright stone of St. Dogmaél, in Pem- brokeshire (Wales), upon which are found two inscriptions, one in Ogham, the other in Latin characters; ’ that which we here reproduce (fig. 11) is from an article on the * Oghama inscriptions at Kenfegge, in Glamovganshire;”° finally, the numerous sculptured dolmens of Ireland (fig. 12).4. Abbé Domenech, in the curious account of his sojourn of several years among the Indians of North America, speaks of tombstones bearing pictographic characters (fig. 13)¢ and of strange inscriptions upon flint stones (fig. 14).¢ To the cliff dwellers, or inhabitants of caves, of Arizona and New Mexico are attributed the designs and pictorial engravings found upon the rocks borne to the ya ae ae / 4 nae She Pa BRS . i / \ ‘yn \ Sak we ieee ao — i See y Se ae ee — ———— ee ys Fie. 10. Dead man’s name. Rock with runic characters found at Vanga, West Gothland, Sweden. Height, 3 feet 5 inches; width, 8 feet. banks of the San Juan (fig. 15)./ Quite recently there were brought to light the stones of St. Aubin Baubigné (Deux Sevres) (fig. 16), a@Stephens (Dr. G.). Handbook of the old northern runic monuments of Scan- dinavia and England. Edinburgh, 1884, fol. b Brash (Rich. R.). The ogham inscribed stones of Wales. Archeeologia Cambrensis, 8° series, Vol. XV, 1869, p. 155. ¢ Archzreologia Cambrensis, 1846, Vol. I, p. 412. 4 Borlase (William Copeland). The dolmens of Ireland. London, 1897, 3 vol. 8°, fig. € Domenech (Abbé). Seven years’ residence in the great deserts of North America. London, 1860, 8°, 2 vol. f Nadaillac (Marquis de). L,Amérique prehistorique. Paris, 1882, 8°. PLATE |. Smithsonian Report, 1904,—Maire. CLAY TABLET WITH THE PREHISTORIC LINEAR SCRIPT. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Maire. PLATE II. CUNEIFORM TABLET OF CLAY FOUND AT LACHISH. MATERIALS TO WRITE UPON BEFORE INVENTION OF PRINTING 645 upon which inscriptions are distinguished which have formed the subject. of a communication to ?Académie des Inscriptions et Belles- ) rr) AN N \ WANN a NN \ WU \\ Ny | wc ANTS M4 NR \\ \ \ M AN Wi NY i, Fiq@. 13. Pietographie in- graye NYY seription on a stone, F1q.14. Inscription graven on Fia@. 11. Inscription in Latin Fa. 12. St. Monaghan’s stone. Treland. rock by North American In- dians. and Ogham. St. Dogmael, \ Pembrokeshire. Lettres, and of which the journal VEclair reproduced three designs ‘n its issue of the Ist of April, 1904.4 Hh, vi Fia. 16. One of the carved Frq@.15. Carved rocks on banks of San Juan blocks at St. Aubin Bau River, Arizona. bigné (Deux-Séyres). | and Charbonneau, session of the 4Communication of Doctors Capitan, Breuil, 11th of Mareh, 1904. 646 MATERIALS TO WRITE UPON BEFORE INVENTION OF PRINTING. ROCKS CUT INTO TABLES OR BUILDING STONES. It requires no great effort to find inscriptions of this kind. As civilization developed, man began to prepare with care the material upon which he wished to write or carve. Throughout the Orient, from Egypt to India, monuments constructed of dressed stones are covered with carvings or pictures, explained and commented upon by inscriptions (fig. 17). The Greeks and the Romans employed stone tables for the purpose of engraving laws, public and commemorative records. The funeral cippi and stele of nearly all nations are cov- ered with inscriptions, and likewise the coffins of stone and wood. Are not our modern cemeteries like an immutable obituary, or, better still, like a huge biographical dictionary ? Inscriptions upon stones of all kinds—marble, sandstone, granite, slate—are so frequently met with around us that it seems superfluous to cite examples. Fig. 17. Brick from Erech. (Perrotand Chepie, Histoire de ‘ PrArt. Paris.) Puce. in Babyloniaa hieroglyphic tablet. The baked earths deserve special mention on account of their preparation and their antiquity. In ancient times the Persians, Medes, and Assyrians were about the only nations that customarily made use of clay, either dried or baked, for writing upon (fig. 18) 4, inscriptions of this kind are known which date back to more than four thousand years before Christ. These countries were so poor in rocks that all their structures were built of brick. Ceramics were still in their infancy when designs and symbolic signs were employed for decoration. Everyone is familiar with the geometrical designs, the crossed, dotted, or concentric lines which ornament prehistoric pottery.’ The ceramics discovered at Hissarlik and Mycene present strange decorations; one finds colored and concave designs, swastikas, and inscriptions in archaic characters a@Schell (V.) O. P. Notes @’é@pigraphie et d@archéologie assyriennes. Reprint from: Recueil de travaux relatifs & la philologie et A lV'archéologie égyptienne et assyrienne, 4°, t. XXIT. 6 Consult the collection: Matériaux pour Vhistoire primitive de ’homme. MATERIALS TO WRITE UPON BEFORE INVENTION OF PRINTING. 647 (figs. 19-20) ;¢ the same remarks are applicable to the ceramics of Central and South America (fig. 21) 3” peculiarity of shapes and de- signs, paintings and symbolic characters. In Grecian antiquity fragments of pottery were utilized as ma- terials upon which to write accounts and observations (fig. 22) ;° the beautiful Grecian ceramics of the purest period always bear inscrip- tions explanatory of the figures. METALS. It can not be demonstrated that iron never received engraved inscriptions in antiquity. The great decomposition which this metal must have suffered under the influence of the oxygen of the atmos- phere and the earth is the only reason why none has come down to us. Fig. 19. Fusaiole with archaic in- scriptions. Fie. 20. Pusaiole Fie. 21. Bolivian vase. (Castelnau Fa. 22. Pottery fragment with archaic in- Exped. de la partie centrale de with Greek inscription. scriptions. lAmerique du Sud. Paris, 1882.) All the other metals, including the precious metals, pure or alloyed, are found with inscriptions. There have been recovered in Egypt, Assyria, Central Asia, and Greece tables or placques of bronze which were covered with them. Hannibal had lengthy Greek and Punic inscriptions engraved describing the state of his army and_ his @Schliemann. Tlios, Ville et Pays des Troyens, trad. de lVanglais par Mme. ie) Hgger. Paris, 1885, gr. 8°. ’Castlenau (Ir. de). Expédition dans la partie centrale de Amérique du Sud. Paris, 1852,’8° et 4°, atlas, pl. 11, 12, 13, 14, 16. ¢ Wilken (Ulr.). Griechische Ostraka aus Aegypten u. Nubien, Liepzig, 1889, So WOE LUG sally al imo) Bt . 648 MATERIALS TO WRITE UPON BEFORE INVENTION OF PRINTING. series of exploits.*| In Rome the use of columns and of tablets of bronze for inscribing laws followed that of wood. We find in all the museums of Europe inscriptions upon metals (fig. 23). One of the most remarkable is the famous bronze tablet preserved in the Museum of Lyons, containing the address delivered in the year 48 by the Emperor Claudius.” Lead beaten thin and reduced to leaves served the same purpose. Job laments his inability to write a discourse upon sheets of lead. In Greece lead thus prepared was quite frequently used. Suetonius terms these leaves of lead plumbea charta;° tablets were also made of it, which were employed all through the Middle Ages. . A iy Nes TSAR Lh SY nee, Fic. 23. Gallic inscription in dotted characters on bronze found near Dijon. (Dict. Arch. de la Gaule.) It seems unnecessary to cite coins and medals. They always bore a legend, either symbolic or explained by letters. WOOD, BARK, LEAVES. Wood as a material used to engrave and write upon is perhaps more ancient than stone, but there is no trace of it left from the prehis- toric period. It was split into thin boards, upon which were traced in different colored inks the characters of the language. The Egyp- tians must have proceeded in this manner, if one may judge by a syea- more board discovered in 1837 in the third pyramid of Memphis, which, according to the Egyptologists, dates back more than five thousand years. The ancient laws of Solon and of Draco were likewise traced upon wooden tables. They were called “ axones.” These tables joined in the shape of quadrangular prisms and crossed by an axis, were first set up perpendicularly in the citadel, where, revolving by the slight- a Polybius, III, 33. » Allmer (A.) et Bissard (P.). Musée de Lyon. Inscriptions antiques. Lyon, 1888 seq. gr. 8°, t. 1, p. 58 seq. and 1 plate. ¢ Suetonius. Twelve Cesars. Nero, C. 20. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Maire. PLATE III. pale Ranta i, SH Le ee i he ee Srperereey ¥ » ~~ Fig. 26. Buffalo skin figured with designs showing a war chief in action. “in the library of Brussels, a manuscript of the Pentateuch, which is believed to date back beyond the ninth century. It is written on 57 skins sewed together, and is 36 meters long.” Petrarch wore a vest of leather upon which he wrote his inspira- tions when on a walk. This vest, covered with writing, was in 1527 still in Sadoleto’s possession.° Let us recall that the red-skin Indians wrote or painted the results of the chase or their martial exploits on the inside of the tanned and bleached skin of the bison (fig. 26)¢, which served them for a a Hasting (James). » History of the Two Tartar Conquerors of China, Hakluyt Society edit., p. 26. c Hist. Gén. de la Chine, X, 470-479; XI, 17-28. @ Kashgaria, English trans., p. 155. ¢ History of China, p. 575. Conf. S. Wells Wiliams, The Middle Kingdom, II, 623. INQUIRY INTO THE POPULATION OF CHINA. 669 though many millions must have perished, it is not at all likely that the numbers of 1850 (4147493,000) were more than decimated. Even then, to kill or starve 48,000,000 people in ten years would mean 12,000 a day, in addition to the 40,000 a day who (at the rate of 30 per thousand per annum) would die naturally, and would balance about the same number of births. Moreover, the rebellion covered only one-half the area of China, so that 24,000 a day is certainly nearer than 12,000. The loss of life attending the crushing of the two Mohammedan and the Nien-fei rebellions (1860-1875) mounted certainly to over : million. Then we have a quarter of a million killed in the suppres- sion of the Mohammedan rebellion in Kan-su in 1894-95. If we add to this terrible source of loss of population that resulting from famines and floods, the total is nearly doubled. There were great famines in 1810, 1811, 1546, and 1849, which, according to the Tung hua lu, the best official authority we have on the subject, re- duced the population by 45,000,000. Although this figure may seem excessive, we know that in the next great famine, that of 1877-78, which visited only four provinces of the Empire with great severity, no fewer than 9,500,000 persons fell its victims. This figure I quote on the authority of the China famine relief committee of Shanghai. We must add to this again the loss of life which attended the great flood of 1888, when the Yellow River broke its banks and flooded nearly the whole province of Ho-nan. According to memorials sent at the time to the Emperor, about 2,000,000 were drowned or starved to death by this catastrophe. Then there is the unknown, but cer- tainly terrible, mortality during the great drought and famine in Shan-hsi, Shen-hsi, Chih-h, and southern Mongolia in 1892-93 and i894. There have also been numerous epidemics of cholera and plague which have devastated sections of the Empire in the last twenty to thirty years, and still! we have not exhausted the list of ‘auses of violent fluctuations, of extraordinary loss to the population of China during the nineteenth century.” It must not be lost sight of that these figures represent only the mortality among adults; it is extremely improbable that infants were counted at all. Popoff, in his study on the population in China,’ estimates that the a})}. H. Parker, China, p. 190. bT was told in 1901 by the late Li Hung Chang that over 30,000 Chinese lost their lives in Peking alone during the Boxer troubles of 19980. Admitting that this figure and all those here given are exaggerated, it is true beyond all doubt that the loss to the population from these causes has been fearful. ¢P. 8. Popoff in Novoe Vremya, No. 3066, September 10, 1884. Conf. S. Wells Williams, The Middle Kingdom, 1, 270, 670 INQUIRY INTO THE POPULATION OF CHINA. population of China proper has not only not increased during the period of forty years, from 1842 to 1882, but has even diminished by the considerable number of 30,942,592. The only reliable data I have found on the subject of Chinese vital statistics are the following: In 1880 the governor of the province of Che-kiang reported“ to the Emperor that as the result of a general census of the province taken in 1879 it was found that the population was 11,541,054. Mr. Popoff, the interpreter of the Russian legation in China, was informed in 1882 by the board of revenue in Peking that the population of this same province of Che-kiang was then 11,588,692, and in 1885 the same board informed the writer of the present paper that it was then 11,684,348. As corroborative evidence of the value of these figures, we learn that Commissioner of Customs Alfred E. Hippisley® found by a careful report made to him by the taotai of the prefecture of Wen- chou that the average number of persons per home was about 5.14, and that the total population of the prefecture was 1,841,690. ‘ The area of the prefecture being about 4,500 square miles, the average population would therefore seem to be about 409 to the square mile in this prefecture, and thus largely in excess of the general average of the province.” The best available information concerning the area of the province of Che-kiang © gives it as 34,700 square miles. Assuming, then, that the average population to the square mile is one-fifth less than in the prefecture of Wen-chou (say 825 to the square mile), the total popu- lation of the province in 1881 would have been about 11,145,000—a figure substantially agreeing with that given by the governor of the province for 1879 and that supplied Popoff in 1882. The population of Che-kiang, according to the above figures, increased from 1879 to 1882—say about three years (1880-1) from 11,541,054 to 11,588,692, or 47,638. From 1882 to 1885 (also three years) it increased from 11,588,692 to 11,684,348, or 95,656. This would be an annual increase from 1879 to 1882 of 0.206 per cent, and from 1882 to 1885 of 0.275 per cent, or an average yearly rate from 1879 to 1885 of 0.240 per cent—this under the most favorable possible circumstances, the country being blessed with peace and plenty during all that period and for some years previously. At this a Peking Gazette, March 17, 1880. b Trade Report of Wen-chou for 1881, pp. 27-28. ¢Statesman’s Yearbook, 1902, p. 495. It may be said that the returns for Che-kiang show just the contrary of what I am seeking to prove, but it must be seen at once how fanciful must be the returns of population when the total number in a vast province is deduced from a rough count in a small district. This is substantially the method the Chinese follow, INQUIRY INTO THE POPULATION OF CHINA. 671 rate the population of Che-kiang would double itself by natural increase in 417 years. : Newsholme,” calculating the-average birth rate and death rate for the five years 1891-1895, found that in Prussia the population would double itself by natural increase in 49.2 years; in England in 59.1 years; in Italy in 65.7 years; in Austria in 74.1 years, and in France in 591 years, the annual increase in the period named averaging in the latter country only 0.08 per 1,000. Conditions of life in other provinces of the Empire of China are approximately the same as in Che-kiang—in fact, in a number they are worse, particularly as regards the frequency of famines, floods, and epidemics; neverthe- less, Chinese enumerations would have us believe that the population in China increases more rapidly than in the most favored countries of the world. In the case of China, natural increase is the only one to be taken in line of count; immigration into China is practically nil, and emigra- tion from China proper to other portions of the Empire, excluding Asia, has only within quite recent times become of considerable size, and even now it is not sufficient to appreciably affect the sum total of the population in the approximate count we are trying to make of it. The only migratory movements of the Chinese have been from province to province of the Empire. Without going far back into the past it will suffice to mention the repopulation of the provinces of Ssu-ch’uan and Ytin-nan after the Manchu conquest from the Hu Kuang provinces and the similar movement to Sst-ch’uan during the great T’ai-p’ing rebellion. The emigration from Shan-hsi into southern and eastern Mongoha after the famine of 1877-78, and that from Shan-tung and Chih-h into Manchuria still going on, are the most Important recent movements of population to outlying parts of the Chinese Empire. The emigration to southern Asia and _ to remoter parts of the world is drawn exclusively from the provinces of Fu-kien and Kuang-tung, and though considerable, is not so large as to affect to any appreciable degree the rough figures of population we hope to establish.’ Very little accurate information has come to us as to the death ‘ate In any given locality of China; in fact, the only official data I know of is the death rate in Peking during one year, 1845, for which year we have also the returns of a detailed census of the population within the Peking city walls. These were obtained by Sacharoff and published in his valuable study, cited previously. According to aWlem. Vital Statistics, p. 15. b’ The following figures relative to Chinese emigration, taken from Export of April 14, 1904, a German paper devoted to commercial geography, first appeared. in Gottwaldt’s work on Chinese emigration. The greater part of the Chinese emigration originates in the southern provinces, Shan-tung being the only 672 INQUIRY INTO THE POPULATION OF CHINA. them the population of Peking within the walls in 1845 was 1,648,- 814, and the number of deaths (exclusive of infants and small chil- dren, say, under 5 years of age) during the whole year was 39,438, or about 23.9 per 1,000 inhabitants-——by no means an excessive rate. The death rate among infants, resulting from the highly insani- tary conditions in which the whole population, rich and_ poor, throughout the Empire constantly lives, and also from female in- fanticide, must be exceedingly high. This latter cause of infant mortality is accountable for a considerably increased death rate in the provinces of Kuang-tung, Fu-kien, Che-kiang, Shan-hsi, Kiang- hsi, An-hui, and in most of the other provinces of the Empire in a lesser degree.” Everything considered—especially the fact that in a very large part of China the people live huddled together in towns and villages, and that nowhere is any attempt ever made toward sanitation or the prevention of the spread of contagious disease—it seems quite safe to put the death rate in China at 30 per 1,000 as a minimum. northern province that furnishes any large proportion of emigrants from China. The number of Chinese outside of China is as follows: Country. Number. | Country. | Number. ORM OS a era ee ee Bee aie eee 2, 600, 000 IMG CaO Sepia AO enol ie ee 74, 568 Siar ee eee te hie at een eer 2-500) 000; || (Burride! < ja ees Sow eee 40, 000 Malayer enin Stl aepen cet mieten see 985,000" Asistrailiar 2. secant ee sheen cae 30, 000, Sundanlslandsessse 2s sesessee Ee eae GOOXO00] PASIatieHRUISsial. sea nee ee 25, 000 Hongkong. oa. 2 Reece ce ls ee we 2145543) Sapam s29-2 22 sbece 2 ae 2 Joe eee 7,000 PAIN OT Gal cme ae eee ee en? 272, 829 Neioren tie: omen: aye es ee career 3,710 Indo-China esse oP ees 150, 000 Philippines 22s. eee ea ene 80, 000 Motel as sese eee see eee eee 7, 642, 650 The following figures show the number of persons that left China and Hong- kong and returned during the last twenty-six years: China and Hongkong. Left. Returned. ,629,947 | 1,309,787 = Amoy (Bait en)) i ee Se Eee ee ce Re ee ee Swatow7(Kuane=tunie) cel sea ae ee 1, 794, 298 1,307, 744 Kiung-chou (Hai-nan)-_-__...._.._---- eee A SEE = Be 2 ee ee cy SE 298, 772 296, 238 Hon gon poy 2 Se Se eS ee ee re ee a ee ee 1,130, 000 1, 090, 000 «See Jour. Nor. Ch. Br. Roy. Asiat. Soe., Vol. XX, p. 25 et seq. Newsholme (Elem. Vital Statistics, 130) says that infant mortality in Europe is lowest in Ireland, with 164.6 in every 1,000, and highest in Russia in Hurope, with 422.9 in every 1,000. It must be at least this .in China. In Japan, where there exists the same desire as in China to have posterity, the average number of children to a marriage is about 3.5 (Newsholme, op. cit., p. 70). [see no rea- son to believe that the Chinese are more prolific. In the United States, accord- ing to the census of 1900, the annual death rate of the whites, where accurately recorded, was about 17.8 per 1,000. INQUIRY INTO THE POPULATION OF CHINA. 673 iO Let us revert now to the figures given by the Chinese Government for the population at the varieus periods since 1741 and see whether the annual rates of increase are at all reasonable. This examination is distinctly disappointing; nothing less satisfactory could be con- ceived. Between 1748 and 1788—during which time China enjoyed extraordinary peace and prosperity, disturbed only by some uprisings of aboriginal tribes in the mountainous regions of the west, and two small rebellions, one in Shan-tung in 1777, the other in Shen-hsi in 1781—no great famines or other natural calamities are: recorded. Nevertheless, the annual rate of increase of the population (the enumerations being all presumably made in the same manner, with the same classes excepted), which between 1743 and 1749 was 2.90 per cent, fell from 1749 to 1757 to 0.91 per cent, to rise between 1757 to 1761 to 1.87 per cent, falling again to 0.73 per cent between 1761 and 1767, and to 0.57 per cent: from that date to 1771. The next change is phenomenal: Between 1771 and 1776 it was 5 per cent, but immediately after, between 1776 and 1780 it fell, without any known reason, to 0.86 per cent, to rise again between that date and 1783 to 2.34 per cent. The average annual rate of increase during the whole period was 1.83 per cent. In Japan, where much more favorable conditions exist than in China, the average yearly increase of the population from 1872 to 1899 has been only 1.04 per cent. If we accept the figure given for the population in 1741 (143,412,- 000) as being closer the truth than subsequent ones, and bearing in mind the reasons given previously for and against a rapid increase of population, we may assume that the population of China proper barely doubled in the hundred years following; consequently in 1842, instead of being, as given in the official enumeration, 413,000,000, it was probably about 250,000,000. Referring now to the extraordinary causes of mortality from 1842 down to the present day, some of which are mentioned on preceding pages, they may be tabulated as follows: | Resulting Years. | lossof popu- lation. LENE aati hiaWs ujelgtye denen RRS At Se RNR Se a ee Bi as ee ee ee ERE ee a nity aime | 1846 | 225, 000 Dee ee Re ae NO OO Ree Ae Peper WN g a ipah Os 7 Cer snide Be | 1849 | 13,750,000 iRar=Pinopreboiomy sine seek nae sao nee eres eee = Nace see wesene a esos 1854-1864 | 20,000, 000 Mohammedan tebellions es -seeme t= te ee ee ee eee sees eee eee Jos 1861-1878 1,000, 000 Weinman ee ne ee free ee a eee teh eee ee 5) ees Sd ea ee | 1877-1878 9,500, 000 Mellow AR iVeIDI MUN ablOm. = Sees ser see eee seas eee ew aaeeeese ies ore | 1888 2,000, 000 ESV TVITT Ope ny te ore ee ae ae Bots ee EN Seiad Boe = Seo je wone 1892-1894 (?) 1,000,000 Mohammedan rebellion ------ eat oe See ee ere eens seas sls 1894-1895 | 225, 000 Motalklossio tie: cil te sees e eee ees eee ee Sp EE ee te fod 47,700,000 SM 1904——43 674 INQUIRY INTO THE POPULATION OF CHINA. We are therefore led to the inevitable conclusion that the present population of China proper can not greatly exceed that of 1842, a conclusion reached by another line of argument in 1881 by my friend A. KE. Hippisley, in his too-brief study above referred to, and by Mr. Popoff in 1884. The following considerations tend to strengthen this opinion: The most recent enumeration of the population of China which can lay claim to any value is that of 1885. In it we find that the returns given for six provinces (Chi-hi, Anhoui, Kan-Soo, Kuang-hsi, Yitin- nan, and Kuei-Chu) are the same as those given in the earlier census of 1882, but which in this latter were in reality for the year 1879. A comparison of the official estimates for these provinces, with the esti- mates made by careful foreign investigators is highly interesting. In the case of the province of Sst-ch’uan, which the board of reve- nue estimated at 71,073,730 in 1885, all foreign writers agree that it is quite impossible to beheve that any such population exists or can exist in it. Its western, northwestern, and southwestern parts are extremely mountainous and very sparsely inhabited. Furthermore, the province contains no extremely populous cities. Ch’éng-tu, the capital, has about 350,000, and Ch’ung-k’ing about 130,000. The Lyons Commercial Mission, speaking of the year 1895-96, states its behef that the estimates of the maritime customs at Ch’ung- k’ing for 1891 of 30,000,000 to 35,000,000 for the province of Ssi- vh’uan is too low, but accepts that of from 46,000,000 to 45,000,000.” G. J. L. Litton, writing in 1898, estimated the population of Sst- ch’uan at more than double that given in the enumeration of 1812, and put it at 48,000,000.2. F.S. A. Bourne, also writing in 1898, says that the population of Sst-ch’uan is probably between 45,000,000 and 55,000,000. In a report in 1904 Hosie gives it as 45,000,000.° Kiang-hsi, for which the official returns give a population of more than 24,000,000, is believed by W. J. Clennell, writing in 1903, to have less than 12,000,000.4 The same writer estimates the popula- of Fu-kien in 1903 at “certainly under 19,000,000,” whereas the Chinese figure for 1885 is 23,502,794. As regards Yiinnnan, the Lyons Mission*® puts the population in 1896 at from 7,000,000 to 3,000,000. F. S. A. Bourne, writing of Yiin-nan in 1896, says that * according to the best native authority the population is estimated at one-fifth of what it was before the (Mohammedan) rebellion,’”/ a4 Mission Lyonnaise d’explor.-commer. en Chine, 1895-1897, part 1, p. 252. + Brit. Cons. Reports, No. 457, Mise. series. ¢ Brit. Cons. Reports, No. 458, Misc. series, p. 49. Blue Book; China, No. 5 (1904), p. 4. d Brit. Parl. Blue Book; Ching, No. 1, 1903. € Op. cit., part 11, p. 129. f Rep. Blackburn Chamber Commerce, p. 91. INQUIRY INTO THE POPULATION OF CHINA. 675 while Litton, in 1903, thought it was “ not over 10,000,000." " The Chinese estimate of the population of this province in 1879 (the same figure is given for 1885). was 11,721,576, but only two years before that, in 1877, General Mesney ” placed it at 5,600,000. Kuei-chou in or about 1896 was thought to have about 7,000,000 inhabitants,° in this agreeing with the Chinese estimate. Without going any further we see that for the five provinces above mentioned foreign investigators substantially agree that the Chinese estimates are too large by some 56,000,000. All the Chinese figures are one-half to one-third too high. I have not the least doubt that the same reduction must apply to the estimates for most of the other provinces, the error in excess increasing presumably with the density of the population. The conviction is therefore forced on me that the present population of China proper does not exceed 275,000,000, and is probably considerably under this figure. The population of China is most unevenly distributed. In cer- tain sections, for example, around Swatow, and in portions of Ho-nan, Shan-tung, and Chih-h, it is extraordinarily dense, while in others, as Kan-su, Yiin-nan, Kuei-chou, and Kuang-hsi, it is surprisingly sparse. Guesses of the population based on partial returns from some densely populated center would give a most erroneous idea of the population not only of the province as a whole, but of even a smaller division of the country. I have traversed several times all the north- ern provinces of China—Chih-li, Shan-hsi, Shen-hsi, and Kan-su— and can vouch for the fact that in none of them does the population appear to exceed in numbers what the soil can easily support. The absence of easy lines of communication over which surplus produce ran. be readily exported, and the fact that the Chinese do not raise cattle or any domestic animals in considerable numbers, tend to re- strict the areas cultivated by the farmer. It seems certain that China could support a much larger population than it now has—a condition which could not exist if the population had reached the enormous figure which imaginative writers give us. IT am confirmed in this opinion by such a careful observer as F. S. A. Bourne, who, referring to the journey of the Blackburn Chamber of Commerce mission,! which traversed the whole Yang-tzt Valley and southwestern China, says: “ From what we have seen on this journey I should say that China could support twice her present population, and that each man a Brit. Parl. Blue Book; China, No. 3, 1903. b Journ. Ch. Br. Roy. Asiat. Soc., XXV, p. 483. ¢ Mission Lyons., part 11, p. 207. @ Rep. of mission to China of Blackburn Chamber of Commerce, 1896-97, p. 111. 676 INQUIRY INTO THE POPULATION OF CHINA. might be twice as well off as he is now; and this without any revolu- tionary change in their present manner of life.” ¢ Enumerations of the population of China, 1761, 1812, 1842, 1882, and 1885. Provinces. 1761. 1812. 1842. 1882. | 1885. Ghikeli=2o 2. Seana eas 15,222,040 | 27,990,871 | 36,879,888 | * 17,937,000 | * 17,937,005 SVamMmaninied 555-5 ecece ence 25,180,734 | 28,958,764 | 29,529,877 | 36,247,885 36,545, 704 Sianeli saa eee | 9,768,189 | 14,004,210 | 17,056,925 | 12,211,453 10,791, 341 Honan ee. oes eee ee | 16,382,570] 28,087,171 | 29,069,771 | 22,115,827 | 22, 117,036 jan ¢-s e _...| 28,161,409} 37,848,501 | 39,646, 924 | 20,905, 171 21, 259, 989 JATIN Ute * aoe AS ee Gere ane | 22,761,030 | 34,165,059 | 36,596,988 * 20,596,988 — * 20,596, 988 Huse nets oe See ee ere | 8,063, 671 14,779, 158 | 25,799,556 | 25,000,000 | 28, 502, 794 (@Heski an > aaa 15,429,692 | 26,256,784 | 30,437,974 | 11,588, 692 11, 684, 348 Thuepeliae ee ee eee | 8,080,603.) 27,870,098 | 28,584,564 | 33,365, 005 33, 600, 492 Eigen bh Ae eee en ean eee | 8,829,820] 18,652,507 | 20,048,969 | 21,002,604; — 21, 005, 171 Shenshsijseses ae ee eee on Bee earl 10,207,256 | 10,309,769 | *8, 432,193 3,276, 967 Ken SUP seo eee eee ere ie ehaeerse | 15,354,875 | 19,512,716 | *5,411, 188 * 5,411,188 SSSU=C EU Tle ee ee eee | 2,782, 976 21,485,678 | 22,256, 964 67, 712, 897 | 71,073, 730 Reet = TUL | 6,797,597 | 19,174,030 | 21,152,603] 29, 706, 249 | 29, 740, 055 LEQUEREINEN «ee sees) | SLOP TA 7,313, 895 8,121,327 | *5, 151,327 * 5,151,327 Viinenant 3.2L sae ee ee | 2, 078, 802 5, 561, 320 5, 823, 670 | *11,721,576 | * 11,721,576 ECHSNEOMNOW Science cccinencenscoos 3, 402, 722 5, 288, 219 5,679,128 | *7,669, 181 * 7,669, 181 iam oh site ee ome ere ee | 11,006,640 | 23,046,999 | 26,513,889 | 24,534,118 | 24,541, 406 otal: ieee oc tate | 190, 257,423 | 360,440,395 | 413,021,452 | 381,309, 304 | 377, 636, 198 The figures given in the censuses of 1761, 1842, 1882, and 1885 were supplied to Father Amiot, Sacharoff, Popoff, and Rockhill by the Chinese board of reve- nue. Figures in the returns for 1882 and 1885 marked with an asterisk are those given to Sacharoff for the year 1879. They are the latest official esti- mates. The figures given under the census of 1812 are taken from Sacharoff, whose authority was presumably the official Va Ch’ing Hui-tien. aJIn a most interesting study entitled “Tenure of Land in China and the Condition of the Rural Population” (Journ. Ch. Br. Roy. Asiat. Soe., N. S., XXIII, pp. 59-174) we find it stated (pp. 76-79) on excellent authority that * it is impossible to say with any sort of exactness what proportion of the whole soil of China is tilled by peasant owners, but probably it can not be put at less than one-half. The other moiety is owned in great measure by retired officials and their families, the class known as the literati and gentry. * * * Con- siderable tracts of land are owned by such families, and it is the invariable rule in these cases to lease the land to small farmers. In the central and popu- lous parts of China these holdings are exceedingly small, often less than an English acre, seldom larger than three or four acres. * * * Most jands yield one or more subsidiary crops in the course of the vear, besides the prin- cipal crop. * * * On the frontier provinces, where the soil is poorer and the population more sparse, the size of the holdings is in general much larger than in the central provinces, and the people would seem as a rule to be better off. But as population increases there seems everywhere to be a strong tendency for holdings to become reduced to the minimum size that will support a single family. The more fertile the soil the smaller the farms and the more minute the subdivision. Tow marvelously fertile the soil is under fayorable circum- stances will be seen from the fact that * * * one mow (6.6 to an acre) wil! support one individual. On this basis a square mile is capable of supporting a population of 3,840 persons.” * CHINESE ARCHITEHCTURE-< By STEPHEN W. BUSHELL, C. M. G., B. Se, M. D. The first impression given by the view of a Chinese city from the parapet of the city wall—whether it be Tientsin, with the 150,000 houses of its population of shopmen and artisans, or Peking, with its temples, its imperial and princely palaces, and its public build- ings—is that of a certain monotony, resulting from the predomi- nance of a single type of architecture. After a long residence this impression still remains. and it 1s very rarely that a building stands out which is not reducible to one general formula. China, in fact, in every epoch of its history and for all its edifices, civil or religious, public or private, has kept to a single architectural model. Even when new types have been introduced from the West under the influence of Buddhism and Mohammedanism, the lines have become gradually toned down and conformed to his own standard by the leveling hands of the Chinese mason. It is a car- dinal rule in Chinese geomancy that every important building must face the south, and the uniform orientation resulting from this adds to the general impression of monotony. The most general model of Chinese buildings is the ting. This consists essentially of a massive roof with recurved edges resting upon short columns. The curvilinear tilting of the corners of the roof has been supposed to be a survival from the days of tent dwellers, who used to hang the angles of their canvas pavilions on spears; but this is carrying it back to a very dim antiquity, as we have no records of the Chinese except as a settled agricultural peo- ple. The roof is the principal feature of the building and gives to it when finished its qualities of grandeur or simplicity, of strength or grace. To vary its aspect the architect is mduced occasionally to double, or even to triple, it. This preponderance of a part usually sacrificed in western architecture is justified by the smaller vertical «Chapter III, Chinese Art, by Stephen W. Bushell; published -by the board of education, South Kensington, Victoria and Albert Museum. London, 1904. Reprinted by permission of the controller of His Majesty’s stationary office. . leded 677 678 CHINESE ARCHITECTURE. elevation of the plan, and the architect devotes every attention to the decoration of the roof by the addition of antefixal ornaments, and by covering it with glazed tiles of brilliant color, so as to concen- trate the eye upon it. The dragons and phenixes posed on the crest of the roof, the grotesque animals perched in lines upon the eaves, and the yellow, green, and blue tiles which cover it are never chosen at random, but after strict sumptuary laws, so that they may denote the rank of the owner of a house or indicate the imperial foundation of a temple. The great weight of the roof necessitates the multiple employ- ment of the column, which is assigned a function of the first im- portance. The columns are made of wood; the shaft is generally cylindrical, occasionally polyhedral, never channeled; the capital is only a kind of consol, squared at the ends or shaped into dragons’ heads; the pedestal is a square block of stone chiseled at the top into a circular base on which the shaft is posed. The pedestal, ac- cording to rule, ought not to be higher than the width of the column, and the shaft not more than ten times longer than its diameter. Large trunks of the Persea nanmu from the Province of Sstichuan are floated down the Yangtze River to be brought to Peking to be used as columns for the palaces and large temples. The nanmu is the tallest and straightest of Chinese trees, the graim improves by age, and the wood gradually acquires a dead- leaf brown tint, while it preserves its aromatic qualities, so that the superb columns of the sacrificial temple of the Emperor Yung Lo (pl. 1), which date from the early part of the fifteenth century, still exhale a vague perfume. The pillars are brightened with ver- milion and gold, but it is the roof which still attracts most attention, in the interior as well as outside, the beams being often gorgeously inlaid with colors and the intervening ceiling geometrically divided into sunken panels worked in relief and lacquered with dragons or some other appropriate designs. The stability of the structure depends upon the wooden framework ; the walls, which are filled in afterwards with blocks of stone or brick- work, are not intended to figure as supports; the space, in fact, is often occupied entirely by doors and windows, carved with elegant tracery, of the most flimsy character. A Chinese fabric so far is curi- ously analogous to a modern American building of the newest type, with its skeleton framework of steel filled in with dummy walls. The Chinese seem to have a feeling of the innate poverty of their architectural designs and strive to break the plain lines with a pro- fusion of decorative details. The ridge poles and corners of the geing roofs are covered with finial dragons and long rows of fan- tastic animals, arranged after a symbolism. known only to the initi- ated, the eaves are underlaid with elaborately carved woodwork Sa "AYNLNADQ HLN3S1LSI4 “ONINSd YVAN SAWO] DBNIW ‘OF DNNA SO TWIVH WWIOISIYOVS OP PELELL Lied judddddiaedt UPIWS ‘| aLWId “AYNLNAD HLN3SSLHDIQ = ONIMAd ‘ALISYSAIN() IVWNOILVN ‘SOISSV1ID S3HL AO T1VH WVIYSdW| “SONNY ONNA Id "|| alvid "}24usnNg—'p96| ‘Woday ueluOsUyIWS CHINESE ARCHITECTURE. 679 brilhantly lacquered, the walls are outlined with bands of terra-cotta reliefs molded with figures and floral sprays; but in spite of every- thing the monotony of the original type is always apparent. Chinese buildings are usually one-storied and are developed hori- zontally as they are increased in size or number. The principle which determines the plan of projection is that of symmetry. The main buildings and wings, the side buildings, the avenues, the courtyards, the pavilions, the motives of decoration, all the details, in fact, are planned symmetrically. The architect only departs from this formal rule in the case of summer residences and gardens, which are, on the contrary, designed and carried out in the most capricious fashion. Here we have pagodas and kiosques elevated at random, detached edifices of the most studied irregularity, rustic cottages and one- winged pavilions, dotted down in the midst of surroundings of the most complicated and artificial nature, composed of rockeries, lakes, waterfalls, and running streams spanned by fantastic bridges, with an unexpected surprise at every turn. Ruins in China are rare, and we must turn to books to get some idea of ancient architecture. The first large builedings described in the oldest canonical books are the lofty towers called “ t’ai,” which were usualy square and built of stone, rising to the height sometimes of 300 feet, so that they are stigmatized as ruinous follies of the ancient kings. There were three kinds of t’ai, one intended as a storehouse for treasures, a second built within a walled hunting park for watching military exercises and the pleasures of the chase, and a third, the kuan hsiang t’ai, fitted up as an astronomical observatory. The Hsia dynasty, of the second millenium B. C., was renowned for its buildings and irrigation works; their predecessor, Shun, as a patron of the potter’s art; while among their successors the Shang dynasty was celebrated for its sacrificial vessels and wine cups, the Chou dynasty for the finish of its hunting and war chariots. Among the later representatives of the t’ai are the towers of the great wall, which are built of stone with arched doors and windows—the Chinese would seem always to have employed the arch in stone architecture— the storied buildings dominating the gateways and angles of the city walls, often used to store arms, and the observatory of Peking, which is also a square tower mounted upon the city wall. When the tower is planned of oblong section, broader than it is deep, it is technically called a “ lou.” Chinese buildings might be classified as civil, religious, and fune- real, but it is more convenient to group all together in the few illus- trations allowed in our limited space. The Hall of the Classies, called “ Pi Yung Kung” (pl. 1), was built after an ancient model by the Emperor Ch’ien Lung in Peking, adjoining the national university called “* Kuo Tzt Chien,” where the Temple of Confucius 680 CHINESE ARCHITECTURE. and the stone drums, as described above, are installed. The Emperor goes there in state on certain occasions to expound the classics, seated upon the large throne within the hall, which is backed by a sereen fashioned in the form of the five sacred mountains. It is a lofty square building with a four-sided roof covered with tiles enameled imperial vellow, and surmounted by a large gilded ball, encircled by a pillared veranda under a second projecting roof of yellow tiles. The four sides consist each one of seven pairs of folding doors with tracery panels. It is surrounded by a circular moat with marble balustrades, crossed by four bridges leading to the central doors. On the sides of the courtyard in which it stands are two long cloistered buildings, sheltering about 200 upright stone stele covered with in- scriptions over the front or back. The inscriptions comprise the complete text of the “nine classics,” and were engraved by the Emperor Cl7ien Lung, in emulation of the Han and T’ang dynasties, both of which had the canonical books cut in stone at Si An Fu, the capital of China in their times. The text is divided on the face of the stone into pages of convenient size, so that rubbings may be taken on paper and bound up in the form of books. It was the custom as early as the Han dynasty to take such impressions, a practice which may possibly have first suggested the idea of block printing. A sundial of antique form is seen mounted on a stone pedestal in the foreground of the picture. On the other side of the hall, the south, stands a magnificent “ porcelain ” pailou, resembling the one illustrated in plate m1, which spans the avenue leading to Wo Fo Sst. the “temple of the sleeping Buddha,” in the western hills near Peking. The pedestals and three arches are built of sculptured mar- ble, separated by walls of vermilion stucco from the paneled facing of faience covering the rest of the structure, which is enameled in three colors—yellow, green, and blue—and forms an elaborate frame- work for the inscribed tablet of white marble enshrined in the center. This tablet, the motive of the erection, displays a short dedicatory formula, composed and presented by the Emperor, which is chiseled and filled in with red in the actual lines of his original brushwork. These archways, which are a characteristic feature of Chinese archi- tecture, are only erected by special authority. They are generally made of wood with tiled roof, and are usually intended as memorials of distinguished men and women. Some, however, are built entirely of stone, like the immense gateway with five portals at the avenue of the Ming tombs. The stone toran of Indian stupas is doubtless the original form from which the Chinese pailou, as well as the Japanese tori, is derived. One of the grandest and most interesting sights of Peking is the Temple of Heaven, which is within the southern or Chinese city, sur- rounded by stately cypress trees in the midst of a walled park over ‘ONIMSd YV3N ‘VHaGGng ONIdSSIS JHL 4O 3IdW3! LSIHGGNG 'NOTIVWd ‘VLLOD VHS] G3ZV1D GNV 319uvI) JO HOUYW IVINOWS| AU 3LV1d *\jeusng PO6L ‘Poday ueRluOsy}IWS ‘ONIMad ‘ALIQ NYSHLNOS ‘NV«d Nall ‘NSAVSH JO YVLIV LVSY5 SHL CU ONS ts @: _———= SSS ES EEE ee EK ge may va OP RP ORR Ae 4a he 7 # f} am 5 RPE ORY ey ee 3, 4 “Al 311d ‘\Jausng—'p06| ‘Hodey ueiUuOsy}IWS CHINESE ARCHITECTURE. 681 3 miles round. The oxen used in sacrifice are kept in the park, and there are separate inclosures provided for the other sacrificial ani- mals, which include sheep, deer, pigs, and hares. The consecrated meats are prepared in accordance with an ancient ritual in kitchens built for the purpose, to which are attached special slaughterhouses, well houses, and stores for vegetables, fruit, corn, and wine. The Chinese have no idea of vicarious sacrifice, the offerings to their supreme deity are like the precious objects, raiment, and foods which are set forth in ancestral worship. Heaven is not worshiped alone; the ancestral tablets of four of the imperial forefathers are always associated with the tablet of Shang Ti, the “ supreme deity,” followed by those of the sun, moon, planets, and starry constellations, while the spirits of the atmosphere, winds, clouds, rain, and thunder are ‘anged in subordinate rank below. Heaven is distinguished by the offering of blue jade pi, a foot in diameter, round and with a square hole in the middle, like the ancient mace-head symbols of sovereignty, and by the bullock being sacrificed as a whole burnt offering. The jade and silk are also burned; twelve rolls of plain white silk and hempen cloth being sacrificed for heaven, one for each of the other spirits; while the banquet piled on the altar in dishes of blue por- celain is proportionately lavish. The great altar of heaven, Tien T’an, the most sacred of all Chi- nese religious structures, is seen in plate rv. It consists of three circu- lar terraces with marble balustrades and triple staircases at the four cardinal points to ascend to the upper terrace, which is 90 feet wide, the base being 210 feet across. The platform is laid with marble stones in nine concentric circles and everything is arranged in mul- tiples of the number 9. The Emperor, prostrate before heaven on the altar, surrounded first by the circles of the terraces and their railings, and then by the horizon, seems to be in the center of the universe, as he acknowledges himself inferior to heaven and to heaven alone. Round him on the pavement are figured the nine cir- cles of as many heavens, widening in successive multiples till the square of 9, the favorite number of numerical philosophy, is reached in the outer circle of 81 stones. The great annual sacrifice on the altar is at dawn on the winter solstice, the Emperor having proceeded in state in a carriage drawn by an elephant the day before, and spent the night in the hall of fasting called Chai Kung, after first imspecting the offerings. The sacred tablets are kept in the building with a round roof of blue enameled tiles behind the altar which is seen on the right of the picture. The furnace for the whole burnt offering stands on the southeast of the altar, at the distance of an arrow flight; it is faced with green tiles, and is 9 feet high, ascended by three flights of green steps, the bullock being placed inside upon av iron grating, under which the fire is kindled. The 682 CHINESE ARCHITECTURE. rolls of silk are burned in eight openwork iron urns, stretching from the furnace round to the eastward; an urn is added when an Em- peror dies. The prayers written upon silk are also burned in these urns after they have been formally presented in worship before the tablets. To the north of the great altar, which is open to the sky, there is a second three-tiered marble altar conceived in similar lines, but some- what smaller, called the “ Ch’1 Ku T’an,” or “altar of prayer for grain.” This is dominated by the imposing triple-roofed temple presented in plate v, which is covered with tiles of deep cobalt blue shining in the sunlight so as to make it the most conspicuous object in the city. The name of this edifice, as set forth on the framed plaque fixed under the eaves of the upper roof, in Manchu and Chi- nese script, is Ch’i Nien Tien (temple of prayer for the year). The Emperor goes there early each year in spring to make offerings for & propitious year. It is 99 feet high, the upper roof supported by four stately pillars, the lower roofs by two circles of 12 pillars, all straight trunks of nam-mu trees recently brought up from the south- west, when the temple had to be rebuilt after its destruction by fire. Originally founded by the Emperor Cl’ien Lung, it was rebuilt dur- ing the present reign in every detail after the old plan. During the ceremonies inside everything is blue; the sacrificial utensils are of blue porcelain, the worshippers are robed in blue brocades, even the atmosphere is blue, venetians made of thin rods of blue glass, strung together by cords, being hung down over the tracery of the doors and windows. Color symbolism is an important feature of Chinese rites; at the temple of earth all is yellow; at the temple of the sun, red; at the temple of the moon, white, or rather the pale grayish blue which is known as “ yueh pai,” or moonlight white, pure white being reserved for mourning. The altar of the earth, Ti T’an, is on the north of the city, outside the city wall, and is square in form; the offerings are buried in the ground instead of being burned. The temples of the sun and moon are on the east and west and are also outside the city wall of Peking; the princes of the blood are usually deputed by the Emperor to officiate at these. A good illustration of the ting, which is so characteristic of Chinese architecture, has been given in plate 1, from a photograph of the large sacrificial hall of the Emperor Yung Lo. The tombs of the Ming dynasty, called colloquially “ Shih-san Ling,” “ Tombs of the Thir- teen (IKmperors),” are, as the name indicates, the last resting places of thirteen of the Ming Emperors. The first was buried at Nanking, his capital; the last near a Buddhist temple on a hill west of Peking, by command of the Manchu rulers when they obtained the Empire. The Emperor Yung Lo (1403-1424), who made Peking his capital, choose this beautiful valley for the mausoleum of his house. It is Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Bushel| PLATE V. TEMPLE OF HEAVEN, CH’! NIEN TIEN, SOUTHERN CITY, PEKING. Smithsonian Report, 1904.—Bushell. PLATE VI. 1% = = = is oe ae rg % sd 8 A > aE # =e pow SHRINE AND ALTAR OF CONFUCIUS, CONFUCIAN TEMPLE, PEKING. CHINESE ARCHITECTURE. 683 6 miles long, 30 miles distant from Peking to the north, and the imperial tombs are in separate walled inclosures, dotting the slopes of the wooded hills whieh skirt the valley. The avenue, with its row of colossal stone figures, has been noticed in the last chapter. At che end of the avenue one comes to a triple gateway leading to a court with a smaller hall, and passes through to reach the main courtyard with the large sacrificing hall, where, by order of the Manchu Emperors, offerings are still presented to the long-deceased ruler of a fallen dynasty by one of his lineal descend- ants selected for the purpose. The hall is mounted upon a terrace, with three balustrades of carved marble extending all around, as- cended by three flights of 18 steps in front and behind, leading to three portals with folding doors of tracery. It is 70 yards long by 30 deep, with a massive tiled roof supported by eight rows of four pillars each. The columns, of Persea nanmu wood, are 12 feet around at the base and over 60 feet high to the true roof, under which there is a lower ceiling, about 35 feet from the floor, made of wood in sunken square panels painted in bright colors. The ancestral tablet is kept in a yellow roofed shrine mounted upon a dais, with a large carved sereen in the background, and in front stands a sacrificial table with an incense urn, a pair of pricket candlesticks, and a pair of flower vases ranged in line upon it. Leaving this magnificent hall and pass- ing through another court, planted like those preceding, with pines, arbor-vite trees, and oaks, one comes to the actual tomb. Yi Woe i / q Ns * < y, j ~ 7 Weft ‘i Wilds ame L. 2xeT fails yw Neh Ne ( ¥\?) \ ‘0 noyopunu yuvis myHON 5 01 1: wae ti J A ry i Le! § Tivos WsnLyN *40fanang pup 42au/6uz 23039 ‘puog “y pacmpz £0 dow 243 uo pasng MHOA MAN FO ALVIS WA DARD AHL SSOUOV LTO Ad OL emoy pio au) ) — oct tae We ane EeacaCUE e—s AMEREVAO RUD At = SAGATY PSZI[CALD FU) (CO) FHL tO @qrTn0ow oak . y 08 a cr : hz ‘| SLV1d ‘spuowikS>—'p06 | ‘Uoday uBiuosY}IWUS THE PROJECTED NEW BARGE CANAL OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK: By Col. THoMAS W. Symons, U. S. Army. In the years following the Revolutionary war the subject of naviga- ble canals was a very absorbing one to our forefathers. In this new and rapidly developing country in those pre-railroad days the impor- tance of canals in the transportation world can hardly be appreciated at the present time. Canals were projected all over the country, and many were built. The attention and labors of the ablest men of the period were devoted to canal schemes, their financing, locating, and building. A good many of the canals that were built have succumbed to new conditions and been discontinued, being unable to stand the competi- tion of railroads. Some, however, have stood the test of time and have remained important factors in the commercial world to the present day. Without question the most important of these early artificial waterways was the Erie Canal through the State of New York, connecting the Hudson River with Lake Erie. This canal, although originally built of small size, played a very important part in the settlement of the great West, or what was then the great West, by furnishing a route in connection with the Great Lakes by which the products of the new western country could reach the markets along the seaboard, and by which in turn it could get its supphes of clothing, tools, groceries, etc., at an economical rate for transporta- tion. It is certain that the settlement and development of the New York and New England hinterland were enormously expedited by the Erie Canal. Locally in New York State the effect of this canal was shown by the increasing commercial importance of New York City and the establishment and development along the line of the canal of the most important chain of cities in the country—Albany, Troy, Cohoes, Schenectady, Little Falls, Utica, Rome, Syracuse, Rochester, Lock- port, and Buffalo. a Reprinted, by permission, from the Bulletin of the American Geographical Society, May, 1904. 751 . 752 PROJECTED NEW BARGE CANAL OF STATE OF NEW YORK. Some of the early New York canals have been abandoned. Those which are left and kept in a navigable condition are: the Erie Canal, connecting the upper chain of Great Lakes above Niagara Falls with the Hudson River, and thence with the seaboard; the Oswego Canal, which connects Lake Ontario with the Erie Canal, and the Cham- plain Canal, which connects Lake Champlain with the navigable water of the Hudson. The Erie Canal, which is the principal mem- ber of this canal trinity, is 350 miles long, and ut present has 72 locks. It was originally built with a depth of 4 feet, with locks 90 by 15 feet, being of a size to accommodate boats of but 80 tons capac- ity, and was completed in 1825. Tolls on the canal were high at first, but were gradually reduced, and for many years have been abolished altogether. It is a noteworthy fact that before they were finally abolished the tolls had more than paid for the canals of the State and their enlarge- ment. The small 80-ton canal was soon found inadequate, and it was enlarged to its present capacity—that is, for boats carrying 240 tons of freight. This work of enlargement was started in 1835, but was not completed until 1862. When the canal was built, and when it was enlarged, the only known or successfully developed method of canal-boat propulsion was by animal towing, and a tow path was provided all along the ranals. The necessity for this tow path was one of the principal factors which caused the canal to be kept out of water courses and built in the upper portions of the valleys. The development of steam canal-boat propulsion has changed the problem, and the great canal that New York is to build will now be located, wherever possible, in streams and lakes, and it will have no towpath. This will reduce the cost of maintenance enormously, for the cost of keeping the towpath in order is the heaviest item of expense of the present canal. The New York canals were no sooner enlarged to their present size than agitation for their further improvement commenced. ‘This culminated, about ten years ago, in the adoption of a project for deep- ening the canals so that they would accommodate boats of 8 feet draft instead of 6 feet, and for lengthening the locks so that they would take two boats of the same length and width as at present, coupled tandem, at one lockage. The State made an appropriation of $9,000,- 000 to carry this project into effect. It was soon found, however, that the amount named was grossly inadequate, and that to complete the project would cost two to three times the sum which had been voted. The work was also badly managed, and the people of the State were indignant at the deception which had been practiced on them regard- ing the estimates and the scandals attending the work, and the project was abandoned. Then came another period of agitation, investiga- PROJECTED NEW BARGE CANAL OF STATE OF NEW YORK. 1753 tion, and discussion. All sorts of things were proposed. Many prominent people wanted a ship canal connecting the Great Lakes with the sea, and several routes were surveyed, and estimates of cost of various sized canals made. Many wanted the $9,000,000 project completed, either as originally proposed or with modifications. Some ‘wanted to turn the State canals over to the General Government, and depend on it for maintenance and improvement. Some wanted to abandon the canals altogether, and some to utilize the canal right of way for State railroads. In 1897 the writer of this paper, in a report to the General Govern- ment, proposed, as the best solution of the problem, that the canals should be enlarged to enable them to be used by barges carrying 1,000 to 1,500 tons. Governor (now President) Roosevelt appointed a board of prominent New York business men soon after this to advise the State what to do with its canals, and this board, after more than a year of investigation, and the careful consideration of everything that could be proposed, reported in favor of enlarging the Erie Canal to a capacity for barges of 1,000 tons, and a lesser improvement for the Oswego and Champlain canals. The legislature caused surveys, plans, and estimates for the work to be made. All the canal people of the State finally came in under the banner of the 1,000-ton barge canal, and through their united efforts the legislature at last passed a bill for the enlargement of the Erie, Oswego, and Champlain ranals, to enable them to be used by 1,000-ton barges, with all the locks of sufficient size to take two boats, coupled tandem, at one lockage. The estimated cost of the work proposed was $101,000,000. At the fall election of 1902 this proposition was submitted to the people of the State, who approved it by a majority of about 250,000 votes. New York is thus committed to and has entered upon this tre- mendous work of canal improvement—by far the greatest work ever undertaken by any State. This projected work is in the very front rank of canal propositions. It is overshadowed in the public mind by the Panama Canal, on account of the international character and the interesting complica- tions that have attended the inauguration of that work by the United States. In commercial importance the Erie is in many ways the equal of the Panama Canal. On the Panama it is hoped to some time reach a tonnage of 10,000,000; on the Erie all works, structures, water supply, ete., are predicated on a tonnage of 10,000,000, and pro- visions are made for accommodating, at slight additional expense, a tonnage greatly in excess of this. On the upper Great Lakes there isa water-borne commerce of very nearly 90,000,000 tons per year. The Erie Canal will furnish the cheapest route for connecting this sm 1904-48 754 PROJECTED NEW BARGE CANAL OF STATE OF NEW YORK. vast lake commerce with the seaboard, and its wide-reaching influ- ence can hardly be conceived or appreciated except by those who have given years of study to the problem. In magnitude the work that New York has undertaken exceeds the work at Panama. More earth and rock must be excavated, more masonry used, and more dams built. The cost per unit is not nearly . so high as at Panama, because the work will be done in the Temperate Zone, where labor, tools, and materials are abundant and reasonably cheap. In the complexity of the engineering questions involved the Erie is hardly second to the Panama Canal, for while the canalization of the Mohawk River is a very different problem from the control and utilization of the Chagres River they are both engineering projects of the very first magnitude. The building of the Panama Canal under conditions akin to the proposed enlargement of the Erie Barge Canal would be a simpler, cheaper, and easier work than that which New Yerk has undertaken. The barge canals that New York is to build will follow the same general route, fulfill the same functions, and minister to the same wants as the present navigable canals connecting Lakes Erie, Ontario, and Champlain with the navigable waters of the Hudson below Troy. In three important respects they will differ from the existing vanals: First, as to size and capacity; second, as to location, and third, as to the character of navigation provided for. The locks of the new canals, which govern the dimensions of the boats that can be used, are 28 feet wide, 310 feet long, and 11 feet deep. The canal prism has a depth of 12 feet and a general minimum width on the bottom of 75 feet in canal sections and 200 feet in rivers, pools, and lakes. Boats can be built which will pass through the canal carrying 1,000 tons of freight, but it will probably be found advantageous to sacrifice some of the carrying capacity to secure bet- ter models and greater clearance. The lift of the locks will be much greater than at present, and the number of locks will be greatly reduced. On the present Erie Canal there are 72 locks; on the new rie Barge Canal there will be but 38 locks. The new locks will take two canal boats, each of 150 feet length, coupled tandem, at one lockage, and this makes the lock capacity 2,000 tons, or about eight times that of the present canal. As freight boats nearly always travel in pairs coupled tandem, the advantage of the double-length locks in doing away with the necessity of uncoup- ling and recoupling at every lock is very great, saving much time and lessening dangers. A very decided change is made in the location of the canals. The Erie Canal is about 350 miles long, and the new canal follows the old canal for only about 100 miles; the other 250 miles is almost entirely 5 15 e PROJECTED NEW BARGE CANAL OF STATE OF NEW YORK. by anew route. Large portions of the Champlain and Oswego canals also follow new locatrons. The existing canals may be called “ hillside” canals, as they go through the open country and along the upper portions of the valleys above the rivers, from which they religiously keep away to the great- est extent possible. The new and greater canal is put in the valley bottoms and in the water courses and lakes wherever practicable. The principal advantages of the valley-bottom location in the ease of the greater canal are cheapness of construction, greater freedom and ease of movement by boats in the wider waters of the water courses and lakes, greater rapidity and less cost of transportation, greater immunity from accidents that disable the canal, and less cost of maintenance. With the small canal as originally built and as sub- sequently enlarged to its present size it would not have been econom- ical, with the knowledge and means then possessed, to have built the dams and locks required to canalize the Mohawk and other rivers and to excavate the large channels required for flood discharge. With the large barge canals now proposed this canalization is not only desirable, but is cheaper than it would be to utilize the existing lines of the canals. The existing canal is a “ tow-path ~ canal, built with the distinct idea that all business on it should be done by animal towing. In the new and larger canal no tow path is provided, and it is expected that navigation through it will be by means of steamboats properly adapted to it and towing other motorless cargo boats, in accordance with the custom which has been developed and is now in vogue on the Erie Canal to a certain extent. It is this change in the method of navigation which permits the valley bottom, lake, and water-course location to be adopted. Long years before the construction of the Erie Canal the early pioneers had found a water highway extending nearly acreoss the State of New York, and it was largely used by those who settled the western portion of the State. It was not perfect, involving, as it did, many portages about falls and rapids and from one river to another, and the stemming of swift river currents, with bars and shoals, but it fulfilled a most useful function. The Erie Canal when built did not follow this pioneer route for reasons stated: but it is a remarkable circumstance that now, after nearly a century of disuse, this old pioneer route is to be again adopted and the new and larger barge canal is to follow it without material deviation. This old pioneer route followed up the Mohawk River, with portages about the falls and bad rapids, to the vicinity of Rome; thence a portage was made across to the waters of Wood Creek; thence it followed down the waters of this small stream to Oneida Lake,’ On across the lake it went and down the Oneida River 756 PROJECTED NEW BARGE CANAL OF STATE OF NEW YORK. to the junction of the Oneida, Oswego, and Seneca rivers, at Three — River Point—a famous locality in the olden days. Here two routes were open to the enterprising traveler. If he were going to the set- tled western part of the State he would follow up the Seneca River and thence into the various branches and into the beautiful “ finger ” lakes tributary to the Seneca. At that time and by that route the cost of transportation between Albany and Seneca Lake was from $75 to $100 per ton, and it took four weeks to make the round trip. If he were going farther west, or into Canada, or had much freight to transport, he would ofttimes go on down the Oswego River to Lake Ontario and thence by lake to his destination. The projected route of the Erie Barge Canal follows up the Hud- son River to Waterford; thence, by means of the requisite locks, it reaches the Mohawk River above Cohoes Falls. From Cohoes Falls to just west of Rome the river is canalized—that is, dams are built, forming great pools, and these pools are connected by channels not less than 200 feet in width and 12 feet in depth. Above Rome there is a summit level leading over to Wood Creek, and, as in the olden days, the canal route follows down this stream and through Oneida Lake and Oneida River to Three River Point, thence up the Seneca River properly canalized to the vicinity of Clyde. From Clyde westward there are no water courses of importance running in the right direction, and the new canal will follow generally the route of the existing canal to the Niagara River at Tonawanda; thence the Niagara River will be used up to Lake Erie and Buffalo. Between Clyde and Tonawanda there is one important modification of the route, and this is at Rochester. The present canal goes through the city in a very awkward manner, crossing the Genesee River in a masonry aqueduct, and the route is impracticable for the large canal. Here a new route is adopted, passing to the south of the city and crossing the Genesee River in a pool formed by damming the river. The Oswego Barge Canal leaves the Erie Canal at Three River Point and keeps on down in canalized Oswego River to Lake Ontario. The new Champlain Canal keeps in the Hudson River from Water- ford to Fort Edward, instead of following along on the bank of the river as at present. In doing this advantage is taken of the commer- cial power dams which already exist in the river, and which, in con- nection with locks to pass them and the deepening of the river be- tween the pools, will fully canalize the river. From Fort Edward to Whitehall, at the foot of Lake Champlain, the new canal follows the location of the existing one. The most important question connected with any canal proposi- tion is that of water supply, and the Erie Canalis no exception. The western end of the canal will be fed from Lake Erie, as at ‘ PROJECTED NEW BARGE CANAL OF STATE OF NEW YorK. 757 present, the existing canal from Lake Erie to Tonawanda being retained as a water feeder only. This, with natural local supplies from streams along the line, will give all the water required until the Seneca River is reached, which has an abundance of water. The only locality where the water-supply problem attains great impor- tance is at the summit level, between the Mohawk River and Oneida Lake. This is provided for, in the larger canal, by utilizing the existing sources of supply and developing additional ones by water storage in West Canada Creek, the Mohawk River, and Oriskany Creek. If in the future more water is needed, due to increased use of the canal, or for any other reason, this can be supplied by additional storage in the Adirondacks at a comparatively small expense. It is believed that these new and enlarged canals will be of benefit to New York in enabling her to retain and increase her commercial supremacy, largely through their controlling influence on freight rates and the prevention of differential discrimination against the port of New York, which is now and has for years been the rule. They will also benefit the entire region of the Great Lakes, and this benefit will extend far into the interior of the great Northwest and influence transportation rates throughout the country. Upon the Great Lakes many millions of tons of freight are trans- far lower than are pos- ported every year at exceedingly low rates sible by any other than water transportation. The canals that New York has undertaken to build will practically extend this cheap. sys- tem of water transportation to the seaport of New York and other ports in the vicinity, and bind the East and West closer together. RAPID-TRANSIT SUBWAYS IN METROPOLITAN CITIES.2 By Mito R. MALTBIE. The problem of urban transportation is largely one of rapid com- munication between business and residential districts, and has grown increasingly difficult as population has become more and more con- centrated. Street-car companies have tried every conceivable kind of motive power, but they have not been able to keep up with the rapid growth. Steam railroads, which have proved so successful as inter- urban means of communication, have been excluded from most centers because of the noise, smoke, and ugliness of the trains. Horse traction is not sufficiently rapid, and the cable for the same reason has given way to electricity. However satisfactory surface lines may be for short-distance traffic, their inadequacy to deal with suburban traffic became apparent almost half a century ago in the larger urban centers. The steam roads undertook to solve this question by lowering fares and by greatly increasing the number of trains. London went a step further and built underground roads connecting most of the depots in the metrop- ols. Other cities, such as New York, Chicago, Boston, Liverpool, and Berlin, have constructed elevated roads, but these are unsightly, and within the last few years they also have proved or are proving inadequate to deal with the vast throngs who daily leave their homes to seek work in other portions of the cities in which they live. And now, as the last resort, electric subways are proposed, and systems have been or are being built in Paris, Budapest, Glasgow, London, Boston, and New York,’ while other cities are considering the ques- tion. a Reprinted, by permission, from Municipal Affairs, New York, Vol. [V, No. 3, September, 1900, whole No. 15, pp. 458-480. b Short sections of Berlin’s elevated road are underground, but it has not been included in this article because so small a portion will be below the street level. 759 760 RAPID-TRANSIT SUBWAYS IN METROPOLITAN CITIES. RAPID TRANSIT IN LONDON. Owing to the enormous cost of constructing underground roads, a large daily traffic is essential to successful operation. This condition appeared first in London. When railroads were invented and their utility generally recognized, London was already a city of consider- able size (population in 1851, 2,863,274). Its ancient streets were considered too sacred to be polluted by a noisy monster, and the im- portance of rapid communication between the central portion of the city and suburban areas was not yet recognized. Thus the first steam ‘ailroads were halted at the threshold of the inner city and made to build their terminal stations some distance from the center of com- mercial activity. With the growth of the city and the giving over of certain portions almost exclusively to business, some means of com- Fia. 1.—The Central London tunnel. munication between the various depots became necessary. Steam surface roads were out of the question; electricity and cable traction had not been invented, and horse cars were too slow. Underground steam roads seemed the only alternative. For years the construction of these lines went on, until at pres- ent there are 300 miles and upward of 270 stations within a 6-mile radius of Charing Cross. These railways probably carry over 300,- 000,000 passengers annually, and, including the omnibus, tramway, cab. and steamer passengers, the total approaches very nearly to 1,000,000,000 persons annually. The unpleasant features of travel in the “ underground ”—the dingy entrances, the dark tunnels, the dirty, crowded, and dimly lighted cars, the sulphurous fumes from the engines, the dirt-laden air—were appreciated from the start and grew worse as the traffic increased. The lines were mostly near the surface, and openings were provided at short intervals to permit the smoke, steam, and RAPID-TRANSIT SUBWAYS IN METROPOLITAN CITIES. 761 gas to escape, but they very inadequately performed that function. The managers, with the characteristic English slowness to adopt new methods and the desire to make large profits, reminding one of the New York Manhattan Elevated Railroad Company, refused to adopt electric traction, and until 1890 there was no method of rapid transportation in London other than the steam roads. In that year the City and South London Electric Railway was opened, about 34 miles in extent, extending from near the monument, in King William street, only a few blocks from the commercial cen- ter of the metropolis, to the suburban district of Stockwell, upon the south side of the Thames. The success of this road and the desire for access to the heart of the city led the Southwestern Rail- way—one of the most important English roads—to construct a short electric line between its Waterloo station and the Mansion House, opposite the Bank of England. This line is very short, only 4 miles in length, but it does assist in solving the problem of urban transportation in that it brings the suburban districts reached by the Southwestern into closer communication with the business por- tion of the city. The Central London Railroad, the latest, largest, and best equipped of all London subways, most nearly resembles, from the point of location, the New York subway. It runs from the Bank of Eng- land, under Cheapside, Newgate, Holborn Viaduct, and Oxford street, past St. Paul’s Cathedral, Hyde Park, and Kensington Gar- dens to a station in the suburban district of Shepherd’s Bush, a total distance of 64 miles. There is a large traffic toward the Bank of England in the morning and to the West End in the evening, and the only means of transportation until lately was by omnibus or carriage or a roundabout route via the underground. No tram- way has been permitted to occupy this main artery, and the new underground road will greatly add to the transportation facilities of London. Various other electric underground lines have been proposed, and within the near future the Metropolitan and the Metropolitan Dis- trict railways, now operated by steam, will adopt electricity as a motive power. Bids and plans have already been called for. CONDITIONS IN BUDAPEST. After London, Budapest was the first city to build a subway. Here it was the outcome of various plans for joining the central and business portion of the city with the park, a favorite rendezvous some 21 miles distant. Nothing definite was proposed until the spacious and handsome Andrassystrasse was laid out, which offered a direct and attractive route for a street railway. Application was made for permission to build a horse-car line, but the plan met with strong 762 RAPID-TRANSIT SUBWAYS IN METROPOLITAN CITIES. opposition chiefly upon esthetic grounds. Several years later, after a short experimental electric line had proved a success, the scheme was again resurrected, electricity being the motive power. This proposal met a fate similar to its predecessors and led to the con- struction ot the subway. In 1894 the concession was granted, and two years later the line was opened to the public. No other project is at present being considered; the transportation problem is not so serious as elsewhere, and the tramway system is very efficient, giving satis- factory service. THE GLASGOW SUBWAY. The Glasgow subway was started several years before that in Budapest, but being much larger in scope and more difficult to con- struct, owing to the great amount of tunneling necessary, it was not opened until the latter part of 1896. Even then it did not remain open, for the traffic was so much heavier than anticipated that it was necessary to close the line for a few weeks and improve the facilities for handling crowds. The first definite project for an underground road culminated in 1887, when a bill was introduced into Parliament to authorize such an undertaking. The local authorities opposed it, because they feared that tunnels under the Clyde would render any further deep- ening of the river impossible and thus seriously interfere with the commercial development of the city. However, in 1890, a bill was passed; these objections did not seem of sufficient importance to counterbalance the need for rapid transit. Short sections of the steam roads, similar to those in London, had been operated for some time below the surface, but they reached only a few suburban dis- tricts. The new subway connects the business portions of the city with the residential areas to the west and northwest. Its eastern extremity is in the heart of the city, from whence the line makes a broad swing to the west, some 7 miles in circumference. As yet there seems to be no competition between the subway and the municipal street railways. The latter do not reach many of the suburbs served by the subway, and the long-distance traffic does not use the surface lines because they are slower. Even with the pro- posed extensions, there will be abundant traffic for each system. BOSTON’S SUBWAYS. The Boston subway was opened in 1898. It is entirely unlike every other line, not being a separate and distinct system, but merely affording to the surface lines a means of reaching the business dis- tricts without using the surface of the streets. Prior to its con- struction the street car lines from the many suburban districts around Boston all met on Huntington avenue, Tremont and Boylston streets, or at Scollay square. Between Scollay square and the junc- RAPID-TRANSIT SUBWAYS IN METROPOLITAN CITIES. 763 tion of Tremont and Boylston streets the congestion was so great that traffic was almost* wholly impeded during the busiest hours of the day. Various solutions of the problem were proposed from time to time. An elevated road was rejected by a popular vote, and the proposed widening of the streets involved so great an expense as to be impracticable. The only comprehensive scheme seemed to be a subway in the congested district, and in 1894 an act was passed author- izing its construction. The results have been most satisfactory. The streets are not nearly so crowded as before, and there is a great saving to the passengers of the time necessary to reach the central portion of the city from almost any suburb. The total length of the subway is 13 miles, and contains over 5 miles of track. Several additional lines are under consideration. THE COMPREHENSIVE SCHEME FOR PARIS. The problem of rapid transit was first agitated in Paris almost half a century ago, and as early as 1870 the municipal authorities began seriously to study various solutions. In imitation of other Fia. 2.—Map of Paris, showing subways in operation and under construction. cities an elevated road was proposed during the eighties, but the esthetic Parisian would have none of it. The beautiful boulevards, streets, and public places, laid out by Baron Haussman at great 764 RAPID-TRANSIT SUBWAYS IN METROPOLITAN CITIRS. expense, must be preserved at every cost. And true to French custom no plan would be approved until a comprehensive scheme for the whole city was formulated. This had been accomplished by 1896, an electric subway having been decided upon. The street traflic had become so congested that no more surface lines or omnibus routes could be added. The extent of the Paris metropolitan subway is indicated by the above map. When it is entirely completed the system will be nearly 404 miles in length, will cost the city $86,000,000, and the operating company about $10,000,000 more for equipment.* At present, only one section and parts of two others have been completely constructed and put in operation, namely, the ne running from the Vincennes gate in the east, past the Hotel de Ville, the Louvre, and the Tuil- leries, down the Champs Elysees to the Place de ’Etoile, from which three lines operate—one to the Trocadero, one to Porte Dauphine. and one to Porte Maillot. The total length is some 8 miles, and the cost about $7,000.000 for construction alone. PUBLIC CONTRO! IN GREAT BRITAIN. The relation of the municipality to the subways varies greatly from city to city. In no instance have the city authorities undertaken operation, but in Paris and Boston, as in New York, the public owns the subway, having constructed it at public expense. The extent of public control is least in Great Britain, there being a marked difference between street railways—surface lines—and underground roads. The former are subject to strict control, and the municipality may take over a line twenty-one years from the time when the franchise is granted, or may construct or purchase the tracks and rent them toa private company. But no underground road is municipally owned or operated, and no public authority has the right under the act granting the franchise to purchase a line. Of course the local authorities may regulate to a moderate degree, but beyond a somewhat restricted exercise of the police powers they may not go. The most important provision found in any of the acts, ex- cept clauses protecting avowedly private interests, such as are to be found in acts creating steam railroads using private property prin- cipally,? is one requiring workmen’s trains to be run each day, morn- a The city has planned for two more sections, making eight in all, bringing the total length up to 48.5 miies, and the cost up to between $45,000,000 and $50,000,- ~ 000. These last two sections haye not yet been authorized by the central goy- ernment. ’The restrictions imposed upon private companies relate principally to the amount of capital that may be issued, the extent to which loans may be nego- tiated, location of the road, the property purchased, the indemnities paid, the maximum fares charged, the number of trains run, the motive power used, etc. RAPID-TRANSIT SUBWAYS IN METROPOLITAN CITIES. HOS ing and evening, at a fare not to exceed 2 cents for the whole or any part of the journey on the Central London Railway. Of course Par- hiament knows no higher law than its own will, and may impose any restrictions or may order compulsory purchase at any price, but all such proceedings are without the realm of probability. This difference between underground and tramway lines rather surprises one at first, for British cities have gone as far in the ces 5 oes sae eee Soe 78 Secretary’s report on ...........- ai eee eee 34 sun’s possible variability .............-.- Stee 81 transmission of solar envelope ........---------- 85 Atmosphere; metalsim the ss 2-e.c2- cc. an seee Wests eRe See Ee eee 235 d’Avennes, E. Prisse, on Egyptian and Arabian horses ..........-..-----.-- 457 Avery fund, statement concerning status Of 25.255 see tee eee eee een eee eee eee 355 Sa, natal INDEX. 10 Page. Flint, James My on’ Chinese anedicine /---- 52-2222. Seco. s- 2 ~ = 92, 93, 96, 97, 98 Jouct Cavaliere vonuluiteraturevohlhoriumese= == olsen escent ee 20; 91 Journal of Terrestrial Magnetism and Atmospheric Electricity .......----- oa2 14 K. Kohl baumienGeWeeAe on vahlations olispeciiiceraviby, sess s-secs ees ese 261 iimor@ han) es plese een cope eer nee peta cores es Stars trainees MEe iD acs. sistears stores 6 Keishinotyeuke don atlonssDynescs oe saa se serene Se einen hota. ate Bae nice es 4] RlacestsbldwardeAtescollectionmnomses see =e seae arelseae Bis aa oa he ae 41 Klingelfuss, Fr., on a lightning spiral observed near Basel. ..........-.------ 259 Knox, Philander C., member of the establishment ...............-.-------- XM, 2 Krause, F., on sling contrivances for projectile weapons ......-------------- 619 Voneries stheorwoltvisionerw senses Loven Nee oak cs heen cleepe meee seas ae ne e249 L. Langley, S. P., on experiments with the aerodrome ..........-- Se ates 113 One Jaan SHO MICH S ON mee eae mete Sars Nar eee eee eine ore mee siee 95 on method of avoiding personal equation.........---..------ 92 Onwemovalvotesniuthsomememainss sass eee er ae ae ae 93 on 1900 solar eclipse expedition: -=...2 1222.2. 5-25.2 1s. tos- 98 Secretary of Board of Regents...........----- 5 Sais Daily SANT ax Secretary’s report on the Institution..............-- esas 1-107 TEC CS SSING Cleese t ct acc frre ee cr ae CR TS Lo SOG VOX TOMIG LOGAG Y) yon: Lendenfeld; R:, on-motion-of-birds:tm flight=-eo ee Jee ica oe vie tase = 14 on relation of wing surface to weight...........--.----- 127 ihewisvandsClarnkel xpositiom = st. Gets oe so oe eo Soyo arian see woe LXXUI, 27,45 Liberty wAnthiur ds. On, pew lersoss csc see ok eae Seton, eeneee aeae ce Accuses 693 EAbrarian weponiOlssaan sass o oa os ccc s sae ee me ke aa eee aoe 87 Libranyeohi Congress, Smithsonian deposit. -6 <2. 22 s-ceesse ese. -assc- oso ~ LXIX Lighting, some new modes of ...--..--- Se ps BOS TO eS ear a ey 267 Lightning spiral observed near Basel ........-- Bose eet ees rene Sones 259 Lippincott, J. B.,;on-the Yuma reclamation project. 522.55.+.-4..2--5.25-2< 383 Louisiana Purchase Exposition, True’s report on Smithsonian exhibit...... 100-107 Lo wewlize Nes donationvpyi.- By Multiple origin of horses and ponies ......---- BES Sas ac Jicclewoeins sie guia Geer dow ING Naples table, lease renewed ..-.-.-.- Bpsets ayteno heme eaeeee Se cea at Sept 16 NationalkGalllenyoteAinteese=s= aes eceee aoe eer ota tenieaaes See ESeaOAS LO National Museum, additions to collections -.-...------ ee a eee 28, 39 OXCMaN ges sxe se tes seine ee eee oe eee eee eee 43 exhibitat- St b0ulSieesasosce~ cee soe see see ee teers. 103 financestof =: 22. soe sees Soe ee eee ee eee ee XLI library 2 ae2: see Bot Sic wee oe O eee BR ee ee eae eae 45, 89 meetings and lectUKes! 22225255 eee eee eee 44 new, building forte-sas2 ese eee eee eae ee 4, 27 publications.22--as-ece aes Re Ses eer ea are eer Sh 44 report by Assistant Secretary in charge of.........------- 37 researches oo ss ace pata oe ee eee ee eee see ee ee Cee 43 Secretary, Saepe tb OMee sone seme o ieee sotieedeets 27 sectional libraries ...-- Rees Serene See sae ees ae 89 RAI) RG) ase ere ee ieee ree in en OE te Ee Oe 44 National Zoological Park, animals in. -2< 252-22 -s2ces- eee eae ea (ANG Tie Ae elephantshouse ime see ceie sao eet eee eee SUL exdallann gintsus (bepress 34 tee s5- Aiea es spe Co ee 72, 102 finances of.....- TORT igs A DN See SE ee oe Takes ROK important losses ....- Dias eiydt abe ale ae Spayt ee Ve nCeschipilonvOleanvextinct nalts sass see ea re ees 96 FARE SEMA ALLO MO be All (ns) ON a) ry Sear ate eo ee eI 51] collections, Museum expenditures for..........-........--2- XLI Printing and binding, Museum expenditures for..................-22-----2- LIII Erojectilonweapons sling contrivances fora. .22-5)2-.c2-s sce cae sis te eee oes 619 RuUplications=distribucionwo tase mee em ree meee ese en 8 et esta 16 ScUOT Sure POC ON sees ee NA Ia ar tae ete Sey Se Os 91 Rueblomegion. preservation: of ruins my... 2 2 s22 =. ons be Ss oo cen ce oe 573 Purchase of specimens, Museum expenditures for ..........-....----------- LVI USN Ae Veeder Collectio mmalno gsi eee ee eet ee ee ern oe ania 4] sm 1904——51 802 INDEX. Q: Page. Quarterly issue of Smithsonian miscellaneous collections. .........-.-------- 19 R. Radiationcim the solar systemsseensosaotee = oa cr eee ee ee eee eee 185 Railroads Alricam: =... jpeaReeeeeese aces sae ae ACen Se eee ee ee eee TPA Ralipht- W. i, donations:y sts , onretiecting telescopess{ a. 425-22. sc sess as aces eee Ite, It Rockhill MWe WeeeOnetheypopulatirom=:o tex @ Init alee se re 659 Roosevelt, Theodore, member of the establishment ......-..----..--.------ SIO, 2 yon Rosen, Eric, on archeological researches in Argentina and Bolivia -...--- 573 Rumford spectroheliograph of Yerkes Observatory -...-...------------.---- 151 S. Stes Glass Ted bs ee eh ee a eS oes ee ene 46, 50 Shani Kara: Oxi aves Jeena) (Oehavall Aone. = oo Seo coo a sn cenoeposaacecocecsses 745 Schuchert; Charles: a=... ks 2 Oe sees ee Bere a eek ee eer ae eee 25, 42 > Ons PAGSviOn® Alttele 2. sts ya Sean eee ae eee 779 Schumann, Victor, on the absorption and emission of gases -...-------- ey 14,91 SchiwarzwHasAcs 222s seek eee alee Se are ee te ee eet yee ee 41, 97 Sclentikie im Vestiealorsev.O LIGLOMEO list Caer eee ee eee ee Dek Scripture, Es W.,*onethe “vowellormany = 22: oes a= ace ae nee aia erate 13 Scudder, Samuel H., collection from.......-.-- is cea) ERM Ls, free Ale 4] Secretary “of the Institutiona.-22e4en ns en oe tae ea est eee XII annual report to Regents’). 222 sae. see eee ae eee eee eee pe\plilt, Sectional dilbraries = <2 <2 weak eee ee ee noe ee Smee ee ee eee ee 89 Seton-Karirv Hk W..donationgsbyeneseecee coos ee eo eee ee on eee 39 ShalleraN- S.-M teatunesiohome earth an dino ONE = =e ae eae ea ee 17, 91 Sharpe; Richard W., on! fresh-water Ostracoidays===2 92-5 252-22 ses] = eee 97 Shattuck: Ge Be ks rae sh sree paras yes se te ae earn ee ec 42 Shaw, leslie M;, memiberiof the establishment s2- > 255 -s-eeeeee eae eee seers SIUM 2 Sherzer, W- Elo. explorationiolelactensi== ses eee se nee eee ee eee eee 16 Sickler.c.. Mi, donations bys 2 ee ea eee: See we cere ere eee eee 42 Skinner) Je O-- oni thesnouse sparrow ieee am sea ats Sere ate sete ere 423 Sling contrivances tor projec tile yes OTs yer) er reer 619 Smaedes, Missy EOS Rit sakes ee a eal Sa lc eg a 54 Sinn le, AWE ae Sp a a es dae elie 3 FI a De a en 287 Smith Hucene dA). Moma omer see cise ete ore See eet eerie 42 SyUD THOT GAD Tod ON | Meee a ei Su heen mena eee 2 oe ae Ge danedo aoe 40, 43, 93 Smithson remains, committee appointed for transfer .........-...----------- XVI INDEX. 803 Page. Smithson-remains: exhtumeatlonlOle,s2=45 22.5: 2 ook ee ence ce eee sees XXI fittinestomibanecommended. 20. see fe Sg ee cee 5 NECepMoOuwate NG wancOnrke joecass eee eae XXVII, XXXI reception at Smithsonian Institution............---.---- XXVIII reception. at; Washington Navy=Yardi> 2.22 2225.22 2 ee XO reportoLcommittee on! disposition Of 2222 esas 5- 4= ese ee Ox reponbtiot commubcteeronitranslerys ese. eee fee ale SVL eRe Secretary’s report on their removal.--....----.---------- uf Smithsonian deposit. waibraryiOl, Congress nese. ee eres ote nie ee aae ete LXIX, 20 SHuIthsonmianelnshituton., condition ot tumds Julie O04 Se lee ee eee ee MOXY, detailed statement of disbursements -...-----.-.---- XXXVII estalolisinmemt este eo ese ie eraleay eat ema XII Cp OWA OV RF EOL 5] YOLDUISTS Se ener wren Se) we et eee eed 26, 101 neceipisandsexpenditunesss mone see ieee sees XXXVI Ree enibsrOleemeare= Se wee Re ree are ae sts ne XI\ report of executive committee --....--.--.---------- XXXV Solamenvel Opes transmilsslOmiO les same se ee see eee alee ncie rewire ole ln seine 85 SO lasses Cura G1 @ Mee pee este yee eee See Re es bee ie ee a ee ae 34, 185 S PALLO WrbNewhOUSes ses ee mee ae Sere eae coe ae a Se ORISe Sus ee ulemee se sees 423 Species) ovolumonany siomin cance Ol oso a2 asia: cies oatacieasiewiee ee se cnc 387 SOSOIO MIAMI, VARMOUOMG. Ole cas dasa aad concTass ne seacac seo anoeesanan] 261 Seow; Sx oSaimeniis) yyior yaeA My s -goceaessnacas sooudesasedcocussasosesude 254 Spectroneliocraphstheikumilord q2 2s secce obs co ces se cls Seni cine ese cee 13 Some, SUEea, .ClorMeKaWoNl NW? Seo cca cesses eooseo goes Groce casos uoos5ooase 4] Sprague pequest, statement cOnCeMmMINg se —. rs oo eros eicieiet eis ere oe 4 Siroitworal, Wo AGH @ollleyOniohaln noone eA a ae es ee Se a ee eee odanewase 4] PS UzD cheese] GIN aN OW Olas k Cm ESE Peer terre SO eR nee Pen neta pee ee Aloha Paenan Ea eid 93, 97, 98 SLAvUGeKOlmMianka tavanl OUSiePOCOS mrmnmnee aaah ane eee eens sek eee 517 SUENISRDIS CONT ANY gS (SA Ole cere ees Oe ee ees ee ie ee re ts ee IIe SoS aos 43, 46, 49 SHREW IB ee TAINS One oer re Fie ie Sees Ba eae cor Pe een re Spee toe ees See ae at 38 SLOKESas Oil GeOneel Cra mlel se sees eye eee eee Nee ee ete eee oe eye 773 SHU V7 OVOSISH ONL NRT OUR eee ae ee etenere, Ret aie Cee ee a Oe Slorcic 81 SSWUEEION WON Ul vel RIS SRS eke ca a ee ee a pee 43, 46, 47, 49 SUCZH AMS Jat lee CoKovare ho Ovals ON da eet ak oe eres ae nei PEI SS ics 40 Stebbing, Thomas R. R., on Amphipoda from Costa Rica.....-..--.---.---- 96 DSRS) Sh sed BY 2 is eh acs Ne En aT aa RS a eS ERE Ee 45 SuelMecemmlWcomman cles tee ao ote ee HS rae Se mvels lage Scare nee en areata 25, 42, 45 SUOMI, TEN OME! Wea ile ClO See nee See ero ese a eeeenapaaoodes sec ae 759 Symons thomas W..vom the New. York Barge Canal: --- 2... 222. cesses er 751 Syd eran Olt OeeMapers Wyememe ates coe oe eee tle teenie See eee 92,97, 98 A: Maite Wallram Her memnibexote theiestablishment -222------s--4- sem se oe 00, 2 Mal otusnonoOvocenlCidnAWiNOS 2.226. sec linsccca tle oe oe ses elec sien eieen ena 291 Tassin, Wirt, on the Persimmon Creek meteorite .-............-1---..------ 98 WWaselions Jaleo (GS eas Seis ka Gese te ae eee Rei ee eee rer Acie XXXII ‘eleswo oss ING VAD nN RNS Ae ar Se ene AS ras ny 35 eee 80 Waleseo/a® lOngas; Conk nl CWOll Os aeeeseaca sas waASen sen on oS Gobessocsbesasor 163 selec memnenle Culm weep ee Ses. srayaic so Seis 2 a= Ses owes seas meee mse ees 18,91 Tingmhas, CWS tccadi otis faeee eee ee eee ere b eo mero ee ese ereece 5] Mion Sori ee Ce oOnabiOne DY 222... -4.52- s/o. Sst cee ele seul eee eee wes seer 40 Mhomsou, thin, on electric’ welding development... -.-.-. ---22.52---22 22. 281 Thoin. amifngiie, 5 5 ee eee eee eed eee es Seem ee et eS cS 429 804 : INDEX. Page Townsend; (Charlesth<: = Ses esha sae see cece ene aoa er ae eee eee 44 Trask. (Mirs! Blanche. donationtby. 21s sccnce- sees a ae oeee eee eee 41 Travers, M. W., on attainment of very low temperatures. .-.....---.-..--- 14, 20, 92 True; HiwWe a2. Sa oee Se Ree Creates sce oe see meee aenine eee eens 18, 91, 92, 97, 104 representative of Institution at Lewis and Clark Exposition .....- 27 Louisiana Purchase Exposition .. 25, 100 Tsuchida, “L:,.collectionstromSees )- Jessa. 2525s. 6 eee ee ese aee eeeeeee 40 Turner, H. H., on the application of photography to astronomical research... 171 Wie OME ie 1a, Oe Ciat let evAONG IBINWAOE) a aancucaassoncouss> soko toate cosecossecs 93 Ungern iG. We, donation iy 22 seer = meters ter ola ata ete eee ae rete eee 42 University of Wisconsin, congratulations extended to...-...-.-..----------- 27 Wie VariaOns Ol Specie oralyiliye meee oe = Syne ae caters tee ar artes Sees 261 Vision in brightness and darkness, observations on...--..------------------ 249 Vision, recent anatomical discoveries relating to: = ---2---=2-= = + 2- === == == 250 Viviane RevAc on birduiietn British Papuaeanasac escent a= sas ee sear 413 W. Widltitenmileniy <8 cS test Se aa ee es Sale erature eee ete 53 Wiatersa@.ah aaice6 ewe See eee eS ea ie Daneman ae eae eae 44 Weapons sling contrivances tor projectilG=2+ 2. 25-3222 eee qa ce ere ee 619 Wharton. AAR eedonationt bynes = 2625 = Ses oo ose pete aie aiavatere cee eae 42 White, Andrew D., Regent of the Institution ............---- PAYS 2Oiy ROQVMG, doc, 7 Williams) Gardner Hy. donations! byaqs ss sae ee are ee ee eee 41 WialhiamssMirss 4. An colectionstromt. 452. ona eee eee a ee eee 4] Wail Somey @ lvarshe sje rev ra c lento rae pA: tll Nee 98 Wilson;-C; TR, Re) onieondensation mucleissus25. (2-262 fo ge eae eee 195 Wilson; James, member of the establishment -2..-.2--2--1...225 2-5-3. --ee KIM, 2 Wine suriace, its reldtiin.to weight. 2222) e=-~ oem eee ce ner ee ser ei e eeeee 127 Warelessitel oma layz soto cree anise seater eee re eae eete ee eerie eee 275 Wiorlksofethe meclamanloneservilGes sen onesie a= ae ee eee area 373 Workshops, Museum:expendithares tor vent of. —sece a= eine lee ter LIL Wiritino smaterialsmased io nges seers acre re eee ese eae pa rere 639 Xi: Yerkes Observatory, the Rumford spectroheliograph at ....-.--------------- 131 Viuma-reclamationepno]eGhessesaec eee eine se ae nee se ee ee eo eee 383 Z. Zahm, Ay Bis GrantWos.:- . sc teeee eres aameeen ose eee ceitae ae enter ae 15 von Zittels Karl Aliirediee: 7 5se aetna arcane a ree aera eee 779 Zoology, Sixth International Congress'onl 55... 5.222 52-2 cee oe ee 25 se es iy my ik i ea ate Bea ie ire are it ; a eo PNeaaiats ; au 1% OS eal Wie ce oT ‘ae - 5A Waa yA a mt a i SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES TM